Yt kt eee Lo”
Bd
ee Mise Cd
/
J]
t
i
Pe
‘
~
‘
4
i
=
ns
r
1 { ri
v 1 i
bh
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES
OF
PHILADELPHIA.
1897.
COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION:
THomaAs MEEHAN, CHARLES E. Smiru,
Epwarp J. Nouay, M. D., GrorceE H. Horn, M. D.,
Henry SKINNER, M. D.
Epitor: EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D.
ee
a
PHILADELPHIA : |
ACA DEMYSOR NATURAL SCIENCES,
LOGAN SQUARE.
1898.
Uy
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA,
February 3, 1898.
I hereby certify that printed copies of the Proceedings of the Academy for
1897 have been presented to the meetings of the Academy and mailed as fol-
lows :—
Pages 9to 24 mailed February 23, 1897, presented February 23, 1897.
«e
25 to 72
73 to 120
121 to 136
137 to 152
153 to 165
165 to 196
197 to 228
229 to 276
277 to 308
309 to 324
325 to 340
341 to 372
373 to 388
389 to 452
453 to 500
«¢ March
‘Search
‘« March
eA rl
1 Atpril
‘cs = May
sc May.
June
«« June
“(July
“< October
«« November
‘« December
‘< December
«¢ January
DOCKER-FOSTER CO., PRINTERS, PHILA.
2, 1897,
4, 1897,
16, 1897,
21, 1897,
23, 1897,
10, 1897,
22, 1897,
15, 1897,
18, 1897,
19, 1897,
18, 1897,
23, 1897,
27, 1897,
13, 1897,
18, 1898,
ce
ec
ce
e¢
March 2, 1897.
March 9, 1897.
March 16, 1897.
April 20, 1897.
April 27, 1897:
May 11, 1897.
May 25, 1897.
June 15, 1897.
June 22, 1897.
July 20, 1897.
October 19, 1897.
November 23, 1897.
December 28, 1897.
December 14, 1897.
January 18, 1898.
EDWARD J. NOLAN,
Recording Secretary.
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.
With reference to the several articles contributed by each.
For Verbal Communications, Announcements, ete., see General Index.
ALLEN, Harrison, M. D. Observationson Tarsius fuscus .
BENEDICT, JAMES E., Po. D. A Revision of the Genus Synapta .
Brinton, Dante G., M.D. Dr. Allen’s Contributions to An-
thropology
CocKERELL, T. D. A. New andl Tittle: ine n North secon
Bees 4 : : ; 3
CocKERELL, T. D. A. aud Wir. I. Fox. New Fossorial Hymen-
optera from New Mexico
Forp, JOHN. Cypreea lynx deformed by are
Fox, WiLu1AM J. Contributions to a knowledge of the Hy men-
optera of Brazil, No. 2—Pompilidee (Plate IV)
Contributions to a knowledge of the Hymenoptera of Brazil,
No. 3—Sphegide (sens. lat.)
FRAZER, Dr. PerstFor. Geological Section fr om Meoneon to
Siberia and Return
HeatH, Haroip. External Besmules af Motrie ery noche
(Plate VIII) :
JORDAN, Davin SrarR and Game FEE. A @aileehon of
Fishes made by Joseph Seed Roberts in Kingston, Jamaica
KELLER, IDA A. Notes on Underground Runners (Plate ITT)
Notes on Plant Monstrosities (Plate V) ;
MEEHAN, THomAS. Contributions to the Life Histories of Plants,
No. XII: The Fecundity of Heliophytum indicum; The
Origin of the Forms of Flowers; Spines in the Citrus Fam-
ily; Flowers and Flowering of Lamium purpureum;
Cleistogamy in Umbelliferze ; Rhythmic Growth in Plants;
Pellucid Dots in some Species of Hypericum; Honey
Glands of Flowers; Varying Phyllotaxis in the Elm;
Folial Origin of Cauline Structures ; Polarity in the Leaves
of the Compass and other Plants; Hybrids in Nature;
Origin and Nature of Glands in Plants; Nutrition as
affecting the forms of Plants and their Floral Organs;
Some Neglected Studies .
Morris, CHARLES. The Primeval Ocean
Nouan, Epw. J., M. D. Biographical Notices of Harrison ‘Allen
and Gees Henry Horn
Parmer, T. CHALKLEY. Demonstrations of iasernon of roe
bon Dioxide and of the Generation of Oxygen by Diatoms.
Pirspry, H. A. Descriptions of new South American Bulimuli.
New Species of Mollusks from Uruguay (Plates VI and VII).
New Achatinide and Helicide from Somaliland
New Australian Mollusks (Plate IX) .
New Brazilian Streptaxidee 4
Descriptions of two New Forms of Pendens
Puspry, H. A. and Benjamin SHarp, M. D. Scaphopoda a the
San Domingo Tertiary (Plates X and XI) :
Pirspry, H. A. and E. G. Vanatra. Descriptions of two new
Species of Cerion , 4
Ruoaps, SAMUEL N. A Dantnened "3 the iMammnalere of
Northern New Jersey ; ;
A Contribution to the Mammalogy of cena Bonsayieaen
A new Southeastern Race of Little Brown Bat
A Revision of the West American Flying Squirrels
Notes on Living and Extinct Species of North American
Bovidee (Plate XIT) : : ; : : : :
Dr. Allen’s Zoological Work 2 : : 5 : :
RHOADS, SAMUEL N, and Ropert T. Younc. Notes on a Collection
of small Mammals from Northeastern North Carolina
Ruttrer, CLoupsLEy. A Collection of Fishes obtained in Swatow,
China, by Miss Adele M. Fielde
ScuiveLy, Mary A., M, D. The Anatomy and Developuieae
of Spirorbis Veni (Plates Iand IJ) , ; : ;
SmirH, JoHN B, Dr, Horn’s Contributions to Coleopterology .
SronE, Wirmer. The Genus Sturnella
On the Annual Molt of the Sanderling :
Van DeEnpurGH, JOHN. Reptiles from Sonora, Snalon anid
Jalisco, with a Description of a new Species of Scelo-
porus. : . : ‘ : : : : .
169
1Z
505
142
18
290
357
360
477
503
465
365
23
204
227
314
483
518
303
56
153.
529.
146
368.
460
PROC Hl DINGS
OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES
OF
PAD EP ee
JANUARY 59.
Mr. CHar_es Morris in the Chair.
Thirty-three persons present.
A paper entitled “ A Contribution to the Mammalogy of Northern
New Jersey,” by Samuel N. Rhoads, was presented for publication.
The Council reported its organization and the appointment of the
following Standing Committees to serve during the current year. :—
On Liprary.—Charles P. Perot, Arthur Erwin Brown, Harrison
Allen, M. D., Henry C. Chapman, M. D. and Henry A. Pilsbry.
On Pusriicatrons.—Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith, George
H. Horn, M. D., Edw. J. Nolan, M. D. and Henry Skinner, M. D.
On Instruction.—Uselma C. Smith, Harrison Allen, M. D.,
George Vaux, Jr., Newlin Peirce, D. D. S. and Samuel N. Rhoads.
CoMMITTEE or CounciL oN By-Laws.—lIsaac J. Wistar,
Theodore D. Rand, William Sellers and Benjamin Tilghman.
2
10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897,
JANUARY 12.
The President, SAamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.
The Affinities of Floridian Miocene Land Snails—Mr. Pitspry
spoke of the Miocene Helices and Bulimi from the Silex-beds of
Tampa, Florida, stating that the fauna was of as purely Antillean
type as that of the Bahamas to-day. Helix latebrosa, instrumosa,
erusta, ete., belonging to the Plagioptycha section of the genus Cep-
olis. “ Helix” haruspica proved to belong, as Dall had suspected,
to the genus Pleurodonta, and therein is about equally allied to
Cuban, Jamaican and Caribbean forms now existing.
The Bulimiform snails of the Silex-beds numbered some four or
five species. They have a reflexed peristome, and a heavy deposit
upon the parietal wall, which is most strongly developed toward the
posterior angle of the aperture, but is there separated from the pos-
terior termination of the outer lip by a narrow channel, somewhat
as in certain European and Asiatic species of Buliminus, but entirely
different from the structure of the same part of the shell in Ameri-
ean Bulimulide. Ina species from the island of Fernando Nor-
onha, however, an identical structure occurs. In fact, this species,
the Bulimus ridleyi of Smith, is so similar to some of the Miocene
forms of the Silex-beds that apart from size they are not readily dis-
tinguishable. There can be no reasonable doubt, therefore, that B.
ridleyi is a living representative of this Miocene group, preserved
practically unchanged on the remote island of Fernando Noronha,
while the group has been wholly crowded out of existence in the
continental faunas.
The name Hyperaulax was proposed for the group, which now in-
cludes the following species:
Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) ridleyt Smith (type).
Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) floridanus Conrad.
Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) heilprinianus Dall.
Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) americanus Dall.
Bulimulus (Hyperaulax) stearnsti Dall.
All but the first of these being fossils of the Silex-beds.
Hyperaulax may for the present be considered a subgenus of Bult-
mulus; but the final position and rank of the group awaits invest-
igation of the soft anatomy. It belongs to Division II of the
speaker’s classification of Bulimuli, having vertically wave-wrinkled
nepionic whorls. A similar reflexed peristome occurs in the sub-
genus Rhinus, but that group wholly lacks the other special features
of the aperture already alluded to.
JANUARY 19.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair..
Twenty-seven persons present.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11
The deaths, on the 15th inst., of John H. Campbell and Charles
H. Banes, members, were announced.
The Gastropod Radula.—Mr. Pitspry spoke of the development
and specialization of the radula in streptoneurous Gastropoda, show-
ing that the law of mesometamorphosis, originally based upon ortho-
neurous forms ( Helicide'), is equally applicable to the Prosobranchs.
His remarks were illustrated by black-board diagrams and a series
of specimens.
JANUARY 26.
The President, SamueL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-two persons present.
Charles J. Pennock and Williams Biddle Cadwalader were
elected members.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
‘Guide to the Study of Helices, Man. Conch., ix, p. xiii, (1895).
12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
THE PRIMEVAL OCEAN.
BY CHARLES MORRIS,
In dealing with the conditions of the remote past it is impossible
to avoid hypothesis, since exact knowledge is not within our reach.
The best that can be done is to support hypothesis, as far as possi-
ble, with facts drawn from experimental science. It is only in this
way that we can deal with the problem of the Primeval Ocean, by
seeking evidence for speculative conception in existing facts. The
views which are entertained, for instance, concerning the former
greatly heated condition of the earth, which must largely affect any
hypothesis concerning the ocean, are mainly speculative. Yet there
are so many facts to sustain them that they are generally accepted
as well founded; and if we accept the view that the earth has
gradually cooled to its present state from a former greatly heated
or vaporized condition, certain conclusions concerning the former
state of the ocean and atmosphere become inevitable.
At one time, under such circumstances, there could have been no
ocean, since all the water of the earth must have existed as atmos-
pheric vapor. Still more remotely, perhaps, no water existed, the
temperature being too high for that combination of oxygen and hy-
drogen to which it is due. Such a condition probably exists now in
the solar spheres, whose atmospheres contain an abundance of free
hydrogen.
As regards the oceanic and atmospheric conditions of an earth
chemically like the one we inhabit, but differing from it greatly in
temperature, there are certain conclusions which appear inevitable.
If, for example, the surface of the earth should become so heated as
to raise the oceanic waters to the temperature of 212° F., that is, to
the boiling point under present atmospheric pressure, there would
result a very considerable evaporation of the waters of the ocean,
but by no means a total one. In fact, the great bulk of the ocean
would remain in its bed, since the pressure of the atmosphere would
be much enhanced by its increase of aqueous vapor, and the boiling
point of water be correspondingly raised. Therefore, during the
ancient cooling of the earth, the aqueous vapor of the atmosphere
must have begun to condense into water long before the temperature
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13
sank to 212°, and the earliest ocean must have formed at a much
higher temperature.
We have experimental evidence of the boiling point of water
under pressure up to a certain limit of temperature. Under a pres-
sure of one atmosphere, as is well known, water boils at 212° F.
With increase of pressure the boiling point rises, but not in an
equivalent ratio, since the energy of evaporation increases more
rapidly than that of pressure. For example, under five atmospheres
of pressure water boils at about 300° F.; under fifteen atmospheres
it boils at about 400° F.; under twenty-five atmospheres it boils at
about 440° F. I have given approximate temperatures, so as to
state them in round numbers, the actual temperatures differing
slightly from those stated.
It is evident from the figures given, that as the temperature rises
the energy of evaporation steadily gains the ascendency over that of
pressure. At 300°, one hundred degrees of temperature must be
added to produce ten additional atmospheres of pressure. At 400°
only forty degrees of temperature are needed for the same result.
Experiment has gone no further, and we are not aware at what rate
the temperature of the boiling point would increase under higher
pressures. But if we may judge from the rapidly accelerated in-
crease of evaporative energy with increase of temperature, it may
be that at some point between 600° and 800°, all the waters of the
ocean would be converted into vapor and form part of the atmos-
phere.
At the boiling point of 440°, which yields twenty-five atmos-
pheres of pressure, one-twelfth of the oceanic waters would be con-
verted into vapor, and eleven-twelfths continue as water. A total
evaporation of the oceanic waters would produce a pressure of about
three hundred atmospheres, or 4,500 pounds on each square inch of
surface. The primeval pressure must have been still greater, since
much water which has sunk into the earth’s crust and forms no part
of the present ocean must then have added to the volume of atmos-
pheric vapor. We cannot affirm at what limit of temperature this
great pressure would be overcome, but, from the rapid rate of in-
crease in evaporative energy observed between one and twenty-five
atmospheres of pressure, it seems not improbable that this limit
would be reached, as above said, at some point between 600° and 800°.
At the period in question, when all the ocean was in the air,
the enormous pressure must have exerted an important influence
14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
upon the surface conditions of the earth. There may have been
then a very active tendency to volcanic or earthquake disturbances,
but this tendency must have been held greatly in check by the pres-
sure. This great pressure must also have exerted a vigorous influ-
ence in condensing surface and aerial materials, converting vapors
into liquids and liquids into solids, and thus have played its part in
the formation of a solid crust. Again, the abundant aqueous vapor
must have been active in the process of surface cooling, rising in
heated winds and conveying heat to the upper air. Finally, as the
temperature fell, the pressure of the vapor condensed some of its own
material into water. The escape of heat then grew still more rapid,
through the aid of evaporating water and falling rain, processes
which may have long been incessant.
As the surface cooled, through these and other influences, the
conversion of yapor into water went on more rapidly, and the atmos-
pheric pressure steadily decreased. This was probably attended
with an increase in surface disturbances, the wave of disturbance
growing in height as the pressure diminished. As the solid crust
grew thicker and the rocks more rigid from progressive cooling,
these seismic disturbances again diminished. There was thus prob-
ably a cyele of change, from an originally level and quiescent sur-
face to one of ridges and depressions with great disturbance, and
again to one of growing quiescence and gradual reduction of ine-
qualities.
Of the chemical activity of water at a temperature of over 600°
we have no knowledge, as water of this temperature has not been
produced in laboratories under circumstances suitable for experi-
ment. Its solvent powers would probably be very great, and many
substances may have been held in solution in the waters of the
primeval ocean which are insoluble at present temperatures. These
substances were, probably, in part washed down from the air into
the gathering ocean, in part dissolved from the surface. The bring-
ing together of numerous elementary substances or simple compounds
in a common menstruum was undoubtedly followed by great chemical
activity, and numerous compounds of more or less intricacy were
formed in the heated waters. Of these, some were insoluble and
settled to the bottom ; others were soluble and continued in solution.
The salts of the present ocean are doubtless, in great measure, the
final outcome of these ancient solutions and chemical actions. They,
in all probability, represent but a small fraction of the substances
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15
then held in solution by the heated oceanic waters, which, from their
large percentage of foreign constituents, may have been almost jelly-
like in consistency.
It is impossible to estimate the chemical activity of that period.
The high temperature of the waters greatly favored such action, and
among the dissolved substances were probably many unoxydized
materials, now first freely exposed to the assaults of oxygen. The
energy of chemism that ensued was probably greater than had ever
before or has ever since existed. In addition to simple oxides, many
more complex substances were doubtless formed, and it may be that
many of the constituents of the primeval rocks then and thus first
came into existence.
The story of chemical activity in the earth is, therefore, very
closely connected with that of the ocean. It began, no doubt, in
- the primeval atmosphere, but reached its culmination in the waters
of the ocean. During the early period of the earth chemical
inaction must have long prevailed, on account of high temperature
and unfavorable physical conditions. Perhaps the principal chem-
ical action of the primeval atmosphere was the combination of oxy-
gen and hydrogen into water vapor. But, on the formation of an
ocean of highly heated waters, holding in solution a considerable
variety of elementary substances and simple compounds, chemism
probably grew active, and in time became very energetic as the
waters increased in depth and in the variety and volume of their
contents. Many of the complex minerals were very likely then
formed, and, being insoluble, were separated from the water and de-
posited as rock formations. Only when the ocean became, in a
measure, freed from its abundance of foreign material, did this ac-
tivity of inorganic chemistry decrease. It has continued to decrease
until the present time, when it has practically ceased to exist, oxida-
tion having reduced nearly all substances to a state of chemical
fixity.
It has been succeeded by an era of organic chemical action, which
is, at present, in a state of full activity, and promises long to con-
tinue so. It began in the early seas, probably after their temperature
had diminished to near or below the present boiling point. It grad-
ually replaced inorganic chemism, and has long continued active, at
first in the water, and later on the land also. It is now, and has
long been, at its maximum activity, the quantity of new material
produced in the plant and animal world being annually enormous.
16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Continued refrigeration must, in time, repress this organic activ-
ity and bring it finally to an end, the chemical inertness once due to
extreme heat being paralleled by a similar inertness due to extreme
cold. The interval between is that of the earth’s chemical history.
In the history of chemistry we perceive, therefore, two great cycles,
an inorganic one, whose principal feature is oxidation, which reached
its culmination in the remote past, and an organic one, whose prin-
cipal feature is deoxidation, which is now at its culminating point.
The question which naturally follows is: When did inorganic ac-
tivity cease, and organic activity begin, and to what extent is the
latter an outgrowth from the former? The reduction of the temper-
ature of the ocean had much to do with this change, inorganic action
being probably favored by a high temperature, while organic action
may have been impossible in waters much above 212°. These two
phases of chemical activity differ strikingly in one particular. In-
organic chemism had a fixed period of duration, beyond which it
could not exist. When there remained no more substance in con-
dition to be seized upon by oxygen, this phase of chemical action
necesssarily ceased. Organic chemism has no such limitation. It
may continue in activity, under favorable conditions of temperature
and sunlight, indefinitely, its material being practically inexhaust-
ible. Only decrease in temperature can bring it to an end.
As the waters of the primeval ocean slowly cooled, and inorganic
chemism declined in activity, organic chemism probably set in,
aided by the solar rays, then perhaps first freely reaching the waters.
The material for this new phase of action had been prepared before
and existed abundantly in the water and air. It may have had its
origin in an early reaction between carbon dioxide and the elements
of water, yielding the hydro-carbons; and subsequently between
these and nitrogen, yielding the far more complex albuminous com-
pounds.
Certainly organic forms appeared in the waters of that period,
and conditions favoring their formation must have existed. Wedo
not know through what successive steps of chemical combination the
complex organic molecules arose. We do know that many of the
preceding mineral molecules were quite complex in composition,
and can reasonably deduce from this that still more complex mole-
cules arose under conditions restraining the activity of oxygen.
Seed forms of organic substance may have first appeared—simple
carbon compounds. These would serve as the basis of more complex
‘
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17
molecules, and there may have been a long-continued process of de-
oxidation and formation of higher carbon and nitrogen compounds,
till true organic matter appeared and the chemistry of life came
fairly into play.
I have but one further suggestion to offer. That is, that the con-
ditions favoring the development of organic material were transitory,
and no longer exist. If living matter were now swept from the
earth, it could not, in any probability, be restored. Its seed condi-
tions have passed away. ‘They could not reappear in water of the
temperature of the present ocean and the existing chemical rela-
tions of inorganic matter. Organic chemistry emerged from a
vitally active stage of inorganic chemistry. It could not well arise
from the existing passive stage of inorganic chemistry. Fortunately,
conditions favoring the origin of organized matter are no longer
needed. Organisms have within themselves the power of inducing
new chemical action to an indefinite extent. A plant is a natural or-
ganic laboratory, within which new organic material is elaborated
from elementary constituents which exist abundantly in air and
water. From the plant the animal derives the more complex ma-
terial it requires. Thus the process goes continually on, and can
only be brought to an end by a fall in temperature below the point
requisite for organic chemism. How far in the future this will be it
is impossible to predict, but the reign of life, which has continued
for many millions of years upon the earth, will, in all probability,
continue for many millions of years to come.
18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SOUTH AMERICAN BULIMULI.
BY H. A’ PILSBRY-
The species described below have been found during the writer’s
work on the group in the Manual of Conchology. Wlustrations of
them will appear in due course in that series of monographs.
— Bulimulus rushit, gorritiensis and corumbaénsis belong to the typi-
cal section of the genus, characterized by densely wave-wrinkled
apical sculpture. B. pachys, chrysaloides, glyptocephalus and sar-
cochrous have separated, straight vertical riblets on the nepionic
whorls, much as in the Galapagos group Nesiotes, or the northern
Mexican and Lower Californian groups.
Bulimulus rushii n. sp.
Shell umbilicate, globose-ovate, rather thin but solid, light yellow-
ish. Surface with inconspicuous growth-wrinkles and extremely
fine, close incised spiral stric, visible only above the periphery.
Spire very short, conic, the apex obtuse. Whorls slightly over 6,
moderately convex, the sutureshallow but well marked. Aperture
slightly oblique, ovate, a trifle over half the total length of shell ;
peristome simple, unexpanded, the columellar margin broadly dilated
above. Alt. 193, diam. 14 mill.; alt. of aperture 10 mill.
Maldonado, Uruguay (Dr. W. H. Rush).
Apparently allied to B. sporadicus and B. vesicalis, especially to
the stouter variety of the latter species ; but conspicuously different
in the very short spire, globose form and widely open, deeply pene-
trating umbilicus. By an inadvertent exchange of labels, a wrong
locality was given in the catalogue of Dr. Rush’s shells in the Nau-
tilus. It has been figured but not described in the Manual of Con-
chology, pl. 12, fig. 47.
Bulimulus gorritiensis n. sp.
B. gorritiensts Pils., Nautilus x, p. 78 (name only).
Shell perforate, ovate-turreted, thin and fragile, corneous-brown
or dirty corneous-whitish. Surface slightly shining, sculptured with
irregular and rather coarse wrinkles of growth. Spire elevated,
rather slender, the lateral outlines straight ; apex quite obtuse, the
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19
nepionic whorls shallowly, rather irregularly zig-zag wrinkled in the
young, this sculpture lost with age. Whorls 63, convex, with well
impressed sutures.
Aperture ovate, rather wide, brownish inside, varying from slightly
to decidedly under half the length of the shell; outer lip regularly
arcuate, acute, unexpanded and fragile, columella slightly concave,
the columellar margin narrowly reflexed above.
Alt. 20 diam. 104 mill. ; alt. of aperture 9 mill.
Alt. 174 diam. 8 mill. ; alt. of aperture 7 mill.
Alt. 17 diam. 8% mill; alt. of aperture 8 mill.
Gorriti Island, Maldonado Bay, Uruguay (Dr. Wm. H. Rush,
WassN.):
A smaller, thinner, more turreted shell than B. sporadicus or its
varieties, the whorls more convex, apex blunter, the first whorl be-
ing planorboid. The whorls are more convex and more wrinkled
than in B. tenuissimus.
Bulimulus corumbaensis n. n.
Bulimus amenus Bonnet, Rey. et. Mag. de Zool., 1864, p. 70, pl. 6, f. 2.
Not Bulimus amenus Pfr.
The locality given by Bonnet for this species is incorrect. It oc-
curs at Corumba, province of Matto Grosso, Brazil, where Mr.
Herbert H. Smith found it common on walls, ete. B. corumbaénsis
is closely allied to the typical form of B. sporadicus Orb., but it is a
less elongated shell, solid, with distinctly expanded peristome and
very widely dilated columellar lip, the umbilicus larger than in spor-
adicus. The striped color pattern is a conspicuous but variable
character. It belongs to the restricted subgenus Bulimulus (-++ Lep-
tomerus ).
It may be remarked here that but few of the localities given by
Bonnet, for species described in the paper mentioned above, are cor-
rect. His Helix vitreais not South American. Bulimus pictus is
not Peruvian, being a form of Drymeus pecilus Orb. of Bolivia
(Province Santa Cruz) and Matto Grosso. Pupa varius, said to be
Tasmanian, is a mottled race of Cerion glans, of New Providence,
Bahamas.
Bulimulus angrandianus n. n.
Bulimus radiatus Morelet, Séries Conchyliologiques, III, p. 188, pl. 9, f. 2.
Not Bulimus radiatus Bruguiére.
The name of this Peruvian species of the section Lissoacme being
preoccupied, may be changed as above.
20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Bulimulus pachys n. sp.
Shell umbilicate, ovate-conic, solid and strong; surface smoothish,
with slight growth-wrinkles, rather regular and close on the spire
and disposed to be interrupted. Spire acutely and straightly conic
with subhorizontal sutures, the apex small, obtuse, earlier 1} whorls
regularly and rather finely costulate vertically. Whorls 72, con-
vex; sutures well impressed, the last hardly descending; last
whorl regularly convex and inflated.
Aperture subvertical, ovate, somewhat over half the length of
shell, white inside; peristome unexpanded, rather blunt, the outer
margin regularly arched, columella slightly concave, its margin
broadly reflexed, with a salient angle at junction of reflexion with
basal lip; parietal callus moderate; umbilicus deep and rounded.
Alt. 323 diam. 20; alt. of aperture 18 mill.
Province of Bahia, Brazil (v. d. Busch).
The type is a faded, decolored specimen, showing traces of a
median white girdle, brown above and slightly so below it, asin B.
durus Spix. Itis considerably like B. heterotrichus in size and form,
but is unlike that species in the less oblique aperture with blunt, un-
expanded outer lip, the differently formed columella and the costu-
late apical whorls. In general aspect it somewhat resembles Bin-
ney’s B. patriarcha. ‘The columellar lip is pressed in above, unlike
that of B. durus, which is, besides, a smaller species.
Bulimulus chrysaloides n. sp.
Shell perforate, oblong turreted, thin, deep reddish-chestnut,
somewhat paler on the spire; surface lusterless, with irregular, indis-
tinct growth wrinkles and microscopic crowded spiral striz, very
superficial and probably cuticular. Spire long, the apex obtuse,
13 nepionic whorls regularly vertically costellate, the riblets straight,
closer on the latter portion. Whorls 63, moderately convex, the
last a trifle descending in front ; sutures impressed.
Aperture small and short, slightly oblique, short-oval, contained
slightly less than 2) times in length of shell, brownish-vinous with-
in ; peristome thin, slightly expanded ; columellar margin expanded,
not reflexed, forming a long triangular plate concave on the apertural
side; the inner edge of columella rather acute, slightly concave.
Alt. 22, diam. 10 mill.; alt. of aperture 83 mill.
Alt. 183, diam. 9{ mill; alt. of aperture 84 mill.
Martinique.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21
The nepionic whorls, when unworn, show a vertically ribbed
sculpture very different from the reticulate apices of the B. exilis
group, but like the apex of B. sanctelucie Smith. The peculiar
columella also somewhat resembles that species, which in propor-
tions is also quite similar, but the post-nepionic sculpture and dark
color of chrysaloides are unlike Smith’s form.
Bulimulus glyptocephalus n. sp.
Shell narrowly perforated, long ovate, solid and thick, of chalky
teature. White or bluish-white, the apical whorl buff, the next
_ bluish below, paleabove. Surface irregularly and cvarsely wrinkle-
striate and conspicuously malleated ; apical whorl with conspicuous,
arcuate riblets, becoming closer and beaded on the second whorl.
Spire conic, the apex very obtuse, sutures impressed; whorls 53,
weakly convex, the last suture slightly more descending along the
latter half, and consequently a trifle oblique to the others.
Aperture a trifle exceeding half the total altitude of shell, sub-
vertical, white inside, with a faint narrow band at position of the
periphery and another wide one above; outer lip blunt, obtuse, not
expanded ; columella concave below, straighter above, the columel-
lar margin broadly dilated above, reducing the umbilicus to a
chink ; parietal callus white, rather thin. Alt. 31, diam. 17 mill.;
alt. of aperture 152 mill.
Peru (A. Agassiz).
A peculiar form unlike any Peruvian species known to me except
the next, in the characters of the earlier whorls. It differs from the
following species in its elliptical-ovate shape and larger aperture.
Bulimulus sarcochrous n. sp.
Shell narrowly umbilicated, ovate-conie, solid andstrong. Fleshy
white, becoming flesh-pink and then brownish above, the earlier 2
whorls brown below, white above. Surface irregularly, weakly
striate, more wrinkled below the sutures, faintly malleated on the
body whorl; apical sculpture as in the preceding species, except
that the riblets are less prominent and are much finer and closer on
the second whorl. Spire straightly conic, the apex very obtuse;
whorls 53, nearly flat, the last one not more rapidly descending than
the rest.
Aperture ovate, one-half the altitude of shell, vertical, light brown
inside, with a faint, narrow light band at position of the periphery,
and white within the lip-edge; outer lip obtuse and rather thick, not
22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
expanded ; columella with an oblique fold above, the columellar
margin well dilated, rounded. Alt. 29,diam. 16 mill.; alt. of aper-
ture 143 mill.
Peru.
Closely allied to the preceding species, but the spire is more slen-
der, the umbilicus larger, surface less malleated and the columellar
fold more conspicuous. The apical riblets are finer and closer, less
coarsely granulated on the second whorl.
Drymeus (Neopetreus) filiola n. sp.
Shell acutely oblong-ovate, solid and strong. Opaque, whitish,
distinctly flesh tinted at apex and last whorl, the spire bluish. Sur-
face shining, very irregularly striated, with scattered short trans-
verse impressions. Whorls fully 63, the first nearly planorboid
above, the second much higher than wide, producing a mamillar
apex with the characteristic sculpture of the subgenus. Following
whorls of spire flat, acutely keeled, the keel appearing just above
sutures, becoming more obtuse and concealed below; next to last
whor! convex; last whorl oblong, convex.
Aperture irregularly ovate, purple-brown inside ; peristome blunt,
hardly expanded, pale edged; columellar margin vertical and
straight, parietal wall flesh-colored, with no perceptible callus. Col-
umella very broad above, obliquely truncated in the middle, pro-
ducing the effect of a large blunttooth. Umbilicus perforated, with
a compressed, long chink behind the inner lip. Length 45, diam.
25, alt of aperture 22°5 mill.
Peru.
The largest member of the Neopetreus group, strikingly unlike
other species known to me in contour of shell and columella. The
specific name is in allusion to my own little daughter Elizabeth.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23
A CONTRIBUTION TO THE MAMMALOGY OF NORTHERN NEW JERSEY.
BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS.
The following notes on New Jersey mammals are based on per-
sonal experience had during three collecting trips in the northern
portion of the State. In some cases I have added to my own obser-
vations those of people living in the localities named, whose testi-
mony was considered thoroughly reliable.
Trip number one was made during the last week in May, 1893, to
Nolan’s Point, Lake Hopatcong, Morris County, collecting being
confined within a radius of three miles from Nolan’s Point Villa, on
the east shore of the lake.
The second trip included a brief stay of five days during the last
week in August, 1893, at a place near Delaware Gap station in the
western corner of Warren County. Trapping was restricted to a line
of woodland and meadow connecting a lake (Sunfish Pond) 2 miles
distant, with the farm-house in which I lodged near Delaware Gap.
The third and most important trip covered a period of three
weeks, extending from the sixth to the thirtieth days of October,
1896. It included three stops of one week each ; the first at Cul-
ver's Lake, Sussex County, the second at Unionville, Orange Covnty,
New York, just across the northern boundary of Sussex County
near the Walkill Valley, and the third at the southern end of
Greenwood Lake in Passaic County.
Considered in their faunal, geological and topographic relations,
there is a great similarity in all the localities named, lying as they
do within the Alleghenian life region, as restricted by Dr. J. A.
Allen, and moulded by the powerful agencies of the glacial period
which has left its characteristic impress upon the greater part of
northern New Jersey. The mountains of Warren, Sussex and Pas-
saic Counties are the highest on the eastern side of the Delaware
River, several attaining the height of nearly 1,900 feet. The Kit-
tatinny Range, in its continuation northward from the Water Gap,
runs close to two stations named in the above itinerary, viz., Dela-
ware Gap on the western slope and Culver’s Lake (Culver’s Gap) on
the eastern. The mountain at these places is covered mainly with
24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
deciduous trees, alternating with pines and occasional hemlock in
swampy localities, isolated bogs of tamarack and rhododendron and
fir affording retreat for animals more characteristic of the Canadian
fauna.
The lakes of New Jersey are numerous; Culver’s Lake and Long
Lake together cover a considerable tract, and with their surround-
ings of swamp and mountain form a natural forest game preserve
that is well worth the future attention of the legislators of the State.
At Lake Hopatcong, the largest of all, the country is less mountain-
ous, and the fauna and flora shade somewhat into the Carolinian
elements, but at Greenwood Lake the western range of Greenwood
Mountain shows the most marked Canadian features noted in the
State, frequent swamps and bogs of white cedar, fir, pine, hemlock
and tamarack nestling among the depressions of the summits.
The excursions of which the following pages form a summary are
part of the author’s plan to make a comprehensive zoological survey
of all the counties of New Jersey and Pennsylvania, with special
reference to mammalogy and herpetology. About half of this labor
has been completed.
1. Didelphis marsupialis virginiana (Kerr). Virginia Opossum.
No specimens of opossum were taken. Its rare occurrence at
Greenwood Lake, where I was informed by the hunters that two
had been captured in the last two years, is of interest as showing the
presence of this animal in the most boreal surroundings which the
State affords.
An examination of the large opossums of North and South Amer-
ica which belong to the marsupialis type of Linneus, shows a spe-
cific difference in the character of the last premolar. In Brazilian
and Surinam specimens this tooth is a retrorse, blunt, rounded cone
with slight trace of a shoulder above the cingulum on the posterior
border. In examples from the eastern United States and Mexico
the tooth is sharply and abruptly conical, compressed laterally and
entirely surrounded by a tuberculate basal shoulder. Independently
of other marked characters, this is sufficient at once to divide spe-
cifically the composite group marsupialis as defined by Oldfield
Thomas’ into two sections. -A study of Linnzeus’ description’ leads
me to adopt Hernandez’s Mexican animal as the least composite
type of marsupialis with definite given habitat. D. karkinophaga
'Cat. Marsup. Monot. B. Mus., 1888, pp. 323-327.
2Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 54.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25
Zimmerman’ is the first name given to the South American species
from Cayenne ; D. aurita Max. Wied* (—D. azare Temm.) becoming
under the ruling of Thomas (le.), D. karkinophaga aurita (Max.
Wied).
2. Dorcelaphus virginianus (Bodd.). Virginia Deer.
It has been many years since one of these animals was killed in
any of the localities visited. Several are confined in a game pre-
serve surrounding Sunfish Pond in Warren County, and a few in
the Dalrymple preserve on the east side of Long Lake in Sussex
County.
3. ?Cervus canadensis (Erxl.). Wapiti.
A hunter near Delaware Gap declared that his grandfather, who
“killed the last Elk shotin Pike County,” Pennsylvania, stated that
sometimes the hounds would drive both elk and deer across the
Delaware River onto the Kittatinny Mountain. That the latter spe-
cies has quite recently been known to find temporary refuge in Sus-
sex County on this account is easily proved, and it is probable that
in this manner the Wapiti has either voluntarily or involuntarily
become a member of the New Jersey fauna within the present cen-
tury.
4, Lepus americanus Erxl. Varying Hare.
Once pretty numerous in the tamarack swamps of northern New
Jersey, this species now seems to be exterminated. Mr. Larkin
Hazen stated that he shot one about six winters ago on Greenwood
Mountain just across the State line in Orange County, New York.
They used to frequent a small swamp near Culver’s Gap, but I was
unable to find any trace of them there.
5. Lepus sylvaticus Bachm. Wood Hare.
No specimens of this common species were secured. On this ac-
count J am unable to say whether the subspecies transitionalis is
found in northern New Jersey.
6. Synaptomys cooperi Baird. Cooper’s Vole.
Four specimens of Cooper’s Vole were secured. The first, an
adult male, was trapped in a wet meadow close to woodland among
sphagnum and tussocks of Juncus; and the second, an adult nurs-
ing female, under a heap of stones along the edge of dry wood-land
but quite near swampy ground. Both these specimens were caught
3 Geog. Gesch., 1870, p. 226.
* Beitr. Nat. Bras., 1826, p. 395.
26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1S8oie
near the head of Long Lake, adjoining Bear Swamp, October 8th
and 15th, 1896. Two additional examples were trapped October
29th at Greenwood Lake, the first in a wet pasture lot at the south
end of the lake, the last along a deep ravine in Greenwood Mount-
ain, among sphagnum and grass by the road-side.
In no case have I seen this species out of easy reach of sphagnum
or removed a stone’s throw from woodland, even when wet meadows
afforded it a tempting diversion into open country.
The specimens are esentially like those of this species taken in
Pennsylvania and New England, being uniformly lighter colored
than those found in the bogs of southern New Jersey at the same
season, to which I gave the name Synaptomys stonei in 1893, and
which a full series of specimens is likely to prove separable from
cooperi as a subspecies:
I believe the above record of typical cooperi is the first for New
Jersey, though it is probable that Cooper’s original specimen was
taken in the northern section of the State.
7. Microtus pennsylvanicus (Ord). Wilson’s Meadow Vole.
As was expected, the common meadow mouse proved very abund-
ant in all visited localities.
Of the ninety specimens taken, none show any remarkable varia-
tion from the typical form found in southeastern Pennsylvania.
Several females contained embryos, while young of all stages of
growth were secured. It is not likely that the severest winter
weather puts any effectual period to the reproductive powers of this
animal. In old nursing females the fall moult seemed to be some-
times almost wholly arrested, their pelage presenting a very ragged
and faded appearance.
8. Microtus pinetorum (LeC.). Pine-woods Vole.
Comparison of two specimens of this vole taken at Delaware Gap
shows no differences of even subspecific value to separate them from
individuals taken in the pine barrens of southern New Jersey. Un-
less South Carolina and Georgia specimens differ markedly from
any I have yet taken in Pennsylvania and New Jersey, the conclu-
sion of Audubon and Bachman, that scalopsoides is a synonym of
pinetorum, holds good.
The individual and seasonal variations in this species among spec-
imens from the same locality are very great, making it necessary
that a large suite of skins from Florida to Massachusetts be con-
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27
sulted to determine this point. In any event, all the Pine Voles of
Pennsylvania and New Jersey belong more properly to the northern
type.
No specimens were taken except at Delaware Gap.
9. Evotomys gapperi (Vigors). Gapper’s Wood Vole.
Thirteen specimens were trapped in and about Bear Swamp near
Long Lake, and six more in a hemlock swamp in the bottoms of the
Walkill about two miles south of the New York State line. They
are similar to specimens from Quebec, being lighter colored than
those taken by Mr. Stone at May’s Landing, New Jersey, in 1893.
Iam convinced that the reason this species was not taken near
Greenwood Lake, was my neglect to set traps in the more retired
and deep-shaded hemlock swamps.
10. Fiber zibethious (L.). Muskrat.
No specimens of this abundant species were taken, except at Lake
Hopatcong.
11. Peromyscus leucopus (Raf.). Deer Mouse.
A large series of deer mice from every locality mentioned in the
itinerary of this paper closely conform in character to those of other
parts of New Jersey and Pennsylvania. Though abundant in
localities where Evotomys was found, no specimens of P. canadensis
were secured among them, showing that the mountains of northern
New Jersey lack the more typical Canadian elements which are
found in isolated places in Pennsylvania where I have taken cana-
densis. ,
There is a marked racial difference between leucopus of Pennsyl-
vania and New Jersey and the type of /ewcopus found in Massachu-
setts and northern New York, the latter being smaller and brighter
colored with a narrower dark dorsal stripe and more hairy tail.
Pennsylvania and New Jersey specimens are practically identical
with those collected by me in west Tennessee and Kentucky, where
the type form of leucopus defined by Rafinesque is found. It has
been proved by Mr. G.S. Miller, Jr.,° that the Cricetus myodes of
Gapper applies to the smaller short-tailed deer mouse of Canada
which is apparently identical with those of northern New York and
New England. These facts induce me to revive the name myodes
for the small deer mouse of the eastern Canadian fauna, making it
read Peromyscus leucopus myodes (Gapper).
° Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 1898, pp. 59, 60.
28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
12. Neotoma magister Baird. Allegheny Cave Rat.
The occurrence of this rat in the Hudson highlands near New
Jersey, and in Massachusetts also, has for some years led mammalo-
gists to believe that its distribution across the intervening country
would be found continuous in favorable localities. Save the dis-
covery of their remains in the cave deposits of Monroe County,
Pennsylvania, there has been no definite record to my knowledge
which would connect their habitat in the Allegheny Mountains with
that on the Hudson River. I was informed, however, by a hunter
at Delaware Gap, that he knew of such an animal on the Kittatinny
Mountain in Warren County. This statement I was unable to ver-
ify, owing to my short stay at that place. It is very likely that this
rat will also be found on the Kittatinny range near Culver’s Gap,
but during my visit no exploration of the summits was made.
Soon after my arrival at Greenwood Lake, I was told by a local
sportsman that he had once caught a ‘‘ wood rat” on the mountain
in a deadfall set for skunks. The summits of Greenwood Mountain
at the south end of the lake are made up exclusively of great masses
of glaciated conglomerate and shale with perpendicular fissures and
steep faults running parallel with the northeast and southwest trend
of the range. Chestnut and scrub oaks and dwarfed pines and hem-
locks sparingly cover the nakedness of this desolate but picturesque
locality. Owing to their perpendicular cleavage, I found the rocks
rarely afforded the proper shelter for the abode of the cliff rat, and
it was only after nearly two days of climbing that I stumbled upon
an escarpment from which the rock masses had so fallen into the
gorge as to forma roof. Beneath this, unmistakable signs of the
rats were found, and in the two following days an adult male, a very
old female and a young male, about two-thirds grown, were secured.
These specimens differ in no respects from a series from the Penn-
sylvania Alleghenies taken at the same season. They form the first
New Jersey record of this interesting native rat.
13. Mus decumanus Pallas. Norway Rat.
14. Mus musculus L. House Mouse.
Specimens of the House mouse were taken. Of the status of the
Black Rat, M. rattus, no notes were secured.
15. Zapus hudsonius (Zimm.). Meadow Jumping Mouse.
Ten specimens from Lake Hopatcong and three from near Cul-
ver’s Lake represent this animal. The latter were taken in a wet
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29
swamp grown up with Juncus and grasses. The temperature fell on
two nights when these were taken to near 32°, forming heavy frosts.
Their absence from my traps in the Walkill Valley and at Green-
wood Lake was undoubtedly due to the low temperature having
driven them all to their winter repose. A thick layer of yellow fat
completely covered the bodies of these Culver’s Lake specimens,
adhering so firmly to the skin that it was very difficult to preserve
the specimens.
16. Zapus insignis Miller. Woodland Jumping Mouse.
I secured four beautiful specimens of this Zapus in woodland
along a small rocky stream connecting a rhododendron swamp with
Lake Hopatcong, near Nolan’s Point. All were trapped close by
the water’s edge, precisely as described by Mr. Miller in his later
account of the species. I have never taken this animal in open sit-
uations such as are preferred by its kinsman of the meadow. The
most persistent trapping in likely places at Culver’s and Greenwood
Lakes did not reveal the presence of insignis there. It seems prob-
able that it is more sensitive to frost than hudsonius and had gone
into winter quarters before my arrival at Culver’s Lake. At Green-
wood Lake a dormant jumping mouse, evidently of this species from
the description given me by the finder, was dug out of a gravel
bank during my stay. I visited the spot, and from its situation in
deep woodland near a brook, I am morally sure it was insignis. The
narrator of the incident stated that he knew the meadow species
very well, but that this one was ‘“‘ much redder.” These particulars
are given to show not only that insignis is found in Passaic County,
but to prove that it hibernates earlier than hudsonius.
The presence of a persistent premolar in all other known species
of the genus as contrasted with its absence in Zapus insignis may
eventually entitle the latter to separate subgeneric rank.
17. Castor canadensis Kuhl. American Beaver.
Numerous localities in northern New Jersey are pointed out as
the traditional sites of beaver colonies. This animal was so early
exterminated in these places that I found it impossible to secure any
data relating to the time of their extinction.
18. Arctomys monax (L.). Woodchuck; Ground Hog.
Very abundant on the Delaware slope of the Kittatinny Mount-
ain; less so in other localities named except at Lake Hopatcong.
No specimens were taken.
30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
It seems strange that the unmistakable difference in size and color
obtaining between the woodchucks of the Hudson Bay regions and
those of Maryland, the type locality of monaz, should not have been
officially recognized. With Dr. Allen’s excellent analysis of its
nomenclature® as a basis, I see no objection to designating the wood-
chucks of eastern North America by the following formule :—
1. Arctomys monax (Linneeus), Syst. Nat. 1758, p. 60; Maryland
Marmot. Size small; color gray-brown, feet brown. Habitat.—
Carolinian fauna, intergrading northward through the Alleghenian
and Canadian fauna into
2. Arctomys monax melanopus (Kuhl), Beitrage, 1820, p. 64; Hud-
son Bay Marmot. Size large; color brown-black, feet black. Hab-
itat.—Hudsonian fauna, intergrading southward with typical monaz.
19. Tamias striatus (L.). Carolina Chipmunk.
Forty specimens, representing every locality visited, show nearer
affinities to the Carolinian than the Canadian form of our eastern
chipmunk. Those from Delaware Gap are scarcely separable from
southern New Jersey examples, the Greenwood Lake series being
nearest to lysteri of Maine, but much darker. This animal is very
abundant in Warren, Sussex and Passaic Counties, but not so num-
erous at Lake Hopatcong.
A temperature of 28° during my stay at Greenwood Lake did not
wholly silence them, though it greatly lessened their activity and
apparent numbers. Contrary to what I expected, no really fat spec-
imens were procured, and all seemed most busily intent on gather-
ing and storing acorns at a season when they are generally supposed
to go into their winter sleep. About twenty per cent of those taken
had the tail shortened or injured in some manner.
20. Sciurus hudsonicus loquax Bangs. Carolinian Chickaree.
Numerous everywhere; abundant in the deeper evergreen for-
ests.
21. Sciurus carolinensis pennsylvanicus (Ord). Northern Gray Squirrel.
Not common except in the vicinity of Long Lake.
Even the former existence of the Fox Squirrel in northern New
Jersey rests on such unreliable evidence that I am unwilling to in-
clude it in this paper.
Monog. N. A. Rod., 1877, pp. 915-917.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 31
22. Sciuropterus volans (L.). Carolinian Flying Squirrel.
A female and three young taken at Lake Hopatcong, and a male
from near Culver’s Lake, show no tendency to gradation with the
northern animal.
23. Procyon lotor (L.). Raccoon.
Not rare. ) > 11 A. M: 12 M. iad BoB i 4.00 P. M.
(6), 911 A. M, 12 M. 1P.M 4.00 P. M.
156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
All the eggs in the chain are never found to be in the same stage
of segmentation. The following will show the typical arrangement :
in a chain of 22 eggs, numbers 13,18 and 20 were unsegmented ; 2,
5, 6, 7, 9,.12 and 16 were 2-celled ; 14, 3 and 4 were 3-celled ; 1, 8,
15 and 22 were 4-celled; 10 was 5-celled. The observation was
made at 2 P.M.; by 3 P.M. the successive changes had taken
place in all these eggs with the exception of 13, 18, 20, 10 and 14,
all of which were probably dead.
The segmentation in S. borealis is unequal. The first cleavage
plane is equatorial, and takes place as the following will serve to il-
lustrate :
11.00 A. M., egg unsegmented.
11.05 A. M., slight notch visible.
11.30 A. M., segmentation plane visible for one-half the cireum-
ference of the egg; polar globules present.
12 M., faint, but complete segmentation plane, 2-celled stage.
1 P. M., marked segmentation plane, resting period.
The egg having passed through the above described changes is
now divided into two unequal portions, the smaller of which is ellip-
soidal, giving the whole egg a somewhat dumb-bell shaped appear-
ance. The capsule is distinct, but more closely approximated to the
surface of the egg than in the preceding stage. There is no marked
change in color, the lower #arger cell is somewhat darker than the
upper.
In the 3-celled stage the division plane passes upward through
the smaller of the two cells already formed ; this stage then consists
of one large and two smaller unequal cells.
By continuation of the division plane of the last stage the lower
and larger cell becomes divided into two unequal cells. This sec-
ond segmentation plane is at right angles tothe first or segmentation
plane of the 2-celled stage. But by their peculiar intersection with
each other, neither plane is any longer a continuous circle; the
points of intersection are marked by z-shaped lines. The lower left
cell is darker than the others, containing the most yolk. In seg-
mentation of these eggs the first furrow or segmentation plane al-
ways bends to the right, the second bends to the left.
The next division takes place in a plane at right angles to the
last. The first cell to be divided is the smallest of the four already
existing cells; the polar globules take their position at the right
hand side of this small cell. The general shape of the egg becomes
modified somewhat at this stage. It is now irregularly spheroidal.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157
The successive stages up to the 16-celled stage are shown in the
accompanying illustrations, Plate I. The origin of the respective
cells is indicated by arrows. The cells of the 4-celled stage are
designated A, B, C, D in the order of formation; A’, B’, C’, D’ are
successively developed from these in the formation of 5-celled,
6-celled, 7-celled and 8-celled stages. Inthesame manner 4a, b, ¢, d,
are derived from the previous A’, B’, C’, D’, forming stages 9-celled,
10-celled, 11-celled and 12-celled. The next four stages are desig-
nated a’, b’, c’, d’, and constitute 13-celled, 14-celled, 15-celled and
16-celled stages in their respective order of formation.
The blastula has a very small blastocoele ; the blastopore forms
the mouth. The cells of the endoderm take their origin from the
macromeres of the lower half of the blastula, while those of the up-
per half give rise to the ectoderm. The mesoderm can be traced
from the left posterior macromere. The blastula becomes bilaterally
symmetrical by the rise of the primitive mesoderm cells; these lie
in the posterior portion on either side of the median line. Next in
development the endodermal cells of the blastula become invagina-
ted into the segmentation cavity and form the archenteron, while
the ectoderm grows over the invaginated portion. The primitive
mesoderm cells sink between endoderm and ectoderm deeper into
the segmentation cavity.
In the gastrula stage the blastophore is a median ventral, longi-
tudinal slit; this closes from posterior to anterior until there re-
mains only a small aperture. The first stage of the larva after seg-
mentation almost entirely fills the egg capsule, and is surrounded by
a zone of cilia. The body is opaque, reddish-brown in color, and
flattened on one side just below the cilated zone.
In the second stage of the larva the ectoderm becoming invagina-
ted, forms the stomodeum or larval oesophagus; the archenteron
elongates backward. There is a central opaque yolk-mass which is
surrounded by a layer of clear cells. This layer of clear cells is
thickest on the same side that the larva of the previous stage was
flattened. The zone of cilia persist and one pair of ocelli appear.
The third stage of the larva has the flattened portion of the body
more marked than in the preceding stages. The collar originates as
two prominent projections on the right and left of the ventral, pos-
terior, median region of the body.
The prominent features of the fourth larval stage are the increase
in the curve of the dorsal surface and the growth of the collar.
158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
In the fifth stage the larva appears divided into three regions:
anterior, middle and posterior. The anterior represents the cepha-
lic region, and is separated from the middle by a ring of cilia. The
collar covers the whole ventral side of the middle body region ; its
entire surface is ciliated. The body is of an orange color, while the
yolk mass is brown. ‘There is a bright red projection below the
collar in the ventral region. Two ocelli are visible.
The sixth larval stage is characterized by the greater develop-
ment of the collar and the development of hook-like setze in the
lateral portions of the body; three pair of these sete are arranged
between the collar and the posterior portion of the larval body. The
primitive body cavity lengthens during this stage. The region of
body from the posterior portion to mouth, becomes flattened.
The body of the seventh larval stage is more vermiform ; the mid-
dle body region being the largest. Four ocelli are present (the
larger being the original two) which are placed on the apex of the
prostomium in the median line. There is an apical tuft of cilia
present and a ciliated post-oral ring. The mouth opens in the
median, ventral line and has ciliated lips. The collar is ciliated
and now covers only about one-third of the middle body region.
The posterior portion of the body is narrower than the middle por-
tion and is segmented ; its surface is ciliated on the ventral side
and there is a tuft of cilia on the last segment. The posterior end
of the intestine opens on the dorsal surface of the last segment by
means of an invagination of the ectoderm, and thus the anus is
formed. The operculum develops during this stage, appearing as a
narrow, triangular plate arising from the dorsal side of the head.
The larva now releases itself from the egg capsule by pressing its
spines against the walls, and becomes a free swimming form.
In the eighth stage of the larva the operculum increases in size ;
the ocelli which were first to appear, now disappear ; the apical
ocelli remain. The club-shaped tentacles are replaced by the be-
ginning of branchiz. The operculum continues to develop. The
collar much reduced in size remains attached to the cephalic region.
In the ventral portion of the same region is the shell gland repre-
sented by an oblong mass of cells. The larva ceases to swim about
and sinks below the surface of the water, attaching itself to some
object by means of a translucent limy secretion. This is the shell
forming stage.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159
The formation of the shell was observed as follows: On July 29th
at 8.30 P. M. the larva swam slowly about a limited area for about
fifteen minutes. It then remained quiet and attached itself to the
glass in which it had been placed, after a few minutes it began to
secrete a translucent mass about it. At 9.30 P. M. the shell thus
formed presented a translucent horn-shaped appearance and formed
a permanent tube covering about one-half of the fully extended
body. The upper half of the body was constantly protruded from
and withdrawn into this half formed shell.
In the ninth stage the shell assumes a spiral form, but is about
half the diameter of the adult shell. The annelid still possesses
apical ocelli; the collar disappears; the tentacles are filiform and
branched. By differentiation of the cephalic region, and by growth
of the larva in length of the posterior part of the body, and by seg-
mentation into numerous metameres, the originally unsegmented
larva is transformed into the adult annelid.
The time occupied by the development of S. borealis from the
first segmentation stage to that of the free swimming ciliated larva
was found by a series of observations to occupy the space of three
days. Two days later the annelids attached themselves and com-
menced the formation of shells; the length of time required from
this stage on to completion of the adult shell has not been ob-
served.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
A. Agassiz. Spirorbis spirillum, Annals of Lyceum of Natural
History, Vol. VIII, pp. 318-323.
J. W. Fewkes. Spirorbis borealis, American Naturalist, March,
1885, p. 249.
Pagenstecker. §pirorbis spirillum, Zeitschrift fiir wiss. Zoologie,
i
EXPLANATION OF PLATES I AND II.
Figures 1 to 10. Segmentation stages.
Figure 11. Blastula stage.
Figure 12. . Gastrula stage.
Figure 13. Sixth larval stage. Ventral view. (Still in the
ege capsule).
Figure 14. Seventh larval stage. Ventral view. (Ready to
escape from egg capsule).
Figure 15. Early shell secreting stage. Ventral view.
160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Figure 16. Later shell secreting stage. Ventral view.
Figure 17. Adult Spirorbis borealis showing arrangement of
_ branchize, operculum, alimentary tract, shell gland,
generative glands.
Figure 18. Cephalic and anterior thoracic regions of adult S.
borealis showing arrangement of branchize and
operculum, groups of setze, fore-gut of alimentary
tract.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161
NOTES ON UNDERGROUND RUNNERS.
BY IDA A. KELLER.
Reduction to types is one of the most characteristic features of
modern biological science. That very important branch of botany
and zoology which is known as morphology has this for its sole ob-
ject. In all the variety of form and function which the plant world
offers we recognize only a few organs, viz.: root, stem, leaf and
trichome as distinct from each other, every part of a-plant being
simply regarded as one, or a modification of one, of these fundamen-
tal forms.
It is the same mental habit by which we are influenced in the
formation of our ideas regarding the life history of plants. We are
accustomed to unify the cycle of their existence; e. g., we say that,
in general, a plant arises from seed, that it produces roots, a stem,
leaves and, finally, fruit, when the sequence is repeated. Although
in reviewing our past experience we are forced to modify our views
upon this subject, we do not hesitate to pronounce the foregoing the
typical plan of vegetable existence. The more carefully, however,
we investigate the development of plants, the more divergences we
find in regard to this recognized fundamental method. Especially
among the lower forms of vegetation it may be observed that repro-
duction by fruit gives way with great frequency to bud formations.
Nor in the higher forms is the beginning of the vegetable organism
to be found in the ovule as often as we are apt to suppose. Such
bud formations find expression here in the production of bulbs,
tubers, adventitious buds, runners, ete.
So far as the resulting plant is concerned, there is no difference
visible, whether it was produced from seed or bud, and it is not un-
til we unearth roots in great numbers that we begin to realize how
great is the importance of the, method of reproduction by buds in
assisting to clothe the earth with vegetation. Every botanist will
readily recall many illustrations of this point. One season I spent
much time in studying the formation of runners on the bulb of
Erythronium Americanum, and the result was surprising. Again I
dug up a great number of the scaly bulbs of Ozalis violacea, and
found hardly one without one or more runners issuing from its base.
162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
It appears probable that these runners with incipient plants or
bulbs on their tips, in many cases, appear regularly at certain sea-
sons, and their development may be confined to certain periods. I
observed the beginning of the formation of runners of Erythronium
in early April, and their subsequent development which lasted at
least until June, when bulbs had formed on the ends. The speci-
mens of Ozalis referred to above were collected in June, but I have
also found runners on the bulbs of this plant in October. My chief
reason for putting these few observations together is to direct atten-
tion to these points, since the time favorable for this line of work
will soon be at hand. Our spring flowers will, without doubt, prove
good objects for investigation. It seems reasonable to suppose that
the formation of runners will be found to be most active when the
plant is not requiring much energy in seed and fruit formation.
This certainly seemed to be the case with Erythronium. I do not
now remember having found any runners on plants in flower, but I
collected scores of plants which produced runners actively, but
which had not sent up their flowering scapes.
The following is directly in this line: On the 26th of April of last
year I came upon a locality near Swarthmore which was overrun to
an unusual extent by Arisema triphyllum. I was struck by the
marked difference shown by these plants so far as their respective
stages of development were concerned, and began to dig up speci-
mens of various degrees of maturity. Upon examination of a young
plant such asis represented in Plate III, fig. 1, the corm was just be-
ginning to swell, a number of roots had emerged from it; these were
clothed with root-hairs for the soil adhered to them tenaciously. One
might naturally conclude that these young plants were seedlings pro-
duced from the fruit of the preceding year. A different origin was,
however, suggested by other plants of about the same appearance and
stage of development. A clue was obtained by such specimens as
that represented by fig. 2. The corm was somewhat thicker and
the appendage at its lower end was very suggestive. This was
brown in color, and was, without doubt, what remained of ashrivelled
runner attached at one time to another plant. Upon examination
of still younger plants, figs. 3 and 4, no sign of a thickened
corm was to be seen, and the rootstock, if such it may be called, was
still firm and hard. The attachment to the mother plant was, how-
ever, no longer intact.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165
Fig. 5 represents a plant of considerably larger size. In other
respects it did not differ materially from that represented by fig.
2. Unless the truncate end of the corm may be considered assuch,
every trace of the appendage was lost. This “cut off” appearance
did not belong to the body of the corm, for when the shrivelled coat-
ing was removed, the lower end revealed a conical shape—fig. 6.
Fig. 7 shows a plant whose leaves and general appearance in-
dicated a further stage of development, although its growth ap-
peared somewhat stunted. Three large buds z, had formed. The
specimen was interesting on account of the different relative posi-
tion of corm, stem and roots as compared with the plants repre-
sented in the preceding illustrations. The roots here emerged from
the base of the corm, while in the other cases described they pro-
ceeded from above. A turning of the corm seemed to have taken
place, the point through which the axis of rotation may be consid-
ered to pass is evidently at the junction of corm and stem. This
apparent rotation is probably due to the position in which the termi-
nus of the runner is primarily lodged. At all events, the subject
deserves further investigation. The upright stem in all cases obeys,
according to the rule, the influence of negative geotropism, the roots
are positively geotropic, but the corm itself seems to be quite free
from the influence of this force. Physiologically, this is certainly of
interest: I do not now recall any similar observations recorded in
regard to the effect of geotropism on bulbs produced from under-
ground runners.
Fig. 8 represents a plant considerably larger than that of fig.
7. The corm here had an appearance of partial rotation, while
fig. 9 shows a corm: from a plant similar to those of figs. 1 and
2, with the appendage below. It is a question, probably only to be
decided by statistics, which is the normal position, if there be such a
one, in young and mature plants.
To show the variety of form assumed by the corms of Arisema
triphyllum, I have outlined a number of these in fiz. 10; a, 6, ¢, d, e,
f and g, all being taken from flowering plants. Some are flat below,
e and f, others are convex, d and e. Buds are visible in many cases,
z, and even in these flowering plants the appendage, ap., indicative
of the origin of the plant, is not always lost.
In many other respects, this species is extremely interesting. It
is remarkable for its variations in size. I have found specimens
164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
which were considerably over two feet tall, while again one often
comes across flowering dwarfs barely six inches high.
I collected, on the excursion above referred to, 25 spikes for ex-
amination, and of these 21 were staminate and 4 pistillate. Of
the latter closer examination revealed that on 2 of them some few
stamens with ripe anther cells were to be found, the anthers being
well-filled with pollen, fig. 11, p. The anther cells had burst,
and there isno reason why the pollen, in such cases, should not
fertilize the ovules in pistils on the same plant, especially since small
insects are always found inside the spathe, which may serve to dis-
tribute the pollen. Possibly these few stamens may help to ensure
fertilization in case cross fertilization should fail, which latter
method, for aught I know, may be the usual one. The stigma is so
remarkable that I could not refrain from sketching it, fig. 12. It
is densely covered with enormous club-shaped hairs which are ex-
tremely like the glandular hairs I found producing the jelly-like
secretion in the fruit of Peltaydra undulata. Here and there I
found a pollen grain on these hairs, p.
Finally: From the numbers cited above, although they can-
not be taken to represent the ratio in which staminate and
pistillate spikes are to be generally found, it appears, never-
theless, that nature wastes a great deal of energy to secure the
formation of fruit by such an excessive production of pollen. We
may suppose that all these staminate flowers are produced to ensure
fertilization by insects. There occurs to me another point of view
to which I am at present somewhat inclined: Every one must ad-
mit that in nature there is an inherent tendency under proper con-
ditions to produce flowers even if there may be little chance finally
of seed formation, although the ulterior object of the flower is then
not accomplished. We know that in the genus Arisema the
“flowers are moncecious or by abortion dicecious.” It is quite pos-
sible that this abortion may have a direct bearing on the method
of reproduction described above. I wish to emphasize the point
that while the plant obeys this flower forming inclination, the sup-
pression of fruit production on those plants, which by abortion
develop only staminate flowers, may serve to increase the tendency
to the formation of underground runners. At all events, if we at-
tempt to realize the great number of plants of Arisema triphyllum
produced by buds we must admit that the plant with stam-
inate flowers only, is possibly not less prolific than the fruiting one,
Oe a
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165
especially should it be found, as it is to be expected, that the growth
of runners from the development of underground buds is more vig-
orous when the chief energy of the plant is not consumed in fruit
formation.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE III.
Figs. 1, 2,3, 4,5, 7, and 8 young plants of Arisema triphyllum,
+ natural size.
Fig. 6, corm of fig. 5, showing conical shape of lower portion after
removal of coating; 4 natural size.
Fig. 9, corm with two buds, z, and appendage from a plant simi-
lar to that represented in VIII; ? natural size.
Fig. 10, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, corms from flowering plants showing a
variety of form; + natural size.
Fig. 11, pollen grains; the protoplasm is contracted by alcohol ;
the nucleus, 7, is very distinct; greatly magnified.
Fig. 12, stigma beset with large club-shaped trichomes, three pol-
len grains are visible, p; greatly magnified.
12
166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
APRIL 6.
The President, SamuEet G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.
APRIL 13.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty-eight persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—
“ A Contribution to the Mammalogy of Central Pennsylvania,”
by Samuel N. Rhoads.
“A New Southeastern Race of the Little Brown Bat,” by Samuel
N. Rhoads.
“Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hymenoptera of Brazil,
No. 2—Pompilide,” by Wm. J. Fox.
“‘ Notes on Plant Monstrosities,” by Ida A. Keller.
The death, on the 12th inst., of Edward D. Cope, a member, was
announced, whereupon the following minute was unanimously
adopted :—
The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia has received
with profound sorrow the announcement of the death of PRor.
Epwarp Drinker Cope. It is fitting that this meeting should
place on record a minute expressive of its sense of the loss sustained.
The Academy witnessed the beginning and the end of his long
labors. It was to its halls he came as a student in 1859, and it was
to them he paid his last visit before his final illness. The lustre
thrown upon the society by his researches is but a reflex of the
spirit of this remarkable man who exhibited, in a way rarely
equalled in the history of science, the consecration of a powerful in-
tellect to the pursuit of the knowledge of nature. To an almost
unerring accuracy of observation he conjoined admirable judgment.
He was unexcelled as an expert in the field of vertebrate zoology of
both present and extinct forms; he discovered great numbers of
genera and species; he announced startling and epoch-making
schemes of classification; he framed comprehensive systems of phil-
osophy based on biologic premises.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167
One hesitates which to admire most: the tenacity of his memory,
the brilliancy of his wit, or the ease with which he used his enor-
mous erudition. To any community, and at any time, the loss of
such a man is a calamity.
The Committee on the Hayden Geologica] Memorial Award re-
ported in favor of conferring the medal and interest on the fund for
1897 on Prof. A. Karpinski, of St. Petersburg, Director of the
Geological Survey of Russia.
Pror. Karpryski has long been the most prominent figure
among Russian geologists, and, in spite of the claims upon his time
and energy of the Geological Survey of Russia’s gigantic domain—
very far the largest region in the world under the direction of a
single man—he has found time to contribute valuable additions to
our knowledge in many different fields. Some of these are :—
Geological Investigations and Exploration of the Coal Deposits
of the Eastern Urals. 1880.
Remarks on the Sedimentary Formation of Russia-in-Europe.
Origin of the Iron Ore in the Donety Basin.
Geographical Observations on the Urals.
Sedimentary Beds of the Tertiary of the Eastern Urals.
Reference to the Occurrence of Permo-Carbonic Measures in Dar-
wazminca. 1884.
Ammonites from the Ural. 1884.
Fossil Pteropods. 1884.
Essay on Unification, etc. 1884.
Geological Map of the Urals. 1884.
Materials for the Study of the Methods of Petrographic Research.
1885.
Geological Map of Russia, Sheet 139.
_Orographie Description. 1886.
Prof. Karpinski has been prominent in the councils of the Inter-
national Geological Congress, his ability and eminence suggesting
his selection as the President of the general committee of organiza-
tion of the coming Congress. The Committee hopes to present
farther details of Prof. Karpinski’s life at a later date.
APRIL 20.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty-four persons present.
The deaths, February, 1897, of Baron Constantin von Ettingshau-
sen and of Prof. Karl Claus, correspondents, were announced.
[1897.
168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
APRIL 27.
The President, SamuEt G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-seven persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—
“ New Species of Mollusks from Uruguay,” by Henry A. Pilsbry.
“ External Features of Young Cryptochiton,” by Harold Heath.
The following were elected members:—Henry Brinton Coxe,
Ferdinand Philips and Eckley Brinton Coxe, Jr.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169
CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LIFE HISTORIES OF PLANTS, NO. XII.
BY THOMAS MEEHAN.
It will be seen by the dates and references in some of the fol-
lowing chapters, that the papers were written long ago. ‘The
facts noted have been confirmed by observations made in subsequent
years. Some of them have been read at the meetings of the Botani-
cal Section of the Academy, and, though requested for publication
elsewhere, have been held so as to appear in this series of “ Contri-
butions.”
Having been written at various times, when the subjects of the
sketches were fresh in the mind, there may be some repetition of
propositions. This would not have been the case had the papers
been prepared continuously.
THE FECUNDITY OF HELIOPHYTUM INDICUM.
Heliophytum Indicum, the Heliotropium Indicum of the older bot-
anists, has found its way over all the tropical and subtropical por-
tions of theearth. It is at home in Asia, Africa and America, and
if it once gets a chance seed into the soil of Europe, will no doubt
as easily maintain its hold as other free-seeding typical weeds have
done. In some unknown way a few plants appeared in 1894 in my
garden, and have afforded me an interesting study.
Its capacity for seed production isenormous. The cyme-branches
that have flowered and have, or will have, perfect seed, represent,
August 28th, a line of 1,224 inches. There are twenty seed vessels,
that is to say forty seeds to the inch, making a total of 48,960 seeds.
The cymes are still vigorously unfolding and flowering, and will
probably double these figures, but in uncertainties it is best to be
on the safe side; so, allowing but one-third more, we have a length
of fruiting rachis of 1,632 inches, and a total seed production of
65,280.
All this has proceeded from a plant that was itself but a seed
three months before! The total length of stem and branches sup-
porting these seed-bearing cymes, is but 396 inches. The plant is
true to the classical story of Clytie and Phoebus which gave the
original genus Heliotropium its name. It does not open a flower until
170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
the sun has reached the summer solstice. When the sun ceases to
woo it, the flower opens, only to find its beloved going away. Less
than three months of flowering will, therefore, have been occupied
in this enormous seed production.
The facts here detailed have an important bearing on two points
maintained by me, in connection with the life-history of plants :—
I have recorded numerous observations in the Proceedings of the
Academy, commencing with 1866, showing that the growth-energy
of plants is rhythmic, dependent on the power of the plant, or the
parts thereof, to convert nutrition into the growth-force, and that
the various forms which plants present are the result of varying
phases of life-energy, in most cases of no physiological value, and
with which environment has little to do. The evidence furnished
by Heliophytum, though of a negative character, is surely strong.
Through the long ages the plant has been established over a vast
area, and consequently subjected to many varying and varied con-
ditions of environment; it has continued as a compact genus or sec-
tion distinct from Heliotropium, without any material change that
would warrant a modern botanist in making new species of it.
Again it has been maintained by me that as environment can
have no important influence on changes of form, the free and un-
trammelled production of seed would be of far more importance
in a supposed “struggle for life’ than any power of adaptation
could be that depended more on an occasional cross for its increased
energy. Dean Swift’s satire in which the Lilliputians, by the mere
force of numbers, are made to overcome the giant Brobdingnagians,
cannot be supported in every case by the histories of plants, but
when it comes to a question of distribution, numbers surely are the
more likely to hold the field.
I think I may claim the credit of advancing the further proposi-
tion that a free production of seed may always be taken as an a
priori indication of self-fertilization. In cleistogamic flowers the
certainty of seed-bearing is well known. With rare exceptions the
huge natural order of Composite are self-fertilizers, and they have
managed to embrace within themselves about one-tenth of the whole
vegetable kingdom. Where the wind or an insect is the agent in
fertilization, the agent does not always come along. On plants de-
pendent on this outside assistance, numerous flowers fail to seed.
No plant so dependent ever perfects all its seeds; in many cases
utter failure follows. In this remarkable plant there is no indica-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171
tion that a single flower failed to mature seed. It must certainly
be held remarkable that in a single plant, bearing in round num-
bers over 30,000 flowers, every one should bear two seeds.
It has been contended that though plants may generally self-fer-
tilize when the agents for cross-fertilization do not attend, they are
so arranged as to cross-fertilize when the agent does appear. As
the Heliophytum flowers are freely visited at times on my grounds
by insects, and especially butterflies, there might be some strength
in the point. I can, however, testify by an almost daily observa-
tion of my plant through the season, that minute flowers are only
visited by insects when others are scarce. Though I have seen
them visiting the flowers for several successive days, there are
many days when they do not visit them, and none were noticed on
the former until the beginning of August. A careful watching of
the anthers shows, however, the extreme difficulty of effecting cross-
fertilization. The anthers form a cone over the stigma, and the
pollen sacs burst almost simultaneously with the unplaiting of the
corolla. When the flower is a few hours old the stigma protrudes
slightly through the anther-cap, and is visible under a lens through
the very small orifice of the corolla-tube. Even admitting that the
flower has not fertilized at this early stage, and that the tongue of a
butterfly might introduce foreign pollen to it under certain cir-
cumstances, it would rarely, in any case, occur. It is well known
that all insects soon discover the easiest method of doing their
work. In this case there are five openings between the tube of the
corolla and the bases of the filaments, offering a wholly unobstructed
course to the creature’s tongue. It would have to use considerable
force to insert its tongue under the anthers pressing down on the
stigma. It is inconceivable that the flower can receive any aid to
cross-fertilization in this way. But we may grant that a cross-fer-
tilization will result in a plant better fitted for the struggle for life
than one self-fertilized, and that a small percentage might become
ceross-fertilized. The question of numbers again forces itself upon
us. How many of the seeds of any plant get a chance to develop to
a plant again bearing seeds? How many of the 65,280 seeds of this
plant will probably mature; will come to be seed-bearing plants
next year? Only a small percentage, in any case, ever do. In this
case surely very few will, and of these how many would those result-
ing from a “chance cross” give?
172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
_ Facts of this character are common, but this case presents them
in such a remarkable degree, as to make it a special one Helio-
phytum indicum, a self-fertilizer and wonderfully productive, has
maintained a remarkable homogeneity amidst rare variation in the
environmental conditions.
If we accept the thought frequently thrown out in these contribu-
tions that form results from the various degrees of rhythmic energy
in the plant itself, just as it would in the formation of the frost
crystals on a window pane, we can see that environment can not be
regarded as a leading agent, but must take a minor place.
THE ORIGIN OF THE FORMS OF FLOWERS.
In my intercourse with intelligent and observing botanists, who
frequently do not place their conclusions on record, I find a grow-
ing tendency to discredit views, till recently widely prevalent, that
external conditions have any more than a feeble influence on the
evolution of the forms of flowers. Thought is in the direction that
various degrees of internal energy seem rather the chief agents in
effecting change.
Listening to some verbal remarks before the Botanical Club of
the American Association for the Advancement of Science, at
Buffalo, New York, by Mr. David F. Day, I was struck by his
point that irregular flowers were usually associated with the curving
or twisting of the peduncle, while regular flowers and straight pe-
duncles were usually closely related. I saw this subsequently well
illustrated in lilies. In the class to which belong Lilium Philadel-
phicum and L. Catesbei, the upright flowers are perfectly regular ;
irregularity, in some of the floral parts, characterizing the nodding
ones. The nodding peduncles, after flowering, become erect, and in
the seed-bearing stage the seed vessels are erect on perfectly straight
peduncles in both classes. It is evident from this fact that in the
species with drooping flowers, the expansion of the perianth occurred
before the uncoiling energy had been exhausted, and during a
rhythmic rest. It is further evident that the growth-waves prevail-
ing in the development of the flower varied in intensity in different
parts, and that varying forms must necessarily follow from these
varying degrees of energy. Unequal pressure by reason of the
curve ought to be accountable for this inequality. It is, however,
evident that outside agencies could not have had much, if any, in-
fluence in the curving which results in irregularities of these lilies.
Some excellent illustrations are often seen where an erect flower oc-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 173
easionally occurs on a plant which generally has the pedicels more
or less curved. Some Gloxinias and other Gesneriaceous plants will
readily recur to the intelligent observer. Gesneria elongata, a South
American species, popular in garden culture, often has these erect
flowers. In this ease the flowers are perfectly regular, and of a
different character in other respects from the normal ones.
During the past season I was able to add a new illustration to
the list in Pentstemon barbatus. In a large bed with several hun-
dred flower stems, I collected some twenty erect flowers. In the
normal condition, the three lower segments constitute a lip, and
are so tightly recurved that they press against the tube ; the upper
-two are erect, and form an upper lip. But in the exceptional flow-
ers noted, this is all changed. The lobes of the corolla are equal,
recurved, and pressed against the tube. But the most remarkable
change occurs in the fifth or barren stamen. In the normal form
this is so differently constructed from the other four that thoughtful
observation has to be given before deciding that it is a stamen at
all. In these erect, regular flowers there is not the slightest differ-
ence between any of the stamens. ‘The fifth is the exact counter-
part of the other four. Each one of the five stamens are alternate
with the five regular lobes, as they should be in any well-ordered
regular flower. Assuredly if a plant always had flowers like these,
and only these flowers, it would not be a Pentstemon, but be made
to constitute a wholly different genus, if it were not, indeed, referred
to another natural order, for a two-lipped and more or less irregular
corolla is regarded as a leading characteristic in Scrophulariacez.
We may say that nothing but a different degree of growth-energy,
accelerating or retarding the spiral development, so that that which
should have been left curved was advanced to (or left in) a straight
condition, had anything to do with the remarkable change.
And then we may ask if such remarkably distinct forms can be
produced on the same plant, and in an exceptional way, what is to
prevent the plant from regularly exercising the same force, and thus
making the irregular flower the exception? That this can be done
is shown in the case of the upright and nodding lilies already cited,
though we have no evidence that a regular and irregular lily ever
grew on the same plant, as here produced by a Pentstemon. Ex-
amples might be found if carefully looked for.
That these vagaries, once brought into existence, have hereditary
powers, is too well known to horticulturists to need more than a
174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
passing notice. That they are not oftener the parents of a line of
new species is probably owing to the fact that of the millions of
seeds produced by a single plant, an extremely smail percentage
ever get the opportunity to grow and again develop to a seed-bear-
ing condition. There would be little chance among so many for
these exceptional flowers of Pentstemon to perpetuate themselves.
Though it would seem that in this case environment, as it is gener-
ally understood, could have had little to do in developing an irregu-
lar to a regular flower, one may plead for life-energy as the chief
factor in the production of form, and still leave considerable for en-
vironment to do. One cannot well retain as erect a position when
holding an umbrella against a driving storm, asif he were simply
shading himself on a calm summer day; and there must be some
opposing elements or adverse circumstances capable of depressing
life-energy as a mechanical force, and with this variation in degree,
we may reasonably look for a change in form. But granting all
this it must be evident that life-energy, dependent on oyine phases
of nutrition, is the main power in deciding form.
SPINES IN THE CITRUS FAMILY.
The spines which often occur in members of the Aurantiacez or
Citrus family are said to be axillary. We are to understand by
this that they are situated between the base of the leaf and the axis
or stem ; but they are rather lateral than axillary. Lateral spines
are to be considered as of stipular origin, but stipular spines are
usually in regular pairs, one on either side of the petiole. A single
lateral spine could scarcely be stipular. Pondering over these
anomalies with an orange tree before me, it was noted that the
spines varied much in size and strength. In many cases there were
no attempts to form spines at the nodes. In a few instances where
spines were wanting, the axillary buds were pushing into growth,
where a small point with an articulation might be noted on the bud
scale. In some cases there would be points on two separate bud
scales. With this suggestion a careful examination of the spines
showed clearly that they were but strongly developed bud scales, or
portions of the calycine system. I could trace no articulation as in
the young state above noted, though the upper portion soon loses its
vitality, while the major part of the spine remains green and active
for a long time.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 175
Examining next some plants of Triphasia trifoliata which had
wintered in the open air, I was pleased to find the leaf origin of
these spines confirmed. The articulation, which the leaves of most
of the Citrus tribe have near the junction
of petiole and lamina, is plainly seen in
these spines (Fig. 1). The part above the
articulation is completely dead and brown
as one might expect the lamina of a leaf to
be—the more highly vitalized spine, the
metamorphosed petiole, has resisted the
frost killing severity of the winter.
We can thus see that the proper classi-
fication of the spine in the Citrus tribe is
with such as are borne by thistles or sim-
(\\\ ilar plants, where the leafy bracts form-
Fic. 1. ing the involucres terminate in sharp
rigid prolongations, which are not to be classed with spines equally
with the sharp apices of Gleditschia, Maclura and other specifically
spiny species.
FLOWERS AND FLOWERING OF LAMIUM PURPUREUM.
One might suppose that a plant so widely spread over the world,
and one that intrudes itself so persistently on every one’s attention as
Lamium purpureum, could not possibly have anything written about
it that would be new to botanists. But I am inclined to believe that
plants have not a uniform behavior in every place, and possibly the
behavior of species here may be different from that in the Old World.
These considerations make it the more important that the points I
have noted in the plants growing on my grounds should be placed
on record.
The species is very abundant as a weed on my grounds near
Philadelphia. It is the form with the smaller flowers and without
the ring of hair below the throat that is described in the typical
form of Europe. It was originally introduced into my grounds
from Germany. It is probably the form which Willdenow regards
as a good species, and describes as Lamium incisum. The hair that
is found in the throat of L. purpureum is absent—there is but a
single short tooth instead of two on the lower lip, and the pollen is
orange instead of bright scarlet.
Dr. Bromfield notes “ anthers with several tufts of stiff hairs or
bristles on the face of each cell, and according to Mr. Leighton ac-
©
176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
companied by 6-8 small, white, oval, tuberculate bodies at their
base, but of which I can find no trace in my specimens, and pre-
sume they are, therefore, not constantly present.” These tubercles
are only on one side of the anther, and are easily overlooked. There
are always six of these so far as I have examined them; they are,
however, easily overlooked as they are on one side only, as already
noted. They are very beautiful as seen under a lens, but I have
been unable so far to trace their morphological significance. A small
gibbosity on the underside of the tube near the base seems to have
been overlooked and may also throw some morphological light on
the structure of the flower.
An interesting peculiarity is that soon after the ringent corolla
opens it separates from the receptacle, the style disarticulating from
the carpels at the same time and falling away with the corolla. In
most monopetalous flowers the pistil remains after the corolla fades,
the corolla usually falling forward and over it. There is rarely any
articulation by which the style separates from the carpels as in this
case, and as do the stamens in many flowers of other species.
This early fading of the flower and casting off of the pistil, indi-
cates that the flower may have been fertilized before the opening of
the lobes of the corolla. An examination shows that this is really
the case. When the flower is fully expanded, the stamens are
straight, bearing the anthers under the arched upper lip. The an-
thers will usually be found destitute of pollen, while the longer lobe
of the divided style will be found with an abundance of orange col-
ored pollen at the apex. It will further be noted that from the
relative position of the forks of the style and the anthers, the pollen
could not readily reach this portion of the style while in the fully ex-
panded condition of the flower.
If we take a matured flower bud, just ready for expansion,
and carefully cut away the upper lip, we find no stamens there at
that stage. They, as well as the style, are bent downward, grasped
and held in place by the incurved lower lip. Examining these un-
opened flowers in the early morning we find the anther cells have
already opened, and the sharp stigmatic point of the lobe of the
style in most cases is inserted in one of the anthey openings and cov-
ered with pollen. Between eight and nine o’clock in the morning
the unopened buds unfold. Slowly the incurved stamens and style
straighten themselves, and rise to their final positions under the
arched upper lip. During this process the stigmatic lobes are.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 177
brought into contact with the disrupted pollen sacs, and receive an
additional supply of fertilizing material, as if nature was taking a
double care in this instance that the flower should be self-fertilized.
The corolla at this stage seems firmly attached to the receptacle, but
very soon afterward it falls at the slightest touch, indicating that
fertilization has been perfectly accomplished. An examination of
the flowers at this stage will also show that the seeds are wholly
mature, and we have to conclude from this examination alone that
the fertilization was accomplished in the unopened flower.
CLEISTOGAMY IN UMBELLIFERZ.
So far as I know no record has been made of cleistogamy in the
Umbellifere. In 1893 a plant of Cryptotenia Canadensis in my
garden indicated cleistogamy, but as the flowering period had ad-
vanced considerably, further observation was left for the present
season.
Cleistogamy, as usually understood, perfects seeds when the gen-
erative organs are enclosed in the calyx only, no attempt at form-
ing a corolla being made. In this strict sense the Cryptotenia
would not be cleistogamous. But the plant has two classes of flow-
ers: one in which the stamens and corolla are highly developed,
with the gyncecium abortive, the other with a highly developed
gyneecium, stamens with comparatively short filaments, but with
polliniferous anthers all enveloped in a corolla extremely fugacious,
beneath which fertilization is accomplished before opening. The
fine anthers are pressed tightly against the stigma, accomplishing
fertilization and inducing carpellary growth before the corolla has
reached perfection. When this period has been reached it falls at
once, carrying along with it the stamens which have already per-
formed their functions. Though differing somewhat from the usual
character of cleistogamy, the action is cleistogamic surely.
The corolla in the male flowers is more enduring than in the
female flowers ; indeed, as a general rule, it is only the male flowers
that we notice in examining the plant. It is extremely rare to find
a female flower with an expanded corolla, as it falls very soon after
opening, and it was this seeming absence of corollas in the first in-
stance, yet with an abundance of fruit-bearing pedicels, that led to
the suspicion of cleistogamy.
The numerous male flowers with even more perfect stamens that
are more abundantly pollen-bearing than those in the seed-bearing
178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
flowers, with absolutely no function to perform, present an anom-
aly, and yet it has a counterpart in the petal-bearing flowers of
many cleistogamic species, which I have found rarely seed-produc-
ing, though it is customary to refer this class of flowers, in such
cases, to an effort on the part of the species to secure an occasional
cross. It would rather seem that the true position of cleistogamy in
the economy of nature is not yet well understood.
RHYTHMIC GROWTH IN PLANTS.
Though the principle that plant-growth is not continuous but
rhythmic must have been long ago observed, I am not aware that
any special importance has been attached to it, or of any detailed
observations as to the time and manner of the rests and advances
until my paper on the Compass Plant, Si/phium laciniatum, ap-
peared in the Proceedings of the Academy in 1870. I believe
it has been left wholly to me to show that rhythmic growth is
an important factor in the evolution of form. It is not even yet
recognized as it deserves to be. This consideration renders the
recording of additional facts desirable.
Dr. Asa Gray, in the Synoptical Flora of North America, refer-
ring to the natural order Polemoniacez, says, “ hypogynous disk
generally manifest,” and “ remarkable among the hypogynous gamo-
petalous orders for the trimerous pistil, but in two or three spe-
cies of Gilia dimerous.” “The corolla is not always perfectly
regular, and the five stamens are very commonly unequal in length
or insertion.”
Of Phlox particularly he says, “most species with long filiform
style, about equalling or surpassing the corolla tube, but some
with short included style, perhaps but dimorphous; but only in P.
subulata have both forms been found in the same species.”
Unless we remember the rhythmic character of growth, we get but
a poor idea of the true nature of things by the terms Dr. Gray em-
ploys. What do we learn of the disk by merely calling it by this
name; and what is a dimerous or a trimerous pistil? Why should
the stamens and style be dimorphous, and what is dimorphism in
this connection? Before answering these questions, let us follow
the development of the flowers in Phlox.
Early in the morning of September 1st, all the expanded blossoms
of some heads of garden varieties of Phlox paniculata were plucked
- out so as to watch the behavior of the unexpanded flowers. As I
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179
believe growth is modified by temperature it may be noted that it
was cool for the season—65° F. There was absolutely no growth in
the corollauntil 9A. M. Up to this time the corolla was enjoying a
rest, but then the lobes began to unfold, occupying about two hours
to reach their normal salver shape form. By opening the flowers
at various times before 9 A. M. we note that the anthers are not at
rest ; they are regularly increasing in size. By 9 A. M. they have
reached their full development, and the cells burst and discharge
the pollen simultaneously with the unfolding of the corolla lobes.
By now opening a flower-bud that is a day behind this one in devel-
opment, we note that while the corolla with its attached stamens
was growing, the style was at rest. It evidently starts on its new
rhythm of growth the evening before the full opening of the corolla,
that is to say when the ultimate length of the latter has been reached,
the style starts on itsadvance. It does not quite reach its ultimate
length when the anther cells discharge their pollen, but the appressed
stigmas receive and retain the scattered pollen grains. Returning
now to the corolla, we find that after full expansion, at about 11 A.
M., it continues without change the whole of the next day, wither-
ing and falling away on the third. It may be noted, however, that
a very light touch causes disarticulation the second day, showing
that fertilization has already been accomplished. The lobes of the
pistil do not diverge until the second day, but it is evident that fer-
tilization is not dependent on the expansion of the lobes. The pol-
len tubes act in advance of the expansion of the lobes.
That the morning was rather cool for the season may have been a
reason why no insects visited the flowers till noon. Humble bees
were the first in the field, rifling the sweets by cutting the tubes of
the corolla. The honey bee soon followed, using the slits made by
the humble bees, and during the afternoon several species of lepidop-
tera gathered the nectar by the legitimate entrance.
The nectar is secreted by the “ hypogynous disk.” It is remark-
able, however, that I could find no exudation on the first day of
opening. The flow seems to commence on the second day, and is
most abundant when the flower is about to wither and long after
the fertilization of the flower has been effected. I have already
placed this fact on record in connection with Lonicera and some
other flowers. It is probably a general fact, strangely overlooked
in treatises showing the relation of the honeyed secretions to the
agency of insects in the cross-fertilization of flowers. So far as the
180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897
fertilization of Phlox is concerned, every fact pointed to self-action.
Insects seem to have no agency whatever in the remarkably prolific
results. I have before had occasion to remark that abundant fer-
tility in any plant is always a strong indication of self-fertilization.
The “ dimorphism ” referred to might properly be termed polymor-
phism. Neither the stamens or pistils can be classed distinctly as long
or short, but vary indefinitely. In a white variety of Phlox pyra-
midalis I found the style usually about two-thirds the length of the
tube. The stamens too, are very variable even on the same plant.
At times only one stamen may be seen at the apex of the throat on a
second-day flower. At other times there are three, simulating a
three-lobed style. There are, however, always to be seen two shorter
than the other three. These two lower and shorter are usually
near together, but often widely separated, and occasionally one
anther will be sterile. The reflecting observer will have no diffi-
culty in referring all these variations to the varying degrees of
rhythmic energy. Whether a growth-rhythm flows gently or is
arrested suddenly, decides the direction and degree of the rebound-
ing energy, of which the forms of flowers are but the outward
show.
Referring now to the hypogynous disk, or nectary as it might be
fairly called, an examination when the seed capsule is nearly
mature, shows it to be formed of a fine-toothed membrane, the lobes
of which are opposite to the lobes of the calyx. Under morpholog-
ical law we should expect them to be alternate. Separating, how-
ever, a nearly mature capsule from the “ hypogynous disk,” we see
by the glass the imprint of five minute scales, alternate with the
teeth of the disk; this furnishes the key to the problem. Between
the calyx cycle and the corolla cycle, there are two cycles undevel-
oped, of which the “ hypogynous disk” is the only manifestation.
Nectar-bearing glands are usually abortive organs.
We may now say that nature makes a Polemoniaceous flower
simply through greater irregularity than usual in the intensity of
its growth-waves. When the calycine leaves had been reached the
growth-waves were weak or they would have been bracts, and so
weak that enough force could not be collected to develop the next
cycle at all; a partial recovery resulted only in the “ hypogynous
disk.” The corolla found a fairly steady wave, but all following
were unsteady, as shown in the varying lengths of the organs.
There should have been five carpels and five lobes to the style, but
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181
as in the formation of the “hypogynous disk,” the growth-waves
were too weak. They sometimes, however, reveal to us their un-
steadiness. I have frequently found but two carpels in some Phloxes,
while once in Phlox Drummondii, I found four!
With the facts as brought out in the making by nature of Pole-
moniaceous flowers, we can see how with a little better regulation
of the growth-energy other genera and species of plants might have
been created which now have no existence. The wholly suppressed
series might have been a five-cleft or a gamosepalous calyx,—the
“hypogynous disk,” petals or a monopetalous corolla, and the
present corolla, might have been another series of five stamens.
With these changes other combinations appear.
We may also see in a study of Polemoniaceous flowers how the
varying rhythmic strength influences the whole form of the flower,
as well as the development of its individual parts. Dr. Gray says:
“the corolla is not always perfectly regular.” The tube of the
corolla is slightly curved in most species of Phlox. Three longer
stamens are always on the upper side of the curve, the two smaller
are the lower ones. When the seed vessels of Phlox paniculata are
nearly mature, the calyx is two-lipped, the three upper correspond-
ing to the upper or outward curve of the tube of the corolla. We
may say that it is the irregularity in the growth-waves resulting in
organs of varying degress of development, that cause irregular
flowers. We have regular flowers when the growth-waves of a
plant are all of a uniform intensity.
PELLUCID DOTS IN SOME SPECIES OF HYPERICUM.
Many species of Hypericum present small black dots on the stems,
leaves or other portions of the plant. In H. corymbosum Muhl.,
the stem and lower leaves have these dots profusely scattered over
the surface, those on the stem being generally somewhat elongated,
after the manner of suber cells as usually seen in the young bark or
epidermis of woody plants. Examining the series of leaves in suc-
cession up the stem, we find the uppermost leaves nearly destitute of
black dots, a few being found chiefly near the margin. Starting
again from below upward, we find that as we advance the pellucid
dots, wholly absent in the lowermost leaves, begin to be compara-
tively scarce near the midrib. As they come into existence, the
black dots disappear. The pellucid dots increase in numbers with
each series of leaves—the black dots seem to give up the ground to
the pellucid ones—till, when the much reduced leaves beneath the
13
182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
flower are reached, scarcely any but the pellucid dots are found.
They reappear again in numbers on the petals.
It is singular that though there is an evident correspondence in
the increase of pellucid dots and the decrease of the black dots, no
genetic relationship can be discovered. In no instance was there
any evidence of a transmutation of a black dot to a pellucid one.
The dotted structure of other species growing on my ground was
therefore examined. These were Hypericum perforatum, H. Buck-
leyi, H. Kalmianum of our country, and H. Androsemum, H. caly
einum and H. Moserianum of the old world. H. perforatum fur-
nished the most interesting subject for comparison. The lower
leaves, given up wholly to black dots in H. corymbosum, had only
pellucid dots, and in none of these were black dots numerous. In-
deed, it was only in the uppermost leaves that a few black dots were
found, and these sparingly distributed near the outer edges. On
the petals also the black dots are sparingly found.
It is apparent from what has been stated in regard to H. corym-
bosum that the energy productive of the black dots is different in
degree from that productive of pellucid dots. We may further con-
clude that these varying degrees of growth-energy had but little
to do with the differentiation of these two species. One species
could readily be transformed to the other as each degree of energy
was in control.
In H. Kalmianum and H. Buckleyi pellucid dots are profuse. No
trace of black dots could be found. From what has been already
noted, they are not to be expected where the pellucid dots abound.
In the European H. Androsemum the whole surface is minutely
pellucid-punctate. The mid-rib and veins are also pellucid. At
various points along the lines of these veins are, however, small
swellings, more or less orbicular, as if they had been originally
pellucid dots, and that lines had been thrown out to cunnect the
dots with each other. In H. calycinum there are similar connec-
tions, and besides a few scattered pellucid dots; but these are not
round but pyriform, one end tapering into a narrow tail. If alittle
more prolonged, we should have just such connections as we find in
H. Androsemum. In H. Moserianum, we find the surface profusely
covered with dots, not very pellucid, apparent though they are when
held up to a bright light. Some of these are wholly individualized
and isolated, but others have sent out a line as yet unconnected, but
the great majority have had the lines connected, and have formed a
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183
mass of reticulated veinlets unequalled in any other species I have
seen. Turning to Hyperium prolificum I find many semi-pellucid
dots in the petals, especially near the margin, and some of them
elongated, and in a number of cases they have met others and
formed an elongated pellucid vein.
I think these pellucid dots are the initial steps taken by the plant
in the formation of veinlets and veins. It cannot for an instant be
conceived that nature first makes a skeleton leaf and then covers it
with parenchymatous tissue. These strengthening ribs must be
constructed out of cell-tissue only as the organism needs them. And
this construction can only go on undera regularly arranged system.
There can be no theoretical reason against the view I have taken of
the nature and office of these pellucid dots.
I think little has been written regarding the variable character of
these dots. The only author I have found is Bromfield, who was,
in a measure, my early patron and preceptor in botanical study.
In Flora Vectensis, writing of H. perforatum, he takes occasion to
note the difference in the character of the dots in various species,
which, in some, take the form of anastomosing pellucid veins. “I
do not find,” he concludes, “any notice taken of this character by
any author I have consulted.” I have seen none since his work ap-
peared in 1856.
HONEY GLANDS OF FLOWERS.
It is impossible to take up any subject connected with the be-
havior of plants without a thought of the wonderful labors of Dar-
win in the same line. We owe him warmest gratitude for the di-
rection he has trained us to follow. But some of us believe that the
great field of vision he opened up to us is broader than ever he him-
self suspected, and that many more behaviors of plants are to be
seen and interpreted than it was given to him to behold and ex-
plain. It is, moreover, clear that the a priori line on which he
started must naturally bias judgment. Itis not in human nature to
be free from such bias. Feeling that every act and behavior of a
plant must originate in a selfish effort for its own good, the doctrine
of natural selection naturally followed. The natural condition of
life being that of continual war, every effort of a plant was to secure
some advantage in this great struggle. Whatever helped this view
could not but be welcomed, even by one who was so unusually fair
minded as Darwin. Whatever did not accord with his premises,
could not be considered as of much importance. Some of us have
184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
departed from the path of our great leader. To us it seems that
while selfishness is an undoubted condition of existence, self-sacrifice
is equally a natural law. It appears to be the higher development
of the original condition—the raison d’ etre why selfishness exists.
Facts which Mr. Darwin would treat lightly, we may be pardoned
for desiring to see more clearly elaborated.
The honey glands in flowers have been, in Mr. Darwin’s view, so
closely related to the encouragement of insect visitors, that their
production where they could have little reference to the fertilization
of flowers is lightly treated. He refers' to an observation of Karr
that the bracteas of some orchids secrete nectar, that Fritz Miller
has seen a similar behavior in the bract of Oncidium in Brazil,
and that Mr. Rodgers had seen a similar secretion from the base of
the flower-peduncles of Vanilla. That he could have seen this fre-
quently in the species of orchids under his own observation is prob-
able. He names Phaius as one of the genera in which he exam-
ined the flowers for nectar.? I am sure I have seen honey glands
similarly situated in many orchids, but they are very evident in
Phaius grandifolius, a common species under cultivation, and prob-
ably the one Mr. Darwin had under observation.
I have had before me for a coupleof weeks past
a Nepalese species not uncommon in gardens,
Cymbidium aloeifolium, in which the copious
supply of nectar from the base of the bract, or
rather from the main stem at this point, attracts
general attention. It will be of interest to de-
scribe the development of the infloresence in
detail. The spike has sixteen flower buds on it.
The peduncles are at an acute angle with the
main stem, and perfectly straight until the
bud has reached its full size and is ready
to expand. When this stage is reached, the
peduncle takes a horizontal position and then makes a twist curv-
ing upwardly, and the labellum, which up to this time had formed
the upper portion of the perianth, becomes the lower. Many days
before this occurrence the nectar commences to ooze from the gland
at the base of the bract. Long before the opening of the floral seg-
ments the globule has reached its full dimensions of two or three
Fig. 2.
1 Fertilization of Orchids, Chap. IX.
*Tbid. Chap. V.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185
lines in diameter. It soon hardens on exposure to the atmosphere,
and has a high degree of viscidity from its earliest appearance.
Considerable force must be exerted in expelling it from the tissues
of the plant. Mr. Darwin’s explanation is that in these cases the
excretion is for the sake of getting rid of superfluous matter during
the chemical changes which go on in the tissues of plants. But as
starch is necessary for storage, and plants generally have no super-
fluity of the article, why should the plant labor to form that which,
in this case, must be the wholly superfluous article of nectar. To
get over this difficulty Mr. Darwin had already suggested that nec-
tar was in the earlier ages of plant life always superfluous. That
insect life at first had no knowledge of its existence or value, and
that on discovering it, insects and flowers became gradually more
correlated.
So far as we can now see these secretions render the plant no ser-
vice whatever in the great battle of its life, and this Mr. Darwin
frankly owns. To him it is an act of excretion of useless matter.
To us who believe that individual life is not wholly for itself, but
that every act is of some use in the general economy of nature, the
new field opened up is one of extreme interest. Observations in
this beautiful field are too limited to warrant any general deduction
as to the purpose of these stem-bearing glands. The object of this
paper is to draw the attention of those who may have orchidaceous
plants to a closer examination of their structure, and to encourage
a record of such observations.
VARYING PHYLLOTAXIS IN THE ELM.
Calling, a few years ago, the attention of Dr. John Macfarlane,
then assistant botanical instructor in the University of Edin-
burgh, to a bed of one year old seedlings of Ulmus Americana and
that many of them had opposite leaves, he further observed that
each form had been so characterized from the earliest development
of the plant. They were either alternate or opposite from infancy,
and had adhered strictly each to its separate character through the
whole of the first year’s growth. This bed of one year seedlings
probably contained ten thousand plants. In different parts of this
long bed the numbers of each class varied. In places about one-
third were alternate leaved, in others the opposite leaves were much
more numerous. For the purposes of this paper it may be assumed
that about half were of each class.
186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
In another part of my grounds I had about one thousand two
year old plants, transplanted the previous spring when one year old.
Interested in learning how long the opposite leaved individuals—
for I assumed there must have been many of that character—would
continue of that class, I found that all but nine had started on the
opposite leaved plan from the commencement of the second season’s
or last spring’s growth. These nine continued to form opposite
leaves on all the leading branches, but the secondaries which pushed
out from the primaries during the summer, had alternate leaves.
One may say that by the third year all trace of the opposite leaved
system will disappear.
It has been assumed in phyllotaxy that the underlying law in
leaf-arrangement is to provide for the very best exposure to the
light of the foliar organs. That leaves must have light, and that
leaf-arrangement must surely have some reference to this fact, needs
no argument to support it. But it must be obvious to an experi-
enced observer that leaves are very far from being always arranged
in the best manner to this end. One need never go far for an
illustration that if advantageous exposure to light be all that is in-
volved, the plan could be vastly improved. There has always
seemed to me fair ground for believing there must be a deeper un-
discovered law, and I have been continually on the watch, without
much success, fur clues to this deeper mystery.
In the case of these elms, the pairs of leaves are decussate,
every other pair being exactly superposed with those beneath.
Such an arrangement would not be thought the most favorable for
the action of light. On the other hand, the alternate distichous ar-
rangement in these young plants, and measurably in the older ones,
causes the leaves in many cases to have the leaf-blade vertical, or,
where the nodes are not particularly distant, to have portions of the
leaf-blade overlapping another leaf, in effect reducing considerably
the available leaf surface.
One point of special interest is that the nine trees which carried
over the opposite leaved arrangement through the second year are
much weaker in growth than the others. I think I might safely say
that superior vigor of growth and the alternate arrangement of the
leaves are correlative.
SPECIAL FEATURES IN A STUDY OF CORNUS STOLONIFERA Mx.
Some interesting features for biological study are furnished by
Cornus stolonifera of Michaux, Cornus alba, or the “ white-berried ”
Dogwood of many authors.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187
In northern regions, in southern Canada for instance, it flowers
in June. Under cultivation in eastern Pennsylvania, its flowering
season is during the first weeks in May. When the axillary buds
of the past season push into growth, some of them seem more vigor-
ous than others. Strange to say these vigorous branches are sud-
denly arrested at the second node, and, instead of a continuous
axillary growth, the cymose inflorescence follows. The flowering is
over by the first of June, and the white-berried fruit matures by the
first of July. But the weaker growths of the past season are not
arrested at the secondary node, but make a continuous growth until
the end of June, when the axial growth is also arrested and flowers
follow as in the earlier instances. These branches are flowering
while the earlier ones are maturing seeds. So suddenly is the axial
growth force arrested, that the two axillary buds at the base of
the axis, which in the condition of inflorescence becomes the
common peduncle, have the growth energy communicated to them,
and instead of remaining dormant to make side branchlets for next
year, start to form branchlets now. Some idea of the intensity of
the growth force, and the suddenness with which the energy was
diverted laterally, may be inferred from the fact that these axillary
buds, so suddenly called into development, will elongate and
form a pair of fully grown leaves by the time the blossoms in the
cyme have become fully developed. Except that the cyme, equally
with its axis, is somewhat weaker than the earlier ones of the season,
there is no material difference in the other portions of the inflores-
cence. The axillary buds at the base of the earlier blooming cymes
push into growth with as much vigor as those on the later blooming
branches, and some of these terminate in inflorescence, the flowers
blooming in August. The facts furnish excellent illustrations of
the influence of arrested or accelerated growth force in changing the
character and habits of plants.
Another point I have taken occasion frequently to illustrate is
one which I believe to be wholly my own:—that leaves by no
means always originate at the node from which they seem to
spring, but from some indefinite point in the axis below. In this
Cornus the sudden arrestation of growth which determines the
flowering conditions and the lateral divergence of the growth-en-
ergy, produces the union of a portion of the petiole with its axial
growth resulting in one of the branches of the cyme. In some cases
the arrested leaf-blade will form a bristle-like appendage an inch in
188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
length, slightly expanding to a lamina at theapex. The united por-
tions of the cyme-branch and petiole can be readily traced down-
ward towards the lower node. The separation of the edges results
in the usual square stem at this point. It may be remarked here
that one of the distinctions between Cornacese and Umbellifers is
the absence of an involucre. But here we find the tendency to dis-
pute even this character with the Umbelliferous order. The cases
.sometimes given as illustrating such encroachment are not valid, for
the so-called involucre of Cornus florida results merely from a sec-
ond growth of bud scales. This occurs in many families of plants,
as, for instance, Pavia, Carya, Fraxinus and other genera, especially
in some hickories, where the rejuvenated bud scales are sometimes
as highly colored as in the Dogwood and go by the name of “ Hick-
ory-lilies.”
The appressed hair of the leaves and young branches of Cornus
stolonifera have been referred to as being “straight but fastened in
the middle, and thus appear appressed.” But many will be noted
as having but one arm, which is as much appressed as if it had been
fastened at the middle. It is evidently a branched hair. The same
general law of sudden arrestation has evidently extended to the hair.
The apical growth, suddenly arrested, has driven the energy later-
ally, resulting in a horizontal growth on either side, as in the forma-
tion of the inflorescence.
The tendency to abortion in many of the primordial parts, well
noted in Cornacee, may be illustrated here by some further facts
not hitherto specially noted. Though but one seed is produced,
two cells are seen in the transverse section of the carpel, and a
third has been occasionally observed. With a flower of four sepals,
four petals and four stamens, we may reasonably assume the early
existence of four carpels. But the stigma is usually described as
simple. If, however, we examine it just as the flower is fading, we
may note that it is really four-cleft, indicating certainly the four-
earpellary character of the ovarium.
Another illustration of the prevalence of abortion is in the small
number of fruits which come to perfection in comparison with those
which fail. The flowers seem all perfect. It is safe to say that in
regard to seed-bearing nearly every flower is potential in all its
parts. Pollen and stigma are fully functionable. Indeed there is
scarcely a flower but is fertilized and seems to make a fair start to-
ward maturity. But the majority fall by the way. Though the
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189
average number of flowers on a well-developed cyme may be one
hundred and fifty, it is rare to find a dozen fruits mature. Often
there are none. I have not been able to satisfy myself that the
anthers discharge their pollen on the stigma before the expansion of
the corolla, thus insuring self-fertilization beyond all chances, as I
have shown to be the case in many other instances. I have not
found pollen in an unexpanded flower, nor any anther that was not
covered with pollen in an expanded flower. The discharge of pollen
and expansion of the petals is probably simultaneous. The stamens
are longer than the style, and one may say, almost with certainty,
that the flowers receive only their own pollen. Facts might be
adduced in support of the proposition that it was an instance of
sterility from the lack of pollen from other flowers, but the weight of
evidence will, I think, favor the conclusion that its failure is from
abortion. In other words, the sudden arrestation of the growth
force disperses the energy into other channels, with sterility as the
result.
The winter color of the past season’s branches has attracted atten-
tion. The rich reddish-brown has given it the popular name of
“Red-twigged Dogwood.” The manner in which this red tinge is
produced is plainly discernible. I have shown in other papers
that color in vegetation is mainly an incident in the struggle for
life of the various parts of a plant. If we cut off a branch from
a tree, it dies without a struggle. If a frost come early in the fall,
the leaves blacken and take on no bright tinge. But if we only
partly detach a branch from the tree, or if, in the autumn, there isa
struggle with physical forces before death finally assumes control,
the leaves color. All this I have fully elaborated elsewhere. The
same course is evident here. On the young bark, a few white dots
appear. These are incipient cork cells. For a while they are in-
active. As soon as they begin to develop, the epidermis turns white,
and at once a light pink ring encircles the vesicle. When rupture
takes place, a pink line extends upward and downward, and from
this pink line the reddish tinge becomes gradually diffused. In a
short time the whole of the epidermis, both of the young branch and
of the petioles, has a reddish-purple tinge. No one who will make
a few observations during midsummer will fail to be convinced, that
the formation of cork cells is a destructive agency, and yet an
agency of comparatively slow action; that color is the result of this
protracted struggle for life ; and that the peculiar action of the cork
190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
cells, varying as it does in almost all plants, each species having its
own peculiar method of developing cork cells, fully accounts for the
red color of the annual growths in Cornus stolonifera.
FOLIAL ORIGIN OF CAULINE STRUCTURES.
The endeavor to conceive axial and foliar organs as morpholog-
ically distinct, leads to difficulties easily surmounted by the concep-
tion that every part of a plant is but modified leaf-blade. In striv-
ing to regard stem and leaf as essentially distinct entities, we become
wholly lost in studying the genesis of the tendril, and we are com-
pelled to say of them they “ may be axial or they may not. This
may ordinarily be determined by position. Any direct continua-
tion of stem or branch must be of an axial nature, that is, of the na-
ture of stem; and the same is true of whatever primarily develops
in the axis of a leaf. Conversely, whatever subtends a lateral axis
or branch may be taken for a leaf or foliar production being in the
place of such.” * But the difficulty of carrying this idea along to a
consistent conclusion becomes apparent at p. 118 of the work cited,
where the tendrils of Cucurbitacee are pronounced “ peculiar and
ambiguous, on account of their lateral and extra-axillary position
and the manner in which the compound ones develop their
branches.”
That a leaf and stem must be morphologically the same seems
proven by the well-known fact that leaves often develop into stems.
The author has seen buds at the ends of the leaves of the Japan
Umbrella Pine, Sciadopitys, and a large number of species of plants
are raised by florists from leaves of which Begonia is a familiar
example. The section of an articulated stem of Opuntia is tech-
nically stem; yet the flower which, morphologically stated, is but a
“bundle of leaves,” often shows that it is simply a whole section
metamorphosed. We call the deciduous portions of Taxodium dis-
tichum “leafy branchlets” simply because the least vigorous ones
perish. If all were to fall, they would be regarded as pinnate
leaves, and it is barely necessary to refer to the fact that numerous
plants bear flowers on the leaves, as a tree of the Jujube, Ziziphus
vulgaris, before the author as he writes, amply illustrates.
By adopting the hypothesis that a tendril is always cauline, we
shall have to admit that stem is of folial origin in a study of Big-
noniaceous plants. A number of species have trifoliate leaves when
3 Gray’s Structural Botany, 1879, p. 54.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191
the branches are comparatively weak, but when they have gathered
strength the terminal leaflets develop into a strong tendril. For
instance in Bignonia venusta “ the leaves are opposite ; lower ones
ternate and without tendrils, upper ones conjugate or pinnate with
one pair of leaflets, and furnished with tendrils.” The quotation is
from the Botanical Magazine, Vol. 46, p. 249, so that those who have
not the plant at hand, may see the different forms of leaves in the
plate. The one leaf has become a petiole, and is again trifid at the
apex—these branchlets again becoming leaflets in other species.
Whoever has had the opportunity to study some of the strong grow-
ing Bignoniaceze of Central America, must be fully impressed with
the woody character of these tendrils. They are as truly ligneous
as are those of Vitacez, which are conceded to be of axial origin.
When, therefore, we find a plant with a leaf normally trifoliate,
transform the terminal leaflet into a permanent woody tendril, it is
difficult to understand the necessity for the “ abnormal and excep-
tional” view of these cases. I¥ we say leaf-blade is the foundation
of all cauline structure, we are not surprised when a leaflet of Big-
nonia becomes of the nature of stem, and we are not left to mere
position on the axis before we can determine the origin of what is
actually the same thing.
POLARITY IN THE LEAVES OF THE COMPASS AND OTHER PLANTS.
Those who try to live and learn are often suprised to find some
conclusion, which in earlier years we thought unassailable, sud-
denly shattered by the logic of facts. In my own case itis not un-
usual to note that beliefs which in a limited sphere seemed founded
on a rock, were wholly washed out when opposed by a more general
application. Of this class is my former faith in the polarity of the
root-leaves of the Compass Plant, Silphium laciniatum.
It is just as true to-day as it ever was that the root-leaves stand
erect instead of curving more or less toward the horizon as the root
leaves of most herbaceous plants do, and that the edges of these
leaves are in a more or less north and south line. The faces of the
leaves are of much the same construction, and are presented to the
east and west respectively. It seems very reasonable to suppose
that the leaves are polar because of the similarity in the structure
of what would usually be the upper and lower surfaces; that be-
cause both surfaces are struggling to get to the full light, and
having equal power neither can win, and hence the edges must
192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
of necessity be in the northerly and southerly directions. This is
the accepted explanation of this supposed polar arrangement.
The first blow to my faith in this doctrine was the observation
that though the stem leaves have an equal arrangement of stomata
on either surface, just as the root-leaves have, they make no attempt
at “polarity.” Further than this many Australian and Cape of
Good Hope plants have vertical leaves, with an equal distribution
of stomata on either surface, but there is no polar direction specially
to the edges of the leaves. In our own country the leaves of Quer-
cus Catesbwi are all vertical the first year from the acorn, but their
edges are directed to any point of the compass. It is evident that
we must yet regard the question as to the cause of the northern and
southern direction of the leaf-edges in the Compass Plant as an
open one.
If we now look over the whole field of Composite, it will surprise
us to note how many of this order have the whole or portions of the
leaf-blade vertical. Liatris, Lactuca, Chrysopsis, Tanacetum, Cir-
sium, Centaurea, Boltonia, Silphium, Mulgedium and Sonchus will
furnish numerous illustrations. No one can fail to see that this
results from a continuation of the spiral growth into the leaf-blade.
In many cases there are two spiral twists in a single leaf-blade; the
leaves on the flowering stems of these genera are on the } plan.
The epiderm is composed of five leaf bases or dilated petioles as-
cending spirally and lapping over each other, and this spiral mo-
tion is continued to the free portions which we designate as the
proper leaves. This spiral motion is greater in some species than in
others. In Liatris it is particularly marked. Not only does the
twist become so severe as to turn the leaf-blades strongly on their
edges, but extends to parts of the inflorescence. Even the style
branches are twisted around each other, and the styles of many dif-
ferent florets will coil into a tangled mass. Many other orders
besides Compositze have the tendency to carry a portion of the
leaves vertical, wholly through this richness of spiral development.
Onagracez furnish abundant illustrations; and the coiling of the
leaves of the garden Narcissus must be familiar to many. We can-
not consider the condition of such leaves to have any more phy-
siological importance than if they had presented a perfectly hori-
zontal plane. é
What then is the explanation of the generally north and south
line of the leaves of the Compass Plant, admitting, as we must, that
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193
the vertical position is merely the result of vigorous spiral develop-
ment ?
We may get help from the behavior of plants in analogous cases,
I observed many years ago, and placed the fact on record in the
Proceedings of the Academy, that in going across the prairies of
Illinois, the earlier flowers of Helianthus mollis faced the southeast.
This I have confirmed by plants in my garden. Not only is it true
of this, but of other species of Helianthus. I could travel across the
open prairie as well by these flowers as by the leaves of the Com-
pass Plant. ' The opening flowers of many other species of plants
are usually in nearly one given direction. Digitalis media of the
Old World, has the opening flowers mostly in a direction facing
south. I have never found any plant, growing in a fully open place,
present any tendency to open its flowers in a northwardly direc-
tion.
Now let us for a moment pass to the anthesis of some very early
spring flowers. We will take the Goat Willow, Salix caprea and
the Chinese Magnolia Yulan. If the male catkin of this willow be
in a position to catch the early morning sun, the catkin has a curve
westwardly ; if the aspect is such that it cannot get the sunlight till
midday, the curve of the apex of the catkin is northwardly. It is
exactly the same with the flowers of Magnolia. A very slight
warmth from the sun at that early stage of the season excites
growth, and the development of the flower being greater on the
warmed side causes the apex to seem to curve in the opposite direc-
tion. We may conclude that some such law prevails in the opening
of the sunflowers and others. All plants have varying phases of
rhythmic rest and growth ; many Composite start their daily growth,
as I have shown in various papers, soon after sun-rise. A little
extra warmth at this time, would throw the greater growth in the
easterly direction. A flower, the period of rest of which ceased at
noon time, would have its greatest development encouraged in the
westerly line.
Just how such considerations as these would affect the root-leaves
of the Compass Plant is not clear. But if we imagine, as we may
from the facts detailed, that growth in the spring is favored in one
point more than others, and that there is a favored resting as well
as a growing point, we have a good clue toa sound explanation.
I feel assured that the final solution of the peculiar position of the
leaves in this plant must be sought for in this direction, and not in
any peculiar physiological necessity on the part of the plant itself.
194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897..
HYBRIDS IN NATURE.
Our gardens abound with hybrid plants. Although the garden-
er’s skill originates them, there seems little reason why they should
not occur in nature. The plant desired to produce seed has its flower
opened by the hybridizer before it naturally expands; the anthers
are removed before the pollen-sacs are ruptured, insects are ex-
cluded, and the next day probably, when the stigma is receptive,
the foreign pollen is applied. In this way hybrids are secured.
From the ease with which hybrids are produced in this way arises
the belief that hybridism in nature must be of frequent occurrence.
It is a matter of grave importance that we decide how far this
belief is correct. Up to a period not remote, it was a belief that.
what we know as a species was always a species from the earliest
epoch. When a distinct form came under observation that seemed
not to have existed from the beginning, it was regarded as a hybrid.
It would be accepted as a species, though deemed of hybrid origin.
Thus Linnean nomenclature abounds in “ hybrida” as a specific
denomination. If it can be shown that these are not hybrids, but
have been evolved from other species under some regular law of de-
velopment, the importance of the question becomes apparent.
We now accept the doctrine ‘of evolution as beyond discussion.
Species do follow from other species as the world advances; but the
old idea is still so prevalent, that many botanists who accept the
facts of evolution in a general sense are very apt to regard any un-
usual departure asa case of hybridism. Our modern literature
abounds in such instances. Supposed hybrids are being continually
described as actual hybrids on no other ground than that they pos-
sess characters common to others already described.
If nature intended hybridity to be one of her handmaidens in
the production of new forms, she has strikingly failed. Let us
take the oak as an illustration. When the male flowers are at a
certain stage, a slight jarring of a branch will cause the pollen to
float away in little clouds discernible to the watchful eye. One may
readily conceive what an enormous quantity of pollen must be car-
ried from one tree to another by every sudden breeze. In our
woods there are rarely less than two or three species in company.
Not infrequently there are more, and these are usually blossoming
all at one time. Hypothetically, one may argue that these gregar-
ious species must receive one another’s pollen, must cross-fertilize,
must result in a hybrid progeny in which every separate character-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195
istic will be irretrievably lost. But the carefui student of nature
knows that this is not so. The seed collector goes into a wood
which may contain White Oak, Black Oak, Scarlet Oak, Red Oak,
Chestnut Oak, Swamp White Oak, Post Oak, Black-Jack Oak,
Scrub Oak, as he may do along the Wissahickon, gather the acorns
of each species under its particular representative, and plant them
with the absolute certainty that they will be true to their several
parentages. This could not be if the hypothetical proposition cited,
of free inter-pollination, were an actual fact.
How, then, are we to account for the striking deviations from
typical forms which we occasionally see? I have long believed that
form is the result of various degrees of rhythmic growth. It is the
mechanical result of varying degrees of energy. These results may
be noted on a single tree. On the weaker branches of a white oak
the leaves will be comparatively entire; on the stronger shoots,
where growth-energy is rampant, the leaves will be deeply lobed.
In mulberries these differences must be well known. The leaves
on branches full of growth-vigor are lobed, but when this energy is
somewhat spent, wholly entire leaves follow. Surely these facts
must have come within the range of common observation.
But varying degrees of rhythmic growth may not always result
in lobed leaves in its aspects of vigorous growth, or of entire leaves
in its weaker ones, because other factors interfere. We may not
know just what these incidental forces are, though we may feel sure
they exist. For instance, on the common red cedar we may note two
distinct forms of foliage: on the weaker, half-starved branches the
leaves are like needles and resemble those of the common juniper,
but on the more vigorous branches there are seemingly no leaves at
all! We have to say “seemingly,” for indeed there are really leaves,
as really so as on the weaker ones, but the peculiar growth-energy of
these more vigorous branches causes them to become connate with
the stems. Ona branch a year or two old, we can easily separate
these connate leaves from the true bark formed beneath.
But that there is no necessity for bringing in hybridity to account
for the occasional aberrations from the normal form we meet with
is well known to those nurserymen whose business it is to raise trees
in great quantities. There are just as many and just as striking
variations among genera consisting of a single species, or of species
wholly isolated from other species of the genus, as where there are
several. The European Oak, Ash, Linden, Beech and many others
196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
furnish illustrations. The English Oak, Quercus Robur especially,
will furnish scores of variations that have been selected from the
seed-beds of nurserymen, and given distinctive names. Many of
these differ from each other by characters quite as striking as those
which distinguish American Oaks from each other ; but we know
they are not hybrids because there was no other species with which
they could intercross, and they are not regarded as species because
of their derivation from Quercus Robur. This would not be a true
test of specific rank. It still savors of the old doctrine of the special
formation of species which we know is not true. With our modern
experiences we may expect occasional wanderings from a general
character as a result of an unusual expenditure of force. Usually
these displays of energy are not able to maintain themselves. Seed-
lings fall back to the habits of their ancestors. If, however, they
should be able to maintain themselves, they are entitled to rank as
species. They are species and nothing else.
Seeing, as we must, that all this is so, and must be, why should
we refer to hybridity to account for individual changes, especially
as the warmest advocates of natural hybridity rarely get beyond
“supposition ” in any case.
ORIGIN AND NATURE OF GLANDS IN PLANTS.
When treating of glands, authors point out their secretory and
excretory functions, and describe their structure and general char-
acteristics, concluding with the bare statement that “besides these
there are others which seem to have no office in the general economy
of the plant.” It has always seemed to me that this class of gland-
ular bodies deserved closer investigation, and in 1869 I contributed
a paper to the meeting of the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, at Salem, “On the Glands of Cassia and
Acacia,”* indicating that in these and some other plants the
“glands” could not be otherwise than abortive branches. Though
the paper excited no discussion, it is fair to say the proposition did
not seem to meet the approval of the eminent botanists attending
that meeting; but, so far as I know, no further attempt has been
made to investigate and explain the nature of these so-called glands.
It has always seemed to me a fair inference that if they are but ar-
rested or abortive branches, we might reasonably expect to find -
occasional instances of an advance from their depauperized state.
* Proceedings of Am. Ass. Ad. Science, Vol. XVIII, p. 260.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197
This season I have had a piece of good fortune; it is interesting
enough to give the discovery in detail :—
On my grounds I have a mass of Cassia Marilandica, probably
fifty plants, covering an area of about sixteen square feet. The
leaves are, normally, abruptly pinnate, having a number of pairs of
opposite pinnz with a gland terminating the common petiole. The
base of the petiole is tumid, and usually the “ gland ” arises on the
upper surface of the petiole, just above this tumid part. This, how-
ever, is not constant. In some cases I found the “ gland ” a quarter
of an inch, a half inch, an inch, and, in a few cases, as much as two
inches away. In a few instances they were found with fully-de-
veloped pinne on either side of them, presenting precisely the ap-
pearance of the terminal pair at the apex of the common petiole.
As the terminal one has developed with a perfect leaf in some in-
stances, as already noted, it must be assumed that these at the base
of the leaf could, under equally favorable conditions, do the same ;
in their nature they are identical.
Besides this positive proof, the larger basal glands will occasion-
ally furnish strong presumptive proof. These bodies vary much in
form, sometimes narrow cylindrical, sometimes nearly globular, at
other times are found some remarkably vigorous and ovoid. At
the apex may often be seen a pair of small glands in the posi-
tion that two opposite leaflets would occupy, with a very small
gland between, just as we find at the apex of the common petiole.
No one comparing such a gland with the apex of a leaf could come
to any other conclusion than that the two were normally the same,
except that the two leaflets had not developed, leaving only a pair
of glands to represent them.
But, it might be suggested, this would only show that the gland
was an undeveloped compound leaf; the proof that it was an un-
developed branch would be still desirable. Here we have to fall
back on advanced knowledge in vegetable morphology. Most
botanists are now prepared to believe that not only are the organs
of flowers to be conceived of as modified leaves, but the stem itself
‘comes under the same conception. ‘The cell is the primary plant.
Whatever form the plant has to take ultimately, is governed by
laws operating in this primary cell. The next step in the concep-
tion is the union of cells so as to form leaf-blade, and the next the
coiling of leaf-blade to form stem, the upper portion of each coil
finally becoming the leaf. There is abundant evidence, not neces-
14
198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
sary to be reproduced here, that this theoretical conception of the
formation of stem by the mere coiling of leaf-blade is legitimate, and
we are left only to account for the formation of buds, which are
eventually to become branchlets.
The origin of buds is readily accounted for by the operation of
rhythmic growth. Growth is not continuous, but progresses by a
system of successive waves. The node is at once the resting place
of the old wave and the departing point of the new. The axial bud
is really the termination of the old growth wave. In many cases
during the resting period, it starts rapidly on with the new growth-
wave, assuming its original position as the leading shoot, when what
might have been the leader from a lower portion of the system of
arrested nodes forming the bud, is pushed aside to become what 1s
known as an extra axillary branch. This conception I cannot
claim as the belief of “ most botanists,” as it is essentially my own,
supported by facts detailed in many papers, which it is not neces-
sary to reproduce here.
Recalling the evidence directly showing that the “ gland” must
be a branch arrested in development, and carrying in our minds the
theoretical conception of the origin of the stem and buds, we can
readily understand how an arrested branch has been enveloped by
a coiling leaf-blade or set of leaf-blades on the petioles until all that
is left is consolidated apex which we now call a gland, and how glands
of this character which appear higher up on the leaf stalks are still
modifications of the same character, the whole compound leaf itself
being of precisely the same character in its original structure as
what we come ultimately to know as stem and branches.
In my paper above cited I introduced the bud system of the
Honey Locust, Gleditschia, in confirmation of the position assumed
in regard to Cassia. Here again it furnishes evidence of the sound-
ness of the conclusions reached in this paper. The leaves are
abruptly pinnate as in Cassia, but the apex of the common petiole
or rachis does not appear as a gland so much as it does an undevel-
oped bud. Occasionally, however, it does develop, and the leaf
then has a single developed pinnated leaflet instead of the usual-
abruptly terminating pair. In other instances one of the opposite
pair is abortive, in which case the one developed assumes the role of
a terminal leader, pushing aside and making axillary to itself the
usual terminal bud or gland. This latter instance strongly sustains
my point that when a subordinate bud gets the opportunity to push
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199
vigorously, the whole system of buds above, arrested in its growth
by some varying of rhythmic action, is pushed aside to the “ extra-
axillary ” position.
The character of rhythmic growth-waves has not yet received
much attention from vegetable biologists. We know that in the
growth of some plants the wave progression seems regular and con-
tinuous, and then the form of inflorescence we term centrifugal
results; at other times the rest seems but partial and is resumed
retro-actively, presenting to us the centripetal condition. Though
ignorant of the manner in which these varying phases of rhythmic
growth is brought about, there is no question about the fact. The
production of the supra-axillary bud into a spine in Gleditschia is,
therefore, easily explainable. Assuming, as has been done in this
paper, that an axillary bud is the termination of a growth-wave,
and that the growth which has succeeded in establishing itself as
leader pushed the bud—the arrested terminal branch—aside ; a lower
bud on the arrested branch in the more active line of the subsiding
growth-wave, would push into activity sufficiently to become a spine,
while all the upper portion of the terminal axis remains for a bud,
or, perhaps, a mere “gland.” In this case the spine represents a
centrifugal growth. But when what appears to us to be a lower
bud, but which under the conception here adopted would be an up-
per one, first pushes, we may regard it as an illustration of centri-
fugal growth in the bud state.
I may be pardoned for observing with some pride, while making
a contribution to the knowledge of other hitherto obscure phases in
plant life, that the deductions made in my Salem paper of twenty-
four years ago have been fully confirmed.
NUTRITION AS AFFECTING THE FORMS OF PLANTS AND THEIR
FLORAL ORGANS.
It is remarkable that while American students of plant life are
leaning more and more toward the belief that variation in plant
structure is due to varying degrees of life energy, European botan-
ists seem more inclined to search for external conditions as the great
factor in these modifications. That internal energy must be in-
fluenced to some extent by external conditions is manifest to every
observer, but changes brought about by these outside influences are
rarely permanent. Efforts have been made to show that acquired
characters have become hereditary ; but in most of the instances ad-
200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
duced, it has not been difficult to prove that the changes, wholly
credited to outside conditions, simply hastened the internal action
which could have been taken wholly independently of these condi-
tions.
It has fallen to me to show, first in a paper published in the Pro-
ceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of
Science, 1868, and subsequently in other papers, that form is the
result of varying degrees of life-energy, and that the degree of en-
ergy is due to the ability of the whole plant or portions of a plant,
to elaborate nutritive material. This being true, external condi-
tions may have to do with the supply or the character of plant
nutrition, but it is the constitutional power of a plant, or any por-
tion of a plant, to avail itself of nutrition that determines the result-
ing life-energy.
The present paper has been suggested by reading an excellent
memoir in the Linnean Society’s Jowrnal, Botany, Vol. XX XI.
It starts out with this proposition: “The capability of varying is
admittedly a general property of all living organisms, but how
variation is affected by forces other than natural selection we know
but little.”
I have shown in my address before the American Association at
its Montreal meeting,® that variation is an essential condition in the
general order of things, and that the reasons for the innumerable
variations in the forms of leaves and flowers must be sought for in
the necessity of variety for variety’s sake, and not in the mere acci-
dent of external conditions. In other words the internal energies
of the plant, varying as they do in results from their varying de-
grees, would produce innumerable variations, although the external
conditions were exactly the same all over the world.
In this paper and another correlated in the Jowrnal of Botany
for January, 1896, Mr. Burkill records the results of patient and
careful studies of variations in the number of stamens and carpels
of several species of plants in which these variations have been con-
spicuously known. But he starts with supposition already referred
to, that different external conditions govern the results. He, there-
fore, divides his examination of the common chickweed into classes
accordingly: plants from hayfields, damp locality, plants from a
5 On some Variations in the number of Stamens and Carpels, by I. H. Bur-
kill.
6“ Variation in Nature,’”’ Vol. for 1871, p. 392.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201
garden rather shaded, plants from a warm cinder bed, plants under
the shade of evergreens, and so on through six others. Though no
less than 7,951 flowers in thirteen widely separated genera were ex-
amined—5,700 being of the common chickweed—the author states
that the results are “insufficient to establish any fact other than
that plants do vary,” but supports “the main contention of this
paper that the position of the flower on the axis affects the sexual or-
gans if they vary.” This is simply my own doctrine on the origin
of sexes in flowers’ given at the Salem meeting of the American
Association, that the position of the flower on the axis in relation to
the supply of nutrition, or the ability of the organs to avail them-
selves of the nutrition provided, decides the character of the sexual
organs.
The laborious and valuable observations in these papers result in
showing a correlation in appearance and disappearance of stamens
and carpels in their variable species. When the stamens were in-
creased in numbers there would be an increase in carpels and vice
versa. A change in one organ resulted definitely in a change in
others. This I have observed in the common Dahiia in gardens.
The ray florets in the normal “ single” form are pistillate, the tubu-
lar disk florets are hermaphrodite. In what are termed “ double”
Dahlias—that is, when the florets become all ray-like or ligulate—
the purely female condition follows with the change from tubular to
liculate. I believe this is true mm most cases where the tubuli-
floral section of Compositz assume ligulifloral conditions, as it is a
fact well worth noting in connection with this whole subject that
while Dahlia, Helianthus, Bellis, Chrysanthemum and numerous
other species with normally tubulifloral florets will advance occa-
sionally to the ligulifloral or so-called double condition of the
florists, I can recall no instance of one normally of the latter class
that assumed the tubulifloral or “single ” condition.
The observations of Mr. Burkill, as well as my own long-recorded
observations, show that the variations in the various organs of
plants cannot be accounted for under the chapter of accidents com-
monly known as natural selection or conditions of environment ; but
are arranged under a definite plan, governed by the degree and con-
dition of vital energy, and that this energy itself is dependent on
the supply of nutrition, including the life-power of the cells inter-
ested to avail themselves of it.
7See Proc. Am. Assoc., 1869; also American Naturalist, 1869, p. 260.
202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
SOME NEGLECTED STUDIES.
Botanical pleasures need not end with the first frost. Buds and
branches furnish an endless variation, and are capable of affording
characters quite as reliable as, and, in many cases, more reliable
than, those offered us by leaves, flowers or fruit. For morphologi-
cal or physiological study, a knowledge of the characters presented
by buds and branches is invaluable.
A few days ago I came across a very thrifty Pin Oak, about
twenty-five years old. Along the smooth, clean trunk, during the
past season, a number of weak shoots had grown. I believe we
cannot tell how an apical cell, which seems to be required before the
growth of the branch can be started, can be formed out of an_ordi-
nary wood cell and be able to push its way through a layer of bark
a quarter of a century old so as to produce the growth of twigs in
question. There is an original field here for study as well as a
theme for admiration. Perhaps my own discovery, published in the
Proceedings of the Academy many years ago, on the nature of
warts or excrescences on the trunks of trees, such as we very often
see on the Weeping Willow, the Garden Cherry and other trees,
may furnish an explanation. It is briefly this: New wood is
formed by germination from original wood cells. These are added
laterally during the growing season. The last series of cells born of
the mother cells at the end of the season become liber cells, and give
the new layer of bark for the coming season. But an occasional
cell does not change. It continues to be a wood cell, though sur-
rounded by others that have been transformed to bark. It does not
separate from its woody matrix, but goes on forming its own addi-
tional wood cells, and in the autumn, its layers of bark cellsin a sort
of colony of its own. ‘These are developed in every direction round
the circular matrix, and the excrescence naturally forms a circle.
An excrescence, sawn asunder, exhibits the annual growths of wood
and the annual deposit of bark, just as the mother trunk does. I
have never observed the excrescences make branches.
The manner in which buds are formed and protected at differ-
ent stages of their growth affords endless pleasure. In Lirioden-
dron the stipule encloses the younger growth, and, opening the bud,
we find the leaf blade has its apex fast in the axis between the
branch and the petiole. No one can doubt that the truncate leaf
results from its early casting in such a mold. In Magnolia we find
the same protection from the stipule, but the petiole is not bent.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203
The young leaves are folded longitudinally. We can see some of
the processes by which nature makes Liriodendron differ from Mag-
nolia, but what induces the curving of the petiole in one instance
and the straightening in another we have yet to learn.
Though no reference is made of the fact in descriptive botany, the
manner in which the base of the petiole folds over the young bud is
distinctive of the genus Rhus, or at least, of many species, for I
have not examined all. The folding is so nearly complete that no
axillary bud is visible. In the winter, after the leaves have fallen,
we see by the cicatrices that it was a fold of the petiole and not an
absolute over-growth. The cicatrix is precisely like that formed by
the fallen leaf of the Horse Chestnut, and adds another suspicion to
a list already by no means brief that there is a closer relation be-
tween the natural orders Sapindaceze and Anacardiaceze than sys-
tematists generally believe. Other species of trees, notably the Plane
and Yellow Wood, have similar embracing petioles. There seems no
physiological advantage in these cases. The young bud must have
some protection in infancy, and variety seems an essential part of
the order of things. All we can say is that this form of protector is
as good as any other. The internal arrangement of the bud in Rhus
is interesting: Two bud scales meet face tu face, and closely press
their edges together. The interior is a cavity, but densely filled
with short, soft hair.
A Sapindaceous plant allied to the Horse Cliestnut, Kolreuteria
paniculata, a small tree from Japan, has branches interesting from
the fact that the petiole disarticulates at a little distance above the
base of the petiole, leaving lacunose cicatrices, and giving the branch
a singular knobby and rough appearance. Here again the teleolo-
gist will be at a loss, and seeing that it is no disadvantage, we can
only say that it gives a pleasant variation to the run of life.
I might offer many illustrations, but enough has probably been
said to show how much of interest the winter season may afford.
204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
A CONTRIBUTION TO THE MAMMALOGY OF CENTRAL PENNSYLVANIA.
BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS.
In the following annotated list are presented the results of the
author’s study of the feral mammal fauna of central Pennsylvania
during the past four years. The data here submitted is of three
kinds: first, that recorded by the author, and based entirely on
his own observations in the field ; second, that obtained by employed
assistants in the field, and verified by specimens and notes in the
author’s collection ; third, notes obtained from other sources, the re-
liability of which the author has no reason to doubt. In all cases
where the presence or distribution of any species rests on the third
class of evidence the source of such evidence is stated.
The main sources of information are as follows, in order of sequence :
1. A collecting trip, by the author, to Pine Grove Furnace, Cum-
berland County, April 11 to 15, 1893. This included a visit to the
limestone caves near Carlisle.
2. A collecting trip, by the author, to Round Island, Clinton
County, May 25 to June 1, 1896; including a side trip taken to
Emporium, Cameron County.
3. A collecting trip, by the author, to Eaglesmere, Sullivan County,
August 20 to 28, 1896.
4. A collecting trip, by Mr. J. C. Ingersoll, September 24 to De-
cember 20, 1896; collecting being done at the following stations in
order of sequence: a. Tuscarora, Juniata Co.; b. Mount Union,
Huntingdon Co.; c. Tyrone, Blair Co.; d. Walsall and Kring’s
(near Johnstown), Cambria Co.; e. Summit Mills, Somerset Co. ;
f. Cook’s Mills, Bedford Co.; g. Hopewell, Bedford Co.
Additional records and specimens have been obtained from Messrs,
Seth Nelson, of Round Island, Clinton Co.; M. M. Larrabee, of
Emporium, Cameron Co.; A. K. Pierce, of Renovo, Clinton Co.;
R. W. Bennett, Eaglesmere, Sullivan Co.; and M. W. Strealy, of
Chambersburg, Franklin Co. To all of these, especially Mr. Nelson,
whose long and intimate acquaintance as hunter and trapper of
the animals of Clinton, Centre, Clearfield, Cameron and Potter Coun-
ties is excelled by none, I gladly express my thanks for valuable aid.
The physical features of central Pennsylvania in all the localities
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205
named above show but slight departure from the typical Alleghen-
ian scenery with which the traveller from Harrisburg to Pittsburg
becomes familiar in his westward route along the Juniata River.
The whole country is more or less crowded with parallel ranges of
mountains running northeast und southwest, much broken by coves
and cross valleys whose numerous streams empty, with the exception
of those of Cambria and Somerset Counties, into the Susquehanna.
The character of the Alleghenies over this wide area conforms
closely to the continuous ridged type of parallel chains rising in long,
flat-topped ranges, which rarely present a peak or dome to relieve
their rounded, monotonous outlines. Their average height is about
1,200 feet, though an elevation of over 2,000 feet is reached in some
localities. With the exception of Sullivan County, nearly the entire
region treated in this paper is devoid of lakes, lying as it does almost
wholly south of the southern border of the great terminal moraine.
Owing to deforesting and burning of the timber over the whole
region, the character, not only of the existing flora, but in greater or
less degree of the climate and fauna of the country, is more or less
altered from the conditions of 100 years ago.
While this has resulted in the extinction of certain forms of rep-
tiles, birds and mammals from their place in the fauna of Pennsylva-
nia, it has not so affected the smaller mammalia, which continue to
find in isolated places the necessary life environment.
Such places it has been the author’s endeavor to search out and
thoroughly explore, in order to supplement our historie knowledge
of the larger exterminated species with reliable facts regarding those
whose subterranean and retiring habits, or restricted range, have
enabled them to escape the older methods of research.
Central Pennsylvania, with the exception of the lowlands of the
Susquehanna below Sunbury and a large part of the Counties of
Adams, York, Cumberland and Franklin in the south, is dominated
principally by the semi-boreal climate, fauna and flora which Dr.
Allen has fittingly named “Alleghenian,” as contrasted with the
colder “ Canadian ” of the north and the warmer Carolinian of the
south. In the intermediate region between these last we find the
most puzzling gradations of animal and plant forms. On the high-
est elevations, however, faunal distinctions are well marked and
in strong contrast with those of the southern lowlands. The most
boreal environment encountered in my investigations was at Eagles-
mere, in Sullivan County, the only place in which the typical
206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
form of Peromyscus canadensis has yet been secured. It is significant
that here also is to be found one of the largest tracts of old-growth
evergreen timber in the State. It is probable that systematic trap-
ping in the tamarack swamps of the more northern Counties of Bed-
ford and Susquehanna will show this and other ‘‘ Canadian” species
to be abundant. South of this, however, along the entire eastern
extension of the Allegheny system east of the main ridge there
seems to be an absence of this species, but in Cambria County and in
Somerset County, near the Maryland line, there appears in the hem-
lock forests a form seeming to connect, in its diminished size and
darker colors, the Canadian Peromyscus with a similar species dis-
covered by the writer in the spruce forests which crown the lofty
summit of Roan Mountain, N. Carolina. The Red-back Vole, Evoto-
mys, also reappears in Somerset County, the most careful trapping in
the intermediate region of Juniata and Huntingdon Counties failing
to reveal it. From these facts it would seem that the southern
extension of the typical Alleghenian mammals found in the northern
counties of the State is confined to a narrow strip of the main
western ridge through Clinton, Centre, Blair, Cambria and Somerset
Counties into West Virginia. In the latter State, owing to the
increasing elevation of the southern Alleghenies, these northern
types of mammalian life are enabled to bridge the warm Carolinian
zone as far south as northern Georgia, insensibly, but surely, appro-
priating those subtle modifications by which the climate of the
southern mountains has transformed Peromyscus canadensis into
Peromyscus nubiterre, Evotomys gapperi into Evotomys carolinensis,
and Sciuropterus sabrinus into Sciuropterus silus.
The author’s collection of central Pennsylvania mammals, forming
the basis of this paper, numbers about 600 specimens, the greater
part of which are skins and skulls, with careful measurements and
data taken in the field. Of these nearly 400 were taken by my
assistant, Mr. J. C. Ingersoll, during the fall of 1896, as already out-
lined, and represent an amount of laborious mountaineering and con-
scientious care, which not only do him the greatest credit but form
the only available means to a right understanding of the character
and distribution of the smaller mammals of the south-central portion
of the Commonwealth. The list enumerates 61 species and sub-
species. Of these 10 are listed as subspecies, 3 are exotic species, 2
(Black Rat and Lynx) are probably exterminated, and 3 (Bison,
Wapiti and Beaver) certainly exterminated.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. . QOT
1. Didelphis marsupialis virginiana (Kerr). Virginia Opossum.
Numerous in the southern valleys, rare on the higher mountains,
and not found within the denser evergreen forests of the northern
counties. As these are cut off the opossum extends its wanderings
into the clearings of mountains where it had hitherto been a stranger.
‘In Clinton County very rare, one killed in 1895 ”—Nelson. ‘“ Rare,
last winter two taken at Emporium”—Larrabee. “Coming in
rarely around Eaglesmere in the last six years”—Bennett. ‘“ Well
distributed throughout the southern Alleghenies ”—Ingersoll.
2. Bison bison (L.). American Bison.
The former range of the bison eastward along the West-branch of
the Susquehanna to the forks of the river below Lewisburg during
the present century is conceded by Dr. J. A. Allen.’ The last buffalo
killed in central Penpsylvania was shot about the year 1800, by Col.
John Kelly, in Kelly Township, Union Co., five miles from Lewis-
burg. The former presence of the bison in the western part of
Bedford County is attested by the names given to Buffalo Mountain,
Buffalo Creek and Buffalo Mills in that County. This forms a con-
necting link between the numerous herds of buffaloes formerly rang-
ing over the Ohio River drainage in western Pennsylvania and the
sparsely scattered bands which may have passed over the watershed
into the Juniata valley at this point. The presence of sulphur
springs in this vicinity with the associated open glade country is well
known to be a favorite place of summer resort for this species, and
it is significant that a tributary of the Juniata in Perry County is
called Buffalo Creek. For further information regarding the east-
ward range of the buffalo in pre-Columbian times to the Delaware
valley the reader should consult the author’s paper in the Proceed-
ings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 1895,
pages 244 to 248.
3. Cervus canadensis (Erx].). Wapiti, American “ Elk.”
The former range of this animal in Pennsylvania was closely co-
extensive with that of the Bison, both species using the same trails,
feeding grounds and licks among the western Alleghenies and pass-
ing thence eastward by the same routes to the Delaware valley. The
elk was most numerous among the elevated mountain glades and
eastern tributaries of the Allegheny and Monongahela Rivers. It
was also fairly abundant in the early part of the century in Clinton,
1 Monog. Amer. Bisons.—Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1876.
208 . PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Potter, Tioga and Lycoming Counties. The latter named regions
formed the hunting grounds of my veteran friend, Seth I. Nelson,
whose diary between 1831 and 1837 shows that he killed 22 elk
during the period. Six of these were killed in 1833. The horns of
one of these were so large that Mr. Nelson, who is about 5 ft. 2 in.
high, told me he could stand erect beneath the skull when the head
was inverted with the antler tips touching the floor. Mr. Nelson
stated that one of the last elk known to have been killed in that
region was secured on Bennett’s Branch in Elk County by a party
of Cornplanter Indians about 1865. A hunter named Wilson
Morrison brought the carcass of an elk about that time to Lock
Haven, claiming that he killed it. But it was afterward understood
that he had paid $25. for it to the Indians.’
The range of the elk and buffalo into the south central counties of
Pennsylvania, east of Fulton County, is very improbable, if, indeed,
they ever wandered that far. The main line of their eastern range
on Mason and Dixon’s line was probably along the valley of Castle-
man’s River in Somerset County and the main ridge of the Alle-
gheny mountain near that place, which formed a continuous trail of
safety between their haunts in West Virginia and the Keystone
State. North of this region their range probably spread northeast-
ward as far south as the Juniata valley, but by far the largest
number did not come south of the east and west branches of the
Susquehanna. The presence of an Elk Mills and Elk Creek in
Chester County. and of an Elkton in Cecil County, Maryland, would
indicate their former presence in that vicinity, probably only as
stragglers along the Susquehanna valley.
The only specimen of Pennsylvania elk known to me is an adult
male in the Museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia. It was shot by a white hunter in 1853, in McKean County,
and was purchased for the Academy by a club of members.
4. Dorcelaphus americanus (Erxl.). Virginia Deer.
With the probable exception of York and Adams Counties, there
is not a county in central Pennsylvania, between latitudes 79° 30’
«Since the above was in type Mr. Nelson sends me a clipping from the
Utica Saturday Globe giving a detailed account of the discovery of a bull elk
by himself and Ira Parmenter on the headwaters of Bennett’s Branch in
1867. A veteran Indian hunter of the Cattaraugus Reservation, named Jim
Jacobs, trailed this elk simultaneously with Wilson and Parmenter into the
headwaters of Clarion river, where the Indian, by superior cunning, made a
circuit and killed the game in a laurel thicket before the white hunters
arrived. Mr. Nelson writes me that this account is correct.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209
and 76° 30’, where the Virginia Deer does not now exist in a wild
state. In some of these it is practically exterminated, occurring
in its former haunts only as a straggler. In none of these is it
common, even in the most protected wilds.
Of the localities known to the writer, those most frequented
by deer are the headquarters of Loyalsock Creek, Sullivan Co., the
northern part of Clinton County, and Licking Creek in the northern
part of Fulton County.
Seth Nelson (Jr.) killed 23 deer in the fall season of 1873, chiefly
in Clinton County. In the period between 1861 and 1865 the deer
became so numerous in that county that they greatly damaged the
crops, and snaring was employed to diminish their numbers. In con-
trast with this there were killed in 1895, in his vicinity, all told, only
ten deer, and most of these out of season, by wild hounds or pot
hunters. The chief agencies in the extermination of deer are forest
fires and wandering dogs, both of which pursue their relentless course
during the entire year, the latter being ten times as destructive as
the gray wolf ever was.
5. Lepus sylvaticus Bachm. Carolinian Wood Hare.
With the exception of the deepest evergreen forest areas on the
higher mountains, no locality in Pennsylvania is a stranger to this
abundant species. In the northern counties, at higher altitudes, it
is represented by the following race.
6. Lepus sylvaticus transitionalis Bangs. Alleghenian Wood Hare.
Two specimens, almost typical of this subspecies, as described by
Mr. Bangs, were recently received from Mr. Nelson, who took them
near his home in Clinton County. A specimen from Summit Mills,
Somerset Co., taken by Mr. Ingersoll, shows a near approach to the
Clinton County specimens; but four others, from the same locality,
are nearer sy/vaticus. As the higher forested mountains are cleared,
this is the form of “ Cottontail Rabbit ” which replaces the now nearly
exterminated “‘Snowshoe Rabbit” or Varying Hare.
7. Lepus americanus virginianus (Harl.). Alleghenian Varying Hare.
This southern race of the Northern or Varying Hare is rapidly
approaching extinction in the greater part of the Pennsylvania Alle-
ghenies once inhabited by it. In the more retired tamarack and hem-
lock swamps of the northern counties this hare is fairly numerous,
but they remain only in isolated places on the main ridge of the
western mountains, southward. In the region traversed by Mr.
————
210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Ingersoll they were not known at Tuscarora, Juniata Co. They
were reported as yet occurring in the western part of Huntingdon
Co., and in Blair Co.,7 or 8 miles west of Tyrone. The old hunters
of southern Cambria County formerly knew of them, but they had
been killed off several years ago. The same report applies to Somer-
set Co., except that some were thought likely to remain on Laurel
Ridge in the northwestern corner of the county.
“ Becoming rare and local in Clinton Co.”—Nelson. ‘“ Numerous
in Cameron County, but decreasing as the woods are. cut off’’—Lar-
rabee. “ Abundant about Eaglesmere ”—Bennett.:
8. Erethizon dorsatus (L.). Eastern Porcupine.
In the mountains of the northern counties as far south as the West
Branch of the Susquehanna the porcupine is frequently met with,
and in some localities is quite abundant, as in Clinton and Sullivan
Counties. At the present day, so far as records are obtainable,
this animal does not occur in southern Pennsylvania, though Mr.
Ingersoll was told by a farmer, Abraham Hay, of Summit Mills,
that he saw one that was killed near Bakersyille, Somerset County,
15 years ago. A mountaineer named Wildmann told Mr. Ingersoll
that he had heard of one being killed in northern Juniata County
on the Black Log Mountain. Last and south of a line connecting
the last two places the range of the porcupine probably rarely ex-
tended. Statements from hunters in Franklin and Cumberland
Counties lead me to believe that the porcupine never lived in their
limits.
9, Castor canadensis Kuhl. American Beaver.
There is little doubt that this animal is wholly exterminated over
the entire Commonwealth. So long ago was this effected that no
person with whom I have communicated has met with them. Mr.
Seth I. Nelson, who hunted in the thirties in Potter County, when
that county was largely covered with virgin forest, and the elk, wolf
and pekan were still numerous, never met with the beaver. In con-
trast with this we have the following statements from his son, Seth
Nelson (Jr.): “The last [beaver taken in this state] was killed on
Pine Creek nine years ago [1884]. A part of Pine Creek is in
Clinton County, part in Potter County, and part in Tioga County,
but the beaver was started in Potter County and followed down
through Tioga County, and killed in Clinton County.”
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211
10. Zapus hudsonius (Zimm.). Meadow Jumping Mouse.
While reported as a well-known species in all localities, I failed
to get any specimens. Mr. Ingersoll secured none during his expe-
dition, perhaps on account of the mice having gone into winter quar-
ters. He heard of them at Tuscaroraand at Hopewell, in both cases
the meadow species being designated.
11. Zapus insignis Miller. Woodland Jumping Mouse.
The first Pennsylvania specimen of this species was taken by my
friend, Wm. A. Shryock, near Pocono, Monroe County, and recorded
in the Americart Naturalist in 1894. In the summer of 1896 I ex-
amined a mounted specimen in the collection of Mr. A. K. Pierce,
of Renovo, who stated it was taken in a hemlock ravine near Howard
Station, Elk County, a few years previously. Two specimens were
taken near Eaglesmere by me in August, 1896.
This species may perhaps be found as far south as Somerset
County, along the culminating ridge of Allegheny Mountain, but its
predilection for to the northern Alleghenian region seems pretty
well proved.
12. Synaptomys cooperi Baird. Cooper’s Lemming Vole.
The first Pennsylvania record for this mouse was given in my
paper on the mammals of Monroe and Pike Counties.’ Mr. Ingersoll
captured five in a springy meadow at the foot of the low mountain
near Kring’s Station, Cambria County, close to the Somerset County
line. They were all taken within a space of 50 acres, in runways
among high grass and matted herbage near an old clearing. During
the time covered in trapping them about six times as many meadow
voles were taken in the same spot. No other specimens have been
met with in central Pennsylvania,* though the species undoubtedly
occurs in isolated places throughout the northern and western parts
of the region. The Kring’s series agree perfectly with specimens
from northern New Jersey and Roan Mountain, North Carolina.
13, Evotomys gapperi (Vig.). Gapper’s Wood Vole.
Wherever the coniferous woodland remains undisturbed in the
Allegheny region this species abounds in moist ravines and swamps.
Beyond these situations it rarely wanders, although two specimens
were taken on the dry, rocky summit of Negro Mountain, Somerset
County, along the wooded cliffs inhabited by Neotoma magister.
3 Proc. Acad. N. Sci., Phila., 1894, p. 391.
* A young male specimen just received, was taken in Clinton County, April,
1897, by Mr. Nelson.
212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Specimens in the author’s collection were taken at the following
localities: Eaglesmere, Sullivan Co., 4; Round Island, Clinton Co.,
3; Summit Mills, Somerset Co.,22. Mr. Ingersoll did not find any
in the Alleghenies except at Summit Mills, probably more on account
of the lack of suitable environment for them in places visited than
because this species is not found in the isolated hemlock swamps
which yet exist in Juniata, Mifflin and Huntingdon Counties.
Comparison of a large series of Pennsylvania and northern New
Jersey Evotomys with series from Quebec shows remarkable external
similarity, there appearing no tendency to variation which can be
said to be constant.
14, Microtus pennsylvanicus (Ord). Wilson’s Meadow Vole.
Abounding in open situations throughout the district up to highest
elevations where food supply abounds.
A somewhat remarkable color variation in this unusually constant
species is found among the fine series taken in Juniata, Huntingdon,
Blair and Somerset Counties by Mr. Ingersoll. Nearly all the speci-
mens, compared with examples from the New England, New Jersey
and eastern Pennsylvania, are noticeably browner, even in the half
grown young. About a dozen of the adults are of two shades of
umber-brown over the whole upper parts, two from Tuscarora being
almost a deep blackish chestnut. It is somewhat remarkable that
all these umber specimens, except one from Bedford County, are
females. Other specimens of both sexes taken in the same localities
with these do not differ markedly from typical pennsylvanicus. The
cranial characters of the brown specimens seem to be like those from
Philadelphia County.
15. Microtus pinetorum (LeC.). Pine-woods Vole.
Occurring in south-central Pennsylvania ; but no specimens have
yet come to my notice other than those recorded from Carlisle by
Prof. Baird. It has not been found in the higher mountains, nor in
the northern counties.
16. Fiber zibethious (L.). Muskrat.
This abundant, and in many cases most destructive of the Rodentia,
holds its own in all parts of its extensive habitat. It seems neither
to increase nor diminish in numbers, whatever may be the agencies
exerted for or against it.
17. Peromyscus leucopus (Raf.). Carolinian Deer Mouse.
This very common mouse shows but slight variation from the
typical form of the Ohio valley, throughout central Pennsylvania.
(4 0 aes
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 213
It is found in all wooded parts of the State, at all altitudes ; its range
somewhat overlapping that of P. canadensis in the borders of the
denser evergreen forests of the northern counties. As in the cases
already cited under Microtus pennsylvanicus there is a strong tend-
ency in the Deer Mice of the Juniata river watershed to assume a
darker, deeper shade of brown than the normal colors seen in eastern
specimens.
18. Peromyscus canadensis (Miller). Canadian Deer Mouse.
Four typical specimens of this distinct species were taken in the
primeval forest about two miles from Eaglesmere. They were not
found in a similar forest in Clinton County, leucopus only being
taken there. It is likely that typical canadensis is not found in
Pennsylvania except along its northern border, in the most boreal
environments of the mountain tops in isolated localities. Along the
culminating ridge, southward, it intergrades into the following sub-
species, inhabiting the loftier summits of the southern Alleghenies.
19. Peromyscus canadensis nubiterre (Rhoads).° Cloudland Deer Mouse.
Of great interest, as showing the true relationships of the long-
tailed, dusky deer mouse of the balsam forests of Tennessee and
North Carolina, is a series of 29 Peromyscus taken in Cambria and
Somerset Counties, Pennsylvania, by Mr. Ingersoll. Nine of these
were trapped at Kring’s Station, the remainder at Summit Mills. In
size and proportions these are conclusively connectant between the
large form found in Canada and New England and the diminutive
cloud-dweller of the Great Smoky Mountains. In color the Penn-
sylvania series shows a marked tendency to assume the dark brown
shades of the upper parts, which distinguish nubiterre from the
ochraceus gray of canadensis. The wide, dark dorsal area charac-
teristic of Roan Mountain specimens is also apparent in those from
Somerset County, but the pencil of white hairs at the anterior base
of ear in canadensis, absent in nubiterre, is retained by all in the
series taken by Mr. Ingersoll.
An average of four of the larger adults of canadensis from Peter-
boro, New York, recorded by Mr. Miller, gives the following measure-
ments in millimeters: total length, 190; tail vertebra, 99; hind
foot, 21.5. Similar measurements of four specimens from Somerset
County are: total length, 180; tail vertebrae, 91; hind foot, 22 ;
while those of nubiterre respectively are 167, 86 and 21.5. The
°P. leucopus nubiterre Rhoads; Proc. Acad. N. Sci., Phila., 1896, p. 187.
15
214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF - [2S2%2
skulls of the three series show a parallel gradation in size southward
from canadensis to nubiterre, but no diagnostic features of a higher
grade to distinguish the two extremes. It is of interest to note that
the decrease in size of body as the species nears the Carolinas is not
correlated by a shortening of the tail and hind feet, but that these
members are relatively longest in nubiterre.
Mr. Ingersoll makes the following notes on this subspecies :
“Peromyscus canadensis I took only at Krings in Cambria Co. and
at Summit Mills in Somerset Co.
‘At Kring’s they seemed to prefer the most retired and secluded
places, especially the narrow and deep wooded valleys with little
streams flowing through. The first I caught were in such a place,
the timber being mostly oak and beech and maple, with here and
there a hemlock. Many old and decaying logs and stumps offered
them pleasant homes, and nowhere else in that locality did I find
them so abundant, and never did I find any at any great distance
from the water, nor more than half way up the low mountain. Pero-
myscus leucopus and Blarina brevicauda were also taken in the same
places.
“At Summit Mills, a region altogether higher, canadensis seemed
to have replaced leucopus entirely, and there I took them everywhere,
in stone walls along the edges of fields grown up to briars and
bushes, in oak woods and in hemlock woods, and one in a trap set
among the rocks on the top of a mountain for Rock Rats [_N. mag-
ister]. I caught a rat in the same place. Traps set for Evotomys in
low, damp ground also often caught P. canadensis.”
20. Neotoma magister Baird. Allegheny Cave Rat.
So far as I have been able to discover, this rat has been taken in
the following localities in middle Pennsylvania:
Clinton County :—*“ Plentiful in our rocky mountains ”—Nelson.
“In mountains near Renovo ”’—Pierce.
Cambria, Somerset and Bedford Counties:—“ Found locally in
the tops of the mountains ”—Ingersoll.
Adams and Franklin Counties:—“In rocky gorges in South
Mountain, near Graffensburg ”—M. W. Strealy.
Cumberland County :—Living among Lewis’s Rocks (type local-
ity of N. pennsylvanica Stone) —J. G. Dillin, S. N. Rhoads. Lime-
stone caves near Carlisle and opposite Harrisburg (type locality of
fossil N. magister Baird)—S. F. Baird. _
Specimens (both recent and fossil) in the collections of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and of the writer, rep-
ad
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215
resent all of the above named localities except Graffensburg. Speci-
mens from the latter place were examined by the author.
The hunters in Sullivan and adjoining counties deny the existence
of this rat in that region. I could find no signs of them around
Eaglesmere. There are undoubtedly connecting colonies of this
species along the Blue Mountains from Harrisburg to Massachusetts.
Links in this chain have been found at Greenwood Lake, New Jer-
sey, and onthe Hudson Highlands, New York. It remains for future
investigators to trace their range over the intermediate region and
demonstrate the distribution of this large mammal throughout the
oldest and most populous mining region of North America, whose
very existence as a living species was unknown to naturalists as late
as the year 1895!
21. Mus musculus L. House Mouse.
The common name given this little pest is by no means specific of
its habitat. Mr. Ingersoll secured a series of 42 in Juniata, Hunt-
ingdon and Blair Counties, nearly all of which were taken in fields
distant from houses or outbuildings. They were especially numer-
ous in upland meadows, in the runways of Microtus and Blarina.
This experience is, however, exceptional, for in other parts of the
State I have only occasionally been troubled by them in such places.
22. Mus decumanus Pallas. Norway Rat.
This species is quite as much at home in the coal and iron mines
of the mountains as in the farmer’s barns or the crowded wharves of
our great cities. It is sometimes found in the same caves with Neo-
toma magister. Which of the two is master I have had no means of
determining, but it seems probable that the native animal is able to
resist any encroachments on his vested rights. Otherwise it would
have long since disappeared from localities it yet inhabits.
23. Mus rattus L. Black Rat.
I was unable to secure any recent records of this once common
introduced species.
24. Arctomys monax (L.). Eastern Marmot.
Abundant in all situations. Specimens from the mountains of
the northern counties are intermediates, approaching the Hudson
Bay form, Arctomys monax melanopus (Kuhl.).
25. Tamias striatus (L.). Carolinian Chipmunk.
26. Tamias striatus lysteri (Rich.). Canadian Chipmunk.
Chipmunks from Sullivan and Clinton Counties are intermediate
between the southern animal and the Canadian form, lysteri. Those
216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
from the southern half of the State are typical striatus. The series
from Somerset and Blair Counties have darker rusty crowns and
rumps than those from Eaglesmere and Round Island.
27. Sciurus ludovicianus vicinus Bangs. Eastern Fox Squirrel.
I have been unable to lay hands on any Pennsylvania specimens
of this squirrel except those of the light gray phase presented many
years ago to the Academy of Natural Sciences by Drs. Heerman and
Woodhouse. The exact locality of their capture is not given.
Mr. Bangs, in his review of the eastern Squirrel,’ quotes Dr. B,
H. Warren in stating that this species “is practically extinct in
Pennsylvania, except in the counties of Dauphin and Cumberland.”
The following notes will be of some value in estimating the status of
this animal in the Commonwealth.
Clinton County :—‘ Not plenty. I killed 3 last fall [1894] ”—
Nelson.
Cameron County :
Larrabee.
Sullivan County :—“ Rare; never seen on tops of the mountains ”
— Bennett.
Cumberland County :—One reported seen near Pine Grove Fur-
nace in 1892. Nearly exterminated—Rhoads.
Mr. Ingersoll was unable to get any reliable notes of this species
in his journey through the central Alleghenies. They are practically
extinct in that region.
“Very rare; have not seen any for years ”—
28. Sciurus carolinensis leucotis (Gapp.). Northern Gray Squirrel.
This animal continues to abound wherever enough timber remains
to supply food and shelter, even in the more densely populated
localities. In the northern parts of the ‘State, especially the north-
western counties, the proportion of black or melanistic individuals
of this species sometimes equals and often exceeds the normal gray
form. This’ is reported to be the case in Clinton County by
Mr. Nelson, where the “ blacks ” sometimes outnumber the “ grays ”
two or three to one. In Sullivan County Mr. Bennett finds the
“blacks” numerous, but the “grays” predominate. I have never
seen nor heard of a black squirrel in southeastern Pennsylvania.
29. Sciurus hudsonicus (Erxl.), Canadian Red Squirrel.
30. Sciurus hudsonicus loquax Bangs. Carolinian Red Squirrel.
After consulting a series of nearly 60 Chickarees from Maine,
Ontario, Pennsylvania and New Jersey, I am somewhat puzzled to
6 Proc. Biol. Soc., Washn., 1896, p. 150.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 217
formulate any rule by which typical hudsonicus and its subspecies
loquax may be distinguished. Strictly comparable specimens taken
at the same season in Maine and southern New Jersey are in some
cases very similar. The greater relative length of tail and hind foot,
however, in the southern animal is fairly diagnostic. The large
series taken by Mr. Ingersoll on the mountains of Somerset County
are but slightly different from Delaware and Chester County speci-
mens, not sufficiently so to warrant their subspecific separation as
expressed by the habitat assigned to each by Mr. Bangs.’
It is more reasonable to restrict the habitat of typical hudsonicus,
as in the case of some other Canadian species ranging into the south-
ern Alleghenies, to the northern partsof Pennsylvania. In this case
the /oquaxz intermediates of the southern Alleghenies give place on
the balsam belts of the Great Smoky Mountains to a dusky, imper-
fectly differentiated form which differs almost as much from hudson-
tcus as does loquax. Some winter skins from Clinton County differ
sufficiently in measurements and the character and color of pelage
to be classed more properly with hudsonicus.
31. Sciuropterus volans (L.). Carolinian Flying Squirrel.
The smaller flying squirrel abounds in the entire region included
in this paper. No specimens have been received from the northern
counties. A specimen taken near Renovo, Clinton County, in the
collection of Mr. Pierce, is volans. The result of Mr. Bang’s in-
quiries into the distribution of this animal indicates that the large
species, sabrinus, will not be found in the State.
32. Putorius vison Schreb. Canadian Mink.
33. Putorius vison lutreocephalus (Harlan). Carolinian Mink.
From the statements of hunters, added to personal experience, the
mink may be said to be numerously and evenly distributed over the
entire upland and lowland regions of Pennsylvania. Taken as a
whole the Pennsylvania minks are more typical of the southern race,
but in the northern mountain streams are very near the Canadian
type.
34. Putorius noveboracensis Emmons. Carolinian Weasel.
Though rarely seen, this animal is a stranger to no part of the
State. In the south its change to the white winter dress seems quite
as irregular as the relative severity of the season and amount of
snowfall. The winter skins of this animal are often sent to the fur-
™ Proc. Biol. Soc., Washn., 1896, pp. 159, 161.
218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
riers by Pennsylvania trappers, and in but few instances have I noted
any in white pelage.
It is not improbable that Putorius cicognani, the smal] northern
species, may be found in boreal Pennsylvania; so far, however, I
have been unable to get any record of it.
35. Lutra hudsonica Lacép. North American Otter.
Recent records of this wary animal in many of the streams and
lakes of the region are so numerous that it is not necessary to enu-
merate them here. The otter has by no means been exterminated
in any county in central Pennsylvania, though it may rightly be said
to be now a rare species, wherever once abundant.
36. Mustela americana Kerr. Canadian Marten.
The following records show that this valuable fur bearing animal
has not been wholly exterminated in the Allegheny Mountains.
1. Columbia County :—‘‘ Mountains north of Benton ”—H. Cow-
ard. Skin in collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences, No.
1,563, 2, captured, as above, in the fall of 1892.
2. Sullivan County :—‘ One was trapped last winter (1895-’96)
near Eaglesmere ”—Bennett.
3. Clinton County :—“ Once abundant in the beechwoods of this
and adjoining counties, now very rare; saw tracks of two in Clinton
County, winter, 1895 ”—Nelson.
4, Cameron County :—“ Found in hard wood timber. Received
several light colored pelts from Shippen Township in 1894. Got 3
from same township in winter of 1895 ”—Larrabee.
5. Potter County :—“I received 22 pelts from a hunter who
trapped them on the east fork of the Sinnemahoning during the win-
ter of 1894—95 ”—Larrabee.
I had the privilege of examining several of the furs of Marten
above recorded by Mr. Larrabee. Mr. M. W.Strealy, of Chambers-
burg, took considerable pains to inquire of old hunters of the South
Mountain region concerning the presence of this animal. Among
these was an old furrier whose father had all his life been in the same
trade in that section. Another informant was a mountaineer 98
years’ old. Mr. Strealy states that neither of these men had ever
heard of the marten or sable being taken in the South Mountain, or
the counties of that region.
37. Mustela pennanti Erxl. Pekan or Fisher.
The Fisher or Black Cat has for many years been practically
extinct in Pennsylvania. Such, at least, is the verdict of nearly
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219
every hunter with whom I have communicated ; and many men of
middle age, who have had twenty years’ experience ia mountaineer-
ing, never saw the track of one where they were formerly numerous,
while many other trappers had not even heard of such an animal.
The elder Seth Nelson caught many of them in the beech woods of
Potter and Tioga Counties, between the years 1827 and 1845.
Mr. Larrabee, of Emporium, Cameron County, declares there are
yet a few in Shippen Township. The tracks of one were seen, and
traps set to catch it, during the winter of 1895-96.
A mounted specimen, taken in Pennsylvania, is in the Academy
of Natural Sciences. It has no more definite data, and was evidently
taken many years ago.
On March 11, 1896, a fine male Pekan was shot by Christ. S.
Nunnemacher on the borders of a wood on Mill Creek, 2 miles north
of Bird-in-Hand, and about three miles east of Lancaster, Lancaster
County. Mill Creek rises in the Welsh Mountains. This animal
had been making depredations on the farmer’s poultry in that viciu-
ity for some months, and was finally discovered by some dogs in
company with Nunnemacher. The animal was taken to Dr. M. W.
Raub, of Lancaster, to be mounted, and the stuffed specimen is now
in his possession. In a letter from Dr. Raub, I have received full
confirmation of the above facts, and unmistakable evidence that the
animal was not a“ Marten,” as reported in the Lancaster newspapers
of that date.
38. Mephitis mephitica (Shaw). Canadian Skunk.
_ 39. Mephitis mephitica elongata Bangs. Carolinian Skunk.
Central Pennsylvania presents us with two forms of skunks,
neither of which are typical of the above species and subspecies as
defined by Mr. Bangs.®
In Clinton County Mr. Nelson states that only about 1 in 20 are
black with a small white head spot. These are of double value as
fur.
This animal is equally abundant at all elevations, in deciduous
forest growths.
40. Procyon lotor (L.). Raccoon.
Though not often seen, the Raccoon continues to exist in thickly
populated districts where forests continue to afford some shelter.
Although much sought after by trappers and hunters it holds its own
in all sparsely settled districts, both mountain and lowland.
8 Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1895, pp. 1-7.
220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
41. Ursus americanus Pallas. American Black Bear.
Several bears are trapped every year in central Pennsylvania,
and some of these generally reach the Philadelphia market during
the winter. It is a good rule that where one finds the Virginia
Deer there are pretty sure to be some bears, and where the former
are exterminated the bears are very scarce or never seen.
There is probably not a county coming within the scope of this
paper, in which the black bear has been completely exterminated.
They are, perhaps, more numerous in the counties surrounding
Clinton County than elsewhere. Seth J. Nelson and hisson concur in
the belief that bears have been more numerous in the past 15 years
than before that time, the clearing of the evergreen timber and in-
crease of brush land and deciduous forests being to their advantage-
About the year 1883 the junior Nelson kilied 7 bears in East Keat-
ing Township, Clinton County,alone. In 1893 he killed 4. I ex-
amined the pelts of several recently taken by Mr. R. W. Bennett,
near Eaglesmere, where they also seem to be numerous.
42. Urocyon cinereoargenteus (Miill.). Northern Gray Fox.
Though very rare in the mountains of the northern tier of counties,
this species may be said to visit every township in the state. It is
probable that this statement could not have been made 20 years ago,
but the destruction of the forests in this, as in other cases, has made
possible such an extension of the range of the gray fox into the once
undisputed habitat of the red fox.
Regarding the dexterity of this species in climbing trees the junior
Nelson told me he had seen one ascend after a squirrel to the height
of 60 feet on an erect dead pine stripped of its bark. It did this
voluntarily, literally “shinning” 25 feet up the brancbless trunk
and backing down again, as a boy would do it. He has known
his dogs to run them up an erect tree 18 inches in diameter, the
first limb of which was 20 feet from the ground.
43. Vulpes pennsylvanicus (Bodd.). Red Fox.
More abundant in the mountains, but found more or less numer-
ously in all localities beyond the limits of towns and cities.
44. Canis nubilus Say. Northern American Wolf.
The following notes seem to indicate that the wolf has never been
wholly exterminated in Pennsylvania, but that there yet exist some
of these wary rovers of the wilderness, to attest the theory that no
country where the Virginia deer remain is free from their incursions.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221
It is well known that the wolf is frequently noted in the Allegheny
Mountains of West Virginia, and the nature of the country lying
between these and the wilds of western Pennsylvania so favors com-
munication between the two that it requires no stretch of fancy to
understand how these crafty wanderers yet defy extermination.
Cameron and Potter Counties :—“ Practically exterminated. One
hunter saw wolf tracks a year ago [1895] ”—Larrabee. ‘“ One seen
in Potter County recently ”—Nelson. This was previous to 1893.
“T was told by 3 men that they saw 2 wolves catch and kill a deer
in Wyckof Run [Gibson Township, Cameron Co.] alongside of the
lumber railroad ””—Nelson. No date of this occurrence was given,
but it was furnished among some notes of recent records. ‘I heard
aman on Kettle Creek killed a wolf this fall [1896] in Potter
County, but I can’t find out his name ”’—Nelson.
Clearfield County :—‘ The last wolf was killed in Clearfield County
with a club by a man on horseback the winter of 1891-92. It was
killed by William Bonsall of the same county ”—Nelson.
Clinton County :—“ I have been told by 2 hunters that they saw 2
wolves this winter [1893-94] about 6 miles from my place [Round
Island], but I have been all through that woods, and see no signs of
anything but lynx, wild cats and foxes. I think it was lynx they
saw instead of wolves ”—Nelson.
Elk County :—“A wolf was killed in Elk County about 9 years
ago [1887 ?] by a deer hunter ”’—R. B. Simpson.
Sullivan county :—“ Long since exterminated ”’—Bennett.
It may be stated in this connection that a wolf was killed at
Prompton, in Wayne County, in the winter of 1897 by Daniel
Routan. “It was run in from York state by a hound”—G. D.
Stevens. Mr. Nelson also informs me that he has heard of wolves
being seen recently in Erie County.
45. Lynx ruffus (Gueld.). Eastern Bay Lynx.
The wild cat is quite abundant in the denser forests of the State,
and often lingers close to long established centres of population in
the mountain country.
46. Lynx canadensis Kerr. Canada Lynx.
Although the majority of reports concerning the existence of this
animal in Pennsylvania relate to the bay lynx or wild cat there is no
doubt that the Canada lynx formerly visited the more boreal por-
tions of the north country.
222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Mr. Larrabee, who recognized the specific distinction between the
two, told me that he knew certainly of the capture of one in Cam-
eron or Potter County within 16 years.
I have received no information of authentic records of the recent
capture of this species in the State.
47. Felis concolor L. Puma, Panther.
Once found in all portions of the Commonwealth, the Panther now
is restricted to the most inaccessible mountain districts. The numer-
ous wild cat and “catamount” stories which find their way into the
newspapers, describing the capture of so-called Panthers in the Alle-
gheny Mountains, have justly made the more conservative class
skeptical of their existence in the State. Careful inquiry, however,
shows that not only are there well authenticated instances of their
capture within the last ten years, but that a few may remain in the
wilderness of Clearfield and its surrounding counties, as well as in
the northeastern section of the State.
Sullivan County :—‘‘ My father killed the last one in this region
certainly known to me, between the years 1855 and 1860”—Bennett.
Clinton and Clearfield Counties :—‘“ There may be one or two yet
in Clearfield County ; but the Askey boys and I killed 2, two years
ago [1891]”—Nelson. Ima later letter Mr. Nelson writes: “ Those
panthers skins, with two others, went to Germany with a lot of other
furs, by Schrader & Co. I did not kill the panther, it got in my
bear-trap, and was dead when I came to the trap.” Not being able
to hear more particularly from Mr. Nelson at this writing, I interpret
him to mean that the “ Askey boys” killed their panther in Clear-
field County on a hunting trip with Nelson. This is in line with a
statement he made to me in conversation one year ago. The panther
caught in bear-trap by Nelson was probably caught on his regular
trapping grounds in Clinton County.’
Potter and Cameron Counties:—‘ None known to have been
killed in 20 years. Accounts of such killing unreliable ””—Larrabee.
48. Scalops aquaticus (L.). Carolinian Mole.
Judging by the scarcity of signs, I should think the common mole
less common, even in the lowlands of central Pennsylvania, than in
the Delaware valley drainage.
9Mr. Nelson has since written that no panthers have been taken since the
“Tong boys killed one about 4 years ago on the big run of Beech Creek.”
[Centre Co. ?].
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 223
49. Parascalops breweri (Bachm.). Brewer’s Mole.
A specimen of the hairy-tailed mole is recorded from Hollidays-
burg, Blair County, by Mr. F. W. True, in his “ Revision of the
American Moles.” It isin the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Cambridge, Mass.
I have never seen a Pennsylvania specimen, nor know of other
records from the State.
50. Condylura cristata (L.). Star-nose Mole.
Though no specimens of this mole have been noted by me in
central Pennsylvania there is little doubt of its comparative abund-
ance over the entire area. Prof. Baird records a specimen from
Carlisle.
51. Blarina brevicauda (Say). Northern Mole Shrew.
In the Allegheny Mountains this species is quite typical of the
northern form. It is everywhere very abundant.
52. Blarina cinerea Say. Least Mole Shrew.
I include this species here on the authority of Prof. Baird, who
records one from Carlisle. The only Pennsylvania specimen known
to meisin my private collection. It was taken by my friend, Witmer
Stone, near Thorndale, Chester County. This southern species is
not likely to occur north of the foothills of the Blue Ridge.
53. Sorex personatus Is. Geoff. St. Hil. Masked Shrew.
This tiny mammal is sometimes taken by the professional mouser
in both the deeper forests and the open grounds near woodland. It
appears more numerous in the northern and mountain districts than
in the southern lowlands. In the former places it associates with
the next species, but is there the rarer of the two.
54. Sorex fumeus Miller. Smoky Shrew.
This larger of the long-tailed shrews is abundant in the mountain
forests, to which it seems closely confined. Itis characteristic of the
Alleghenian as contrasted with the Carolinian fauna, whereas the
masked shrew inhabits both.
I have specimens from Sullivan, Clinton, Cambria and Somerset
Counties.
The rare Marsh Shrew, Sorex albibarbis, of which I took a speci-
men in Monroe County in 1894, will undoubtedly be found to bea
denizen of the hemlock swamps of the central Alleghenies. So far,
however, it has escaped notice in these localities.
224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
55. Adelonycteris fusca (Pal.de Beauv.). Large Brown Bat.
Everywhere abundant, except on the heavier wooded mountain
summits.
56. Vesperugo carolinensis (Is. Geoff. St. Hil.). Carolina Bat.
Rare in central Pennsylvania. Probably confined to the regions
southeast of the Blue Ridge. Prof. Baird secured a specimen, now
in the Smithsonian Institution, from Carlisle.
57. Lasionycteris noctivagans (LeC.). Silvery Bat.
Numerously distributed over the entire region.
58. Nycticejus humeralis 0. Thos. Twilight Bat.
The only record of this southern species known to me is a speci-
men taken at Carlisle by Prof. Baird.
59. Atalapha borealis (Miill.). Red Bat.
An abundant species.
60. Atalapha cinerea (Pal. de Beauv.). Hoary Bat.
This large bat is little known to the mountaineers, so far as my
inquirieshave gone. I have never seen a specimen in life. One taken
near Renovo, Clinton County, is in the collection of A. K. Pierce, of
that borough. From its known range in the United States and Canada
it is more likely to be found in middle than in eastern Pennsylvania,
from which latter region I have seen and heard of several examples.
61. Homo sapiens americanus. Aboriginal American Indian,
Central Pennsylvania at the time of Penn’s coming (1682) was
inhabited by tribes of Iroquoian linguistic stock, as distinguished
from the Algonquin Lenape of east Pennsylvania. The Susquehan-
nocks (Minquas, Conestogas or Andastes) holding originally the
main Susquehanna River valley, conquered by the Senecas about
1670, and finally reduced to a remnant, were exterminated near
Lancaster by the “ Paxton boys,’ December 27,1763. Subsequently
the Six Nation Onondagas, Cayugas, Oneidas, Senecas, Mohawks
and Tuscaroras roamed over the former possession of the Susque-
hannocks, and sold it to the whites, thus relinquishing Adams,
Franklin, Cumberland and York Counties in 1763, Perry, Juniata,
Snyder, Huntingdon, Blair, Bedford and Fulton in 1758, Northum-
berland, Union, Montour, Lycoming, Clinton, Centre, Clearfield,
Cambria and Somerset in 1768, and Bradford, Tioga, Potter, Me-
Kean and Elk in 1784.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 225
Of Algonquin stock there were wandering Shawnee invasions of
the mountain regions west of the Susquehanna in Pre-Columbian
times. The Assiwikales of the sea-board in 1731 settled along the
Susquehanna and in the watershed of the Monongahela. The Al-
gonkian Nantichokes of Maryland also migrated up the Susquehanna
during the middle of the 18th century, settling with the Lroquois at
Juniata and Shamokin, and they probably built the mounds cover-
ing heaps of human bones near Sunbury, identified by Mr. H. C,
Mercer. By the year 1800 they had left Pennsylvania and dwin-
dled to five families living among the Iroquois of western New
York.
Of the existing Indians which represent the ancient occupants or
claimants of central Pennsylvania there were 98 Senecas and Onon-
dagas living in 1890 on the Cornplanter Reservation in Warren
County. There were also 255 Senecas in indian Territory, 5,133
Iroquois in the seven reservations (Onondaga, Tonawanda, Cattar-
augas, Allegheny, Oil Springs, Tuscarora and St. Regis) in New
York, in 1890. Beside these may be mentioned 1,200 Shawnees
living in (?) 1867, and about 2,500 Cherokees in 1890, all living in
Indian Territory.
A few of the more noted Indian villages noted by scouts, mission-
aries and settlers in central Pennsylvania include the following :—
Indian name. Modern name.
Chinklaca-moose Clearfield, Clearfield Co.
Kishaca-quillas Mifflin Co.
Chillis-quaque-(Shawnee) Northumberland Co.
Shamokin Shamokin, Northumberland Co.
Conosoragy (Shawnee, 1755) © Near Muncy Creek, Lycoming Co.
Otston-nakin Montoursville, Lycoming Co.
Quenis-chas-chackki Linden, Lycoming Co.
Wyoming Wyoming, Luzerne Co.
Wyalusing Wyalusing, Bradford Co.
Sesquehanock (Carantonans) Spanish Hill, Bradford Co.
Oscolni On Sugar Creek, Bradford Co.
Gohontoto On Wyalusing Creek, Bradford Co.
Chingilo-molonk Lock Haven, Clinton Co.
In an exploration of the Susquehanna Valley from Pittston to
Harrisburg in 1892 Mr. Mercer writes me he “found ample evi-
dence of former Indian villages along the main river at the mouths
of all important streams, and similar proofs establish villages at the
226 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
mouth of Canadaguinnet Creek, Yellow Breeches Creek, on the Sus-
quehanna, both left and right banks, near Bainbridge, Lancaster
Co., at Caldwells Island, Great Island, and North Branch above
Shamokin, along Conewago and Tuscarora Creeks, near Academia,
on the Juniata and at the mouth of the Tuscarora. Probably the
Shamokin site was the most important on the river in prehistoric
times, the sites at Montoursville and mouth of Juniata ranking next.”
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227
A NEW SOUTHEASTERN RACE OF THE LITTLE BROWN BAT.
BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS.
In my “ Contributions tothe Mammalogy of Florida”? occurs the
first, and, so far as I am aware, the only record of Vespertilio luci-
fugus (= V. gryphus” ?) from the extreme southeastern section of
the United States. The series in question included six specimens
in alcohol and two carefully prepared dry skins, with skulls and
field measurements taken by the collector, Mr. W. S. Dickinson,
from the animals before skinning. Their identification was made
by Dr. Harrison Allen from the alcoholic specimens only.
Recently, in overhauling and labelling my collection, I made a
more careful examination of this series. In consequence I find it
necessary to separate the Florida form as a very distinct subspecies
under the following name and diagnosis:
Vespertilio lucifugus austroriparius, Subsp. nov. Southeastern Little Brown Bat.
Type, No. 878, ad. 2, Collection of S. N. Rhoads. Collected by
W.S. Dickinson, June 23, 1892, at Tarpon Springs, Florida.
Description of type-—Smaller than lucifugus of N. Carolina and
northward. Fur very short, fine and dense, about half as long as
in New York specimens taken in the same season. Color above
uniform, dull, dark brown, inclining to smoke-brown or dark choc-
olate as contrasted with the normal glossy, tawny and umber browns
of northern specimens. Below brownish-cinereous, becoming lighter
posteriorly and edged by a conspicuous margin of tawny white at
the junction of wing membranes with lower half of body. Upper
body fur slightly darker basally for 3 to @ its length, the difference
in shade between the brown-black of basal portion and the smoky-
brown of terminal third of hairs only to be distinguished by close
scrutiny. In /ucifugus the contrast between these parts is conspicu-
ous. On the lower parts this contrast is equally marked in both
forms.
In the characters of the skull, save in the diminished size of aus-
troriparius, | can detect no marked differences. The latter, how-
1Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1894, p. 157.
228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
ever, has a relatively shorter and wider skull with more abruptly
depressed facial plane in the three specimens used in this compari-
son.
Measurements of type.—Total length, 83 millimeters; tail verte-
bre, 32; hind foot, 7.5. Skull: total length, 14; zygomatic
breadth, 8; length of mandible, 10.5.
Specimens in the series date from the last of June to the middle
of September, some having been taken in August, showing that this
is a resident Floridian form and in no sense a winter migrant from
northern latitudes. Neither is it to be confounded with V. albes-
cens of Is. Geoff. St. Hilaire, differing therefrom in respect to the
shape of tragus and coloration of the lower jaw, precisely as does
typical lucifugus.
Of the names already given to a possible southeastern form of
lucifugus, I find none which can be referred to as possibly applica-
ble to austroriparius except V. subflavus of F. Cuvier,’ from Georgia.
In Cuvier’s description subflavus is said to have the tragus half
heart-shaped, and the body colors are so light both above and be-
low as to suggest a light colored Vesperugo carolinensis. Cuvier’s
subjlavus is virtually unidentifiable, though Dr. Allen thinks it per-
haps referable to “ gryphus.”
2Nouy. Ann. du Mus. Hist. Nat., 1832, p. 15.
1897.] "NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 229
CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE HYMENOPTERA OF BRAZIL,
NO. 2.--POMPILIDE.
BY WILLIAM J. FOX.
In this, the second paper based on the collections of Mr. Herbert
H. Smith made in Brazil, many species are described, presumably
for the first time. Much difficulty has been encountered in de-
termining the Pompilide in question because the writer has
been obliged to rely entirely on descriptions, which in many in-
stances are faulty and meager. ‘The difficulty has been height-
ened by the diversity of classification of the older writers on the
subject.
Ceropales abdominalis Tasch.
Corumba (April, May). Three female and one male specimen.
Ceropales sp.
A male from Corumba (April) is close to abdominalis, but the
antennze are fulvous beneath, the apex of dorsal segments 2-6 and
seventh entirely are yellow, and punctuation of head and thorax is
coarser.
Notocyphus saevissimus Sm.
Corumba (April, May); Santarem (September).
Notocyphus tyrannicus Sm.
Chapada (March). Six specimens, varying from 19-28 mm. The
larger specimens lack the purplish and bluish pile mentioned by
Smith.
Notocyphus brevicornis n. sp.
2 .—Black, subopaque; palpi testaceous; head indistinctly punet-
ured ; space between eyes at top about equal to length of the second,
third and half of the fourth antennal joints; hind ocelli separated by
a distance at least equal to that between them and nearest eye-mar-
gin ; the front is broader than in tyrannicus ; elypeus broadly truncate,
not twice as broad as long; labrum nearly as long as the clypeus is
broad, narrowed anteriorly and emarginate; eyes well separated
from base of mandibles; antennz stout, short, not longer than head
and thorax united, the first joint of flagellum longer than the second ;
16
230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
pronotum rounded antero-laterally, posteriorly arcuate, in the middle
about as long as the scutellum ; seen from the side, the dorsulum is
much flatter than in tyrannicus and the middle segment is shorter,
the posterior surface not being emarginate but depressed or sub-
concave, the postero-lateral angles hardly prominent ; the upper sur-
face with a faint central, longitudinal furrow; legs feebly spinose,
the inner spur of hind tibiz just about half as long as the first
hind tarsal joint; wings comparatively shorter than in tyrannicus,
blackish with a reddish-purple iridescence, second submarginal
rhomboidal ; abdomen compressed apically. Length 15-17 mm.
Chapada (March, October). Two specimens. Has a superficial
resemblence to species of the genus Notogonia.
Notocyphus abnormis Tasch. (=Ceropales abnormis Tasch.).
Six specimens, Chapada (March, September, November). They
vary from 13-17 mm. in length.
Notocyphus terminatus n. sp.
9 .—Black ; palpi testaceous; seven last antennal joints orange ;
eyes not reaching mandibles; clypeus broadly truncate; labrum
narrowed apically, truncate, in length scarcely equal to width of
clypeus; space between eyes above about equal to length of second
and third antennal joints; antenne stout, somewhat longer than
head and thorax; pronotum posteriorly arcuate, having a tendency
to become angular; middle segment long, strongly emarginate and
concave posteriorly, the postero-lateral angles produced and strongly
marked, on the sides a furrow orginates at the stigma and terminates
in a broad pit at the hind cox ; legs feebly spinose, the longer spur
of hind tibize more than half as long as first hind tarsal joint ; wings
fuscous, faintly purple, pale at apex of anteriors, the extreme base
and a small spot at base of first discoidal cell, obscurely yellowish ;
cubital vein of hind wing originating distinctly before apex of sub-
median cell ; abdomen shorter than the thorax, scarcely compressed.
Length 18 mm.
Chapada (March). One specimen.
Notocyphus pictipennis n. sp.
9 .—Structurally, this species agrees exactly with terminatus ;
also in the coloration of antenne. The wings, however, have the
basal two-thirds, bright yellow, the remaining third dark fuscous,
with the tips of anteriors pale. Length 18 mm.
Chapada (April). One specimen. Will probably prove to be a
variety of terminatus.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. oil
Notocyphus dubius n. sp.
? .—Black ; spot on each side of dorsal abdominal segments 1-5
varying in size and sometimes uniting on 2 and 3, sixth seg-
ment entirely, pale reddish ; inner and posterior orbits narrowly and
obscurely, clypeus at base and laterally and hind margin of prono-
tum yellowish; head and thorax with a silvery sericeous pile, more
observable in certain lights; front strongly furrowed, convex on
each side ; eyes not reaching base of mandibles, space between them
at top about equal to length of first joint of flagellum ; hind ocelli
separated by a somewhat greater distance than from the inner eye
margin; clypeus broadly truncate, more than three times broader
than long; labrum truncate, not as long as the clypeus is wide;
antennze longer than head and thorax united; pronotum strongly
arcuate posteriorly; middle segment long, emarginate posteriorly,
the postero-lateral angles produced, upper surface with a longitu-
dinal, central impressed line, from each stigma a deep furrow runs
to hind coxze ; legs feebly spinose, the longer spur of hind tibiz a
little more than half as long as the first hind tarsal joint; wings
yellowish, apical margins fuscous, cubital vein of hind wings intersti-
tial with apéx of submedian cell; abdomen about as long as the
thorax, compressed apically, with a faint bluish pile. Length 21-
22 mm.
Santarem (February). Twospecimens. Seems to be near maculi-
frons Smith and macrostoma Kohl. From the former it differs in
coloration of wings, antennee and abdomen. It is, perhaps, closer to
macrostoma, but is larger, and, judging from Kohl’s figure, the
middle segment is differently shaped.
Notocyphus similis n. sp.
2.—Black; wings yellow, apical margins slightly fuscous ;
elypeus short, broadly truncate, more than three times brvader than
long ; labrum nearly as broad as long, shorter than width of clypeus,
broadly emarginate at apex; front with impressed line; eyes but
little separated from mandibles, space between them at top about
equal to length of first joint of flagellum ; hind ocelli separated by
a greater distance than they are from nearest eye-margin; antennze
longer than head and thorax ; pronotum arcuate posteriorly ; middle
segment roundly emarginate posteriorly, but not strongly, the pos-
tero-lateral angles scarcely prominent, when viewed from within;
posterior face with a fine transverse striation, the stigmal furrow
shallow above ; tibiz not at all spinose, the longer spur of hind pair
232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
a little more than half as long as the first hind tarsal joint ; cubital
vein of hind wings interstitial with apex of submedian cell ; abdomen
as long as thorax, compressed apically, with a faint, bluish tinge.
Length 18 mm.
Santarem. One specimen. Allied apparently, to melanosoma
Kohl, but differs in the longer pronotum which, in the middle, is
fully half as long as the longest part of dorsulum. The front is
longer and narrower than in melanosoma.
Notocyphus ferrugineus un. sp.
Q .—Ferruginous; sutures of thorax, and apex of dorsal abdom-
inal segments obscurely, black; clypeus subtruncate, or slightly
rounded-out ; labrum about as long as it is broad at base, subtrun-
cate at apex; front with impressed line, which becomes obsolete,
however, toward base of antennze; the latter broken off and missing
beyond the first three joints; eyes but little separated from the
mandibles, the space between them at the top about equal to the
length of first joint of flagellum; hind ocelli separated by a much
greater distance than from the nearest eye-margin ; pronotum arcu-
ate posteriorly ; middle segment not emarginate, posterior surface
depressed, or concave, postero-lateral angles not at all produced,
upper surface shorter than the dorsulum, parted by a longitudinal,
central, impressed line; legs feebly spinose, the longer spur of hind
tibize at the most half as long as the first hind tarsal joint; wings
fulvo-hyaline, the costal half of the superiors fuscous, the apical mar-
gins palest, first recurrent vein received by the second submarginal
cell in the middle, cubital vein of hind wings originating far before
the apex of the submedian cell; abdomen as long as the thorax,
scarcely compressed. Length 17 mm.
Chapada (March). One specimen.
Notocyphus nubilipennis n. sp.
9.—Black ; abdomen reddish, the base of the first, second, and
greater part of third dorsals, and most of ventral surface, blackish ;
head and thorax with a silvery-sericeous pile, especially on the
clypeus and cox; head as wide as thorax; clypeus subtruncate ;
labrum distinctly longer than broad at base, subtruncate and finely
punctured ; eyes distinctly separated from the mandibles, a little
converging above, the space between them at the top equal to the
length of first joint of flagellum, this latter is somewhat shorter than
the second joint; antenne slender, distinctly longer than head and
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233
thorax; pronotum rather shorter, evenly rounded antero-laterally,
posteriorly subangulate; middle segment entire, the upper and pos-
terior surfaces scarcely separated, postero-lateral angles rounded,
the posterior portion slightly depressed, indistinctly striated trans-
versely, stigmal furrow represented by a pit over the hind coxe;
legs feebly spinose, longer spur of hind tibize about two-thirds as
long as first hind tarsal joint; wings subhyaline, darker apically,
including most of marginal, apex of second submarginal and third
entirely, first recurrent vein received by second submarginal before
‘middle, cubital vein of hind wings interstitial with apex of sub-
median cell; abdomen as long as head and thorax, scarcely com-
pressed. Length 14-15 mm.
Santarem. Two specimens.
Notocyphus obscuripennis n. sp.
2 .—Black; palpi yellowish; second dorsal abdominal segment
with a transverse reddish-yellow fascia, which is almost interrupted
medially ; head and thorax with grayish-sericeous pile, densest on
elypeus; clypeus somewhat more than twice broader than long, its
fore margin very slightly incurved; labrum a little longer than
broad at base, emarginate, with the clypeus finely though distinctly
punctured ; front finely punctured, impressed line faint: eyes well
separated from base of mandibles, separated at the top by a distance
greater than the length of the first joint of flagellum ; distance be-
tween hind ocelli greater than that between them and nearest eye-
margin; antennze (last seven joints missing) ; pronotum subangular
posteriorly ; middle segment entire, posterior portion depressed
slightly, postero-lateral angles rounded, not prominent, stigmal fur-
row shallow ; legs feebly spinose, the longer spur of hind tibiz nearly
two-thirds as long as the first hind tarsal joint ; wings fuscous, with a
reddish-purple iridescence, recurrent vein received by second sub-
marginal cell before the middle, cubital vein of hind wings intersti-
tial with apex of submedian cell ; abdomen barely as long as head and
thorax, but little compressed. Length 12 mm.
Chapada (January). One specimen. The red band of abdomen
gives the insect a superficial resemblance to Pompilus margin-
atus Say.
Notocyphus crassicornis Smith.
$ —Black ; including basal half of mandibles; clypeus, labrum,
face, inner and posterior orbits broadly, scape and pedicellum be-
234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
neath, prothorax on sides and above, except a lateral spot, broad cen-
tral and narrow lateral stripes on dorsulum, greater portion of meso-
pleurz, scutellum and postscutellum, middle segment except sides at
base, large spot on coxe, small one of fore trochanters, apex of fore
femora and their tibize and tarsi entirely, first dorsal segment except
apex, second at base, two transverse basal spots on third, spot on
sixth and seventh and a spot on each side of second and third ven-
trals, bright yellow; joints 1-5, or 6 of flagellum fulvous beneath ;
apex of mandibles testaceous ; clypeus about twice as broad as long ;
labrum about as long as clypeus is broad, incurved at apex ; antenne
thick, about as long as head and thorax; eyes almost reaching base
of mandibles; front distinctly impressed; middle segment entire,
rounded behind ; legs feebly spinose, the longer spur of hind tibize
somewhat more than half as long as first hind tarsal joint; wings
pale yellow, fuscous from apex of second submarginal cell, sub-
hyaline at apex, recurrent vein received by second submarginal cell
slightly beyond middle, cubital vein of hind wings originating far
before apex of submedian cell ; abdomen shorter than thorax, scarcely
compressed. Length 12-15 mm.
Chapada (March). Two specimens. This is the Ceropales cras-
sicornis Smith (Ann. Mag. N. H. (8) xii, 1878).
The following table will aid in separating the Brazilian species of
Notocyphus contained in the present collection.’
Entirely ferruginous; abdomen obscurely fuscous at apex of
segments ; (wings yellowish, the anterior portion of superiors,
particularly in submed. cell, pias . . Qferrugineus n. sp.
Otherwise colored,. . . . . 2 bows: Ca
2. Thorax and abdomen entirely Blaciee st Se 3.
Thorax or abdomen, or both, maculated with whites vad or
yellowish, »!.. 4 i373! Lone’ hale at et
SV imesdarkss 2fiue oe she ewe ts So 5 he
Wings more or less vellowien OAS: fe
4, Inner orbits and each side of clypeus, vellowialt salhitel (hoe Sch
strong pale sericeous pile),. ..... ¢ abnor mis Tasch.
Head in front not maculated, . . . . . 3)
5. Antennz with last seven or eight joints orange (nites faintly
purplish ; inner spur of hind tibiz more than half the length
of first hind tarsal ED . . . « Q terminatus n. sp.
1The genus poe has just been monographed by R. ‘Lucas. See
Entomologische Nachrichten, X XIII (1897), H. 5 and 6.
-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235
Antenne entirely black, 6.
. Antenne aes nae than heed mad orn anions
a0 fanart Sm.
ioiane a the most hon eral A the combined length of
head and thorax, . . =. = =. 9! brevicornis m.sp-
. Apical margin only of wings deoe ee aie aes has GY SOE
Almost the outer half of wings blackish, their extreme tips pale
(last seven joints of antenne orange) . . 2 pictipennis n. sp.
. Pronotum unusually short ; antennze thick
. 2 melanosoma ane:
Bronveum moe Heelies ayort. its leneth' in the middle nearly
equalling one-half the anterior width; antenne slender, dis-
tinctly longer than head and thorax,. . . . 9 similis n. sp.
9. Middle segment emarginate posteriorly (maculation of abdomen
reddish or Feddish-yellow))s.< iss so. %os) a4 Sek Seva ee gO:
Middle segment rounded or truncate posteriorly,. . . . . 12.
10. Head and pronotum not maculated,. ........ .1i1.
Inner and posterior orbits, sides of clypeus and line on pronotum
yellowish,. . . . . . Q macrostoma Kohl, 9 dubius n. sp.
11. Abdomen maculated with red,. . . . . . 2 saevissimus Sm.
Abdomen maculated with white,. . . . . . . Q rixosus Sm.
emeeread TN MaCuUlatey a.) a. 2 Pin oo. ce: ee ea ee eo eee
Head maculated,. .... gt Bes) il
13. Wings subhy line: a fuscous elvan incluaiis mare except
base, second submarginal and beyond; greater part of dorsal
surface of abdomen reddish,. . . . . 2 nwbilipennis n. sp.
Wings fuscous, with purplish iridescence; second dorsal segment
with a transverse reddish band,. . . . obscuripennis n. sp.
14. Head, thorax and abdomen richly maculated with yellow; wings
yellow, apical third fuscous; basal antennal joints orange,
st Lhe EG TCL OSStCOTnIS SE.
Hiend ‘ahd iors pick tie inner orbits, clypeus at sides and
spot above insertion of antennze, yellow; wings fusco-hyaline,
with apex of anteriors dark fuscous, apical antennal joints
fulvous beneath ; abdomen maculated with ferruginous,
2 maculifrons Sm.
Pseudagenia amabilis Tasch.
Agenia amabilis Taschenberg, Zeits. f. d. ges. Naturw., XXXIV, 45.
One specimen from Rio de Janeiro (November).
236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Pseudagenia femorata Sm. (=Agenia femorata Sm. non Fabr.).
Santarem. Six specimens without date of capture.
Pseudagenia comparata Sm.
Santarem (February and November). Ten specimens.
Agenia viridis Sm.!
One specimen. Santarem.
Agenia annulata Sm.
Chapada (September). One specimen.
Agenia tarsata Sm.
A specimen collected in April (no locality) is perhaps this species.
Agenia polistiformis Sm.
Santarem. One specimen.
Agenia pallida Tasch.
Chapada (November). The one specimen before me agrees fairly
well with Taschenberg’s description, except that it is not unusually
pale, a character on which Taschenberg lays stress.
Agenia femorata Fabr. ’
Pompilus feenoratus Fabricius, Syst. Piez., 190.
Mararé (April) ; Santarem. Five specimens.
Agenia micans Fabr.
Chapada (April). Onespecimen. Judging from the description,
Anoplius Richardi Lep. is identical with this species.
Agenia chlorosoma Sm.
Santarem. One specimen.
Agenia curvinervis Cam.
Same locality aschlorosoma. The only specimen in the collection
agrees with Cameron’s description.
Agenia producta n. sp.
Q .—Head and thorax coppery-green ; abdomen, coxze, trochan-
ters and femora at base, black; hind tibiz apically and tarsi more
or less fuscous; antennze beneath, tegule and legs except the parts
described above, reddish ; inner orbits narrowly yellow; clypeus with
large punctures anteriorly, its fore margin angularly produced in
the middle; pronotum gently arcuate posteriorly ; middle segment
1A I have pointed out elsewhere, the males of Agenia and Pseudagenia offer
no generic differences. Therefore, the new species described herein of which
only the male sex is known, are all referred to Agenia, notwithstanding the
probability of some belonging to Pseudagenia.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 237
punctato-rugose, feebly impressed down the middle; wings with a
slight yellowish tinge, nervures testaceous, second and third sub-
marginals at the top of about equal length, second recurrent vein
slightly bowed; apical margins of abdominal segments narrowly
and obscurely testaceous; pubescence of body golden and not dense.
Length 9 mm.
Rio de Janeiro (July). One specimen. Allied to Cressoni and
curvinervis Cam., and auripilis Cress. It lacks the rough front of
the latter species.
Agenia rugosa n. sp.
2 .—Head and thorax, including cox and trochanters and base
of femora blue; abdomen black, apical margins of the segments,
narrowly testaceous; medial and hind tibiz and tarsi fuscous, the
femora except base and the fore tibiz reddish ; antennz beneath and
tegule testaceous ; body pubescence cinereous ; clypeus longest medi-
ally, but not angularly produced, convex ; front microscopically
punctured ; pronotum slightly angulate posteriorly ; middle segment
rugoso-punctate, strongly impressed down the middle; wings clear,
nervures black, third submarginal at the top longer than the corre-
sponding portion of the second, second recurrent vein slightly sinu-
ous. Length 9 mm.
Rio de Janeiro (November). One specimen.
Agenia chapade n. sp.
2 .—Dark metallic-blue, abdomen darkest; antenne, coxe, troch-
anters, base of fore femora, apex of fore tarsi, the four hind tarsi
and apex of hind tibize black ; otherwise the legs are reddish; ante-
rior margin of clypeus in the middle formed into a tooth; pronotum
angulate posteriorly, swollen and prominent at sides ; middle segment
with a very faint trace of transverse strize, scarcely impressed down
the middle; calcaria testaceous; abdomen compressed apically ;
wings fuscous, paler at apex, with a purplish reflection, third sub-
marginal at the top a little longer than the corresponding part of
the second, second recurrent vein gently bowed; face and clypeus
with dense cinereous pile. Length 8 mm.
Chapada (May).
Agenia costalis n. sp.
? .—Metallic-green, with a tendency to blue on middle segment ;
antenne paler beneath, tegule, apex of femora, tibize and tarsi, ob-
scure testaceous, the fore tarsi basally, and the apical joints of max-
238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
illary palpi pale; body pubescence cinereous, especially dense on
face and clypeus; anterior margin of the latter rounded, pronotum
subangulate posteriorly ; middle segment finely granulated, slightly
impressed down the middle ; wings with costal margin broadly fus-
cous, otherwise subhyaline, nervures testaceous, second submarginal
narrower than usual, its length at top fully one-third less than the
corresponding part of the third submarginal ; first abdominal seg-
ment rather long, distinctly longer than the second, petiolate.
Length 8 mm.
Santarem. One specimen. The green color also extends on the
cox, trochanters and part of femora.
Agenia albimacula n. sp.
? .—Black, shining, rather densely covered with cinereous pile,
especially on middle segment and abdomen ; spot in middle of inner
orbits, at base of antenne, at apex of scape above anterior margin
of clypeus, and joints 4-8 of flagellum above whitish; a line com-
pletely enclosing the pronotum, tegule, spot on dorsulum posteriorly,
spot on scutellum, legs, and apex of dorsal abdominal segments 2—4
obscurely in the middle, fulvous ; tarsal joints ringed with dark at
apex ; clypeus broadly subtruncate, a smooth shining depression be-
fore anterior ocellus; first and second joints of flagellum about equal
in length; pronotum angular posteriorly ; middle segment appar-
ently smooth, scarcely impressed ; wings subhyaline, fuscous at apex,
and a fuscous cloud fills the second submarginal and apex of third
discoidal cells, third submarginal at top fully one-third greater than
the second at the corresponding part ; legs spinose, but not strongly.
Length 6 mm.
Santarem (February). One specimen. Were it not for the
bearded maxille, 1 should have referred this species to Salius in
consequence of the spinose legs. The basal vein, also, is not inter-
stitial.
Agenia trifasciata n. sp.
é .—Black, head and thorax opaque ; scape, pedicellum, anterior
femora at apex and their tibiz and tarsi reddish-testaceous, remain-
der of legs except coxze obscurely testaceous ; anterior margin of
clypeus and sides of face narrowly yellowish, clypeus rounded an-
teriorly; a depression bordering each hind ocelli outwardly; pro-
notum subangulate posteriorly, evenly rounded in front; middle-
segment apparently smooth, not impressed ; legs slightly spinose ;
ee
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239
wings subhyaline, the anteriors crossed by three fuscous fasciz ; the
first crosses at the basal vein, the second fills base of marginal, sec-
ond submarginal, base of third and apex of third discoidal, the third
fascia at the apex, third submarginal at top about one-quarter
greater than the corresponding portion of second, nervures testa-
ceous, stigma black ; abdomen shining, clavate, compressed, the first
segment about as long as the two following united ; body pubescence
cinereous and sparse. Length 7 mm.
Chapada (October).
Agenia fragilis n. sp.
6 .—Black, with cinereous pubescence; clypeus at sides and an-
teriorly, sides of face, mandibles except base and the palpi, whitish ;
scape beneath, tegule, four anterior trochanters, the femora, anterior
tibize and tarsi, medial tibiz in part, first abdominal segment on
sides and beneath, and second at base, reddish ; calcaria and last
dorsal segment white; pronotum angulate posteriorly ; middle seg-
ment apparently smooth above, at base in the middle with a shining
fovea from which a short impressed line emanates; legs slightly
spinose; wings subhyaline, bifasciate with fuscous, the first fascia
includes the base of marginal, second submarginal and apex of third
discoidal, the second fills the wing beyond the third submarginal,
third submarginal cell at top about one-third greater than the cor-
responding part of the second; abdomen clavate, compressed.
Length 9 mm.
-Maruré (April); Santarem. Three specimens.
Agenia cingulata n. sp,
$ —Black, with cinereous pubescence which is especially dense
on face, clypeus, thorax on sides and beneath, scape beneath, lab-
rum, mandibles except apex, whitish ; tegulee and palpi testaceous ;
anterior and medial femora at apex, hind femora, four anterior
tibiz and sides of first abdominal segment, reddish; calcaria, ante-
rior and medial tarsi whitish, the latter ringed with black at apex
of joints; pronotum angulate posteriorly ; middle segment evidently
smooth, not impressed, legs feebly spinose ; wings clear, fuscous at
apex, nervures and stigma black, third submarginal at top a little
greater than the corresponding portion of the second; abdomen
clavate, compressed, the first segment as long as the two following
united. Length 7 mm.
Chapada (September).
240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Agenia basalis n. sp.
$ .—Head and thorax metallic-green, including coxe; antenne
above, trochanters, four hind tibiz and tarsi and abdomen except
base and apex, fuscous; face, clypeus except medially, mandibles,
palpi, fore coxze beneath, calcaria and Jast dorsal abdominal seg-
ment, whitish ; antenneze beneath testaceous ; all femora and anterior
tibiz and tarsi yellowish; first abdominal segment ringed with
whitish, pronotum subangulate posteriorly ; middle segment micro-
scopically granulated, not impressed ; hind tibize not spinose ; abdo-
men scarcely compressed, first segment but little longer than second ;
wings clear, scarcely darker apically, nervures dark testaceous,
third submarginal at top nearly one-quarter greater than the corre-
sponding portion of second; second recurrent vein sinuous; body
rather densely covered with silvery pubescence. Length 6 mm.
Santarem.
Agenia testacea n. sp.
$ .—Greater part of head and thorax blue-green; face, clypeus,
mandibles and palpi pale yellow; first three antennal joints (re-
mainder missing), prothorax except central spot above, tegule,
pectus, legs entirely and abdomen testaceous-yellow, the abdominal
segments except the first more or less obscure medially ; pronotum
angulate posteriorly ; middle segment not impressed, legs not spin-
ose ; wings clear, with a feeble tinge of yellow, nervures testaceous ;
third submarginal at top about one-fifth greater than the correspond-
ing portion of the second, second recurrent vein slightly sinuous;
abdomen compressed, more robust than either of the four preceding
species, the first segment scarcely as long as the two following
united ; pubescence of body golden and sparse. Length 9 mm.
Santarem. One specimen.
«The new species of Agenia described in the present paper may be
separated as follows:
FEMALES.
1. Wings hyaline, spotted or banded, . :.. . 2... = 2 Wy eumee
Wings otherwise colored, .... . . |S es
2. Wings fuscous, body deep blue; legs sere coxze, trochanters,
apex of hind tibize and medial and hind tarsi red, . chapade.
Wings with costal margin broadly fuscous, otherwise hyaline ;
body greenish ; antennz, apex of femora and tibiz and tarsi
darkitestaceous,.. .. . ..vi; SyhsG) RORY Se eee
—
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241
3. Wings at the most with the tips fuscous; middle segment more
or less rugose, . . . «OS SPs
Wings fasciate, the nea erent eee ondl eubraareial and
apex of third discoidal cells, tips also fuscous ; joints 4-8 of fla-
gellum white; legs fulvous; pronotum maculated with yellow,
: ; . albimacula.
4, Figad oth fea Whe eon Bady Pabeccents cinereus ; anterior
tibise and femora ea base red; wings clear, nervures black,
rugosa.
Head ead hora coppery-green ; Cibody abecenee s golden ; legs,
(except coxee), trochanters, base of femora, hind tibiz Biel
and apex of tarsi red; wing with a slight yellowish tinge,
Mervures testaccOus,. 5 2 =". . - 2s. + .% product.
MALES.
feeWines fasciate, . .' . Sa gh ae Is Ae
Wings not fasciate, at ag riek fine ewe Lan dae ah oa Or
2. Wings trifasciate ; black, with exception of the scape, pedicellum,
fore tibize and tarsi, which are reddish; anterior margin of
clypeus and sides of face narrowly whitish ; tibial spurs testa-
CEOURG se". cre co Karas
Wings Ge cate PESOS a fees except cox, the medial
femora and tibiz, hind femora, first segment at sides and second
at base reddish ; sides of face and clypeus, tibial spurs and last
segment. whitish, .... . J tue ps Tages
3. Greater part of abdomen dark, ae eee pale MN 3 io. ey NS
Abdomen reddish-testaceous, the apical segments more or less
obscure ; prothorax, pectus and legs except apical tarsal joints
yellowish-testaceous ; thorax blue above; clypeus and face yel-
low; first three antennal joints yellowish-testaceous, (remain-
ing joints wanting), eee tc oe 8. testacea.
4, Black, with cinereous pieceoness Caleante it: medial tarsi
white, ringed with black at apex of joints,. . . . cingulata.
Head and thorax greenish; sides of face whitish; four hind
hice and) tarsi black: 2.4.7 -. KPa cls COasalis:
DIPOGON n. gen.
Allied to Agenia.* Head rather flat, broader than thorax; eyes
scarcely separated from base of mandibles, inner margins almost
parallel; ocelli distinct, forming a triangle; antenne rather short,
shorter than in any species of Agenia known to me, but not thick ;
242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
mandibles 4-dentate at apex; maxillee at base with two long curved
and diverging brushes of pale hairs; maxillary palpi prominent,
6-jointed ; labial palpi small, 4-jointed; thorax oblong, compara-
tively longer than in Agenia; legs rather stout, tibial spurs 1-2-2 ;
to the apex the claws are suddenly narrowed from their middle,
which point internally is formed into a small tooth ; legs not spin-
ose, the hind tibie slightly serrated ; abdomen short and stout, the
first segment campulate, with a short petiole; second ventral dis-
tinctly impressed transversely; wings ample (see pl. IV, fig. 1),
stigma large; cubital vein of hind wing originating far beyond apex
of submedian cell. Type D. populator n. sp.
Dipogon populator n. sp. Pl. IV, f. 1.
2 .—Black, more or less covered with grayish pile, especially on
vertex, dorsulum and scutellum; antenne, mandibles, palpi and
tarsi reddish-testaceous ; clypeus transverse, short, its fore margin
broadly subtruncate, front not impressed ; space between hind ocelli
somewhat greater than that between them and nearest eye margin,
the space between eyes above greater than the combined length of
antennal joints 2 and 3; antenne scarcely as long as head and
thorax, first joint of flagellum more than one-quarter longer than
second ; pronotum slightly bowed posteriorly, middle segment en-
tire, finely punctured, more or less rounded posteriorly ; wings clear,
with a fuscous fascia crossing the anteriors at the basal vein, and a
fuscous cloud which fills the lower half of marginal, first submargi-
nal and first discoidal, and the second and third submarginals and
third discoidal entirely; the cloud is not strictly confined to the
points indicated, as it extends slightly beyond third submarginal
and beneath third discoidal ; nervures and stigma black; abdomen
clothed with sparse, long hairs beneath and apically. Length 6
mm.
Corumba (April). One specimen.
Pompilus amethystinus Fabr.
A large series of both sexes. Chapada (February to April) ;
Santarem (April); Corumbé (April); Pedra Branca (April) ;
Uacarizal (February); Rio de Janeiro (October, November) ;
Villeta (May); Marari (April). :
Pompilus echinatusn.sp. PI. IV, f. 2, 3.
@ .—Black, with varying shades of purple and blue; last two ab-
dominal segments more or less with cinereous pile, and long black
get dno
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243
hairs; face and clypeus with cinereous pile, the clypeus incurved
medially ; front shining, obscurely punctured ; space between eyes
at top less than length of first joint of flagellum; space between
hind ocelli about equal to that between them and the eyes, the latter
distinctly converging above; antennz slender, acuminate, the first
joint of flagellum nearly one-third longer than the second ; prono-
tum angulate behind; middle segment rounded, with a faint im-
pressed line down middle; legs exceedingly spinose, calcaria long,
reddish ; the inner spur of hind tibiz nearly two-thirds as long as
the first hind tarsal joint, fore tarsal comb poorly developed in con-
sequence of its spines being widely separated ; claws with a sharp
medial tooth ; abdomen elongate-ovate ; wings fuscous, with purple
reflections, hind pair paler, third submarginal larger than second,
at top nearly three times greater than corresponding portion of sec-
ond basal vein, and cubital vein of hind wings interstitial; head
with rather prominent long hairs, the thorax with them sparser.
Length 15.
Rio de Janeiro (November). A specimen from same locality
(July), measures 13 mm. is blacker, and the second and third sub-
marginal cells differently shaped (see fig. 3). A variety or dimor-
phic form, perhaps.
This species evidently belongs to Kohl’s Group 1.
Pompilus mundulus n. sp.
2 .—Steel blue; antennz and tarsi black, with cinereous pile,
especially dense on clypeus, coxze beneath and middle segment ; head
broader than thorax, with sparse, long, black hairs; eyes reaching
mandibles, not converging, space between them at the top less than
the length of first flagellum joint, space between hind ocelli dis-
tinctly less than that between them and eyes: clypeus large, fore
margin sub-rounded ; front with impressed line; antennz fairly
slender, the first joint of flagellum more than one-third longer than
second ; pronotum angulate posteriorly ; middle segment rounded,
not impressed; legs fairly spinose, inner spur of hind tibiz more
than half bat less than two-thirds as long as first hind tarsal joint,
tarsal comb wanting; claws with a sharp medial tooth ; abdomen
ovate, about as long as thorax, last segment with long, stiff hairs ;
wings fuscous, with reddish-purple reflection, second submarginal
nearly quadrate, but little narrowed above, third submarginal nar-
rowed more than one-half at top, its width at this point about one-
244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
half that of the corresponding part of second; basal and cubital
(of hind wings) interstitial. Length 10} mm.
Chapada (December). One specimen. Belongs to Kohl’s Group 1.
Pompilus triquetrus n. sp.
@ .—Black ; abdomen at base, and dorsals 1-3, or 4, more or less
red (either with red fasciz or entirely of that color); head and
thorax maculated with bright silvery pubescence as follows: front,
face, clypeus, cheeks, prothorax anteriorly and a medially inter-
rupted line on posterior margin, dorsalum posteriorly, postscutellum
(metanotum), large spot on mesopleurze, small spot at each side of
middle segment anteriorly and larger one at postero-lateral angles,
and greater part of coxze ; ciypeusincurved medially ; eyes not con-
verging, reaching mandibles, space between them at top about
equalling the length of first flagellum joint ; space between hind
ocelli about equal to that separating them from eyes; front strongly
impressed before the anterior ocellus ; antennz rather stout, about
equal to length of head and thorax, the first flagellum joint as long
as second and a little more than half of third united; pronotum
angulate posteriorly ; middle segment rounded, scarcely or not im-
pressed ; legs strongly spinose, tarsal comb fairly well developed ;
claws with a sharp median tooth, spurs testaceous, the inner one of
hind tibize about equal to half the length of first hind tarsal joint (in
two smaller specimens it is decidedly shorter) ; abdomen large, broad
at base as in amethystinus, with cinereous pile, beneath and apically
with long black hairs; wings fuscous, with a dull purplish tinge,
second submarginal larger than the third, oblong and narrowed
about one-fourth above, third submarginal triangular; as a rule the
second and third transverso-cubital veins coalescing above (sepa-
rated in one specimen, however) ; basal vein interstitial, the cubital
vein of hind wings either interstitial or originating a short distance
before apex of submedian cell. Length 14-15 mm.
Corumba (April) ; Chapada (November). One specimen has the
spots of thorax golden. Belongs with the preceding species.
Pompilus erraticus Dhlb.
I doubtfully refer a specimen from Corumba (March) to this spe-
cies. It agress with the short description given by Dahlbom, but is
larger, measuring 11 mm. (53 lines).
Pompilus partitus n. sp. Pl. IV, f. 4.
? .—Head, thorax and legs black, opaque ; abdomen except last
two or three segments red ; clypeus broadly subtruncate ; eyes not
1897. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245
reaching mandibles, not converging, the space between them at top
not equal to length of first flagellum joint; space between hind
ocelli equalling that between them and eyes; front with faint im-
pressed line, and with the vertex distinctly striato-punctate ; first
joint of flagellum nearly one-third longer than the second ; pronotum
subangulate behind ; middle segment rounded, not impressed, the
posterior portion slightly depressed ; legs rather strongly spinose,
tarsal comb fairly well developed, claws with a sharp median tooth,
spurs reddish ; the inner one of hind tibiz fully two-thirds as long
as the first hind tarsal joint; abdomen with cinereous pile, apical
segments with sparse long hairs; wings dark fuscous with bluish-
purple reflection, secona submarginal twice the width of third at
top. Length 16 mm.
Chapada (March). One specimen.
Pompilus deceptus n. sp. Pl, IV, f. 5.
Q .—Similar to partitus as to coloration ; anterior margin of cly-
peus incurved ; front smooth or finely punctured, not striate; space
between hind ocelli less than that separating them from eyes, space
between eyes at top equal to length of first flagellum joint ; legs as
in partitus, but the inner spur of hind tibiz equalling but little more
than half the length of first hind tarsal joint; wings as in partitus,
except that the third submarginal is narrower at top, equalling less
than one-half the corresponding portion of second. Length 14-17
mm.
$.—Colored like 9, the thorax with faint purplish reflection ;
face with pale pubescence ; eyes not reaching base of mandibles;
antennz stout, longer than head and thorax, joints of flagellum
rounded out beneath, its first and second joints nearly equal in
length, the first perhaps longer; legs strongly spinose, longer spur
of hind tibize four-fifths the length of first hind tarsal joint, claws
bifid, the inner process the shorter and truncate ; second submargi-
nal cell larger than third, which is much narrowed above, the mar-
ginal cell rather short and broad; abdomen depressed. Length 12
-13 mm.
Chapada (February, April, September). Five specimens. Has
a superficial resemblance to partitus, but is distinguished by smooth
front, etc.
Pompilus angusticeps n. sp.
$ .—Head, thorax and legs black; abdominal segments 1-3 red-
dish, the remainder black; face, scape beneath, sides of thorax
Ni.
246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
sparsely and abdomen with cinereous pile, especially prominent on
dorsal segments 4 and 5; thorax with slight purplish reflection ;
head-longer than broad: clypeus large, hardly twice as broad as it
is long in the middle, front depressed before anterior ocellus, finely
punctured ; space between hind ocelli distinctly less than that be-
tween themand eyes; eyes distinctly separated from base of mandi-
bles, separated above by a distance about equal to the fifth and sixth
antennal joints; joints 1 and 2 of flagellum about equal in length ;
pronotum angulate behind; middle serment rounded behind, not
impressed ; legs strongly spinose, claws bifid, spurs large, the inner
one of hind tibize nearly equal to four-fifths the length of first hind
tarsal joint; abdomen depressed; wings fuscous, darker apically
and basally with bluish reflection, width of third submarginal at top
less than half that of second at same place. Length 13 mm.
Chapada (March). One specimen. Resembles male of deceptus,
but may be distinguished by cinereous band of dorsal segments 4
and 5, elongate head, ete. The antenne are also much shorter. This
may prove to be the male of either partitus or argenteus.
Pompilus argenteus Tasch.
Chapada (December). One specimen. The females of partitus
and deceptus are very similar, superficially, to argenteus. The
medially denticulate clypeus and silvery sides of thorax of the latter
distinguish it from them, however.
Pompilus pygidialis Kohl.
Uacarizal (February); Chapada (April). Three specimens.
Pompilus fervidus Sm.
Chapada (March); Rio de Janeiro (November); Santarem.
Seven specimens.
Pompilus costatus Tasch.
Six specimens. Chapada (January and March); Corumbaé
(April); Santarem. PP. varietatis Smith, is apparently synonymous
with costatus.
Pompilus vinicolor n. sp. Pl. IV, f. 6.
& .—Thorax, legs and base of first abdominal segment, wine-color ;
head, antennze above, apical tarsal joints, and abdomen black ; inner
and posterior orbits, dot on each side of scutellum, postscutellum
(metanotum), narrow lines on cox and two spots on first dorsal
abdominal segment at base, yellow; dorsulum witha black stripe on
each side; clypeus finely punctured, with large, sparse punctures on
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 247
apical portion, its anterior margin slightly incurved in the middle;
eyes almost reaching mandibles, converging above, the space between
them at that point less than the length of first flagellum joint, but
greater than the second; space between hind ocelli about equal or
slightly less than that between them and eyes; first flagellum joint
nearly one-third longer than second; pronotum angulate behind ;
middle segment rounded, not impressed ; legs tolerably spinose, an-
terior tarsal comb short, composed of well-separated spines, claws
with a rather blunt tooth in the middle, longer spur of hind tibiz
equal to about two-thirds the length of first hind tarsal joint, in
smaller specimens somewhat less ; abdomen with cinereous pile, with
a few, black hairs at apex and beneath; wings having the costal
half of superiors fuscous, otherwise subhyaline (a hyaline streak in
the median cell), nervures black ; marginal rather short and narraw,
second submarginal somewhat wider than third. Length 10-15 mm.
Chapada (February, April). Six specimens.
These specimens are subject to variation: The yellow macula-
tion is restricted or extended, the thorax being almost destitute of
yellow in some, while in others that color is decidedly evident. The
hind margin of pronotum, two stripes on dorsulum, spots on middle
segment are yellow in one example, while another has the anterior
portion of clypeus, wine-colored. The front has peculiar sculpture,
which is difficult to describe, but which may be said to consist of
elongate punctures, coalescing and forming irregular, wavy striz.
Pompilus exquisitus n. sp.
2 —Head and thorax black, including coxz, trochanters and
_ base of femora; abdomen, legs and antennz, wine-color; clypeus
(except base), labrum, mandibles, inner and posterior orbits, face,
stripe extending from between antennz up to center of front, hind
margin of pronotum, two stripes on dorsulum, spot on each side of
scutellum, the postscutellum, apex of middle segment and two dots
before it, dot on metapleure, an interrupted oblique stripe on meso-
pleurze, coxse more or less, base of abdominal segments, particularly
the first and second dorsals, the others obscurely, yellow; clypeus
with some large punctures apically, its fore margin slightly incurved
in the middle; front very finely punctured, not impressed ; eyes
almost reaching mandibles, converging above, the space between
them at that point greater than length of first flagellum joint ; space
between hind ocelli a little less than that between them and eyes;
antennee rather short, the first flagellum joint nearly twice as long
248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
as second ; pronotum subangulate behind ; middle segment rounded,
not impressed ; legs rather strongly spinose, claws with a rather long
central tooth giving them the appearance of being bifid, calcaria
and tarsi at base yellowish, longer spur of hind tibiz not equalling
two-thirds the length of first hind tarsal joint ; abdomen not pilose,
microscopically punctured, beneath and at apex with sparse hairs ;
wings yellowish, dusky at tips, the venation practically the same as
in vinicolor. Length 10-11 mm,
Chapada (March, December). Two specimens.
Pompilus familiaris Sm.
Twelve specimens. Uacarizal (February); Chapada (April,
May); Corumba (April).
Pompilus argenteomaculatus n.sp. PI. IV, f. 7.
° Black, with sericeous pile, especially on the abdomen which
has a grayish appearance; face, clypeus, cheeks, prothorax anteriorly
and its posterior margin, short stripe on dorsulum near tegulz, post-
scutellum, greater part of middle segment, coxee more or less, and
spot on mesopleure beneath, silvery, pertaining to golden in some
examples; leg spines, calearia and mandibles medially, reddish ;
clypeus short, more than three times broader than long, fore margin
incurved; eyes reaching base of mandibles, separated above by a
distance equal to less than length of first flagellum joint ; space be-
tween hind ocelli equal to or slightly less than that between them
and eyes; first joint of flagellum about one-third longer than second ;
pronotum angulate behind; middle segment rounded, not impressed,
the posterior surface somewhat flattened ; legs fairly spinose, tarsal
comb short and feeble, claws with a sharp medial tooth, longer spur
of hind tibize somewhat more than half as long as first hind tarsal
joint ; abdomen ovate, first segment rounded anteriorly, beneath
sparsely and the apex with long black hairs; wings subhyaline, the
costal half of superiors and apical margins much darker, third sub-
marginal much larger than second, its width at top nearly twice
greater than the corresponding portion of second. Length 13-14
mm
Chapada (December, February, March). Three specimens.
Pompilus imitator Sm.
Santarem. Five specimens.
Pompilus turcicus Fabr.
Santarem; Uacarizal (February); Corumbé (March, April);
Chapada (November). Six specimens.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 249
Pompilus bilunulatus Sauss.
Rio de Janeiro (November). One male.
Pompilus exclusus Sm.
Santarem. One specimen.
Pompilus insignitus n.sp. PI. IV, f. 8.
$ .—Black, with rather dense silken pile, which is silvery on face,
sides of scutellum, postscutellum and middle segment posteriorly ;
hind margin of pronotum (which is arcuate), fascia at base of second
dorsal segment, a spot at apex of fore femora, and short stripe on all
tibiz externally, yellowish ; five or six basal antennal joints beneath
fulvous; clypeus subtruncate, about twice as wide as long in the
middle; eyes slightly separated from base of mandibles, at the top
the distance between them is about equal to the combined length of
the scape and following two antennal joints; space between hind
ocelli somewhat less than that between them and eyes; antennz
short, barely as long as head and thorax, at any rate not longer, first
and second joints of flagellum about equal in length ; middle segment
rounded behind; legs tolerably spinose, fore tarsi feebly so, claws
bifid, longer spur of hind tibize almost equalling the first hind tarsal
joint; abdomen with apical margin of segments, as well as legs,
obscurely brownish; wings subhyaline, the anterior portion of supe-
riors darker particularly from marginal cell to apex, third submar-
ginal longer than second beneath, at the top, however, nearly one-
half shorter. Length 9-10 mm.
Santarem. Five specimens.
Pompilus singularis n.sp. Pl. IV, f. 9, 10.
$.—Bluish-purple, when held in certain lights changing to
black ; antennz entirely black; head very transverse, nearly one-
third broader than long; eyes very shortly ovate, searcely separated
from base of mandibles, diverging above, at which place they are
separated by a distance about equal to the posterior width of prono-
tum ; ocelli almost forming a curved line, the hind pair separated by
a distance about equal to half that between them and eyes; front
with distinct, even punctures, medially impressed ; clypeus finely
punctured at base, striato-punctate apically broadly truncate; labrum
prominent ; antennee distinctly shorter than head and thorax, thick ;
pronotum angulate posteriorly ; scutellum and postscutellum (meta-
notum) prominent and elevated, finely punctured, the postscutellum
at sides coarsely obliquely striated ; middle segment much lower than
250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
metanotum, rather truncated, above basally obliquely striated, becom-
ing granulate posteriorly, while the posterior surface has a spongy
or porous appearance ; legs scarcely spinose, claws bifid, the ante-
riors with the inner part short, (hind claws missing); abdomen
elongate-ovate, with sparse, black hairs beneath, sixth ventral at
apex with a strong medial emargination on each side of which is a
strong tooth, seventh ventral slightly keeled down middle, its upper
surface, which is visible from above, bounded by a prominent mar-
gin or reflexion; wings broad, dark bluish and purple. Length
18 mm.
Chapada(April). Onespecimen. Thisisa remarkable Pompilus
in the shape of head, sculpture, elevated postscutellum and broad
wings. It comes nearly to that group of species of which pygidialis
Kohl and fervidus Smith, are types. The venation of wings: an
unusually long marginal cell; basal vein originating before apex of
submedian cell; cubital vein of hind wing originating far before
apex of submedian cell.
Pompilus polistoides Sm.
Twenty-three specimens of both sexes. Chapada (March, April,
November, December) ; Corumba and Marurt (April) ; Rio de Jan-
eiro (November); Santarem. This species varies considerably in
size, but the maculation is fairly constant.
Pompilus decedens Sm.
Santarem. One specimen.
Pompilus rhomboideus n. sp. Pl. IV, f. 11.
9? .— Black, with a very faint tinge of blue on abdomen ; front,
clypeus, coxze and abdomen with cinereous pile; head with long,
black, sparse hairs; clypeus incurved medially ; front with an im-
pressed line; front closely punctured; eyes reaching mandibles
almost parallel within, separated at the top by a distance nearly
equal to length of antennal joints 2 and 3; space between hind
ocelli equalling a little more than half that which separates them
from eyes; first joint of flagellum more than one-third longer than
second ; pronotum with large lateral angles tumid, its posterior mar-
gin angulate; middle segment broadly rounded, slightly impressed
in the middle at base; legs spinose, but not strongly, tarsal comb
wanting, claws bifid, longer spur of hind tibize short, equal to some-
what more than one-third the length of first hind tarsal joint ; abdo-
men beneath and apically with long, black hairs; wings dark fuscous
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 251
with strong purplish effulgence, second submarginal rhomboidal,
third submarginal very large, receiving the second recurrent vein
between base and middle, basal vein and cubital vein of hind wings
interstitial. Length 12-14 mm.
$ .—Similar to female, but more slender, the abdomen almost petio-
late; legs scarcely spinose, claws with a basal prominence the ante-
rior pair bifid, longer spur of hind tibize nearly two-thirds as long as
first hind tarsal joint; wings brighter (aniline red and blue).
Length 9-12 mm.
Santarem (February); Marurti (April); Rio de Janeiro (Nov-
ember) ; Chapada (December). Twelve female, ten male specimens.
Seems to be near P. tristis Kohl.
Pompilus nobilis Fabr.
Rio de Janeiro (July, November); Santarem; Chapada (April).
P. multifasciatus Tasch., is probably identical with nobilis.
Pompilus sp.
A series of male specimens from Santarem, which are very close,
in appearance, to nobilis 9, but which probably belong to another
species, perhaps new.
Pompilus sericeifrons n. sp.
9 .—Black, densely clothed with silvery pile, especially on the
sides of thorax, the abdomen sparsely ; antennee, legs and upper sur-
face of thorax as far as middle segment not silvery; clypeus with
fore margin broadly subtruncate, smooth and shining, otherwise
-clothed with silky pile; front densely clothed with pale golden pile,
impressed down the middle; eyes reaching mandibles, very slightly
converging above, at which place they are separated by a distance
greater than the combined length of scape and pedicellum, but
much less than that of first flagellum joint; space between hind
ocelli but little less than that which separates them from the eyes;
antennze rather long and slender, the first joint of flagellum nearly
as long as the two following joints united; pronotum angulate be-
hind, transversely swollen medially ; middle segment indistinctly im-
pressed, posteriorly with coarse transverse strie; legs not very
strongly spinose, no tarsal comb, tarsi testaceous, claws bifid, calcaria
short, the longer spur of hind tibiz about one-fourth the length of
first hind tarsal joint; abdomen ovate, with sparse pale hairs at
apex; wings subhyaline, the anteriors with two broad fuscous bands,
one crossing the wing at apex of median cell, the other including
252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897-
basal two-thirds of marginal, the second and third submarginal, and
part of third discoidal cells, apex of anteriors narrowly, that of pos-
teriors more broadly, faintly fuscous, marginal cell long and lanceo-
late, second submarginal rhomboidal, receiving first recurrent vein
near apex, third submarginal large, narrowed more than one-half
above, at which place it is slightly narrower than the corresponding
portion of second, nervures dark testaceous. Length 17 mm.
Santarem (February). One specimen. Has a superficial resem-
blance to nobilis Fabr.
Pompilus manifestatus Sm. (—Agenia manifestata Sm.).
Santarem. ‘The only specimen represented agrees with the descrip-
tion of Agenia manifestata Smith, but it is not an Agenia.
Pompilus scrupulus n.sp. PI.IV, f. 12.
2 .—Black, clothed with silvery pile which is visible in certain
lights; clypeus short, more than three times broader than long, its
fore margin shining and broadly truncate ; front smooth, opaque, not
impressed ; eyes reaching mandibles, converging above, at which
point they are separated by a distance about equal to the length of
the first flagellum joint; this latter not quite twice as long as the
second joint; space between hind ocelli much less than that between
them and eyes; pronotum angulate behind, transversely bi-tumid ;
middle segment smooth, rounded behind, with a longitudinal medial
impressed line ; legs tending to brownish, rather strongly spinose, no
tarsal comb, claws bifid, calearia short, the longer spur of hind tibiz
about equal to one-third the length of first hind tarsal joint; abdo-
men ovate, testaceous at apex; wings subhyaline, the anteriors
crossed by two fuscous fascia, which are separated from each other
by a yellow fascia, tips slightly fuscous, second submarginal cell
rhomboidal, scarcely half size of third, which at the top is not one-
third wider than the second. Length 11-12 mm.
Santarem. Nine specimens. While the hind tibie are not ser-
rated, vet this species is otherwise so close to some species of Salius
(Cyphononyx) that I am not certain but that it should be referred
to the latter genus.
Pompilus regius Fabr.
Chapada (December, January, April); Santarem. Twenty-five
specimens.
Pompilus scutellatus n. sp. :
é.—Black; tegul and anterior tibi# and tarsi testaceous; hind
margin of pronotum, base of abdominal segments 1-3, and calcaria,
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. DAB
whitish-yellow; head and thorax with silvery-sericeous pile, most
conspicuous on face, clypeus, thorax on sides and beneath and coxe ;
clypeus rather small, its fore margin broadly truncate ; front witha
medial impressed line ; eyes large, reaching base of mandibles, inner
orbits almost parallel, separated above by a distance greater than
the combined length of pedicellum and first flagellum joint; ocelli
large, the space between hind pair about equal to that between
them and eyes; antennze long, much longer than head and thorax
united, the first joint of flagellum a little longer than second; hind
margin of pronotum subangulate ; dorsulum convex ; scutellum un-
usually high and prominent, finely and transversely striated on the
sides; middle segment much below level of rest of thorax, convex,
rounded behind, finely coriaceous and divided by a strong longitu-
dinal impressed line, reaching about two-thirds its length; legs
graceful, not strongly spinose, claws bifid, calcaria long, the longer
of the hind pair not equalling two-thirds the length of first hind
tarsal joint; abdomen subpetiolate, clavate compressed, first segment
longer than second ; wings subhyaline, the superiors crossed by two
fuscous bands, the outer of which is the broader, nervures dark
testaceous, second submarginal rhomboidal, not as large as third,
which is narrowed about one-third to the marginal. Length 15 mm.
Santarem. One specimen.
Pompilus gracillimus Sm.
Chapada (May). One specimen.
Pompilus resplendens n. sp.
$ —Front, cheeks, greater part of upper and lateral portions of
thorax and abdomen black or blackish with a tinge of brown ;
antennee, clypeus, mandibles, palpi, prothorax, legs including cox,
and tegulz, pale castaneous; hind margin of pronotum, spot at apex
of middle segment, one on the anterior coxe, calcaria of medial and
hind legs, and base of dorsal abdominal segments 1-3, yellowish ;
entire insect, especially the front, clypeus and sides of thorax with
golden pubescence; clypeus small, broadly subtruncate anteriorly ;
front ; subopaque, with impressed line distinct; eyes large, reaching
base of mandibles, the inner orbits, if anything slightly diverging
above, at which point they are separated by a distance about equal
to the combined length of flagellum joints 1 and 2; space between
hind ocelli slightly greater than that between them and eyes; an-
tennze longer than head and thorax united, the first and second
254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
joints of flagellum equal in length; pronotum rounded behind ;
scutellum prominent but not unusually so; middle segment rather
flat, impressed for two-thirds its length, the posterior surface, which
is but feebly defined, depressed ; legs tolerably spinose, claws bifid,
longer spur of hind tibize not equal to two-thirds length of first hind
tarsal joint ; abdomen subpetiolate, compressed, clavate, first segment
longer than second; wings subhyaline, a fuscous cloud fills base of
marginal, apex of second and third submarginal entirely, a trace of
a fascia crosses the superiors at apex of median cell, second submar-
ginal rhomboidal, much higher than broad, the third submarginal
much the larger, narrowed somewhat more than half to the mar-
ginal. Length 12 mm.
Chapada (April). One specimen.
Pompilus serratus n. sp.
$ .—Black, with silvery-sericeous pile, especially on the thorax
beneath ; flagellum beneath fulvous; spot on scape beneath, on each
side of clypeus, mandibles except apex, hind margin of pronotum
obscurely, anterior cox in part, calearia of four hind legs, base of
second abdominal segment and spot on seventh dorsal segment,
white; palpi, anterior tibie and tarsi, and tegul, testaceous; ante-
rior margin of clypeus slightly incurved or subtruncate; front not
impressed ; eyes reaching mandibles, inner orbits sinuous, somewhat
diverging above, the space between them at the vertex about equal
to the length of antennal joints 4 and 5; space between hind ocelli
barely half that between them and eyes; joints of flagellum thickest
at base, thereby giving the flagellum a serrated appearance, the first
joint longer than the second; pronotum angulate behind; middle-
segment not impressed, sloping gradually from base to apex; legs
not strongly spinose, claws of anterior and middle tarsi bifid, of the
hind tarsi apparently simple, longer spur of hind tibiz equal to more
than two-thirds the length of first hind tarsal joint; abdomen com-
pressed, subpetiolate ; wings subhyaline, iridescent, changing into a
beautiful milky-blue color when the insect is held in certain lights,
a fuscous cloud includes part of marginal and second submarginal,
and third submarginal entirely, and along the basal vein is a fuscous
stain ; second submarginal rhomboidal, higher than broad, smaller
than the third, the latter narrowed nearly two-thirds toward margi-
nal. Length 11 mm.
Chapada (April) ; Santarem. The antenne are partly missing in
both specimens.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255
Pompilus fragilis Sm.
Chapada (December, April) ; Corumba (April, May) ; Santarem
(May). Eight specimens.
Pompilus ruficoxalis n. sp.
3 .—Head, thorax and legs black with purplish pile ; abdomen
bluish; four hind coxe red; anterior margin of clypeus slightly
incurved or rather subtruncate; front with impressed line; eyes
separated from base of mandibles, inner margins parallel, separated
above by a distance about equal to the third and half of the fourth
antennal joints; space between hind ocelli less than half that separ-
ating them from eyes; antenne slender, first joint of flagellum one-
third longer than second; pronotum angulate behind ; scutellum
elevated, strongly compressed ; middle segment, sloping from base
to apex, with scarcely any convexity, parted for two-thirds its length
by an impressed line; legs rather weakly spinose, claws of fore and
medial tarsi bifid, the hind ones simple, longer spur of hind tibic
equal to about half the length of first hind tarsal joint; abdomen
compressed, subpetiolate, sixth ventral segment deeply and narrowly
emarginate in middle of apical margin, subgenital plate elongato-
acuminate, rather densely hirsute; wings dark fuscous, with purplish
reflection, second submarginal cell rhomboidal, slightly higher than
broad, third very large, narrowed less than one-half toward mar-
ginal. Length 12 mm.
Chapada (May). Onespecimen. The dark body and red medial
and hind cox form a contrast in coloration which is apparently
unique in the Pompilide.
Pompilus sulcatus n.sp. Pl. IV, f. 15,
2 .—Black ; face, clypeus and thorax on sides and beneath with
pale grayish pile, the pronotum anteriorly, and base dorsal abdom-
inal segments 1-3, or 4, with plumbeus pile; flagellum beneath and
tegulz obscurely testaceous; head rather flat, the occiput somewhat
sunken ; front with punctures running into irregular striz; clypeus
with fore margin slightly incurved; eyes well separated from base
of mandibles, the inner orbits converging from above their middle,
separated above by a distance greater than the length of pedicellum
and first flagellum joint united; space between hind ocelli more
than one-third greater than that between them and eyes; antennz
about as long as head and thorax, the first joint of flagellum but
little longer than the second ; cheeks scarcely developed ; pronotum
evenly rounded and convex, angulate behind ; middle segment sub-
256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
rounded or subtruncate, divided longitudinally by a rather broad
shallow furrow, which is indistinct on posterior surface; legs with
with strong, though not plentiful, spines, claws bifid, no tarsal comb,
longer spur of hind tibize equal to more than half length of first hind
tarsal joint; abdomen with a slight purplish cast; wings fuscous,
with purplish reflection, hind pair paler, marginal cell short, some-
what triangular, second submarginal subquadrate longer than high,
third shortly petiolate. Length 10 mm.
Santarem. One example.
Pompilus varius Fabr.
Two (4) specimens in the collection agree with Fabricius’ brief
diagnosis of this species. Chapada (December) ; Santarem.
Pompilus ornamentus n.sp. Pl. IV,f. 13.
$ .—Black, somewhat iridescent in places; head in front, prono-
tum anteriorly, posterior half of middle segment, pleurze with spots,
pectus, legs, more or less particularly coxee and femora beneath ven-
tral abdominal segments 1-3 and dorsals 1 and 2 laterally and bas-
ally, with silvery-white, sericeous pile, on segments 4-7 it is plum-
beus; clypeus with fore margin slightly incurved ; front impressed,
especially before anterior ocellus; eyes separated from base of man-
dibles, converging from above their middle, the space between them
above about as great as the combined length of antennal joints 3 and
4; space between hind ocelli distinctly less than that between them
and eyes ; antenne short, the first andsecond flagellum joints about
equal in length; pronotum subangulate behind ; middle segment but
slightly convex, not impressed, the upper and posterior surfaces not
separated ; legs strongly spinose, claws bifid, longer spur of hind
tibiz about five-sixths as long as first hind tarsal joint; abdomen
depressed, elongato-fusiform ; wings fuscous, paler medially, with a
purplish cast, second submarginal subquadrate, distinctly longer
than high, third smaller, triangular, greatly narrowed above.
Length 13 mm.
Chapada (December). One specimen.
Pompilus annulipes n. sp. Pl. IV, f. 14.
$ .—Head, thorax and legs, black ; abdomen and antenne red;
posterior margin of pronotum and small spot at apex of scape be-
neath, yellow; basal half of hind tibize and joints 1-4 of medial and
hind tarsi except their extreme base and apex, whitish ; thorax and
base of abdominal segments with grayish pile, the middle segment
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 257
with dense silvery pubescence, head clothed with long pale hairs;
elypeus truncate anteriorly ; front and vertex with a peculiar wrinkle-
like sculpturing ; eyes well separated from base of mandibles, almost
parallel within, separated above by a distance greater than the com-
bined length of the pedicellum and joints | and 2 of flagellum ; space
between hind ocelli slightly greater than that between them and
eyes ; antennee short, flagellum with joints irregular or swollen be-
neath, joints 1 and 2 about equal in length; pronotum subangulate
(almost arcuate) behind; middle segment subtruncate, impressed
down middle, legs with strong, though not dense, spines, claws bifid,
longer spur of hind tibiz slightly more than half as long as first
hind tarsal joint; abdomen short, compressed, a yellow spot on last
dorsal; wings subhyaline, iridescent, apical margin of anteriors
broadly fuscous, second submarginal nearly quadrate, third smaller,
shortly petiolate. Length 11 mm.
Corumbé (April). One specimen.
Pompilus personatus n. sp.
$ —Colored like annulipes, except that the hind femora and the
middle and hind tarsi are reddish, and the flagellum black; pubes-
cence or pile of head and thorax bright silvery, that on front and
thorax above somewhat golden ; clypeus slightly incurved anteriorly ;
front and vertex smooth, at most with very fine punctures; eyes
separated from base of mandibles but by a much less distance than
in annulipes, separated above by a distance about equal to combined
length of pedicellum and flagellum joints 1 and 2; space between
hind ocelli slightly less than that between them and eyes; thorax
and legs as in annulipes, but calcaria reddish ; abdomen rather de-
pressed, last dorsal segment with silvery pile; wings colored as in
annulipes, with the apex of both wings dark, second submarginal
cell almost oblong, larger than the third, which while greatly nar-
rowed above, is not petiolate. Length 10-11 mm.
Corumba (April); Santarem. Two specimens.
Pompilus conterminus Sm.
Chapada (March, April) ; Pedra Branca (April). Three spec-
imens.
Pompilus fulgidifrons n. sp.
9° .—Black ; first two abdominal segments red: face, clypeus,
thorax beneath with silvery pile; tarsi obscurely reddish; clypeus
finely and closely punctured, its fore margin gently incurved ; front
258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
shining, impressed down middle; eyes almost reaching base of man-
dibles, converging somewhat above, the space between them at that
point about equal to the combined length of pedicellum and first
flagellum joint; space between hind ocelli slightly less than that
separating them from the eyes; antennz fairly long, the first joint
of flagellum not quite one-third longer than second; pronotum sub-
angulate behind; middle segment rounded, not impressed; legs
strongly, but not densely spinose, fore tarsi with comb, claws bifid,
longer spur of hind tibize more than half as long as first hind tarsal
joint ; abdomen robust, ovate, ventral segments with large, sparse
pnnctures from which long, black hairs project ; wings fuscous, with
violaceous reflection, second submarginal cell rhomboidal, its length
and height nearly equal, the third longer, narrowed about four-fifths
to the marginal. Length 15 mm.
Chapada (March). One example.
Pompilus caliginosus Fox (n. n. for funereus Tasch. non Lep.).
Chapada (March). One example. Lepeletier de Saint Fargeau
used the name funereus for a Pompilus in 1845.
Pompilus auripennis Fabr.
One example. Santarem.
Pompilus rutilans n. sp.
9° —Ferruginous; sutures of thorax more or less, and abdomen
in part, stained with fuscous; clypeus rather long, fore margin dis-
tinctly incurved ; eyes separated from base of mandibles, converging
above at which point they are separated by a distance somewhat
greater than length of fourth antennal joint ; space between hind
ocelli about equal to that between them and eyes; first joint of
flagellum more than a third longer than second ; pronotum strongly
convex, rather swollen laterally, hind margin arcuate; middle seg-
ment strongly suleate down middle, its postero-lateral angles strongly
tuberculate, posterior surface strongly depressed ; legs with tolerably
strong spines, fore tarsi with comb, claws with a strong sharp tooth
near base within, longer spur of hind tibiz distinctly less than half
the length of first hind tarsal joint; first abdominal segment sub-
truncate anteriorly ; wings yellowish, toward apex subfuscous, nery-
ures testaceous, a fuscous fascia crosses superiors along the basal vein,
and a broader one originates in marginal cell, passing through apex
of second and base of third submarginal into the third discoidal cell,
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259
second submarginal subquadrate, third larger narrowed about one-
half to marginal. Length 19 mm.
Chapada.
This species is remarkable in the bituberculate middle-segment.
Pompilus (Aporus) quadrimaculatus Sm.
Chapada (March). One example.
Pompilus (Aporus) minutus Sm.
Santarem. Three specimens.
The following table will aid in determining the new species of
Pompilus preceding :
Bere ag pt ae et le
alese bY es eat ei ee eee clas
2. Middle segment Poona unar nee Lis Ay oe ia Eee
Middle segment strongly bituberculate: entirely reddish ; wings
yellowish, .... Su. pee Shoe eee IERELLANS!
3. Claws armed with a taach milan AIR eA tiie Bet eats Oc
laws bifid), «.°).i%... 0: Lire eartyes Ile
4, Basal vein and cubital vein of Wa wings STL fee OE
Basal vein and cubital vein of hind wings not merical 210:
5. Steel-blue; length 10 mm., ........ =. . mundulus.
MiPherMmIseteOlONCds (6 GP puedes ose, a RO: ee oO
Smexchycentatehy: blacks. i 5... 2S oehay ys <5 Bee ee BOs
Body more or less red,. . . . . . foe ea ke hee
7. Thorax not silvery ; andemen pecans pie the fifth segment
with pale, sericeous pile, . . . . . rier ye) -, eChInatts:
Thorax maculated with bright Bivens poneeeence abdomen
erayish. 0 & |(ei Mantle, teu e@ngentcomaculatus,
8. Thorax black, Dae tacue, ere Pete tes Ball, in Oh
Thorax maculated with bright alveer Pbeeen ce: . triquetrus.
9. Front distinctly striato-punctate,. ...... . . partitus.
Front smooth, or very finely punctured,. . . . . . deceptus.
10. Head and abdomen fuscous; thorax brownish; wings with
costal half fuscous,. . . . . . . vinicolor.
Head and thorax black ; abdomen hard wings yellowish,
exquisitus,
11. Third eipmarenial call very lates fully: Se the size of second,
HOt PetlOlate, 2). 5. ae a. Hom ORRBtE eT ti oH
Third submarginal small, not pais ok size “8 Seconds. is0 =) £2.
260
12.
13.
14.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Abdomen black, with cinereous pile; third submarginal cell
petiolate smaller than second; middle segment strongly sul-
cate down middle, ...... . . «) Cgsulenamnes
Abdomen with first two segments sodk oe submarginal not
petiolate, but greatly narrowed to Bee sol somewhat larger
than second; middle segment not suleate,. . . fulgidifrons.
Wings dark fuscous with purplish or aniline red effulgence;
body entirely black, subopaque,. . . . . . . rhomboideus.
Wings subhyaline, or yellowish fasciate with fuscous,. . . 14.
Front not sericeous; wings with at least the portion between the
dark fasciz, yellowish. Length 11-12 mm.,. . . serupulus.
Front covered with dense sericeous pile; wings hyaline between
fascize.’ Length’ 17 (mm...) 2.0: .) 2). ase
ils oMIEROE Reso titey 4 ts 8a oy es 8 - 03 Se oie
Anterior and Trade claws bifid, TOnenOr smnpnet body dark,
four hind coxe red, . . . 2. 5). 3) eee
16. Abdomen more’or less’ red; .-. .'.'.'.'.'. 2° =e
Abdomen not tred;. 2.0: 2 0 S38) Or
17. Wings dark fuscous ; first three segments red,. . . . . . 18.
19:
20.
21.
22.
23.
Wings subhyaline, darker apically ; abdomen entirely red, 19.
. Head in front not much longer than broad; abdomen without
cinereous pile, . . . ... MPa 5! (2102717007
Head in front much longer dian deena ; ahdowinel segments four
and five with cinereous pile,. . . ... . . . angusticeps.
Antenne reddish; tarsal joints broadly mated with white ;
third submarginal cell petiolate,. ....... ape
Antenne black; tarsi and four hind tibiz red; third submar-
ginal not petiolate... .%. . 9. . . .'. 2° 7 §persmmaeae
Abdomen depressed, subsessile, . . ......... ~.2zid.
Abdomen more or less compressed, gubpenulute clavate, . . 22.
Posterior margin of pronotum and base of second dorsal abdom-
inal segment, yellowish ; not maculated with pale pile; wings
subhyaline, darker along costa, . . ... . . . insignitus.
Not maculated with yellow, but the thorax noe basal segments
of abdomen spotted with whitish pile; wings dark, paler
medially,’ . ys. = . . . . ornamentus.
Wings dark fuscous throughout fea nue or aniline red efful-
gence: body dark) 37.2 5): . .. . . rhomboideus.
Wings subhyaline, ouly in part fea Be . 28.
Wings crossed by two heavy fasciz; legs pieces ke a seg-
ments 1-3 whitish; length 15 mm... . . . . seutellatus.
——o”=_”——
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261
Wings with a fuscous cloud in vicinity of marginal and submar-
CES: Mitr at nget rete hee fi Si, 2 e's
24. Flagellum serrated bonenthe legs except calcaria black, .
SN tvactre, gets Lats serratus.
Flagellum even beneath ; fronts aati fen ae golden pubes-
cence; legs including cox castaneous; first three segments
broadly yellowish at base,. . . . . .. . . . resplendens.
Planiceps perpictus n. sp.
2 .—Black ; flagellum beneath fulvous; calcaria whitish; spot
on each side of dorsal segments 2-4, and an elongate one on sixth,
yellowish ; meso- and metapleurze and part of middle segment with
dense silvery pubescence, that on coxee, face and clypeus less dense ;
dorsulum at apex and scutellum with dense golden pubescence ;
clypeus small sparsely punctured, anterior margin truncate; front
and face smooth and shining along eyes, the front above and vertex
striato-punctate, opaque ; space between eyes above greater than
combined length of antennal joints 2-4; space between hind ocelli
somewhat less than that between them and eyes; first joint of flagel-
lum about one-fifth, or less, longer than second; pronotum as long
as dorsulum and scutellum united, its hind margin slightly arcuated ;
middle segment subtruncate behind, its upper surface divided by a
longitudinal furrow ; legs spinose but not very strongly, claws bifid ;
abdomen compressed, longer than head and thorax; wings with
superiors dark fuscous, with the median cell (except base and apex),
and a fascia crossing through apex of first submarginal, and discoidal
and base of third discoidal cells, white, extreme tips and inferiors
subhyaline, the latter stained with pale fuscous. Length 17-21 mm.
Chapada, (March, April, October). The species assigned to vari-
pennis Perty by Spinola is evidently not that species. Perpictus
and varipennis Spin., (non Perty) are apparently closely related,
but I think distinct, although they may yet be proved to be but
varieties, varipennis Spinola, having but five abdominal spots,
whereas vartegatus has seven.
Planiceps Herbertii n. sp.
@ —Black somewhat bluish; a spot at each side of dorsal seg-
ments 2 and 3, and the sixth almost entirely yellow; calcaria pale;
fore tarsi testaceous ; flagellum especially beneath and palpi brown-
ish; apical margin of clypeus and mandibles medially, ferruginous ;
front with brownish pile; clypeus, thorax on sides and beneath with
18
262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
silvery pile, the apex of dorsulum with pile similar to that of front ;
clypeus very short, broadly subtruncate, sparsely punctured; front
and face depressed along eyes, particularly the face; eyes diverging
above, reaching base of mandibles, separated above by a distance
about equal to length of antennal joints 2-5 united ; fore ocellusin
distinct fovea, the space between hind pair greater than that between
them and eyes; this intervening space depressed; antennz stout
hardly as long as length of pronotum and dorsulum, first joint of
flagellum nearly as long as the two following united; posterior mar-
gin of pronotum slightly angular; middle segment subtruncate, the
posterior surface a little depressed; legs robust, rather strongly
spinose, fore femora less than three times longer than broad, claws
bifid ; abdomen smooth, compressed beyond base ; fore wings fuscous,
bifasciate with yellowish, their tips pale, hind wings except apex
subhyaline with a milky-blue reflection, second submarginal receiv-
ing both recurrent veins. Length 16 mm.
Santarem. One specimen. Seems to be near Lacordairii Guérin,
but last segment is yellow above, not beneath, and the wings are
apparently different.
Planiceps venustus Lep.
Santarem. One example.
Planiceps (?) jugosus n. op.
9° Black ; more or less clothed with silvery pile, especially on
sides of thorax; antennsz beneath fulvous; second and third dorsal
segments with a lateral pale yellow spot, the sixth segment orange;
fore femora much less swollen than usual; first and second joints of
flagellum about equal in length; pronotum margined on each side
by a strongly developed ridge or fold, posterior margin sharply
angulate; dorsulum posteriorly clothed with yellow pubescence ; fore
wings fuscous, crossed by a hyaline band at apex of first submarginal
cell, the median cell also hyaline, tips subfuscous, hind wings sub-
hyaline, iridescent, second submarginal receiving both recurrent
veins. Length 6 mm.
Chapada (April). One specimen. This is very distinct in its
small size and carinate pronotum.
Planiceps diverticulus n. sp.
? .—Black ; with scant purplish pile; tips of mandibles red ; tarsi
testaceous apically ; thorax beneath sparsely, coxz in part and pos-
tero-lateral angles of middle segment, with silvery pile or pubescence ;
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 263
clypeus greatly depressed beneath level of face, fore margin rounded ;
bases of antennze contiguous, situated below level of face; the latter
when viewed from side more prominently convex than usual; front
not impressed; eyes a little separated from base of mandibles,
diverging slightly above, the space between them at that point
nearly equal to the length of antennal joints 3-5 united ; space be-
tween hind ocelli distinctly greater than that between them and eyes;
hind ocelli situated in shallow depressions; antenne short, first
joint of flagellum, if anything, slightly shorter than second ; prono-
tum angulate behind; middle segment subemarginate behind, the later-
al angles rounded, legs rather strongly spinose, claws cleft ; fore femo-
ra at least three times as long as their greatest width ; abdomen com-
pressed except at base; wings dark fuscous, with bluish pile, some-
what paler medially, second recurrent nervure received by the cubital
vein beyond apex of second submarginal cell. Length 10-15 mm.
Chapada (April, September). Twospecimens. Resembles canes-
cens Smith, but is larger, less pilose, has shorter antenne, ete. The
bunch of silvery pubescence on each postero-lateral angle of middle
segment is apparently a good superficial character.
Planiceps canescens Sm. (—Aporus canescens Sm.).
Santarem. Four specimens. Smith’s description is too meagre
to indicate whether canescens is an Aporus or Planiceps. The spec-
imens in this collection agree with it, however, and they are surely
Planiceps.
The Brazilian species of Planiceps, excluding P. varipennis and
Lacordairii Guérin, which I have not seen, may be tabulated as
follows:
1. Wings fasciate or maculate; abdomen spotted,. . . . . . 2,
Wings fuscous throughout; abdomen unicolored,. . . . . 5.
2. Fore wings black, with the median cell (except base and apex),
and a fascia beyond, white, apex subhyaline; hind wings
stained with fuscous; dorsulum posteriorly and scutellum with
pale, dense, pile; abdomen seven spotted,. . . . erpictus.
Fore wings fuscous, bifasciate with subhyaline or yellow,. . 3.
3. Pronotum laterally not ridged; length 12 mm. or over, . . 4.
Pronotum sharply carinated or ridged laterally; length 6 mm.;
dorsulum posteriorly with yellow pubescence; second and
third dorsal segments with a pale spot on each side, the sixth
eniirely tMlvous,, : 4%... --..oie INT U- halts) oo lb OSU.
264 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
4, Wings bifasciate with yellow, tips pale; face strongly depressed
behind each antennze; fore femora greatly swollen, their
greatest width equal to more than one-third their length ; all
abdominal spots yellow,. . . . os eo 3 ee ere
Wings bifasciate with subhyaline, pe pale; face not strongly
depressed behind antennz; fore femora not greatly swollen,
the greatest width less than one-third their length; spots on
segments 2 and 3 pale, on segment 6, fulvous,. . . venustus.
5. Second recurrent vein received by the cubital vein far beyond
apex of second submarginal cell; body almost without cinere-
ous pile, pertaining to purplish ; a patch of silvery pile at sides
of apex of middle segment,. . . . ... . . diverticulus.
Second recurrent vein interstitial with second transverso-cubital
vein; body with distinct cinereous pile,. . . . . canescens.
Salius (Group ?) transversus n. sp.
2 .—Blue; flagellum, tip of abdomen and tarsi black; head trans-
verse, broader than long; clypeus subconvex, closely punctured, fore
margin somewhat reflexed, subtruncate ; front closely and distinctly
punctured, strongly depressed before the anterior ocellus; occiput
indistinetly punctured ; eyes broadly subovate, almost reaching base
of mandibles, diverging toward top, where they are separated by a
distance nearly equal to the combined length of antennal joints 3-5 ;
space between hind ocelli about equal to half that between them and
eyes ; antennz robust, the flagellum slightly thickened medially ;
pronotum short, sharply angulate behind ; scutellum and postscutel-
lum raised inthe middle longitudinally; middle segment subtrun.
cate, not impressed above, the posterior surface rather coarsely
striato-punctate ; legs tolerably spinose, hind tibize strongly serrated
externally, no tarsal comb, fore and medial claws bifid, hind claws
missing ; abdomen depressed, finely and distinctly punctured, particu-
larly beneath, second ventral with distinct, transverse impression,
anterior to which the segment is black and opaque, ventral segments
with long sparse, black hairs, which are also present on the apical
dorsals, the apical segment particularly hirsute ; wings dark fuscous
with brilliant blue reflection, marginal cell elongate and acuminate,
submarginals large, the second oblong, narrow, smaller than third
which is narrowed about one-quarter to marginal, basal vein received
before apex of submedian cell, cubital vein of hind wings received
far before apex of submedian cell. Length 19 mm.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265
Chapada (April). This species is remarkable for the very trans-
verse head which in many respects is not dissimilar to that of Cero-
pales. The hind claws are missing in the only example in the col-
lection, which was not the case, however, when I first examined it.
Then the hind claws, as near as I can remember, were simple, a
character which would exclude the species from any of the present
known groups of Saldius. Having nothing at present but my memory
to rely on, I would not care to assert that such a character existed,
although of the opinion that future specimens will indicate its pres-
ence.
Salius ( Cyphonyx) brevicornis Tasch.
Corumba (April). One specimen.
Salius (Cyphonyx) diversus Sm. (—Pompilus diversus Sm.).
Chapada. One specimen.
Salius (Cyphonyx) pilifrons n.sp. PI. IV, f. 16.
2 .—Black; mandibles ferruginous in greater part; tarsi brown-
ish; front and dorsulum posteriorly with dense golden pile, face,
clypeus, thorax on sides and beneath and abdomen more or less,
with silvery pile; clypeus short, transverse, more than four times
broader than long, fore margin broadly subtruncate; eyes reach-
ing base of mandibles, converging somewhat to the top, where they
are separated by a distance not quite equal to length of first flagel-
lum joint; space between hind ocelli less than that between them
and eyes; first joint of flagellum nearly or quite as long as the two
following united; pronotum angulate behind, its antero-lateral
angles swollen ; middle sezyment rounded, impressed down the mid-
dle; legs strongly spinose, the serration of hind tibize, however, not
very distinct, claws bifid, longer spur of hind tibiz equal to less than
half the length of first hind tarsal joint ; abdomen subsessile, apical
margins of ventral segments testaceous ; wings subhyaline, tips darker,
two broad fuscous fasciz cross the anteriors, second cubital rhom-
boidal smaller than third. Length 12 mm.
Santarem. One specimen.
Salius (Cyphonyx) opacifrons Fox.
Three specimens of this species, which was originally described
from Jamaica, West Indies. Santarem.
Salius (Cyphonyx) ichneumoniformis Sm.
One specimen. Santarem. Thisis the Pompilus ichneumoniformis
of Smith.
266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Salius (Priocnemis) tegularis n.sp. PI. IV, f. 17.
2 .—Black; legs, tegulee, middle segment, and base of abdomen,
red; head in front and thorax densely clothed with golden pile, in
addition to which a long, sparse, pale pubescence is present, espe-
cially on thorax beneath; clypeus broadly subtruncate, about
three times broader than long; front impressed; eyes not reach-
ing mandibles, if anything diverging above, where they are separ-
ated by a distance about equal to the first and half of the second
joints of flagellum; space between hind ocelli less than that separ-
ating them from eyes; antennz rather long, acuminate, the first
joint of flagellum about one-quarter longer than second; prono-
tum not strongly angulate behind; middle segment not strongly
convex sloping from base to apex, not impressed ; legs rather slender,
fairly spinose, serration of hind tibiz distinct, longer spur of latter
less than one-third as long as its first tarsal joint, claws with a tooth
near base; first abdominal segment subpetiolate ; wingssubhyaline,
faintly tinged with yellow, costal half of anteriors fuscous, third sub-
marginal cell more than twice larger than second. Length 12 mm.
Chapada (October). One specimen.
Salius (Priocnemis) sanguinolentus Sm.
Santarem. Onespecimen. This is the Agenia sanguinolenta of
Smith.
Salius (Priocnemis) basirufus n. sp. PI. IV, f. 18.
2 .— Black ; first three abdominal segments red ; face with silvery
pubescence ; head and thorax with long, sparse hairs ; clypeus rather
large, about twice as broad as long, anterior margin shining, broadly
subtruncate; front impressed, rather strongly convex; eyes reach-
ing base of mandibles, slightly diverging above, where they are
separated by a distance nearly equal to length of joints one and two
of flagellum; space between hind ocelli slightly less than that be-
tween them and eyes; first joint of flagellum about one-sixth, or less,
longer than second; pronotum angulate behind; middle segment
short, not rounded, but rather sloping from base to apex, but not
distinctly ; legs scarcely spinose, hind tibiz strongly serrated, how-
ever; abdomen subopaque, first segment short subpetiolate, impres-
sion of second ventral segment very distinct; wings fuscous with
reddish-purple reflection, third submarginal larger than the second,
narrowed nearly one-half to marginal, second submarginal narrowed
about one-quarter above. Length 9-10 mm.
Chapada (October, November, December). ‘Three specimens.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267
Salius (Priocnemis) rutilus n. sp. Pl. IV, f. 19.
$ .—Ferruginous ; antennz fuscous apically; clypeus rounded
anteriorly ; eyes almost reaching base of mandibles diverging above,
separated on the vertex by a distance about equal to the first three
antennal joints; space between hind ocelli distinctly less than that
between them and eyes; antenne long and slender, first joint of
flagellum but little longer than second; occiput slightly prominent
behind ocelli; pronotum strongly arcuate; middle segment subcon-
vex, sloping from base to apex; legs tolerably spinose, hind tibize
strongly serrated, its longer spur nearly or about equal to half the
length of first hind tarsal joint ; abdomen subpetiolate, the first seg-
ment elongate, as long as the two following united; wings sub-
hyaline, two fasciz and tips slightly darker, nervures testaceous,
recurrent veins received by the submarginal cells between base
and middle. Length 8 mm.
Santarem.
Salius (Priocnemis) varipes n. sp.
9 .—Black ; antennz more or less especially beneath, clypeus and
mandibles sometimes, four anterior tibize and tarsi more or less, the
fore femora sometimes, reddish-testaceous; face and clypeus with
dense silvery pubescence, the remainder of the body with cinereous
pile; eclypeus with fore margin subtruncate, about three times or
more broader than long; front scarcely impressed; eyes almost
reaching base of mandibles, the space between them at top rather
less than that at bottom, a little greater than the combined length
of antennal joints 2 and 3; space between hind ocelli slightly less
than that between them and eyes; pronotum angulate behind ;
middle segment short, rounded, not impressed, but with a triangular
fovea at base above; legs feebly spinose, hind tibize delicately ser-
rated, its longer spur fully equal to half the length of first hind tarsal
joint; abdomen short, the first segment short, subpetiolate; wings
subhyaline, tips darker, the superiors with or without a small fus-
cous cloud in the vicinity of second submarginal cell, the latter
smaller than the third narrowed about one-quarter above, receiving
the first recurrent vein in the middle, or slightly before it, third sub-
marginal narrowed about one-quarter above, receiving the second
recurrent vein before the middle. Length 6 mm.
Corumbé (March); Chapada (April, November). Four spec-
imens.
268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Salius (Priocnemis) rufitarsus n. sp.
2 .—Black ; antennz except five last joints, all the tarsi and fore
tibize, reddish ; pubescence of head and thorax sparse, almost want-
ing ; clypeus rather large, fore margin broadly subtruncate, less than
three times broader than long ; front impressed; eyesseparated from
base of mandibles, space between them at top equal or greater than
length of antennal joints 2 and 3; space between hind ocelli less
than that between them and eyes; antennz rather stout, the first
joint of flagellum nearly one-quarter longer than second; pronotum
angulate behind ; middle segment short, rounded, with some trans-
verse folds, or rather transversely rugose, not impressed ; legs toler-
ably spinose, hind tibiz strongly serrated, its longer spur equal to
barely one-third the length of first hind tarsal joint; abdomen
clothed with pale hairs at apex, shortly subpetiolate; wings sub-
hyaline, tips darker, crossed by two dark fascise, second submarginal
narrowed about one-quarter above receiving the first recurrent vein
a little before middle, third submarginal much larger, narrowed
about one-third above, and receiving second recurrent vein in the
middle. Length 10 mm.
Chapada (April). One example.
Salius (Priocnemis) citricornis n. sp.
2 .— Black, with cinereous pile; head and thorax with rather
long sparse pale pubescence; flagellum except basal joints above,
pale yellow; tarsi rufo-testaceous; clypeus broadly subtruncate,
searcely three times as broad as long; front, not impressed ; eyes
not or scarcely converging above, reaching base of mandibles, the
space between them at top about equal to the length of antennal
joints 2 and 3 united; space between hind ocelli less than that be-
tween them and eyes; antenne slender, first joint of flagellum about
one-sixth longer than second; pronotum angulate behind, dorsulum
strongly convex; middle segment subrounded, rather declining from
base to apex, not distinctly impressed ; legs tolerably spinose, the
serration of hind tibize, however, not very distinct, the longer spur
of the latter nearly one-half as long as the first hind tarsal joint;
abdomen subpetiolate; wings subhyaline, the tips of the anteriors
and two cross fascis, fuscous, third submarginal cell nearly three
times the length of second, receiving the second recurrent vein be-
tween base and middle, second submarginal narrowed one-quarter
above, receiving first recurrent vein in middie. Length 8 mm.
Santarem. One specimen.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269
Salius (Priocnemis) serrulus n. sp.
2 .—Black ; antenne testaceous, legs darker : mesopleurze densely
silvery, remainder of insect with cinereous pile; clypeus anteriorly
and most of mandibles, ferruginous; clypeus strongly depressed
transversely, before anterior margin, front scarcely impressed , eyes
reaching base of mandibles, almost parallel within, space between
them at top about equal to length of antennal joints 2 and 3; space
between hind ocelli distinctly less than that between them and eyes ;
first joint of flagellum about one-fifth or more longer than second ;
pronotum not distinctly angulate ; middle segment rounded behind,
slightly impressed down middle, the posterior face more strongly so ;
legs not strongly spinose, but the hind tibize with a remarkably
strong serration when the smallness of the insect is considered ;
longer spur of hind tibize fully equal to half the length of first hind
tarsal joint; abdomen subcompressed apically, shortly subpetiolate ;
wings subhyaline, iridescent, the superiors with the base, tips and
two cross fascize, fuscous, second and third submarginal cells of almost
equal size, each receiving the first and second recurrent veins respec-
tively between their base and middle. Length 5 mm.
Corumbaé (March). One specimen.
Salius (Priocnemis) setaceicornis n. sp.
? .—Black, with a steel-blue reflection and rather densely clothed
with cinereous pubescence ; clypeus. broadly subtruncate, or slightly
rounded-out, not much more than twice as broad as long; front not
impressed; eyes almost reaching base of mandibles, if anything
slightly diverging above, where they are separated by a distance
fully equal to the length of antennal joints 1 and 2 ; space between
hind ocelli less than that between them and eyes; antenne long,
setaceous; pronotum angulate behind; middle segment rounded
behind, with a slight depression above at base; legs not strongly
spinose, the serration of hind tibiz not distinct, longer spur of the
latter equal to somewhat more than half the length of first hind
tarsal joint; abdomen shortly subpetiolate; wings subhyaline, the
tips and a cross fascia in the vicinity of the second submarginal cell,
fuscous, second submarginal smaller than third, narrowed one-quar-
ter above and receiving the first recurrent vein in the middle, third
submarginal narrowed nearly one-half above, receiving the second
recurrent vein before the middle. Length 9-10 mm.
Chapada (April); Santarem. Three specimens.
270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897..
Salius (Priocnemis) congruus n. sp.
2 .—Head and thorax black; legs and abdomen steel-blue, an-
tennal joints 8-12, fulvous, last joint dark at tip, scape and base of
flagellum beneath testaceous ; head large, much broader than thorax,
somewhat subquadrate ; clypeus rather flat, broadly truncate, three
times or more broader than long; front faintly impressed; eyes.
almost reaching base of mandibles, slightly, if anything, converging
above, at which point they are separated by a distance greater than
the combined length of antennal joints 2 and 3; space between hind
ocelli much less than that between them and eyes; antennz long,
setaceous, first joint of flagellum but little longer than second;
pronotum angulate behind; middle segment sloping gradually from
base to apex, slightly convex, slightly depressed in middle before
apex; legs scarcely spinose, the serration of hind tibize exceedingly
delicate, and indistinct, longer spur of hind tibize about equal to:
half the length of first hind tarsal joint; abdomen shortly subpetio-
late; wings subhyaline, the tips and two cross fascize of the anteriors,
dark, second submarginal cell subquadrate, scarcely half the size of
third, and receives the recurrent vein between middle and apex,
third submarginal narrowed about one-third to marginal, long, re-
ceiving the second recurrent vein between base and middle. Length
11 mm.
Santarem. Two specimens. The thorax beneath, postscutellum
and apex of middle segment, more or less with silvery pubescence.
Salius (Priocnemis) clypeatus n. sp.
2 .—Black, with obscure steel-blue reflection ; flagellum beneath
and joints 4-7 entirely, yellowish apical joints black ; face, clypeus,
thorax beneath, postscutellum and apex of middle segment with
silvery pubescence ; head transverse, not much wider than thorax ;
clypeus subtriangular, its fore margin acute in the middle; front
faintly impressed ; eyes almost reaching base of mandibles, converg-
ing above, the space between them at that point equal to less than
the combined length of antennal joints 2 and 3; distance between
hind ocelli less than that between them and eyes; antenne long, first
joint of flagellum longer than second ; pronotum subangulate behind ;
middle segment rather short, convex, depressed posteriorly, indis-
tinctly impressed; legs scarcely spinose, serration of hind tibice
delicate and indistinct, the longer spur equal to somewhat less than
half the length of first hind tarsal joint; abdomen shortly subpetio-
late; wings subhyaline, the tips and two cross fasicze of anteriors,
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271
dark, second submarginal subquadrate, about one-third the size of
third, and receiving first recurrent vein in middle, third submarginal
large, narrowed about one-third to marginal, receiving the second
recurrent vein between base and middle. Length 12 mm.
Santarem. Two specimens. Bears a superficial resemblance to
congruus, but is quite distinct in the forms of clypeus, etc.
Salius (Priocnemis) egensis D.T. (=Priocnemis opulentus Sm.).
Santarem. One specimen. ‘This species has a remarkable resem-
blance to Pompilus regius Fabr., but it is purely superficial, as the
subpetiolate abdomen and serrated hind tibize of egensis easily dis-
tinguish it from regius.
Salius (Priocnemis) nigerrimus n. sp.
2 .—Deep black ; without pale pubescence ; fore margin of clypeus
subtruncate, or slightly incurved ; front impressed, but not strongly ;
eyes almost reaching base of mandibles, inner orbits parallel, the
space between them at top about equal to the length of the first and
half of the second joints of flagellum; space between hind ocelli
much less than that between them and eyes; antennee fairly slender,
the first joint of flagellum longer than second; pronotum angulate
behind; middle segment rounded, feebly impressed down middle,
legs not strongly spinose, serration of hind tibize distinct, longer spur
of hind tibize equal to about two-fifths of the length of first hind
tarsal joint; wings dark fuscous, with purplish reflection, third sub-
marginal cell receiving the second recurrent vein in the middle,
twice as large as the second, which receives the first recurrent vein
in the middle. Length 12 mm.
Chapada (April). One example.
Salius (Priocnemis) hexagonus n. sp.
@.—Dark steel-blue or green, thorax black; dorsulum and
seutellum with golden pile, that on thorax on sides and beneath,
silvery ; tarsi testaceous; antennal joints seven and eight and ninth
beneath, yellow; clypeus large, hexagonal, distinctly punctured
anteriorly, broadly truncate ; eyes not reaching base of mandibles,
space between them at top greater than length of antennal joints 2
and 3; space between hind ocelli less than that between them and
eyes; first joint of flagellum fully one-third longer than second which
latter is shorter than any of the following, except, perhaps the last ;
head large, subquadrate, but not wider than thorax; thorax robust ;
pronotum short, rounded behind, transversely swollen anteriorly ;
272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1897.
middle segment rounded, convex, covered with cinereous pile, scarcely
impressed ; legs not strongly spinose, the serration of hind tibiz not
strongly marked, their longer spur equal to not more than one-quar-
ter of the length of first hind tarsal joint; apical margin of abdom-
inal segment narrowly testaceous, the apical ventral segments with
short, stiff yellowish hairs; wings pale yellow, paler apically, tips
and a spot in third discoidal cell, light fuscous, second submarginal
receiving the first recurrent near apex, rhomboidal, third submar-
ginal three or four times larger than the second, receiving the recur-
rent vein before the middle. Length 16-17 mm.
Santarem. Two specimens.
Salius (Priocnemis) auratus n. sp.
2 —Black, abdomen slightly bluish, shining; head and thorax
opaque; sides of scutellum, the postscutellum and middle segment
covered with golden pile; face and clypeus and thorax beneath with
sparse silvery pile ; antennal joints 6-8, or 9, fulvous; clypeus large,
somewhat hexagonal, strongly punctured anteriorly, fore margin
broadly subtruncate or a little incurved; eyes not reaching base of
mandibles, converging somewhat above, separated at the top by a
distance about equal to or slightly greater than the combined length
of antennal joints 2 and 3; space between hind ocelli equal to more
than half that between them and eyes; first joint of flagellum not
quite one-third longer than second; pronotum almost arcuate be-
hind, longer than in hexagonus, strongly convex or swollen especially
at the sides; middle segment short, rounded, broadly and shallowly
channelled down middle, with strong, transverse stri or folds, which
are indistinct or absent at base and apex; tarsi tolerably spinose,
the tibize poorly so, hind tibize indistinctly serrated, longer spur of
hind tibize equal to more than one-third of the length of first hind
tarsal joint; abdomen with last segment with rather dense brown
hair, ventral segments more or less clothed with tolerably dense
fuscous hair ; fore wings as far as base of second submarginal yellow,
then as far as middle of third submarginal fuscous, beyond this
whitish with tips fuscous, hind wings yellow with broad fuscous
apex, second submarginal oblong, receiving first recurrent vein just
beyond middle, third submarginal large, narrowed nearly one-third
to marginal, receiving second recurrent vein at about middle. Length
15-19 mm.
Chapada (March). Twospecimens. The color of the wings gives
the insect a striking appearance.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 278
Salius (Priocnemis) fuscomarginatus n. sp.
2 .—Black ; abdomen steel-blue; antennze from base of sixth
joint to base of ninth, orange-yellow ; clypeus somewhat hexagonal,
fore margin distinctly incurved ; eyes converging above, not reach-
ing base of mandibles, separated at top by a distance about equal to
length of first joint of flagellum; antenne longer than in auratus
fully as long as head, thorax and first abdominal segment; space be-
tween hind ocelli equal to more than half that between them and
eyes; pronotum angulate behind; middle segment with a broad,
shallow furrow down middle, with coarse transverse strize, becoming
obsolete basally ; legs tolerably spinose, hind tibiz hardly serrated,
their longer spur hardly equal to one-third the length of first hind
tarsal joint; abdomen subpetiolate, the apical segment punctured
and clothed with brownish hairs; wings bright yellow, apical mar-
gin of anteriors narrowly fuscous; second submarginal cell rhom-
boidal, not much more than one-third as large as the third, the latter
narrowed about one-third above and receives the recurrent vein in
the middle. Length 18 mm.
$ —Colored like 9, but abdomen black, and the entire insect
has pale sericeous pile; clypeus more quadrate, its fore margin much
broader and the emargination triangular ; striation of middle segment
more irregular and not so strong; longer spur of hind tibize equal to
more than one-third of the length of first hind tarsal joint; third
submarginal cell shorter than in the @, receiving the recurrent vein
before middle. Length 15 mm.
Two specimens (9 ¢). Chapada (December) ; Santarem (Feb-
ruary).
Salius (Priocnemis) convergens n. sp.
2 —Black somewhat velutinous with brownish pile; dorsulum
and scutellum with golden-brown pile; flagellum beneath from
second joint, five last joints entirely, inner orbits obscurely, yellow-
testaceous ; apical margins of abdominal segments testaceous; clypeus
transverse, its fore margin broadly subtruncate; eyes almost reach-
ing base of mandibles, strongly converging above, separated at top
by a distance about equal to length of scape; ocelli large, space be-
tween hind pair fully twice as great as that between them and eyes;
first joint of flagellum more than one-third longer than second ;
pronotum angulate behind, antero-laterally not swollen, but evenly
convex ; middie segment rounded, parted by a feeble longitudinal
furrow, and with a few transverse striae at extreme apex; legs
274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
strongly spinose, the hind tibiz distinctly serrated, the saw-like teeth
very acute, longer spur of hind tibize equal to somewhat more than
one-third of the length of first hind tarsal joint ; abdomen subsessile,
robust ; wings pale yellow, the anteriors crossed by a broad fascia,
which includes marginal (except base), third submarginal, and apex
of third discoidal cells, second submarginal cell somewhat oblong,
much smaller than third especially in height, receiving the recurrent
vein beyond middle, third submarginal narrowed about one-third to
marginal, receiving the second recurrent vein before the middle.
Length 17 mm.
Santarem (February). One specimen.
Salius (Priocnemis) vitreus n. sp.
9 .—Black, somewhat velutinous with brownish pile; the flagel-
lum beneath beginning at joint 2, and last five joints entirely,
orange-yellow ; legs somewhat testaceous; clypeus transverse rather
coarsely punctured anteriorly, its fore margin slightly incurved ;
eyes reaching base of mandibles, converging above, separated at the
top by a distance almost equal to length of second and third antennal
joints; space between hind ocelli greater than that between them
and eyes; first joint of flagellum more than a third longer than
second; front feebly impressed; pronotum angulate beneath, not
tumid; middle segment rounded, convex, its upper surface parted
by a shallow furrow, smooth and somewhat shining at extreme apex ;
legs strongly spinose, the hind tibize with the serration unusually
strong, longer spur of hind tibiz equal to a little more than one-
third the length of the first hind tarsal joint; abdomen subsessile,
clothed apically, and beneath sparsely, with erect black hairs ; wings
pale-yellowish, vitreous, having the appearance of isinglass or fish-
gine, second submarginal cell elongate, narrow receiving the recur-
rent vein at about middle, third submarginal more than twice as
large as the second, narrowed about one-third to marginal, receiving
the recurrent vein before middle. Length 15 mm.
Rio de Janeiro (November). One specimen.
Salius (Priocnemis) orbitalis n. sp.
9 .—Black, velutinous with pale pile; tarsi and tegule testaceous ;
flagellum beneath front joint 2 and the last five entirely, orange-
yellow ; inner orbits pale testaceous ; head with some spare, black
hairs, those on the clypeus and mandibles brown ; clypeus transverse,
coarsely punctured anteriorly, its fore margin broadly subtruncate
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275
or a little incurved ; eyes slightly separated from base of mandibles,
converging distinctly above, separated at the top by a distance
searcely equalling the first joint of flagellum; ocelli large, the space
between hind pair decidedly greater than that between them and
eyes; pronotum angulate behind, somewhat swollen antero-laterally ;
middle segment rounded, feebly impressed, subopaque ; legs strongly
spinose, the serration of hind tibize very strong ; longer spur of hind
tibize equal to a little more than one-third of the length of the first
hind tarsal joint ; abdomen subsessile, robust, apical segment densely
clothed with brown hairs; wings pale fuscous, with purplish reflec-
tion, apex paler, hind wings paler, not resplendent with purplish,
second submarginal cell narrow, elongate, receiving the recurrent
vein a little beyond middle, third submarginal much larger, nar-
rowed about one-quarter above, reciving the second recurrent before
the middle. Length 24 mm.
Santarem. One specimen. Differs from the two preceding in
color of wings, larger size, etc.
Salius (Priocnemis) luteicornis Lep.
Rio de Janeiro (November). One example.
Salius (Mygnimia) carinatus Lep.
Chapada (March, October, December); Corumbé (April). Five
specimens.
Salius (Mygnimia) bituberculatus Guérin.
Three specimens. Rio de Janeiro (October, November) ; Santa-
rem. This is the Pompilus bituberculatus Guérin. Four specimens
which may be the male of this species, resemble the female in colora-
tion, are asa rule smaller, and the second ventral segment lacks
the long, teat-like tubercles so characteristic of the female. The last
ventral plate is carinated down the middle, rounded at apex. These
males came from Rio de Janeiro, Santarem and Chapada.
Salius (Mygnimia) mammillatus n. sp.
2 .—Resembles bituberculatus, but is black, with slight purplish
pile; antennze with joints 1, 2 and 3 except apex, black, four and
five orange-yellow, the remainder missing ; clypeus with long black
hairs, its fore margin broadly subtruncate ; front distinctly impressed ;
eyes just about reaching base of mandibles, converging above, the
space betwen them at top about equal to length of fourth antennal
joint ; ocelli approximate, the space between hind pair less than half
of that between them and eyes; pronotum angulate behind ; poste-
276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
rior half of dorsulum bearing a medial longitudinal carina, which
does reach apex, however; middle segment rounded, shallowly sul-
cate down middle, crossed by somewhat irregular, coarse rug or
folds; legs tolerably spinose, the serration of hind tibie distinct ;
longer spur of hind tibize less than one-third of the length of first
hind tarsal joint; ventral abdominal segments sparsely punctured,
becoming more closely and coarsely so on the apical segments, the last
one almost scabrous, second ventral with two large widely separated,
teat-like tubercles ; wings black, with bluish reflection, the superiors
subhyaline at apex. Length 28 mm.
Santarem. One specimen. Allied to bituberculatus, but elypeus
not incurved, dorsulum carinated, tips of superior wings pale, eyes
narrowed more to top, ete.
Salius (Mygnimia) dumosus Lep.
Three females. Rio de Janeiro and Chapada in November. The
abdominal tubercles are small and blunt and comparatively approx-
imate in this species.
Salius (Mygnimia) perpunctatus n. sp.
?.—Black; flagellum beneath from the second, the last seven
joints entirely, orange-yellow ; head with long sparse, black hairs ;
clypeus rather longer than in bituberculatus, with a few very coarse
punctures anteriorly, the fore margin distinctly incurved; front
shining distinctly impressed, and with a short oblique furrow on
each side near the eye; eyes not strongly converging, barely separ-
ated from base of mandibles, the space between them at top some-
what greater than the length of the fourth antennal joint ; space be-
tween hind ocelli equal to about half of that between them and eyes;
pronotum sharply angulate behind, transversely and obliquely de-
pressed just before its hind margin; dorsulum subcarinated down
middle, most distinctly on posterior portion ; scutellum prominent,
with two or three very large punctures; middle segment transversely
striated, with a broad shallow further down middle, on each side of
which the upper surface is depressed ; legs strongly spinose, the ser-
ration of hind tibiz very strong; longer spur of hind tibize equal to
less than one-third of the length of the first hind tarsal joint; fore
coxze with coarse scabrous punctures; abdomen with tolerably dis-
tinct, sparse, punctures above, those of the ventral surface much
coarser, the second ventral segment with two widely separated
obtuse tubercles which slope toward the sides; apical margins of seg-
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 277,
ments testaceous, the apical ones with long brown hairs; wings
yellow, narrowly subfuscous at apex. Length 18-22 mm.
Chapada (December). Two specimens.
Synoptie Table of the New Species of Salius described in the pre-
ceding pages.
elicesrle aAwenGeatinn of) 6st e fe SMe Sr ae
Tarsal claws dentate,. . . . 5-1 (ah Oooh EAP
2. Head very transverse, flat ; Svein fore anil thick ; entirely
blue, including wings, ..... ahs oe Hunneres
Head not very transverse, of the neaal oii ; antennz long and
usually slender,. . . . . ; swe, 82 oe
3. Front clothed with a dense paltien fice second submarginal
cell rhormboidal, scarcely narrowed above; . . . . pilifrons.
Front subopaque without pile; second submarginal cell some-
what triangular, narrowed nearly two-thirds above,
RSMO Poe antnich 2% fe, ie eae Arse Va tn Be opacifrons.
4, Second ventral segment bituberculate or carinate,. . . . . 21.
Second ventral segment not tuberculate or carinate,. . . . 5.
5. Head, thorax, or abdomen more or less reddish,. . . . . 6.
Head, thorax and abdomen not reddish,. . ....... 8.
Cepentirely red). ee se eS SS ruthie
Not entirely red,. . . rR ey Se ice eee Lal 1/3
7. Legs and middle segment ence: Shine with golden pile,
ners . tegularis.
Eipdomen extent apex “ale feibereee he insect black ; thorax
without pale pile; wings fuscous,. ....... es
| 8. Wings subhyaline, more or less fasciate or spotted with fuscous,
Wines otherwise Pissed frp See ie toga e
9. Wings not distinctly fasciate, with a smell Marable Shad in
the vicinity of the second submarginal cell; fore tibise and
tarsi and antenne testaceous,. . ...... . . varipes.
eines: bi- or tritusciate; .°.°. 1.1: * Meigs a tes oe. LO:
10. Hind tibiz very strongly porate RNa ee ss ae
Hind tibize feebly or indistinctly forme a ei hie aa er en eae 8
11. The tarsi and fore tibiz red, as are also the seven basal joints of
antenne ; middle segment somewhat rugose. Length 10 mm.,
=) SR etal Gite oe eee Ee : : : Manne
Legs and antennz testaceous ; mesgnteuns and middle segment
with silvery pubescence. Length 5 mm.,... . . serrulus.
19
278
12.
15.
14.
10.
16.
Lf.
18.
19.
20.
21.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Antenne entirely black ; body steel-blue with a rather dense
cinereous’ pile; tn... . +: » sabe) ol a. 9) CChOegtEorames
Antenne more or less yellowish: «| Oks” Ge) 0d Sonate
Head subquadrate; clypeus broadly ae. uncate; last five
antennal joints yellowish,. . ....... . . congruus.
Head transverse as usual,. . . . 14.
Flagellum beneath and joints 7— 10 entirely, yellowane lyons
broadly subtruncate. Length8 mm.,. . . . . citricornis.
Flagellum beneath and joints 5-10 entirely yellowish ; clypeus
a its fore margin acute in middle; length 12 mm.,
eee Meee) ret . clypeatus.
Wings Sens sachs wot 8, o/e:) oo ey
Wings more or less pollowish, es See - oe
Form slender; entirely deep black, mending wings which have
also a purplish reflection. Length12mm., . . nigerrimus.
Form robust; velutinous with pale pile; last five antennal
joints entirely and the flagellum beneath orange; wings pale
fuscous. Length 24 mm... . Z . + a) « eonbeatas
Wings not fasciate with fuscous, at the most the apical margins
or a spot in the third discoidal cell, fusecous,. . . . . . 18.
Wings crossed by a broad fascia,. . . . sf 208
Thorax more or less clothed with bolder nile especie on
dorsulum and scutellum ; wings pale yellow, with a fuscous
spot in third discoidal cell body with a steel-blue reflection,
be Ait: ‘ hexagonus.
horas not tapiloree wins not pated. Py
Wings bright yellow, apical margin narrowly fuscous; clypeus
somewhat hexagonal, fore margin incurved ; serration of hind
tibize indistinct ; middle segment transversely striated, .
: : . fuscomarginatus.
nes vite paris ie appearance of ceinelaee or fish-glue ;
clypeus transverse, subtruncate; serration of hind tibiz very
strong, . . . 2. . Otreus.
Middle segment dente elothed ae paler pubescence trans-
versely striated ; hind tibiz indistinctly serrated, abdomen
subpetiolate, . . . . . . » auratus
Middle segment nude, enpoIny land Sie comeele serrated ;
abdomen subsessile,. . . . . - + + convergens.
Wings black, with bluish ie sae legless carinated apic-
ally; clypeus broadly truncate... . . . . . mammillatus.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279
Wings yellow; dorsulum subcarinate down middle; clypeus
broadly emarginate or incurved, . . . . . . perpunctatus.
Calicurgus pretiosus n. sp.
9° .—Black; tarsi somewhat testaceous; thorax on sides, beneath
and on middle segment with dense silvery sericeous pile; head wider
than thorax, transverse; clypeus transverse, finely punctured, ante-
riorly coarsely so, the fore margin a little incurved; front micro-
scopically punctate, the impressed line reaching from base of antennz
half way to ocelli; eyes strongly converging above, reaching base of
mandibles, separated above by a distance barely equalling length of
fourth antennal joint ; space between hind ocelli about equal to that
between them and eyes; pronotum subangulate behind ; middle seg-
ment rounded, not impressed; legs tolerably spinose, serration of
hind tibize distinct, their longer spur almost equal to two-thirds the
length of first hind tarsal joint; abdomen subsessile, ventral seg-
ment with large, very sparse punctures ; wings subhyaline, the ante-
riors crossed by two dark fascize, the outer of which by far the
larger, including the marginal, second and third submarginals, tip
of the second and most of the third discoidal cells ; second submar-
ginal cell rhomboidal, smaller than the third, receiving the recur-
rent vein in the middle, third submarginal narrowed fully one-half
above, and receives the recurrent vein before the middle. Length
12 mm.
Rio de Janeiro (November).
Calicurgus cinereus n. sp.
9 .—Black ; tarsi somewhat testaceous; thorax beneath and on
middle segment with silvery pile in certain lights; head wider than
thorax, transverse, front impressed for its entire length, microscopic-
ally punctured; clypeus rather large, apical half highly polished,
fore margin a little incurved; eyes reaching base of mandibles
strongly converging above, separated at the top by a distance scarcely
equal to length of fourth antennal joint ; antennz long and slender ;
pronotum subangulate behind ; middle segment rounded, shining,
not impressed ; legs not strongly spinose, serration of hind tibic dis-
tinct, their longer spur equal to more than half the length of first
hind tarsal joint ; abdomen subsessile, with sparse, pale pile; wings
subhyaline, the anteriors crossed by two fuscous bands, the outer of
which the larger, and includes marginal except apex, tip of first sub-
marginal, second and third submarginals, entirely, and apical half
280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
of third discoidal and beyond, second submarginal rhomboidal, re-
ceiving first recurrent vein beyond middle, third submarginal larger,
narrowed about one-third above and receiving recurrent vein con-
siderably before the middle. Length 10 mm.
Rio de Janeiro (November). One specimen. To the naked eye
the insect has a blue-gray appearance, due to the pile with which it
is clothed. The third submarginal is differently shaped from that
of C. machetes Kohl.
Calicurgus machetes Kohl.
A specimen from Santarem is perhaps this species.
Calicurgus idoneus Kohl.
Santarem. One specimen.
Calicurgus nubilus n. sp.
9° —Black ; face, clypeus, thorax on sides and beneath, middle
segment and abdomen more or less, with silvery pile, especially
obvious in certain lights, that on the abdomen rather sparse and less
silvery ; clypeus transverse, anteriorly shining and with large sparse
punctures ; front smooth or indistinctly punctured, hardly impressed ;
eyes strongly converging above, reaching base of mandibles, separ-
ated at the top by a distance scarcely equalling length of fourth
antennal joint; space between hind ocelli perhaps a little greater
than that between them and eyes; pronotum subangulate behind ;
middle segment rounded, somewhat shining not impressed ; legs not
very strongly spinose, serration of hind tibiz distinct, their longer
spur equal to nearly two-thirds the length of first hind tarsal joint ;
abdomen subpetiolate, the transverse impression of second ventral
segment in the middle and almost S-shaped, longer pubescence of
abdomen pale; base and apex of superior wings and inferiors except
apex, subhyaline, the greater portion of the superiors is covered by
a fuscous cloud ; second submarginal rather rhomboidal, narrowed
about one-quarter above and receiving the recurrent vein a little
beyond middle, third submarginal larger narrowed nearly one-half
or about two-fifths to the marginal and receives the recurrent vein
between base and middle. Length 8-10 mm.
Chapada (January, March, April, November) ; Santarem. Seven
specimens. ‘The species is easily recognized by the wings.
Pepsis aurozonata Sm,
One specimen from Santarem.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 281
Pepsis chrysobapta Sm.
Same locality as aurozonata. One male.
Pepsis aurifex Sm.
Chapada. One specimen.
Pepsis speciosa Sm.
Santarem. One specimen.
Pepsis sumptuosa Sm.
Chapada (November, December, March, April). Three females,
nine males. The Pepsis eximia Sm. (non R. Luc.) is, in my opinion,
the & of this species, and | therefore propose the name confusa for
P. eximia R. Lue. (non Smith).
Pepsis citreicornis Mocs.
One specimen. Santarem (February).
Pepsis sp.
Perhaps brunneicornis R. Luc., but differs somewhat, from the
description of the latter. One specimen, Corumba (April).
Pepsis pan Mocs.
Chapada (October); Santarem. Two examples.
Pepsis varipennis Pel.
Twenty-one specimens, (3 9 and18 ¢). Chapada (March, April,
September, October, November, December).
Pepsis decorata Perty.
One specimen. Santarem.
Pepsis vau-alba Sm.
Four specimens. Chapada (March, September, October).
Pepsis completa Sm.
Twenty-three female, and thirty-three male, specimens.
Pepsis dimidiata Fabr.
Ten female, and nine male, specimens. Chapada (March, Octo-
ber, November) ; Santarem (February).
Pepsis maeandrina Luc.
Four specimens. Chapada (November, December, January).
Pepsis lucidula Sm.
One specimen. Santarem (April).
282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Pepsis pretiosa Dhlb.
Three specimens. Chapada (April).
Pepsis venusta Sm.
Chapada (March, April, June, August, October, December) ;
Corumba (April) ; Mararu (April) ; Santarem. Twenty-seven spec-
imens.
Pepsis Pertyi Luc.
Chapada (April). One specimen.
Pepsis helvolicornis Luc.
Santarem. One example.
Pepsis xanthocera Dhlb.
One example. Rio de Janeiro (November).
Pepsis fulgidipennis Mocs.
Chapada (March, April, September); Santarem. Fifteen female
specimens.
Pepsis violaceipennis Mocs.
Rio de Janeiro (November); Chapada (December); Santarem ;
Mararu. Six specimens.
Pepsis crassicornis Mocs.
Fourteen specimens. Chapada (February, March, April).
Pepsis chlorotica Mocs.
Rio de Janeiro (November). One example. Lucas doubtfully
refers this species to his group P. ianthina, hymenca, elevata, etc.,
in which action he is probably correct, although the wings have a
brighter sheen than the species of that group.
Pepsis mystica Luc.
One specimen. Rio de Janeiro (November).
Pepsis sagana Mocs.
Two examples. Chapada (March); Rio de Janeiro (November).
Pepsis advena Mocs.
Chapada and Corumbaé in April; Rio de Janeiro (November).
This species belongs in the group with two preceding ones.
Pepsis smaragdinula Luc. :
Twelve specimens (9 ¢). Rio de Janeiro (October, November) ;
Chapada (January, March, April).
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285
Pepsis purpureus Sm
Two specimens. Santarem (February). This also belongs to the
group containing sagana, smaragdinula, ete.
Pepsis elevata Fabr.
Chapada (April, December) ; Corumba (April, May) ; Uacarizal
(February). Nine female, ten male specimens.
Pepsis elongata Lep.
Santarem.
Pepsis pulchripennis Mocs.
Twenty-four specimens. Chapada (March, April, November,
December) ; Santarem.
Pepsis rubescens Lue.
Santarem. One specimen.
Pepsis ferruginea Lep.
Santarem. One example which agrees well with the poor descrip-
tion of ferruginea. It belongs in the same group as P. marginata.
Pepsis sinnis Lue.
One specimen. Corumba (April).
In addition to the foregoing species of Pepsis, Herr Lucas will
shortly describe five new species which form part of this collection.
EXPLANATION OF Puate LV.
Fig. 1. Dipogon populator.
' Fig. 2. Pompilus echinatus.
Fig. 3. Pompilus echinatus? var. ?
Fig. 4. Pompilus partitus.
Fig. 5. Pompilus deceptus 3.
Fig. 6. Pompilus vinicolor.
Fig. 7. Pompilus argenteo-maculatus.
Fig. 8. Pompilus insignitus.
Fig. 9. Pompilus singularis.
Fig. 10. Pompilus singularis.
11
. Pompilus rhomboideus.
Fig. 12. Pompilus scrupulus.
Fig. 13. Pompilus ornamentus.
Fig. 14. Pompilus annulipes.
Fig. 15. Pompilus sulcatus.
Fig. 16. Salius pilifrons.
Fig. 17. Salius tegularis.
Fig. 18. Salius basirufus.
Fig. 19. Salius rutilus.
284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
NOTES ON PLANT MONSTROSITIES.
BY IDA A. KELLER.
In one of his “ Physiologischen Notizen,’”’ Professor Sachs forci-
bly calls attention to the exaggerated and erroneous morphological
significance which has been attributed to monstrosities. He con-
tends that monstrosities are simply monstrosities and not “ sugges-
tions” as to the typical morphological nature of organs as implied
constantly by the teachings of the present day morphology.” He
urges that it is but proper to regard them as the result of a contest
between normal tendencies and accidental external agencies. His
final and emphatic verdict is: ‘‘ Monstrosities represent a chaos
without law and order.’ Professor Goebel takes the same point of
view, stating that most of the results obtained thus far in the field of
teratology must be regarded as useless; the method of reasoning
from that which is deformed to that which is normal is a mis-
taken one.* He indicates the direction in which this important
branch of botany should be developed when he says: “The prob-
lem of this science is not to seek in deformities ‘revelations’ of
nature but to explain how these deformities have come to pass.”
At all events deformities in plants are extremely interesting.
Although there can be no doubt that the investigator should above
all things seek the explanations of their causes, yet in the present
state of our science it is impossible to discover in most cases the
reasons for their occurrence, especially if the disturbance is purely
a local one. Descriptions of individual cases will probably prove
of value in preparing the way for future generalizations.
Two rather interesting abnormal growths came directly under my
notice some time ago. One was found on a shoot of our com-
mon garden woodbine, Lonicera Japonica Thunb. Plate V, fig.
1, represents the abnormal branch. It can readily be seen that
the monstrosity was produced by the growing together of the term-
inating leaf-pair, or, according to botanical terminology, the leaves
had become “connate.” It was evident that the activity of the
growing point had been suppressed, but it is a question not easily
1 Flora, 1893, Sachs. Ueber Wachsthumsperioden und Bildungsreize.
2 Thid. p. 222.
3 Thid, p. 233.
* Ibid. p. 233.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285
decided whether this suppression primarily caused the deformity by
interféring with the normal cell development, or if the center of the
disturbance is to be found in the unusual leaf development which
thus might have destroyed the activity at the “punctum vegeta-
tionis.” The abnormal growth had the shape of acornucopia which
was perfectly hollow, and in which every trace of the terminal bud
was effaced. The plant was producing shoots at all available points,
the normal shoots having an appearance such as is represented in
Plate V, fig. 3. These were growing so rapidly in length that long
before the young leaves had arrived at maturity, the growing point
had advanced considerably beyond them. A glance at the figure
although little can be gleaned from it so far as the cause of the dis-
turbance is concerned, will give an ideaas to its further effect. The
impetus derived from the external favorable conditions of the season
which found expression in the luxuriant growth at all parts of the
vine, was directed to the pair of leaves below the monstrosity, and
at this point a branch emerged; the nearest bit of meristem thus be-
came infused with increased activity and the nourishment supplied
was turned aside from its original path and sent in a new direction.
Below the deformity the branch had, however, continued to grow
in thickness. The abnormal growth was at first evidently purely a
local disturbance, there being absolutely nothing unhealthy about
the rest of the shoot as is found so often in cases of fasciations due
to irregular nourishment or other causes. As already suggested, it
will be a difficult matter to decide upon the true and full significance
of a monstrosity in each particular case. A single instance as the
one described above, will hardly warrant the assumption that it is
the expression of a family trait or peculiarity found in allied spe-
cies. The temptation is great, no doubt, to see in this case a ten-
dency to connate growth to which we are accustomed in Lonicera
flava and L. Caprifolium cropping out as a monstrosity in L.
Japonica, It must be remembered, however, that itis far more usual
to find that plants which ordinarily bear connate or perfoliate leaves
(which we are accustomed to regard as later developments) will
develop also some leaves which are simply sessile as e. g., Uvularia
perfoliata. Thus it is that in monstrosities, so far as leaves are con-
cerned, we expect “reversions to primitive types” rather than the
acquirement of new characters.
In the article referred to above, Sachs suggests that normal activ-
ity can only take place if all phenomena go on with mathematical
286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
exactness.” He forces one to realize that it is far more wonderful
that nature proceeds with almost absolute regularity in the develop-
ment of organs if we take into consideration the minuteness of the
vegetative point and the quite incomprehensible precision with
which molecules must travel each to its particular place of destina-
tion. He adds “a few molecules which stimulate the formation of
anthers might be supposed to deviate the ro'ov part of a millimeter to
the right or to the left of their prescribed path, or they might be
delayed two or three minutes on their journey ” and produce an ab-
normal growth. Thus it is that in the crowded condition of the
floral organs at the growing point and because of the complex dif-
ferentiation which must take place here at a very early period, that
monstrosities in flowers are comparatively frequent.® Internal
hereditary tendencies, no doubt, come to the fore-ground in a greater
or less degree ; certainly in the most pronounced manner in such
cases e. g., as those cited by Sachs in the Iridacez where the inner
circle of stamens reappears at times as an abnormal development,
and thus the type of the Liliacezeis repeated. Sachs maintains that
we might regard the normal Iris type as a monstrosity.’ It is quite
apparent, however, that such distinctions will depend entirely on the
accepted definition of the term monstrosity. It seems reasonable to
suppose that the more complex the condition of an undeveloped tis-
sue mass the greater the possible amount of displacement from the
normal position, and the less marked externally will be the influ-
ence of hereditary tendencies. In undeveloped foliage leaves where
the young parts are apt to exert less influence, and are in their turn
less dependent on the condition of adjacent tissues we might, per-
haps, expect at times to find in abnormal growths an innate ten-
dency of an entire family.
I will describe in brief another and very different case of mon-
strosity observed at about the same time as the above. The plant
was the common garden hydrangea, Hydrangea hortensis L. Near
the end of a shoot and opposite a perfectly normal leaf, I noticed one
which was composed of two distinct blades. These were united by
the midrib from the base upward about half the length of the leaf,
and from there on the blades were completely separated. Plate V,
fig. 4, is a side view of the double leaf. It was interesting to note
5 Tbid. p. 236.
SThid, p. 235.
TTbid. p. 234.
1897. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287
the pale surfaces, which form normally the lower side of the leaf,
faced each other, while the shiny morphological upper surface of
the upper blade was turned toward the sky, while in the lower
blade this was turned to the earth. The lower blade then, so far as
its morphological structure was concerned, was decidedly in a false
position, otherwise, at least in its contour, no irregularity was notice-
able, except, perhaps, that it was somewhat smaller than the oppo-
site normal leaf, Plate V, fig. 7. The upper blade was correct as to
its position, but its shape was deformed. It had two apices, the
midrib having divided at the point of union of the two blades.
Besides it was somewhat larger than the opposite normal leaf. The
disturbance which caused this monstrosity was also purely a local
one since the rest of the plant was in nowise remarkable. Evidently
the growing point was twice induced to divide, first in producing
two distinct blades, and again in the division of the midrib of the
upper blade. A chaos this appears without law and order, and yet
even in chaos there is a reason or cause for everything. It would
certainly be worth while to know why the under surfaces of the two
blades faced each other in such a way as to appear as mirrored
images of one another.
288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
May 4.
Mr. CHArtes P. Perot in the Chair.
Thirty-four persons present.
The death, April 29th, of Geo. W. Biddle, a member, was
announced.
May 11.
Mr. CHArues P. Perot in the Chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.
A paper entitled “On a Collection of Small Mammals from
Northeastern North Carolina,’ by Samuel N. Rhoads and Robert
T. Young was presented for publication.
May 18.
J. CHEsTON Morris, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty-six persons present.
A paper entitled “New Achatinidse and Helicide from Somali-
land,” by Henry A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication.
May 26.
Dr. C. N. PErRceE in the Chair.
Twenty-four persons present.
A paper entitled “ Vertebrate Remains from the Port Kennedy
Bone Deposit,” by Edward D. Cope, was presented for publication.
The Hayden Memorial Geological Committee furnished the
following supplementary note to its report recommending the con-
ferring of the award for 1897 on Prof. Karpinski:—
ALEXANDER KaArprnskI, the son of a Mining Engineer of good
family in Moscow, was born January 6, 1847, at Bogoslowsk, in the
mining district of that name in the Urals.
After the end of his course of sciences at the Imperial Institute
of Mines at St. Petersburg, he was appointed in i869 adjunct, and
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289
in 1877 Professor of Geology. Since 1885 he has been the Director
of the Geological Survey of Russia, and since 1886 a member of
the Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg. In addition
he is an honorary member of the Societies of Naturalists of St.
Petersburg, Moscow, Kiev, Kazan and Ekaterinburg; of the
Mineralogical Society of St. Petersburg ; of the Geological Society
of Belgium and of the Belgian Society of Geology, Paleontology
and Hydrology.
The official list of his more important contributions to science
comprises fifty-three published by the Russian Government, in the
Journal des Mines, and in the journals the Mineralogischer Gesell-
schaft, Société Ouralienne, the Académie des Sciences, etc.
Mr. Sager Chadwick was elected a member.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
290 _ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS FROM URUGUAY.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
The following descriptions are based upon material collected in
Uruguay by Dr. Wm. H. Rush, U.S. N. The marine shells were
obtained at Maldonado Bay by dredging in from 3 to 6 fathoms
depth. A list of all the species collected may be found in the
“ Nautilus” for May of this year, p. 6.
Few coasts of like extent have been so little explored conchologi-
cally as the eastern shores of South America from Guiana to Cape
Horn. The limits to the southward of the Antillean mollusk fauna
are only of late becoming known, largely through the collections
made by Dr. von Ihering and others, and recorded by Dall,’ al-
though the collections made at Rio Janeiro and Bahia by the
Wilkes Exploring Expedition,’ and by the commission of natural-
ists’ sent by the Spanish Government, have been of value in this
enquiry. Mr. E. A. Smith’s catalogue of the mollusks of Fernando
Noronha,‘ and numerous records in the volumes on mollusea of the
Challenger Reports, further swell the list. It would seem that the
fauna, as far south at least as the southern limit of Brazil, is prepon-
derantly Antillean, but with a certain number of special forms not
represented in the West Indies, some of them, like Strombus Golath,°
notable for their size or peculiarity. To the southward of Brazil,
the special or non-Antillean forms seem to predominate over the
Antillean, although there is of course a very gradual overlapping,
as would be expected from the lack of any salient coastal feature
1 Nautilus, V, pp. 26,42; VI, p. 109; X, p, 121. Also Proc. U. 8S. Nat.
Mus., XII, p. 773, pp. 219--362.
? Mollusca and Shells, by A. A. Gould.
3 J. G. Hidalgo. Moluscos del Viaje al Pacifico, part 3. marine univalves.
* Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., Zool. XX. Consult also Smith’s paper on the
mollusca of St. Helena and Ascension, P. Z. S., 1890, where many Antillean
species are recorded.
> There are some brief lists of merit other than those above mentioned as
well as many records for single species from this region, scattered through
the general literature of conchology.
6 This magnificent Stromb occurs on the coast of Brazil. The writer
saw numerous examples in the Brazilian Fisheries Exhibit at the Columbian
Exposition in Chicago in 1893.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291
abruptly defining regions of diverse physical features. The em-
bouchure of the Plate River may, as Dall has suggested, mark the
southern extension of typically Antillean forms, but the endemic
southern forms, it seems, extend both to the north and south of it.
The main exponent of this southern fauna is, of course, d’Orbigny,
whose bulky tome has been of such inestimable value to all later
students of South American mollusks.
When we come to the region of Magellan Strait a good many
additional forms appear, and the literature is more copious. Among
recent papers may be mentioned Dall’s report upon forms collected
by the ‘ Albatross,” Mabille & Rochebrune’s Mollusks of the
Mission Scientifique du Cap Horn, Smith’s “ Alert” shells collected
by Coppinger, etc.
Pisidium Sterkianum n. sp. Plate VI, figs. 1, 2, 3, 4.
Shell somewhat inequilateral, ventricose, glossy, light yellowish.
Dorsal and ventral margins about equally arcuate; anterior end
decidedly and broadly truncate; posterior end moderately produced
and obliquely rounded. Beaks full but rather small, and not much
produced above the hinge-line. Surface very finely striated, beeom-
ing a little more coarse near the basal margin; interior grayish-
white. Right valve with two lamellar, slightly curved or sinuous,
parallel cardinal teeth, the laterals short, high and rather slight.
In left valve the laterals are lower and longer. Length 6, height
5, diam. 3°83 mm.
From a creek in the “ Prado,” Montevideo, Uruguay.
Many specimens were collected. One of those opened contained
numerous young, as is often observed in our northern Pisidia.
P. Sterkianum is a large species, about the size of an average P.
Virginicum. I would identify it with Cyclas pulchella Orb. (not
Jenyns, = Pisidium Dorbignyi Clessin) were it not for the very
much smaller size (length 3 millimetres) of that form; the young
P. Sterkianum of that size being much more compressed than Or-
bigny’s figure of C. pulchella. C. pulchella was not among
Orbigny’s South American shells acquired by the British Museum,
according to the official catalogue, and is not represented in the
Museum, as Mr. E. R. Sykes obligingly informs me.
Jt is likely that Clessin’s description of “ P. Argentinum” and his
figure 2a were from a specimen of this species; but Orbigny’s Cy-
clas Argentina, which Dr. Rush collected at the original locality, is
a true Spherium, not unlike S. (Calyculina) laeustre in general ap-
292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
pearance, but not a Calyculina. Clessin’s figures 1 and 2 are poor
copies from the Voy. Amér. Mérid., but the original figures are not
good.
We have named this species in honor of Dr. V. Sterki, who has
undertaken the difficult task of working up the North American
Pisidia. ;
Pisidium vile n.sp. Pl. VI, figs. 17, 18, 19, 20.
Shell rather inequilateral, quite globose, of a yellowish corneous
color. Surface glossy, very finely and evenly striated; anterior end
a little straightened or truncate; posterior end narrower, produced
and rounded; dorsal and basal margins about equally curved.
Beaks large and full, projecting well above the dorsal margin. In-
terior bluish-white. Teeth in right valve: a strong, large posterior
cardinal, emarginate at tip, and a low, narrow, inconspicuous upper
anterior cardinal ; laterals very strong and high. In the left valve
a low anterior and lower posterior cardinal, the pit between them
wide and deep; laterals double, unusually heavy and strong.
Length 2°6, height 2°4, diam. 2 mm.
From a small creek in the “ Prado,” Montevideo, Uruguay.
This form differs from Cyclas pulchella Orb. (Pisidium Dorbignyi
Clessin), described from Maldonado, in being smaller, shorter, with
much more projecting, fuller beaks. The very large size of the pos-
terior cardinal tooth in the right valve, and the greater reduction
of the anterior cardinal, are conspicuous features. A large series
was collected.
It also seems to be unlike any other Pisidia of “ Archiplata,”
judging from the descriptions and figures of P. Chilense Orb., P.
Lauricoche and Forbesii Phil.”
«
Thracia Rushiin.sp. Pl. VII, fig. 30.
Shell thin, rather fragile, inequilateral, inequivalve, the right
valve swollen, left valve much less so, and with lower beak than
the other. White, with a thin isabella tinted cuticle toward the
margins. Anterior end long, broadly rounded, dorsal and ventral
margins subparallel; dorsal margin behind the beaks straightly
sloping, short, posterior-end abruptly truncated. Pallial sinus
moderate. Hinge very slender and delicate; ossicle lunate, with
the ends blunt.
Length 29, height 20, diam. 9°5 mm.
7 Novitates Conchologice, III, p. 489, pl. 105.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293
Length 20°5, height 13°8, diam. 7°5 mm.
Length 20, height 14 mill.
Maldonado Bay, Uruguay.
T. fragilis Penn. is longer in proportion to the height, more pro-
longed and narrower posteriorly, and more convex.
Semele (Abra?) Uruguayensis n. sp. PI. VII, figs. 27, 28, 29.
Shell thin, inequilateral, the anterior end conspicuously longer,
convex, smooth except for fine, faint growth-strie. Surface slightly
glossy or dull, pale isabelline, becoming white toward the beaks.
Dorsal margins sloping abruptly each side of the beaks, the ante-
rior slope nearly straight, posterior slope slightly convex ; anterior
end broadly rounded, posterior end rather narrowly rounded below ;
basal margin regularly rounded, becoming a little straighter near
the posterior end. Beaks small, slightly projecting; a faint ridge
extending from them to the junction of the posterior and basal
margins. Right valve with a small, erect and vertical posterior
cardinal, and longer, larger oblique anterior cardinal tooth, and a
low, slight, lamellar anterior lateral; no posterior lateral tooth.
Left valve with an erect vertical cardinal tooth, no laterals. Inte-
rior pure white; pallial sinus very large and deep. Length 9:5,
height nearly 8, diam. 4°5 mm.
Maldonado Bay, Uruguay, in 3 to 6 fathoms. Abundant.
Mesodesma Arechavalettoi (Ihering) Pilsbry, n. sp. Pl. VI, figs. 15, 16 (about
two-thirds natural size).
Shell shaped much like M. donacea Lam., but less abruptly trun-
cated anteriorly, and wider posteriorly. Epidermis light buff;
growth-striz as in donacea. Interior with the pallial sinus very
deep, extending beyond the middle of the shell; lateral teeth weak,
the left valve with a well developed /\-shaped cardinal retained in
fully adult individuals, with an accessory lamina behind it. Length
74, height 40, diam. 23 mm.
Mar del Plata, Argentina, and Maldonado Bay, Uruguay ; young
specimens only from the last named locality.
This is the shell mentioned as a species of Lutraria in Nautilus,
VI, p. 81, It is eaten in Montevideo.
After deciding the species to be new, I submitted a specimen to
Professor Wm. H. Dall, who has recently made a special study of
the Mactracea, and learned from him that the shell has been named
M. Arechavalettoi by Dr. H. von Ihering. As I have been unable
to find such a name mentioned in the literature examined in the
20
294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
course of a rather extensive search, I conclude it to be unpub-
lished.
M. ventricosa Gray, from New Zealand, has similar weak lateral
teeth, but it is lower, shorter, and more swollen in the middle.
Types are no. 70,486 coll. A. N.S. P.
Corbula Lyonin.sp. Pl. VII, figs. 21, 22, 23.
Shell solid and strong, nearly equivalve, very inequilateral, com-
pressed, oblong, the beaks near the anterior third; dorsal margin
straight and sloping posteriorly, convexly sloping in front; anterior
end wide, rounded ; posterior end narrow, obliquely truncate, ter-
minating below in an acute angle ; basal margin straightish in the
middle, rather abruptly rising near the posterior angle. Outer sur-
face dull whitish. Right valve slightly larger, noticeably surpass-
ing the left behind the beaks and along the posterior two-thirds of
the basal margin, where it closely overlaps the margin of the left
valve. The valves are about equal in convexity, and have the
same sculpture. A posterior area is conspicuously defined on each
valve by an acute keel running from the beaks to the posterior
angle; the keel is considerably bowed downward; above this the
surface is closely, sharply and subregularly costulate, the riblets
straight, obliquely descending in the direction of growth lines. In
front of the keel, the basal half of the valves, or more, has very
coarse and irregular concentric folds; on the rounded anterior end
the folds become more regular and more numerous. The upper part
of each valve is free from the coarse wrinkles or folds mentioned,
being merely striated rather irregularly in the lines of growth.
Interior flesh colored, sometimes in part olive-yellow, the margins
of the valves of the latter color. In the right valve there is a re-
curved, triangular, acute tooth.
Length 11°75, height 6°75, diam. 3°9 mm.
Length 12°75, height 7:9 mill.
Maldonado Bay, Uruguay, in 3 to 6 fms.
This species is remarkably similar in form and sculpture to Cor-
bula Macgillivrayi E. A. Smith,® described from south of New
Guinea, in 28 fathoms. Mr. Smith’s species, however, is double the
size of C. Lyoni; it has minute sculpture not seen in the latter;
the eae a of the eae area is coarser, and the wrinkling of
5 Report on the “ Ghalinges ”” Lamellibranchiata, Chall.- Rep. Zoology,
Vol. XIII, p. 30, pl. x, figs. 8--8b (1885).
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 295
the lower part of the valves less coarse. I know of no other Cor-
bula at all similar to this remarkable species.
At Dr. Rush’s suggestion, this fine species is named in honor of
Commander H. L. Lyon of U.S.S. “ Yantic.”
Corbula Iheringiana n.sp. Pl. VII, figs. 24, 25, 26. 4
Shell very inequivalve and very inequilateral ; moderately con-
vex, somewhat Donaz like in general form. Whitish under a dull,
light brown cuticle. Right valve much the larger and more con-
vex, projecting beyond the other above, the posterior three-fourths
of the sinuous basal margin conspicuously surpassing the left valve.
The upper margin is sloping and conspicuously concave posterior to
the beaks, the posterior end truncated ; basal margin moderately or
slightly arcuate; anterior end obliquely truncated in front of the
beaks, becoming rounded below. Surface rather irregularly wrin-
kled-striate, sometimes (as in the specimen figured) with some rather
coarse folds on the smaller valve.
Length 9, breadth 5:5, diam. 3°8 mm.
Maldonado Bay, Uruguay, in 3 to 6 fathoms.
This is a species of peculiar contour, the valves of very unequal
size and dissimilar shape, even for this genus. I have been able to
find among the numerous forms described from the Antillean region,
none much resembling this.
The specific name is intended to honor the only working malacol-
ogist in South America to-day. Naturalists may well congratulate
themselves that the learned and virile Director of the Museu Paul-
ista is adding to laurels fairly earned in the Fatherland, another
and American wreath, by his enlightened labors upon the South
American fauna.
Crassatella (Eriphyla) Maldonadoensis n. sp.
Smaller than E. dwnulata Conrad, decidedly longer in proportion
to the height, the anterior dorsal slope somewhat convex instead of
straight, and far shorter than the posterior slope, while in F. lunw-
lata it is straight, concave near the beaks, and longer than the other
slope. The lunule is more deeply excavated, and the posterior end
of the shell rounded, not subangular ; beaks less elevated, less acute,
directed forward more than in FE. lunulata. Exterior white,
variously suffused, maculated or interruptedly rayed with pink ;
having low and inconspicuous, but coarse concentric wrinkles. In-
terior pink in the cavity of the valves, white below the pallial line.
296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Teeth, hinge and interior otherwise asin E. lunulata. Length 4°75,
height 4, diam. 1°9 mm.
Maldonado Bay, in 3 to 6 fathoms.
Numerous specimens collected are very much alike except in pat-
tern of color.
Turbonilla dispar n.sp. Pl. VI, figs. 5, 6, 7.
Shell moderately attenuated, composed of about 8 somewhat con-
vex whorls after the nucleus, the latter globose, partly immersed,
with very short low spire of less than two whorls. Sculpture of
spiral grooves at unequal intervals, with oblong punctures along the
grooves; the upper part of spire, especially when slightly eroded,
marked with series of square punctures. Color light brown.
Alt. 8°2, diam. 2°3 mm.
Maldonado Bay, Uruguay, in 3-6 fathoms.
Distinguished by the grooved and punctate sculpture, and the
globose, Naticoid nucleus.
Turbonilla Uruguayensis n.sp. PI. VI, figs. 8, 9, 10.
Shell of the usual slender tapering form. the greatest diameter
contained about 33 times in the height; bluish-white, thin but rather
strong; the sides straight, whorls a trifle convex, with slightly but
distinctly impressed sutures. Whorls 11, not counting the tilted
nucleus ; the two earlier whorls finely costulate or smooth from wear ;
succeeding whorls down to the end of the seventh with deep, regu-
lar, rather oblique ribs (about 26 in number on the seventh whorl) ;
the following whorls vertically and becoming more finely ribbed;
last whor! with the ribs decidedly weaker or subobsolete above, base
convex and smooth. Apex turbinate, tilted at a right angle with
the axis of the shell, consisting of nearly 3 whorls. Aperture irreg-
ularly pyriform, acuminate above, its length contained 4% times in
the height of shell ; the columella subvertical, simple, its edge revo-
lute. Alt. 10°3, diam. 3 mm.
Maldonado Bay, Uruguay, in 3 to 6 fathoms.
Larger than any of the similarly sculptured species of the Gulf
of Mexico or east coast of South America with which I have been
able to make comparison.
Ocinebra cala n. sp.
Shell fusiform, solid and thick, of a dirty white color. Whorls
fully 63 or 7, convex. Sculpture: prominent longitudinal folds,
which are strong but rounded and wave-like, the intervals like the
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 297
folds reversed ; in number 9 to 10 on the last whorl, and about the
same number on the preceding. These are crossed by rounded
spiral threads which are somewhat lamellose from the fine growth-
strie. There are about 13 or 14 principal spirals, but in the region
of the periphery five or six of the intervals are occupied by minor
threads. Aperture one-half the total length of shell, small, long-
oval; passing below into a very narrow, parallel-sided canal nearly
as long as the open oval portion. Outer lip thickened and 7-toothed
within; siphonal fasciole conspicuous, convex, leaving a narrow
umbilical chink. Alt. 11-5, diam. 5°8 mm.
Maldonado Bay.
The general appearance of this species is somewhat like Urosa/-
pinx cinereus on a small scale. The spire is more slender, the folds
stronger in proportion, and the anterior canal narrow.
Urosalpinx Rushii n. sp.
Shell shortly fusiform, thick and solid, white under a dull light
brown epidermis. Whorls about 63, the earliest 1} convex and
smooth, the rest sculptured and convex, the last whorl convex and
robust, excavated below. Sculpture: numerous low longitudinal
folds, quite distinct and regular on the whorls of the spire, but sub-
obsolete on the body-whorl ; spiral cords about 43 on the last whorl,
every fourth cord decidedly wider and more prominent, the middle
one of the three intervening larger than the other two; on the spire,
or in young specimens, the spirals are alternately larger and smaller.
The surface is roughened and minutely lamellose throughout.
Aperture pure white within, about three-fifths the total altitude of
shell, long-oval, the anterior canal contracted, narrow, considerably
recurved, about one-third as long as the open portion of the aperture ;
outer lip thick, with about 7 low denticles within; columella
straight, vertical. Umbilical chink minute, the umbilical region
large, excavated, surrounded by a convex, prominent siphonal funi-
ele. Operculum very thin, with the nucleus near the base. Length
29, breadth 16 mm.
Maldonado Bay, Uruguay.
Compared with Urosalpinx cinereus the spiral sculpture is far
finer, longitudinal folds subobsolete on the last whorl, canal con-
tracted, ete. In Tritonidea tincta the sutures are not so deep, the
aperture channelled posteriorly and the umbilicus obsolete ; other-
wise the two species are considerably alike. °
298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF f1sore
Halistylus circumstriatus Pilsbry. PI. VI, fig. 21.
Nautilus, XI, May, 1897, p. 7.
Maldonado Bay, in company with H. columnus Dall.
Ancylus Rushii Pilsbry, n. sp. PI. VI, figs. 11, 12, 15, 14.
A small, very strongly hooked species. Aperture narrow, wider
anteriorly. Spire produced beyond the right margin. More elevated
and more curved and narrower than A. concentricus Orb. or bari-
lensis Moric., which are both much larger; decidedly narrower,
more convex and more curved than A. obliquus, of which some
hundreds of examples were collected by Dr. Rush. Length 3°75,
breadth of aperture 1:7, height 1°5 mm.
Creek in the “ Prado,” Montevideo, Uruguay.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES VI AND VII.
Plate NE figs. 1, 2, 38, 4. Pisidium Sterkianum.
5, 6, 7. Turbonilla dispar.
8, 9, 10. Turbonilla Uruguayensis.
se ee TI 21d 4) Ancylus Rushir
15,16. Mesodesma Archavalettoi (Ihering) Pilsb.
about two-times natural size.
EE ES OTS 19220. Pisiarim wiles
«fig. 21. Halistylus circumstriatus.
Plate VII, figs. 21, 22, 23. Corbula Lyoni.
a «24, 25, 26. Corbula Iheringiana.
27, 28, 29. Semele (Abra?) Uruguayensis.
« fig, 380. Thracia Rushii.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299
EXTERNAL FEATURES OF YOUNG CRYPTOCHITON.
BY HAROLD HEATH.
The genus Cryptochiton includes the most highly modified indi-
viduals in the order of the Polyplacophora so far at least as exces-
sive growth of the mantle and the consequent diminution in size of
the tegmentum is concerned. In the adult no trace of the tegmen-
tum is visible, the articulamentum alone remaining, being com-
_ pletely hidden within the mantle. While it is held by many that this
represents the last stage of a process by which the mantle gradually
encroached upon and finally destroyed the tegmentum, Reincke’
considers it to be a primitive condition from which the remainder of
the Chitons have been modified. The following observations on the
young of Cryptochiton stelleri, are of interest in this connection.
In many places along the coast of California this species is of fre-
quent occurrence. In and about Monterey Bay they are quite com-
mon out beyond tide marks, where the water is from six to twelve
- feet in depth. Sometimes they may be seen in the dark hollows and
crevices, slowly moving about in search of food, which consists mainly
if not entirely, of plants.
On July 14, 1896, two young specimens were found on the under-
side of stones at the extreme low tide mark. They were placed in
an aquarium at the Hopkins Seaside Laboratory and were kept for
several weeks but they were always sluggish, remaining quiet for
days together in the dark corners or under stones. They did not
exhibit any peculiarities worthy of note.
They were oval in outline, the broader end being anterior, and
were of the same size, having a length of 27 mm. and greatest width
of 15 mm.
Adult COryptochiton are of a dark red color, sometimes obscurely
blotched with white. The young were unlike in coloration, one hav-
ing a light orange-yellow color shading to orange on the mid-dorsal
line; the other was of a light green also darker in the region of the
shell. In both the tint was lighter on the ventral surface. The
bunches of calcareous spines that cover the dorsal surface contain
1 Zeit. fiir wiss. Zool. Bd. XVIII, 1868.
500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
some of a crimson color and these modify to a considerable extent
the general color.
In adults there are from 71--80 gills. In the young there are
56 arranged as in the adult. Anteriorly they shade off into min-
ute papillse not visible to the naked eye.
Full grown Cryptochiton are covered on the dorsal surface with
groups or tufts of caleareous spines so closely crowded together that
the mantle is almost or entirely concealed. In the young the groups
are smaller and much more scattered (Plate VIII, fig. 1); in
addition are multitudes of small crimson spines on both the ventral
and dorsal aspects of the mantle. - Reinecke, and especially Blumrich?
have worked out the development of the spine in several species of
Chiton. It forms above and outside the epithelial cell, from which
it develops, and as the spine increases in length, its base with its
underlying cell becomes pushed into the mantle and a hollow is thus
produced. Many spines forming these hollows occur in such posi-
tions as to produce a circular groove and the small area of epithelial
cells surrounded by this groove becomes a papilla. In young Cryp-
tochiton the entire mantle surface is thrown into these papille
which become clearly outlined by the spines which form in the
channel about them (Plate VIII, fig. 4). These small spines not
collected into tufts are elliptical in cross section and the calcareous
portion imbedded in an organic basis is made up of four pieces.
The arrangement of these pieces is similar to that produced by lon-
gitudinally splitting into fourths a cone of small base and high
altitude.
In the tufts of larger spines there are always to be seen a number
of short bright crimson ones from which others generally color-
less seem to radiate. These are not centrally located, but ex-
centrically on the side of the tuft next to the median line. ©, 0g “AYLROOTT “OUR N *UOT}99T[0) e
2. iS}
4
2
“WOIUENV HLMON NUGLSAM JO dNOUD SANTdTV SQUYALdOUIIOS AHL JO SNAWIONdS NAALANIN AO SINDWAUASVAW
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 327
greatest breadth, 23.8; length of nasals, 11.8; greatest length of
mandible, 22; frontal constriction behind post-orbital processes,
8.5; interorbital constriction, 7.5.
General remarks.—A study of oregonensis, as represented by a
fair series of specimens extending from Tongas, Alaska, to northern
California, seems to indicate that three forms of this small, dark
colored type inhabit the Pacific Coast lands, the typical form found
from northern Oregon to southern Alaska being darkest and
brownest, becoming larger and more rusty northward, and smaller,
grayer and more tawny southward. Lack of specimens from the
two extremes of its distribution compel me to reserve a decision on
these points. In some respects the differences between oregonensis
and the other subspecies of alpinus recognized in this paper seem
almost specific, but in some of the specimens from intervening locali-
ties I find such a strong indication of intergrading with fuliginosus
that this separation seems unwarranted.
Specimens examined.—Alaska, 2; British Columbia, 5; Wash-
ington, 4; Oregon 5; ? California, 1.
oo
bo
oo
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
CYPREA LYNX DEFORMED BY DISEASE.
BY JOHN FORD.
A very remarkable series of shells comprising sixty or more spec-
imens of diseased Cyprea lynx (figures 1, 2, 3) was recently secured
by the writer while examining a barrel of mixed species of Cyprea
that apparently came direct from Singapore, E. Indies. As much of
the animal matter remained in all of the shells it seems quite probable
that they were barreled, indiscriminately, as soon as obtained. The
action of the disease appears to have been the same in all the spec-
imens, the chief abnormal] characters being a pallid and emaciated
appearance of the outer margin of the right lip, and the outward
bow-like curve of the same (fig. 1). In some instances from within
Fic, 1. Fic. 2. Fic, 3.
; Abnormal Cypreea lynx.
the lip a thin, shelf-like partition, suggesting a former imperfect lip
projected partly across the cavity. Several millimeters above this
partition a second lip appears, with teeth that are fairly normal (fig.
2). In fig. 3, a shell is shown in which a flat, white, shelf-like lip
replaces the convex and crenulated peristome of the normal shell,
Other irregular characters are present, but those specified are the
most important. Asa rule the left lip and dorsal parts of the shells
exhibit normal conditions both of form and color. So far as can be
learned no specimens similarly affected have been heretofore observed.
No evidence of the disease was apparent in the associated species.
Representative specimens have been presented to the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and to the Wagner Free Institute
of Science. A fine suite may also be seen in the writer’s collection.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329
JULY 6.
PRroFeEssorR Henry A. PiItssry in the Chair.
Twelve persons present.
JuLY 20.
Mr. Cuarves Morris in the Chair.
Nine persons present.
A paper entitled “New Australian Mollusks,” by Henry A.
Pilsbry was presented for publication.
Auveust 3.
Mr. BENJAMIN SmirH LyMANn in the Chair.
Seven persons present.
Patagonian Tertiary fossils—Pror. H. A. Pitspry spoke of a
small collection of fossils from near Cape Fairweather, Patagonia,
collected by the Princeton University Expedition to that region in
charge of Mr. Hatcher.
The general aspect of the fauna as represented by these fossils is
decidedly Magellanic; but the presence of large oysters, Cardiwm
and Turritella, differentiate it from the recent fauna of Cape Horn.
Negative characteristics are also significant, dominant Magellanic
genera as Nacella, Photinula, etc. being absent.
The forms common to the Cape Fairweather deposit and the recent
fauna are Trophon laciniatus, Calyptrea (probably), and Magellania
venosa. The extinct forms are Trophon inornatus, Turritella inno-
tabilis, Pecten actinodes, Ostrea, two species. The other forms
enumerated below are not sufficiently well preserved to base con-
clusions upon. Of the species supposed to be extinct, the Trophon
and Turritella are nearer to recent forms than to anything yet
known from the Patagonian Tertiary.
The evidence of so limited a number of species is not absolutely
conclusive as to the age of the deposit, but so far as it goes indicates
that it is Pliocene. Certainly no argument for greater antiquity
could be based upon the data now available, whatever a more com-
plete knowledge of the fauna of the beds in question may reveal.
TROPHON LACINIATUS Martyn. Specimens 6 to 6°5 em. in length.
330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
TROPHON INORNATUS 0. sp.
Form as in T. lacinatus or somewhat more obese; surface with-
out lamellee or spiral cords, smooth ex-
cept for growth-lines. Specimens meas-
ure:
Alt. 50, diam. 34 mm.
Alt. 85 mm.
CALYPTR2&XA Cf. MAMILLARIs Brod. In-
ternal casts show no features incom-
patible with the recent C. mamillaris
of the west coast of South America,
TURRITELLA INNOTABILIS N. sp.
Shell long-conic, of about a dozen
slowly increasing whorls, which are
but slightly convex, but become de-
cidedly so below, the latter two or
three being well rounded. Sculpture
on the lower whorls of five rounded
and subequal spiral cords separated
by intervals of about the same width, traversed by one to three
(generally two) sharp threads. Earlier whorls have three primary
spirals parted by intervals bearing a single strong thread, and still
earlier the threads disappear from the intervals.
Internal casts show well rounded whorls, the last just mentionably
flattened above the periphery, faintly angular at the junction of the
outer with the basal regions, the latter less convex but hardly flat-
tened.
Length 31, greatest diameter about 12 mm. (from largest mould).
Described from external moulds and internal casts, which alone
are preserved in the rather hard limestone, which contains, besides
numerous Turritellas, the remains of Cardiwm and Pinna?, and
some included pebbles.
A fragmentary mould of the basal volution of a somewhat larger
specimen than the type shows the basal sculpture of numerous un-
equal and quite low cords, with some radial growth-wrinkles.
The general figure is that of the Chilian 7. cingulata Sowb., but
the details of sculpture differ.
CARDIUM sp. undet. One very imperfect valve of a species prob-
ably resembling muwricatum or consors.
PECTEN ACTINODEs Sowerby.
OsTR#A FERARRESI Orb. Larger than d’Orbigny’s types, the larg-
est measuring 12°5 cm. long, 10°5 wide. There is also less cren-
ulation of the valve edges than the type shows.
OstRmA n.sp.? A rather thin, straight-beaked oyster, not corre-
sponding well with any of the described species. One specimen.
Pinna (?) Mere fragments in a refractory matrix.
MAGELLANIA VENOSA Solander. Abundant.
There were also moulds of crab or lobster chele.
Trophon inornatus.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 331
AvcGust 17.
Mr. BENJAMIN SmirH LyMAN in the Chair.
A paper entitled “The North American Species of Argia (Order
Odonata),” by Philip P. Calvert was presented for publication.
The death of J. Sergeant Price, a member, on the 16th inst. was
announced.
Avueust 24.
Mr. BensaAMIn Suita LyMAN in the Chair.
Eight persons present.
Auveust 31.
Mr. Usetma C. Smiru in the Chair.
Eleven persons present.
A paper entitled “ Description of Two New Species of Cerion”
by H. A. Pilsbry and E. G. Vanatta was presented for publication.
332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
SEPTEMBER 7.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.
Fourteen persons present.
SEPTEMBER 14.
Mr. CHarves P. Peror in the Chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.
A paper entitled “The Annual Molt of the Sanderling,” by
Witmer Stone, was presented for publication.
Scalpellum and Balanus from Texas.—Mr. Piuspry exhibited
fossil valves of Scalpellum and Balanus collected in Texas by Mr.
Charles W. Johnson, and described the former as follows:
SCALPELLUM CHAMBERLAINI n.sp. Tergum (fig. 1) very thick
and strong, of very irregular contour, the scutal and carinal mar-
gins subparallel. Apex conspicuously recurved ; occludent margin
very convex; carinal margin sigmoid, being markedly concave from
the apex two-thirds of the distance to basal angle, then bending in
the opposite direction; scutal margin slightly sinuous, nearly
straight, along the portion adjacent to the scu-
tum, then abruptly deflected, the two-fifths near-
est carina running upward to the basal or distal
angle. Sculpture consists of well-marked, fine.
ce growth-strize and radial ribs and striz ; the prin-
Fie J cipal radii are (1) a strong curved rib from apex
ee to basal or distal angle, (2) a sharper but more
slender rib running to the angle on the scutal margin, (38) a low,
wide rib along the occludent edge, and (4) a low, often obscure rib
running between (2) and (3), and producing a slight sinuosity in
the scutal margin. Besides these. radial ribs, there are numerous ©
fine radial lines throughout. Inside the surface is nearly smooth, a
trifle excavated mesially or below, rising into a heavy callous ridge
near the scutal margin, and equally thick along the occludent
border. The apex is slightly free, with a small area sculptured with
recession lines.
Dimensions: length of occludent margin 14 mm. ; length of valve
from middle of occludent margin to basal or distal angle 24 mm.
Locality and horizon: Berryman’s Place, three miles northeast
of Alto, Cherokee Co., Texas, Lower Claiborne Eocene.,
Four terga were collected by Mr. Johnson at the above-mentioned
locality, all being from the left side. No other plates were found.
1897. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 333
The irregular shape of the tergum, exceptionally convex, occludent
and concave, carinal margin, and unusual angulation of the scutal
margin are sufficiently unusual features to insure recognition of the
species, although the tergum is generally one of the less satisfactory
plates for description. ‘The discovery of the carina will be looked
for with interest, as the position of the species in the genus cannot
be predicated without a knowledge of that valve.
The species is respectfully dedicated to the Rev. Leander Trow-
bridge Chamberlain, D. D., whose liberal and enlightened interest
in the “ Lea Collection of Eocene Mollusca” must be regarded as
one of the important factors in the present revival of the study of
American tertiary paleontology.
A single scutum of Balanus was collected by Mr. Johnson from
the Eocene of Black Shoals, Brazos River, Texas. It is somewhat
worn, and the species remains doubtful until further remains come
to light.
SEPTEMBER 21.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-seven persons present.
SEPTEMBER 28.
The President, SamuEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty persons present.
The death of Johannes Japetus Smith Steenstrup, a Correspon-
dent, June 20, 1897, was announced.
- The following were elected members :—
Thomas H. Conarroe, M. D., G. A. Mueller and Mrs. Catherine
Mueller.
The following was ordered to be printed :—
334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
NEW AND LITTLE-KNOWN NORTH AMERICAN BEES,
BY T. D. A. COCKERELL.
Osmia viridimicans n. sp.
Q. Length 12 mm., brilliant peacock-green, the pubescence entirely
black. Head large, thorax ordinary, abdomen somewhat elongate,
the straight sides almost parallel, but slightly diverging to the fourth
segment ; after which the sides rapidly converge, meeting at the
apex at about a right angle. The light shines on the abdomen in
such a way as to give the impression of deep sutures, which in fact
do not exist. Punctuation ordinary, punctures of vertex and meso-
thorax distinct and separable. Basal area of mesothorax with its
lower portion smooth and shining.
Lower part of face bluer than the vertex; cheeks broader than
eyes; black pubescence of face tolerably abundant ; front edge of
clypeus black, straight, not produced at sides; mandibles 4-dentate ;
tegul green; wings smoky, hyaline, apical margin broadly darker,
no dark streak in marginal cell; first recurrent nervure reaching
second submarginal cell a very short distance from its base, second
recurrent reaching it at the beginning of the apical fourth; legs
bright green, the tarsi black ; ventral scopa entirely black.
Hab—Olympia, Wash., one 9, June 5, 1895 (T. Kincaid).
Readily known by its large size and the characters italicized. Mr.
Fox sends me a Nevada example of Q. mawra, which though en-
tirely black, has the same form as viridimicans, and agrees in hav-
ing the second recurrent nervure reaching the second submarginal
cell quite at the beginning of the apical fourth. .
Osmia cobaltina Cresson, 1878.
Three 9s from Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896 (T. Kincaid), are
of a very beautiful deep blue color, and agree with Cresson’s descrip-
tion.
Osmia kincaidii n. sp.
9. Length 6 to 8 mm., brilliant peacock-green, the pubescence
very sparse, black and dirty white mixed. Head large, thorax sub-
globose, abdomen short and oval. Punctuation ordinary, punctures
distinctly separated on mesothorax, closer and largely confluent on
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 335
vertex. Facial triangle higher than broad; the face may be all
blue, or green with the lower portion blue; the thin pubescence,
even on the clypeus, is black and pale intermixed; cheeks about as
broad as eyes; antennze wholly dark ; anterior edge of clypeus a
little produced, black, broadly truncate, sometimes a little depressed
in middle; mandibles with two large teeth, the third tooth, if pres-
ent, is not visible when they are closed; thorax with mixed black
and pale hairs, especially long on scutellum; basal area of meta-
thorax minutely granular, not shining; tegule punctured, green
with sometimes a purple spot; wings smoky ; nervures black ; first
recurrent neryure joining second submarginal cell a little less than
one-third from its base, second joining it a little less than one-fourth
from the apex; legs green, tarsi black, hind tarsi sometimes sub-
metallic on basal joint ; dorsal surface of abdomen almost nude, the
sparse short pubescence mixed black and pale; ventral scopa wholly
black.
$. Length 53 to 8 mm., bright bottle-green, that is, a much yel-
lower green than the @. Pubescence of head and thorax more
copious, nowhere mixed with black; creamy white on clypeus,
cheeks beneath, femora and lower part of thorax, pale ochreous on
vertex and dorsum of thorax, especially scutellum; wings a little
clearer; tarsi more distinctly metallic; the scanty pubescence of
abdomen all light; sixth dorsal segment barely notched, seventh
strongly emarginate ; seventh ventral segment greenish-blue, large,
its hind margin rounded, with pale pubescence.
Hab.—Olympia and Seattle, Wash. (T. Kincaid). The speci-
mens can be separated into two general series, one larger, the other
smaller and with more globose abdomen. After careful study, I
fail to find specific characters separating these, but if it should be
subsequently held that they are different, the type is to be consid-
ered the larger form. The females are, with one exception, of the
larger size; the males are, with three exceptions, of the smaller ;
both forms were taken at the same time and locality.
The exact data are as follows :
Seattle: 1 9 May 14, 1897, on Rubus ursinus; 1 ¢ April 14,
1897, on sand bank; 1 ¢ April 18, 1897.
Olympia: 6 9,3 June Ist, one June 2d, one June 21st, one July
Ist. 13 ¢, one May 11th, two May 5th, one May 23rd, three May
25th, one May 28th, one June 13th, two April 25th, on Fragaria ;
two April 22d, on Taraxacum.
336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
The female of O. kincaidii is easily separable from anything de-
scribed, by its brilliant color, small size,and partly pale pubescence
on thorax and face. The ¢ is not so easily separated, and should
be compared with exigua from California, bel/a from Colorado, and
illinoensis from Illinois. It agrees with Cresson’s description of
exigua except that none of the specimens are quite so small, and the
tarsi are not testaceous, but black with a metallic tint, the last joint
rufescent or wholly dark. From bella it will be known at once by
the absence of black pubescence on the abdomen. From illinoensis
it differs by the distinctly infuscated wings, the second submarginal
cell not longer than first, the abdominal pubescence not subfuscous.
It is quite possible that the present species may eventually prove to
be a northern, larger and darker race of the Californian exiqgua, but
it is desirable to distinguish it, whether as a species or as a race.
It is to be remarked that Provancher (Add. Faun. Hym., p.330)
records a male from Ottawa, attributed to O. exigua. I cannot
think it likely that this identification is correct, but it is impossible
to reach any definite conclusion, since Provancher’s description ap-
pears to be simply a translation of Cresson’s. It may be that he
had illinoensis before him.
The body-colors of both sexes of O. fulgida (Colorado examples
sent by Mr. Fox) agree with the colors of the corresponding sexes of
kincaidii, but fulgida, while about as broad as kineaidii, is conspic-
uously longer, the abdomen being shaped more like that of viridi-
micans.
Osmia bella Cresson, 1878.
A é& specimen from Olympia, Wash., June 19, 1895 (T. Kin-
eaid), must be referred to bella, but it represents a variety with
darker wings, and the apical pubescence of the second ventral seg-
ment pale. It is of a brilliant green color, and is conspicuously
larger than the males of kincaidii. The black pubescence on the
apical portion of the abdomen is very evident. The second sub-
marginal cell is noticeably longer than the first on the cubital nerv-
ure. Robertson’s illinoensis must be very near to bella. A Colo-
rado bella from Cresson’s series, lent by Mr. Fox, is somewhat
smaller than the Olympia example, distinctly bluer, and the second
submarginal cell is only about as long as the first on the cubital
nervure.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307
Osmia calla n. sp.
6. Length 8 to 9 mm., stoutly built, Augochlora-green. This
almost exactly resembles the Olympia form of bella, but is, per-
haps, a very slightly yellower-green, while the dorsal pubescence of
the abdomen is entirely white, and the second submarginal cell is not
longer than the first on the cubital nervure. The ocelli are a little
further apart, and the teeth of the seventh abdominal segment seem
to average longer. The pubescence of the inner side of the basal
joints of the tarsi is fuscous, not black.
Other distinguishing features of O. calla are as follows: Pubes-
cence throughout dull white, sometimes perceptibly tinged with
ochraceous, nowhere mixed with black. Antenne entirely black ;
clypeus ordinary. Punctures of mesothorax very close; tegule
wholly green ; basal area of metathorax ill-defined, minutely rough-
ened, not shining; wings smoky-hyaline, first recurrent nervure
joining second submarginal cell at about the end of the basal third,
second not far from the apex; legs green, tarsi piceous; sixth ab-
dominal segment notched feebly or quite distinctly, but never entire ;
second ventral segment large, purplish, rather densely fringed at
apex with pale ochraceous-tinged pubescence.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash., 3 ¢, May 25th and June 17, 1894 (T.
Kineaid). This has much the characters of ¢ kincaidii, but is
conspicuously larger and bulkier than the largest males of that spe-
cies. The antenne in kincaidii are longer in proportion to the size
of the head. While in color and length O. calla agrees with 3
fulgida from Colorado, calla is much broader than fulgida, so that
the two have quite a different appearance. The breadth of the ab-
domen in calla is 3 mm., in fulgida ¢ 23.
Osmia bruneri n. sp.
Q. Length 9 mm., brilliant blue-green, the clypeus, legs and
margins of abdominal segments shining purple. This may be only
arace of cobaltina, from which it differs in being green instead of
blue. The pubescence and ventral scopa are black, but dirty white
hairs are intermixed slightly on the vertex, quite conspicuously on
the dorsum of thorax, and also on the first abdominal segment.
Compared with the Pasco cobaltina, the spurs of hind tibize are con-
siderably larger and stouter, curved at the end, and the submargi-
nal cells are both longer. The wings are strongly infuscated, and
the second submarginal cell is, perhaps, a little longer than the first
on the cubital nervure.
338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
From the Colorado O. fulgida’ and viridis, O. bruneri will be
known by the green tegulz, and the partly light pubescence of tho-
rax. It may possibly be the unknown female of O. bella, but there
is no way of determining whether this is the case at present.
Hab.—Colorado Springs, Colo. (L. Bruner, no. 19).
Osmia inurbana Cresson, 1878.
$. 7 to 11 mm. long; dark brassy-green. Sixth segment of abdo-
men distinctly notched. Pubescence rather copious, tinged with och-
reous on dorsum. 37 examples, Olympia and Seattle, Wash. (T.
Kincaid). There is some variation, but they seem to be all one spe-
cies; the extremes of size are connected by intermediates. The
Seattle specimens were taken on April 17th and 18th, one in May ;
eight are from Seattle, the rest from Olympia. The Olympia dates
run from April 20th to May 25th. One was on Fragaria April
25th. A Colorado inurbana, sent by Mr. Fox, is like our medium
sized examples.
Osmia odontogaster n. sp. :
é. Length 9 to 10 mm.; stoutly built, head of ordinary size,
abdomen suboval ; dark brassy-green, metathorax bluer ; pubescence
tolerably dense, ochraceous on head and thorax, very dense and cream
color on clypeus, nowhere mixed with black, nigrofuscous on inner
sides of basal joints of middle and hind tarsi, ochraceous on base
and apex of abdomen, short and fuscous on second, third and fourth
segments, and on the basal portion of fifth, varying to griseous;
third and following segments mofe or less distinctly fringed with
pale or ochraceous hairs; punctuation of head and thorax strong
but extremely dense, becoming sparser on middle of scutellum, which
is thus a little shiny ; basal area of metathorax with its lateral in-
ferior margins shining ; punctuation of abdomen less dense, ordinary,
leaving the surface shining.
Face rather long and narrow; antennz of only moderate length,
flagellum dull rufous beneath ; clypeus ordinary; mandibles witha
large pointed terminal blade, and a broad rounded inner tooth;
tegule black, shining, punctured; wings smoky-hyaline, a little
darker on apical margin, no distinct cloud or streak in marginal
cell ; second submarginal somewhat shorter than the first on cubital
+A fulgida from Colorado, sent by Mr. Fox, has the thoracic pubescence
pale brownish, probably faded. It is, however, a much narrower and longer
insect than bruneri, the abdomen being of the elongate parallel-sided type,
whereas bruneri has it of the oval type.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339
nervure; first recurrent nervure joining second submarginal cell
nearly at the end of its basal third, second at the beginning of the
apical fourth or a little beyond; legs black, basal joint of hind
tarsus broad, truncate at the end; sixth segment of abdomen with
the margin entire, seventh emarginate ; second ventral segment with
its hind margin fringed with long pale hairs, and presenting medially
a large and prominent tooth, directed backward, shaped like the term-
inal joint of a finger, but having a longitudinal groove.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash., 5 &, May 10th and 25th, June 1st and
18, 1894 (T. Kincaid). This might be taken for inurbana, but its
abdominal characters at once distinguish it.
Osmia nanula n. sp.
@. Length 7 to 8 mm.; stoutly built, short, with the abdomen
broad-oval. Color of head, thorax and abdomen dark greenish-
blue; legs, mandibles and antenne black. Pubescence black, with
ochraceous on sides of face, on occiput about tubercles, slightly on
mesothorax, quite densely along hind border of scutellum, on sides
of metathorax, on lateral hind borders of the first three abdominal
segments, especially the first, thinly along whole hind borders of
four and five, very sparsely on surface of sixth, and on first four
tarsi behind. The black hairs on the scutellum are considerably
‘longer than the ochraceous ones, and are placed in front of them.
Ventral scopa all black. Hairs on inner side of basal joint of hind
tarsi dark fuscous. Pubescence of clypeus black, sparse, its ante-
rior margin and the mandibles with some orange-rufous hairs. The
ochraceous pubescence of the thorax, in fresh specimens, is quite
bright, almost orange-rufous.
Punctuation ordinary, punctures of vertex and mesothorax large,
very close, but not all confluent, the abdomen is quite shiny. Head
fairly but not excessively large, clypeus ordinary, mandibles triden-
tate ; tegule shining black, with a submetallic tinge in front: wings
dusky, broad apical margin and upper half of marginal cell con-
spicuously darker: second submarginal cell noticeably shorter than
first on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure reaching second
submarginal cell just before the end of its proximal third, second
very near its tip.
Hab.—Seattle, Wash., 4 9, April 17th, May 11th and 19th (T.
Kincaid) ; Olympia, Wash.,5 9, May 28rd, June Ist, 19th and
30th (T. Kincaid), A @ taken by Mr. Kincaid at Olympia,
340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Wash., differs by having a brassy-green abdomen; it appears to be
only a variety of this species.
I have not described the ¢ of O. nanula, but I have before me
a series of nine males, collected by Mr. Kincaid at Seattle and
Olympia, which I believe belong here. They average slightly
smaller than the females, and are of a brassy-green color. They
might readily be confused with small examples of inurbana, but the
siath abdominal segment is entire or very feebly notched. The dor-
sal pubescence of the thorax and head is quite brightly colored,
and not mixed with black. The smaller size and the absence of
the ventral tooth at once separate them from odontogaster.
Osmia tristella n. sp.
Q@. Length7 to 8 mm., of ordinary build, the abdomen somewhat
longer than in O. nanula. Head, thorax and abdomen dark indigo
blue; legs, mandibles and antennz black. Head of ordinary size,
not so large as in nanula. Pubescence black, not dense, long on
head and thorax, white just behind wings and at sides of first ab-
dominal segment subbasally ; there is also some obscure white or
whitish pile on the last dorsal segment of the abdomen. The
pubescence of the face, vertex, thoracic dorsum and ventral scopa is
wholly black, The abdominal segments between the first and last
are shining, and present some short pile, wholly black except for an
oceasional short pale hair. The pubescence of the legs is all black.
Punctuation ordinary, very dense on vertex and mesothorax; basal
area of metathorax minutely roughened, not shining. Clypeus or-
dinary ; tegule black. Wings pale fuscous; second submarginal
cell about as long as the first on the cubital nervure; first recur-
rent nervure joining second submarginal cell at the end of its basal
sixth, second at the beginning of its apical sixth.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash., 2 2, one June 30th (T. Kincaid);
Seattle, Wash., 4 9, April 18th and May 11th (T. Kincaid). This
might be confused with nanula, but is easily separated by the char-
acters italicized.
Osmia cyanella n. sp.
9. Length 9 mm., stoutly built, very broad, with a large sub
quadrate head. The thorax is especially broad, the distance between
the wings being much greater than in tristella or nanula. The ab-
domen is suboval. Color of head, thorax and abdomen dark indigo
blue; legs, antennze and mandibles black. Pubescence, including
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341
ventral scopa, black, but there are some shining pale hairs along the
hind margin of the scutellum, and sparsely on the abdominal dorsum ;
the extreme apex of the abdomen, the anterior edge of the clypeus,
and the outer surface of the mandibles exhibit some orange pile ;
the pubescence of the tarsi, especially the anterior ones, is also more
or less of a pale orange tint. The hairs of the face and vertex are
wholly black, and the tuft just behind the wings is black. Punctua-
tion ordinary, not quite so dense as in some related species; ocelli
light yellowish, clypeus ordinary; tegulz shining black; wings
smoky ; second submarginal cell perhaps a very little longer than
first on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure reaching second
submarginal cell slightly before the end of its basal third, second
very near its end.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash., May 23, 1894 (T. Kincaid). Resembles
tristella, but easily known by the characters italicized.
Osmia trevoris n. sp.
@. Length 8 mm., stoutly built, head quite large, abdomen short
and broad. The thorax is by no means so broad as in cyanella.
Head, thorax, and abdomen very dark blue, the two latter a slightly
greenish-blue, yet bluer than in nanula; legs, mandibles and anten-
nz black. Pubescence of head black, except some fulvous on occi-
put, hairs of face long, all black; pubescence of pleura black, of
thoracic dorsum moderately dense, and orange-fulvous, with a few
dark hairs intermixed, not readily notived ; tuft behind wings orange-
fulvous; hairs of femora and tibiz short and black, or tarsi dull
fulvous ; dorsal pubescence of the abdomen entirely black, except a
thin, pale fulvous fringe along the hind margins of the segments,
only noticed in certain lights; ventral scopa ali black. Punctua-
‘tion ordinary, punctures of vertex and mesothorax close but separ-
able. Clypeus ordinary; tegule black; wings dusky hyaline, with
the broad outer margin and the upper part of the marginal cell con-
spicuously darker; second submarginal cell a little longer than first
on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure joining second submar-
ginal cell at about the end of its basal third, second a very short dis-
tance before its tip.
Hab.—Seattle, Wash., May 19, 1896 (Trevor Kincaid). This is
closely related to O. nanula, but it is somewhat broader, with a
larger head, and lacks the pale pubescence at sides of face, while
the pubescence of the thoracic dorsum is dense and much more
highly colored; the abdomen, also, is less globose. 0. trevoris ree
23
342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
sembles a good deal in color and form O. cerasi from New Mexico,
but it is smaller than that; the thoracic pubescence is by no means
so bright, and the dorsal abdominal pubescence of cerasi is entirely
black, except on the first segment, where it is pale fulvous, usually
mixed with black.
Osmia propinqua Cresson, 1864.
I have before me 8 females, sent by Mr. T. Kincaid; two from
Seattle, Wash., May 11 and 14, 1897, on Rubus ursinus; one from
Comas I., Wash., June 18, 1896, collected by N. L. Gardner; five
from Olympia, Wash., May 9 and 23, and June 1 and 2.
Osmia subornata n. sp.
Q. Length 14 mm., stoutly built, rather shiny, pure black; head
large, subquadrate, abdomen short and broad; pubescence of face
and vertex entirely black, with sometimes a few pale hairs about the
insertion of the antenne, of cheeks and pleura dark griseofuscous to
almost black, of thoracic dorsum black on disc, with a pale band be-
fore and behind, the anterior band not very distinct, reaching from
tubercle to tubercle, the posterior occupying the scutellum, and very
distinct, but having black hairs intermixed. The color of these
hair-bands is very pale ochraceous. A tuft of pale ochraceous hairs
behind the wings. Pubescence of legs entirely black, or a little
fuscous on anterior basis. Pubescence of abdominal dorsum black,
some rather obscure pale hairs on sides of first segment, and the
apex always noticeably clothed with appressed pale pubescence.
Ventral scopa entirely black. Punctuation strong, but rather sparse
for an Osmia. Inner orbits carinate; clypeus produced and very
broadly truncate ; mandibles very broad ; tegule black; wings pale
fuscous, second submarginal cell about as long as first on cubital
nervure; first recurrent nervure reaching second submarginal cell
a little before the end of the basal third, second near the tip; spurs
of hind tibiz stout and curved at tips.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash., June 1, 2 and 12 (T. Kincaid). This is
a submelanic representative of O. bucephala and O. megacephala,
having the same general structure and appearance. There is, how-
ever, no blue or green tint, and the pubescence is more black, and
the wings are quite dark. The apical tooth of the mandibles is
short.
Osmia pascoensis n. sp.
Q@. Length about 15 mm., stoutly built; black, the abdomen
with a perceptible blue tinge. Head large, but not so large as
2 BO ots 1 Pa, gee
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343
thorax. Pubescence of head entirely black, except a yellowish-
white fringe on occipital margin; of thoracic dorsum cream-colored,
with longer black hairs intermixed ; of sides of thorax black ; a cream-
colored tuft on tubercles and one behind wings, but the hairs of
sides of metathorax below that black. Pubescence of legs black,
shining fuscous on inner side of anterior tarsi. Pubescence of first
abdominal segment cream-color, not mixed with black, of the re-
maining segments black, scopa wholly black. Tegule black. Wings
dull hyaline, with the broad apical margin and the marginal cell
conspicuously darkened. Second submarginal cell a little longer
than first on cubital nervure; first recurrent nervure joining second
submarginal cell a little before the end of the basal third, second at
the beginning of the apical sixth. Punctuation strong and quite
dense on head and thorax; sparse on abdomen. Anterior margin of
elypeus truncate, crenulated or ribbed, the sides of the truncation
sloping away, the angle at the corners a very obtuse one. Apical
tooth of mandibles very long, curved. Spurs of hind tibie rather
slender and straight.
Hab.—Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896 (T. Kincaid). Closely
allied to several species. From subornata it may be known by the
somewhat larger size, the blue tint of the abdomen, the long apical
tooth of mandibles, the straight and more slender spurs of hind
tibize, the absence of the black dorsal pubescence of the thorax, ete.
From bucephala and megacephala by the smaller head, entirely
black pubescence of face, etc.: from nigrifrons by the larger size.
It agrees very nearly with Cresson’s description of nigrifrons, and
may represent a northwestern subspecies of that insect.
Osmia grandior n. sp.
Q. Length about 16 mm. Closely resembles O. pascoensis in all
respects but the following: Head smaller ; clypeus dull and rough-
ened (in pascoensis shiny, with well separated punctures) ; apical
tooth of mandibles shorter; two conspicuous brushes of orange hair
beneath the margin of the clypeus; vertex with smaller and closer
punctures; vertex and whole of thoracic dorsum covered with pale
fulvous hair, rather dense and not mixed with black ; brush of hairs
behind wings black ; metathorax tinged with bluish; pubescence of
first abdominal segment black with pale hairs intermixed ; appressed
pubescence of last segment fuscous; pubescence of first four tarsi
shining reddish fulvous; marginal cell and second submarginal
344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
shorter ; abdomen somewhat longer. The clypeus is quite ordinary,
its margip straight.
Hab—Olympia, Wash., May 10,1894 (T. Kineaid). This would
be easily confused with pascoensis, if attention were not paid to the
details italicized. It is apparently the representative, in the north-
west, of the Colorado juata and longula. The blue tint and the color
of the thoracic pubescence at once separates it from swbornata.
Osmia subpurpurea n. sp.
Q. Length about 14 mm., relatively slender, dark steel blue, the
legs, antennze and mandibles black. Head subquadrate, rather
large, at least as broad as the thorax. Pubescence of face dull white
with a slight yellow tinge, with numerous black hairs intermixed ; of
cheeks pale; of vertex long, thin and mostly black ; of thoracie
dorsum white with a slightly yellowish tinge, with longer black
hairs intermixed; of pleura sparse, dull white; of sides of meta-
thorax copious, white; of legs short and black, with some dull white
on femora behind, and dark fuscous on tarsi; of first abdominal
segment dull white and quite abundant; of remaining segments
very short, dark, hardly noticeable, except that the hind margins of
segments 2 to 5 present each a thin and narrow, but very visible, white
hair-band, and the short pile of the apical segment is pale. Ventral
scopa entirely black. Punctuation of vertex strong, but not so close
as to hide the shining surface; of mesothorax very close, the surface
appearing roughened, dull and dark ; of abdomen minute and sparse
enough to leave a very shiny surface. Basal area of metathorax
dullish, with no high lights. Cheeks nearly twice as broad as eyes;
antennze short; clypeus ordinary, anterior margin straight; apical
tooth of mandibles moderately long; hind spur of hind tibia stout,
and curved at tip; outer end of middle tibia ending in an outwardly
projecting spine; the same with anterior tibie ; tegule black ; wings
dusky; second submarginal cell about as long (perhaps a little
shorter) as first on cubital nervure ; first recurrent nervure joining
second submarginal cell at about the end of its basal third, second
nearly at its end.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash., May 25, 1894 (T. Kineaid). Larger
than O. faceta, and differs by the formation of the clypeal margin,
ete. It is also allied to O. purpurea, but differs in its much greater
size and in the pubescence.
Osmia atrocyanea n. sp.
Q@. Length about 113 mm., moderately robust, sides of abdomen
subparallel, head fairly large. Head, thorax and abdomen indigo-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345
blue, with a greenish tint on the dorsum of thorax and parts of the
abdomen; legs, mandibles and antennz black. Pubescence rather
thin, entirely black except a very few scattered pale hairs near the
tubercles, on scutellum, and sides of metathorax, and rather more on
first abdominal segment. Ventral scopa entirely black. Punctua-
tion ordinary, punctures of mesothorax dense but not confluent, of
abdomen rather close but leaving a shining surface; median line of
mesothorax distinct, basal area of metathorax moderately shiny ;
antenns short; clypeus ordinary, anterior margin entire; apical
tooth of mandibles very short ; tegule black ; wings smoky, paler
along the nervures; second submarginal cell about as long as first
on cubital nervure ; first recurrent nervure reaching second submar-
ginal cell a little before the end of its basal third, second just after
the beginning of its apical sixth.
Hab— Olympia, Wash., July 4, 1896 (T. Kineaid). Seems near
to O. brevis, but differs in the color of the pubescence, larger size,
ete.
Osmia brevis Cress,
An authentic Colo. 2 specimen, sent by Mr. Fox, does not have
the head as large as one would imagine from Cresson’s description.
The pubescence of the pleura is brownish-black. The abdomen is
of a fine dark shining indigo-blue. The second submarginal cell is
longer than the first on the cubital nervure; the first recurrent
nervure joins the second submarginal cell somewhat before the end
of its basal third, the second quite near its tip. At Pasco, Wash.,
May 25, 1896, Mr. T. Kincaid took a couple of ¢ , agreeing with the
Colorado insect, though having the second submarginal cell a little
shorter. At Olympia, Wash., June 24, July 7, ete., Mr. Kincaid has
taken in numbers a species like brevis, but with a more convex, very
shiny, dark prussian green abdomen ; I supposed it to be a different
species, but leave it for the present with this allusion. It is quite
possibly the 2 of inurbana or odontogaster.
At Pasco, May 25, 1896, Mr. Kineaid also took a couple of males
which it seems safe to refer to brevis, although the ¢ of that insect
has not been described. The abdomen is indigo-blue like the 9,
but narrow and more shiny ; antennz wholly black, reaching about
to scutellum ; pubescence of face, vertex and thoracic dorsum yel-
lowish-white, rather copious; of cheeks, pleura and sides of meta-
thorax black; wings quite hyaline, except a slight stain in the
upper part of the marginal cell; dorsal pubescence of abdomen all
346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
black except on first segment; ventral pubescence black, a pale
median patch just beyond apex of second segment; sixth dorsal
segment entire. This ¢ is like O. montana from Pike’s Peak, but
is separated by the entire sixth segment of abdomen.
ee ——e
Osmia proxima Cresson.
This is considered to be the ¢ of atriventris; it was described
from Maine and British America. At Olympia, Wash., June 24,
1895, Mr. T. Kineaid took a ¢ which is evidently conspecific with
an authentic Canadian proxima sent by Mr. Fox. This insect will be
recognized by its small size, large head, short subglobose thorax and
abdomen, and shining dark blue-green color. The hind margins of
the abdominal segments are inclined to be edged with testaceous—
in the Olympia insect this is quite conspicuous. The antennz are
long, and the flagellum is more or less brownish or rufescent be-
neath. The tegule are greenish in front. The wings are hyaline.
Sixth abdominal segment notched.
Osmia faceta Cresson.
@. One collected at Olympia, Wash., June 2, by Mr. T. Kincaid,
agrees with an authentic Canadian example lent by Mr. Fox. Itis
a little greener than that from Canada, but the specific characters
are the same. It is especially to be noted that while the ventral
scopa is black, there is white hair on the extreme lateral margin of
the abdomen, which may run along the margins of the dorsal seg-
ments a little way, forming rudimentary bands. The mandibles
have a conspicuous subapical band of orange-rufous hair.
Osmia densa Cresson.
I have before me an authentic @ from Colorado, sent by Mr. Fox.
It is much like atrocyanea, but the pubescence of the sides of the
metathorax and of the tubercles is all white, while it is black in
atrocyanea. In densa the pubescence of the pleura is scanty and
white, in atrocyanea it is black. O. atrocyanea has a larger thorax
and a somewhat larger head than densa. The following table sep-
arates a series of females having the general appearance of densa ;
in all, the ventral scopa is black.
’ A. Pubescence of pleura, tubercles and sides of metathorax white.
a. Pubescence of clypeus and sides of abdomen white . . faceta, Cr.
b. Pubescence of clypeus black, sides of abdomen without conspic-
uous white pubescence, though there are some white hairs,
‘densa, Cr.
(O. densa was taken at Olympia, Wash., by Mr. T. Kincaid,
June 19.)
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 347
B. Pubescence of pleura black.
a. Pubescence of scutellum black, with a few pale hairs intermixed,
of sides of metathorax black ; head strongly blue,
atrocyanea, Ckll.
b. Pubescence of scutellum light, with, at most, a few dark hairs in-
termixed ; head less blue, clypeus black or almost so,
nigrifrons, Cr.
(An authentic specimen from Colorado, sent me by Mr. Fox;
one from Colorado Springs, Colo., sent by Prof. L. Bruner ;
one from Olympia, Wash., May 25, sent by Mr. T. Kincaid.)
Synhalonia edwardsii (Cresson, 1878).
This is evidently common at Olympia, Wash., and is sent in num-
bers by Mr. T. Kincaid. Cresson describes only the 3; the 9 is
from 14 to 16 mm. long, and differs from that of S. frater by its
mouse-colored thoracic pubescence and by the abdominal bands,
which, though very white, are reduced to two, on the third and
fourth segments, that on the third interrupted in the middle. The
second segment has a small white patch on each extreme side. A
Seattle 9 has the thoracic pubescence ochraceous as in frater, but
the abdominal characters remain quite distinct. One Olympia 9?
has an interrupted band on the second segment. Within what must
be considered the specific limits of S. edwardsii there are, in Wash-
ington State, two distinct types :—
(a.) Race latior. 3. Facial quadrangle not far from a square, sides
of the clypeal yellow, gradually sloping above, distance be-
tween the yellow and the eyes quite considerable. Olympia
and Seattle.
(b.) Race angustior. ¢. Face conspicuously longer than broad.
Sides of clypeal yellow, above squarely notched, distance be-
tween the yellow and the eyes extremely small; pubescence
somewhat paler. 9. Smaller, with paler pubescence, abdo-
men with the white bands on the fourth and fifth (instead of
third and fourth) segments, that on the fifth fuscous in the
middle, but brilliant white at the sides, a white mark on each
side of third, apical segment white at sides. Wings clearer.
Pasco. The exact data are as follows :—
Race latior. Olympia, 18%, April 24, May 2,10, 11, 17, 21, 23,
20; June 5; 199, June 1, 5, 11, 18, 19, 21, 24, 25, 29, July
4: Seattle, 3 ¢, April 17, May 3; 29, both May 19 CT.
Kincaid). Two Olympian ¢s are from Lupinus.
348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF isor
Race angustior. Pasco,5¢,29, all taken May 25, 1896 (T. Kin-
caid).
Synhalonia lycii n. sp.
Q. Length 13 to 142 mm.; general form, size and structure of
S. frater, which might be readily confused with it on superficial ex-
amination. On comparing /ycii with an Illinois example of frater
received from Mr. Robertson, the following differences are at once
apparent :—
S. frater 9. S. lyeti @.
Segments 2-5 of abdomen with Segments 2 and 3 of abdomen
distinct light bands; apex with with light bands; 4 and 5 sooty
light brown pubescence. black, without light bands, or at
most a very narrow apical gray
band on 4; apex with black
_ pubescence.
Ventral surface of abdomen Ventral surface of abdomen
with light pubescence. with black pubescence.
Wings noticeably brownish. Wings clear.
The above are conspicuous and constant distinctions: yet the
head, thorax and legs of the two insects, with their pubescence, are
virtually the same.
Hab.—S. lycii oceurs in the Mesilla Valley, New Mexico, near
the Agricultural College ; on Lycium torreyi, on the College Farm,
April 16; on flowers of plum, College Farm, April 9. Miss Jessie
Casad took one on lilac in Mesilla, April 14.
Calliopsis scitulus Cresson, 1878.
Santa Fé, N. M., July 7 (CkIl. 1,356) ; Sta. Fé, July 25, on Cleome
serrulata (Ckll. 3,747). Also Colorado, collected by Prof. C. F.
Baker (No. 1,595=Fort Collins, Aug. 8, 1895, and 1,592—Fort Col-
lins, Aug. 8, 1895, on Cleome).
In the specimens, Ckll. 1,356, the lateral marks of the clypeus are
almost lacking; as also in Baker’s 1,592, which has only two spots
on the fifth abdominal segment.
I am not sure about the ¢ of C. scitulus; the above records all
pertain to females. At Sta. Fé, on the same day as 1,356, I took a
é which resembled, but was not identical with, C. pictipes Cresson.
Prof. Baker sends a % taken at the same time and place as his 1,595
above, and it agrees sufficiently with Cresson’s description of pieti-
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349
pes to be conspecific. At all events, I think, one may say, that the
8 of scitulus is either pictipes or closely similar to it.
A @ from Colorado (Baker 1,599—Fort Collins, Aug. 15, 1895,
on Solidago canadensis) has the clypeus entirely black.
Calliopsis australior n. sp.
The ¢ of this so greatly resembles scitulus in every respect that
it was long held to be a variety of it, and I only now separate it on
observing that the differential characters are constant. The band
on the third abdominal segment, usually entire in scitulus, is always
interrupted, often quite widely ; the band on the fourth segment is
usually entire, being the only entire band; the fifth segment is black,
with neither band nor spots; the lateral face-marks are always much
broader and shorter than in scitulus; the clypeus always has a pale
stripe down the middle; otherwise the two insects are about the
same. It is to be remarked that australior partakes of the charac-
ters of the Californian C. edwardsti, which has the longitudinal
clypeal mark but not the lateral marks on the clypeus, which are
common to australior and scitulus. C. edwardsii is also a larger in-
sect than scitu/us, whereas australior is of the same size.
The 2 of australior I found in numbers visiting the flowers of
Cleome serrulata at Albuquerque, N. M., Aug. 16; I also found it
on the sand hills at Mesilla, N. M., May 29, numerously visiting the
flowers of Dithyrea wislizeni Engelm. It also comes from Colorado,
collected by Prof. C. F. Baker (No. 1,592—Fort Collins, Aug. 8,
1895, on Cleome).
- The Colorado form has the abdominal markings more yellow than
that from New Mexico.
I am uncertain about the ¢ of australior, but Baker’s 1,591
(Fort Collins, Aug. 8, 1895, on Solidago canadensis) may belong
there. It has the first joint of hind tarsus yellow, not greatly
broadened, and with no conspicuous tuft of hairs at the tip. The
face is all white below the level of the antennz, except a couple of
black dots on clypeus, and one at apex of each dog-ear mark. The
postscutellum and a transverse band on the scutellum are white. I
took a closely similar ¢ at El Paso, Texas, May 13, 1897, three
specimens. It has the face more narrowed below, and the abdomi-
nal markings more reduced than in the Colorado insect. It was
flying round Baccharis.
Calliopsis personatus n. sp.
&. Length 8mm. This also is a sort of modified scitulus, but
the modification is in a different direction. The most obvious char-
350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
acter is that the face is entirely black, although there remains a white
spot at the base of the mandibles. The abdomen has a spot on each
side of the first two segments, a broadly interrupted band on the
third, and an almost continuous one on the fourth, these markings
being white. The fifth segment, as in australior, has neither band
nor spots; the apical pubescence is entirely white. For the rest, the
characters are practically as in scitulus.
Hab.—Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896 (T. Kincaid).
Calliopsis clypeatus Cresson, 1878.
Cresson had only a single ¢. Prof. C. F. Baker has taken both
sexes in Colorado (No. 1,581, on Laramie River, Larimer Co.,
8,500 ft., July 19, 1895). The 9 is like the 3, except that the face
is wholly dark : the antennz shorter, with the flagellum, after the
third joint, dull ferruginous beneath; the abdomen broader, the
apical portion with white pubescence, and the extreme apex with a
broad, dense, ochreous brush.
Calliopsis boylei Ckll., 1896.
This is not rare at Santa Fé, New Mexico. It is also found in
Colorado, a specimen before me was collected by Prof. C. F. Baker
(No. 1,600). The Colorado form has a yellow line on the seape, and
a study of it leads me to believe that C. boylei is probably only a
variety of C. ornatipes (Cress., 1872). In the typical boylet from
Sta. Fé, the scape is entirely black.
Calliopsis coloradensis Cress., 1878.
Santa Fé, N. M., on flowers of Grindelia squarrosa, Aug. 1 (Ckll.
4,029); and in Mr. Boyle’s garden, Aug. 10 (Ckll. 4,397). The
face-marks are slightly tinged with pinkish, and the lateral marks
do not go up so far as would seem to have been the case in Cresson’s
type; yet the identity is evident. The specimens are females.
Calliopsis andreniformis Smith, 1853, subsp. rhodophilus n. subsp.
é. The legs, instead of being entirely yellow, have the femora
with the basal two-thirds nearly all black, and all the tibiz with a
black patch behind; sometimes the four hind tibize have a dark
shade in front; the scape is entirely black, or may have a narrow
yellow line in front; the yellow is paler throughout ; the thoracic
pubescence is more scanty and grayish-white rather than ochraceous ;
otherwise there is little or no difference.
Q@. The face-marks are cream-color; no rudiments of dog-ear
marks. wings clearer. This subspecies is more distinct in the ¢
than 9.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301
Hab.—Santa Fé, N. M.; females; July 27, 1895, at flowers of
Spheralcea angustifolia; Aug. 5, Aug. 14, Aug. 14, July 25 on
Spheralcea angustifolia ; Aug. 19,1894. Males: Aug., 1894; July
27, at flowers of Spheralcea angustifolia; Aug. 5, July 30, burrow-
ing in damp soil, I saw it enter, and dug it out from end of burrow.
Andrena kincaidii n. sp.
? 14 mm. long, black; head and thorax with short, dense, ochra-
ceous pubescence; abdominal segments 2 to 4 with more or less
broadly interrupted apical bands of pale ochraceous pubescence ;
apex densely fringed with orange-rufous pubescence. Femora black,
tibie and tarsi wholly ferruginous. Process of labrum truncate,
subemarginate. Clypeus with rather large, not very dense punctures,
and a median smooth longitudinal ridge or line. Mesothorax and
scutellum distinctly but not very densely punctured, the punctures
unevenly distributed ; basal area of metathorax rugose, ill-defined ;
abdomen distinctly and quite closely, though not deeply, punctured.
Antenne wholly black. Tegule rather dark testaceous. Wings
strongly tinged with yellowish-ferruginous, the apical portion gray-
ish, and the apex conspicuously blackish ; nervures and stigma ferru-
ginous. Mandibles notched at end.
$. About 11 mm. long, more slender, pubescence paler, some-
times becoming whitish, no bands on abdomen ; clypeus lemon-yellow
with two black spots; antennze wholly dark; tibize and tarsi all fer-
ruginous asinthe 9. Hind-margins of abdominal segments becom-
ing testaceous.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash., very numerous specimens of both sexes
sent by Mr. Kincaid. The dates for the females run from May 9
to June 29, for the males from May 25 to June 12. It is a very
distinct species, at once known by the charactersitalicized. Rarely
the @ exhibits a yellow spot on the clypeus, in the median line not
far from the anterior margin.
Andrena saliciflaris n. sp.
2. About 11 mm. long, black, the pubescence brownish-ochra-
ceous. Head ordinary, face broad, facial quadrangle broader than
long, pubescence of face fairly abundant; clypeus shining, but
strongly and rather closely punctured, with a rather strawberry-like
surface; basal process of labrum rounded; antennze black ; vertex
with close shallow punctures, the surface minutely roughened;
mesothorax dull, with tolerably close strong and very large punc-
tures, median and parapoidal grooves distinct ; scutellum with large
352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
punctures, becoming smaller and very dense on its hindmost por-
tion ; enclosure of metathorax ill-defined, irregularly longitudinally
wrinkled ; pleura strongly and closely punctured ; tegulz piceous ;
wings smoky-hyaline; nervures and stigma very dark brown or
piceous; legs with brownish-ochraceous pubescence; basal joints
of middle and hind tarsi rather broad ; abdomen strongly punctured,
rather shiny, practically naked, except for some thin pubescence at
base of first segment, lateral grayish-white patches on hind margins
of segments 2 to 4 representing very broadly interrupted bands, and
dense reddish-orange pubescence at theapex. Venter with three thin
hair bands,
é. Length 9 mm.; pubescence more abundant and rufous
throughout, of quite a bright tint. Face an antenne wholly dark;
band on fourth segment of abdomen entire, but very thin in the
middle, and, like the other abdominal markings, orange-rufous.
Abdomen not so closely or deeply punctured.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash. (T. Kincaid). The @ May 9th; the ¢
April 4th, at willow blossom. In some respects this resembles A.
pruni Rob., but it is quite distinct.
Ceratina nanula n. sp.
. Length 42 mm., shining, very dark bluish-green, brassy-green
on the mesothorax. Legs concolorous except the tarsi, which are
dark brownish, the small joints of anterior tarsi dull ferruginous.
Antenne very dark brown; iegule brown. Wings hyaline, nerv-
ures piceous. Tubercles, median third of labrum (but none of man-
dibles) and clypeal mark cream color; the last is inversely T-shaped,
the upright portion very broad, and longer than the arms. Pune-
tuation ordinary, but the punctures of front and mesothorax large
and sparse, leaving shining impunctured areas in the middle of the
mesothorax and above the antenne. Abdomen ending in a short
point. Hind femora produced beneath to an angle slightly greater
than a right angle.
Hab.—At flowers of Spheralcea angustifolia, Las Cruces, New
Mexico, April 25th.
Ceratina submaritima n. sp.
g. Length about or nearly 6 mm.; differing from nanula in its
larger size, longer antennz (wholly black, or dull ferruginous be-
neath) ; the tubercles dark ; the elypeal mark with the upright por-
tion short, much shorter than the long lateral portions ; the tegule
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 353
black; the wings somewhat dusky; the hind femora more _pro-
duced below, the angle resulting less than a right angle.
Hab.—Olympia, Wash., May 10th; also April 25th, at Fragaria
(T. Kineaid). I have also before me a couple from Seattle, Wash.,
May 13th, from Mr. Dunning, marked “ Lot 214.”
The two species described above differ at once from dupla and
tejonensis in the 3, by having the abdomen terminated by a point ;
the last ventral segment in both tejonensis and dupla is broadly
rounded at the end. At one time I thought nanu/a might be OC.
strenua Smith, but that cannot be, as Smith expressly states of
strenua, ‘seventh segment rounded at the apex.”
As regards the females, the distinctions are not so obvious. I
have what I suppose to be females of nanula from Juarez, Las
Cruces and Santa Fé, New Mexico; but except in being smoother
and more shining (like the ¢) they do not appreciably differ from
dupla, and it may well be that some of the larger examples (82 mm.
long, Sta. Fé, July) belong really to dupla, though of this I cannot
be sure until ¢ dupla has been caught at Sta. Fé,
The ¢ of C. submaritina, which Mr. Kineaid took in some num-
bers at Olympia, Wash., differs at once from the supposed 9 of
nanula in having the elypeus entirely dark, or at most with a very
small and obscurespot. C.acantha Prov., from Los Angeles, Calif.,
is described only from the @ ; it is too small for swbmaritima, its
clypeus is said to have a median testaceous line.
Perdita side n. sp.
$. Length 4% to 54 mm. Head and thorax very dark metallic
blue, obscurer and more inclined to greenish on mesothorax and
scutellum, shining; the white pubescence moderately abundant.
Head large, subquadrate, broader than thorax, and considerably
broader than long; cheeks unarmed, but occasionally produced be-
low into a prominent angle or incipient tooth. Clypeus broad and
low, of the Panama-hat type; mandibles, except their dark tips,
labrum, and face up to the level of antenne light yellow; supracly-
peal yellow area broader than long; upper limit of the yellow im-
mediately lateral to the antennz not as high as the top of the
supraclypeal mark, but only reaching to the lower level of the
antennal sockets, but rising as it approaches the orbit, to end at an
angle of about 45° slightly above the upper level of the antennal
socket. Antenne wholly deep orange; ocelli ina curve. Front
above level of antenne with tolerably sparse but very distinct punc-
304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
tures; vertex shining, microscopically sculptured with very sparse
punctures. Mesothorax sparsely punctured ; tubercles, and hind
border of prothorax, more or less pale dull yellowish ; sometimes
this is hardly noticeable. Tegule hyaline with a blackish spot ;
wings hyaline, stigma and nervures white; stigma long and well-
formed, marginal cell with its post-stigmatal portion longest,
squarely truncate at end, with a very fine appendicular nervure.
Second submarginal high, narrowed rather more than half to mar-
ginal; third discoidal distinct. Anterior tibia and tarsi wholly
lemon-yellow, anterior femora yellow suffused with brown; middle
tarsi whitish; middle and hind femora and tibis, and hind tarsi,
piceous; the middle femora in front, and the middle and hind
knees, dull yellowish or whitish; middle femora angled below.
Abdomen pale brown, the hind margins of the segments hyaline,
the venter dull brownish-orange.
@. Same size and form. Face wholly dark, except that the up-
per edge of the elypeus is dull whitish, this coloration very incon-
spicuous. Head not so large, transversely oval ; antennz shorter.
Scape black, flagellum dull brownish-orange, infuscated at the base.
Legs piceous, anterior tibize and tarsi obscurely dull yellow in front.
Abdomen piceous above and below, without markings.
Hab.—Mesilla, New Mexico, June 7th and 9, 1897, on flowers of
Sida hederucea. They fly actively about the flowers, and in dull
weather I found the males at rest in the flowers. Six males were
taken, but only one 9.
P. side $ runsin my table of Perdita (Proc. Phila. Acad., 1896)
to the neighborhood of P. semicrocea, but it cannot be confused
with anything described, if attention is paid to the characters italic-
ized above. The @ is equally distinct. In the shape of the head,
and the sexual difference in the color of the abdomen, P. side re-
calls P. latior, but the marginal cell is entirely different. On June
7th, I took a single 9 of P. latior in a flower of Sida hederacea in
Mesilla; it had probably wandered from an adjacent Spheralcea,
as renewed search discovered no more of them.
Perdita callicerata CkIl.
Q. Larger than the ¢, length about 53 mm., clypeus entirely
cream color, with the usual two black specks; lateral face-marks
transversely subreniform, white, extending about as high as level of
top of clypeus; antennz asin ¢; mesothorax darker and bluer; legs
virtually asin ¢; lateral light marks of abdomen larger and squarer.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305
Hab.—Mesilla Valley, close to the Agricultural College, on flow-
ers of Baileya multiradiata, May 21, 1897, both sexes taken. The
g I have described previously ; the species is quite remarkable for
having more light color on the face in the 9 thanin the ¢. The
2 of callicerata closely resembles the ¢ of albovittata, but differs at
once by the color of the antennz, the yellow anterior tibiz, etc. ;
the face-marks of the two are almost exactly alike.
Perdita larree CkIl. var. modesta, n. var.
$. Like the type, but head not nearly so large, being only about
as big as the thorax.
Hab.—Mesilla Valley, close to the Agricultural College, May 21,
1897, two at Larrea.
Centris morsei n. sp.
$. Length 21 mm., stoutly built, black, with pale ochraceous
pubescence, very dense on thorax. Clypeus bright lemon-yellow,
with anterior margin rufous; labrum yellow; mandibles dark
rufous with black tips; scape without any yellow ; eyes sage-green,
suffused with crimson at the extreme base ; facial quadrangle longer
than broad, but of the broad type; wings dusky hyaline; tegule
cream-color ; first abdominal segment with abundant pale pubes-
cence; remaining dorsal segments uniformly and completely deli-
cately pruinose-pubescent, producing a grayish appearance; apical
margins of segments colorless or rather whitish-hyaline, extreme
base of third segment, and of second segment at sides ferruginous,
this ferruginous portion being overlapped by the white margin of
the segment before. Venter with dense yellowish-white hairs ; apex
with pale shining hairs, genitalia ferruginous.
Compared with the $ of C. cesalpinie, which it most resembles,
C. morsei is considerably larger, the thoracic pubescence inclines
more to mouse color, and the pruinose-pubescent abdomen with its
two more or less defined reddish bands is very different. In morsez
the hind tarsi have a black brush on the inner side, but the abund-
ant long pubescence is all ochraceous, not at all fuscous or blackish.
The long hairs of the anterior tarsi are blackish, though shining,
and appearing golden in certain lights.
Hab.—Mesilla, New Mexico, bed of the Rio Grande, June 28,
1897. ‘Taken by Mr. A. P. Morse.
356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
OcTOBER 5.
The President, SAamuEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ Volcanic Rocks of Mesozoic Age in Pennsyl-
vania,” by Edward Goldsmith, was presented for publication.
OcToOBER 12.
Mr. CHarues Morris in the Chair.
Nineteen persons present.
OcToBER 19.
The President, SamurEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—
“A Revision of the Genus Synidotea,” by James E. Benedict.
“ Reptiles from Sonora, Sinaloa and Jalisco, Mexico, with des-
cription of a new species of Sceloporus,” by John Van Denburgh,
“Contributions to the Herpetology of San Paolo, Brazil, I,” by
Dr. H. Von Jhering.
“Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hymenoptera of Brazil,
No. 3.—Sphegidee (sens. lat.),” by William J. Fox.
The death of William B. Bement, a member, was announced.
OcTOBER 26.
Mr. ArruurR Erwin Brown in the Chair.
Forty-six persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—
“ Geological Section from Moscow to Siberia and Return,” by
Dr. Persifor Frazer.
“Scaphopoda of the San Domingo Tertiary,’ by H. A. Pilsbry
and Benjamin Sharp, M. D.
Mr. Daniel Baugh was elected a member.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307
NEW ACHATINIDZ AND HELICIDH FROM SOMALILAND.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
The following descriptions are based upon material collected by
Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. Other mollusks presented to the Acad-
emy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia by the same intreped ex-
plorer belong to species already known. They represent so small a
fragment of the fauna of this interesting part of Africa that their
enumeration here may be dispensed with.
Achatina chrysoleuca n. sp.
Shell ovate, with conic spire, in general contour like A. variegata.
Solid and strong, though not very thick. White, with a thin golden-
brown cuticle, which is deciduous over the greater part of the shell,
remaining behind the aperture and in the depressions between longi-
tudinal plications elsewhere; later 13 whorls immaculate, the next
earlier with spaced, somewhat zig-zag and rather broad brown
streaks, the next earlier narrowly streaked, the streaks straight,
Whorls of the spire soiled white. Whorls 63 (the apical whorls
truncated, perhaps 1 or 12 whorls being thereby lost), mod-
erately convex, the last quite convex. Surface shining, finely de-
cussated on the spire, the sculpture hardly visible to the naked eye,
and gradually becoming obsolete, the spirals lost on the iatter 14
whorls, which are somewhat coarsely plicatulate. Sutures even
_above, weakly and irregularly serrate below. Aperture a little ex-
ceeding half the length of the shell, pure white within, subvertical,
acuminate above, deeply excised by the body-wall; outer lip rather
regularly arcuate, but less curved above, simple; columella short,
cylindric, very deeply concave on the front and the side toward
aperture, abruptly truncated at base, delicate flesh-tinted ; parietal
wall with a thin, transparent varnish. Alt. 105, diam. 58 mm.
Longest axis of aperture 60, greatest width of cavity 33 mm.
Tulu Didirko, in about lat. 4° 4’ N., lon. 39° 36’ E., at 3,580 ft.
alt. (Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, March 27, 1895).
Type is No. 68,113, coll. A. N.S. P.. It is an ivory-white shell,
with some inconspicuous marking on the spire. The cuticle is
largely deciduous. Nothing very nearly allied seems to be de-
scribed from this portion of the continent.
24
358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Limicolaria Donaldsoni n. sp. :
Shell narrowly perforate, oblong-ovate, rather thin. Spire ter-
minating in a very obtuse rounded apex. Whorls slightly over 6,
quite convex, separated by deep sutures. Surface shining, finely
striated longitudinally, the strize cut into oblong granules by decus-
sating spiral impressed lines, which become subobsolete on the last
whorl except below the suture where they persist, although weaker.
Aperture ovate, a little less than half the length of the shell, bluish-
white within ; outer lip thin and sharp; columella straight in the
middle and above, slightly concave below, the columellar lip re-
flexed over the umbilicus. Color white under a very thin yellow
cuticle, with faint narrow, sinuous and interrupted brown streaks,
Alt. 39, diam. 204 mm.; alt. of aperture 17, width of cavity in the
middle 10 mm.
The Haud (Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, July 25, 1894).
Type is No, 68,114, coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Of described
species, DL. Beccarii Morel. seems to be nearest to this one; but that
has the spire longer and less obtuse at apex, a stronger color-pattern,
ete. L. Donaldsoni is remarkable for the unusual convexity of the
whorls. None of the very numerous species described during the
last few years seem near to this form.
Limicolaria Vanattai n. sp.
Shell very narrowly perforate, oblong-conic, compact, thin, white
under athin yellow cuticle, variegated with many longitudinal,
almost straight, streaks of rich chestnut, rather close and narrow,
but with a few broad ones among them, the latter often wedge-
shaped, wider below; the streaks neither branching nor zig-zag.
On the last whorl the longitudinal markings are to a great extent
coalescent or smeared together below the periphery, the darker
color predominating on the base. Sculpture: close and fine
costule cut into oblong granules by spiral impressed lines; the
decussation fine and regular on the spire; but below, the spirals be-
come less regular and disappear on the latter part of the body
whorl and are wanting on the base, and the costulz on the last
whorl are coarser. Spire rather thick, conic, the apex very obtuse,
rounded ; suture moderately impressed, margined below by a light
line. Whorls 72, slightly convex, the last slightly attenuated be-
low. Aperture narrowly ovate, livid within, its height contained
2 times in alt. of shell; acuminate above. Columella cylindric, of
a purple-flesh color, distinctly convex in the middle, bending toward
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399
the left as it approaches the base ; the reflexed edge adnate nearly
to base, where it is free, leaving a small umbilical perforation.
Length 56, diam. 26; alt. of aperture 25 mm.
Sheikh Husein, lat. 7° 43’ 32” N., lon. 40° 44’ 30” E., (Dr. A.
Donaldson Smith, Sept. 21, 1894).
Somewhat like LD. turris Pfr., but the columella is distinctly con-
vex instead of gently concave, and the apex is decidedly more ob-
tuse. It is also a smaller, less conic shell. The spire is longer than
in L. Riippelliana Pfr. as figured by Jickeli. The narrow, straight,
not branching, color streaks are also characteristic. It is dedicated
to Mr. E. G. Vanatta. who kindly assisted me in examining the
literature of Achatinide for the species herein described.
Helicella (Lejeania) chionobasis n. sp.
Shell very narrowly umbilicate, thick lens-shaped, low-conoid
above, flattened-convex beneath; the periphery angular at first, be-
coming rounded; rather thin but moderately solid, and slightly
shining. Conspicuously bicolored, the base being opaque white as in
Xerophiles generally, the top rust-brown with numerous irregular,
arcuate whitish streaks, the apex and several earlier whorls glossy-
black.
Sculpture of irregular, low wrinkles of growth, with extremely
fine arcuate striz also above; on the base very minute incised circu-
lar strie are visible under the lens in addition to the wrinkles.
Whorls nearly 63, slowly increasing, slightly convex, a distinctly
defined whitish cord margining the sutures above, produced by the
keel of the whorls. Aperture mainly basal, lunate, moderately ob-
lique, bicolored within ; peristome simple, suddenly dilated at the
columellar insertion, partly covering the narrow umbilicus. Alt.
13, greatest diameter 19-5, least 18 mm.
The Haud (Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, July 25, 1894).
The italicized clauses in the above description sufficiently indicate
the more conspicuous features of this form, which is apparently
different from any member of the group Lejeania known to me.
The permanence of the name Helicel/a for the group of Xero-
philes depends upon the date of publication of Férussac’s Prodrome,
which is still in doubt. It may prove later than Juacosta of Gray,
which would then assume the generic réle. This is a mere question
of names, however. The limits and characters of the group I have
been able to define with considerable exactness, thanks to the
previous work of Schmidt, Moquin-Tandon, von Ihering and others.
360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
NEW AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSKS.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
The forms described below occurred in a recent sending received
from Dr. J. C. Cox, consisting mainly of marine mollusks he had
collected at Eden, on the coast of New South Wales, a catalogue of
whieh will probably be published by him elsewhere. In the pres-
ent scattered condition of the literature of Australian mollusks,
only omniscience can always escape the danger of overlooking some
description ; but reasonable care is believed to have been taken in
dealing with the following.
Genus TATEA Tenison-Woods.
The relationships of Tatea seem to require examination. In the
Manuals of Fischer and Tryon it is placed under Jeffreysia asa
subgenus ; but it differs radically from this group in dentition and
operculum, and is also unlike it in shell characters. The Rissoina
group is that to which Tatea seems allied by its operculum ; and
Eatoniella Dall, with species in Kerguelen Island, South Georgia
and New Zealand, would apparently be the most nearly allied
genus, if judged by conchologic features only.
Eatoniella’ has an ovate, one- or few-whorled operculum with the
nucleus near the columellar margin, a process arising therefrom
directed toward that margin. The shell has 43-6 convex whorls,
is thin, the peristome somewhat reflexed at the columellar margin,
and neither contracted nor indistinctly varixed as it is in Tuatea.
The species are all quite small, the largest known being but 3 mm.
long. The dentition as described and figured by Schako in the
paper of Martens and Pfeffer cited above, has some peculiar feat-
ures. The rachidian tooth is practically as in Rissoa, apparently
with a basal denticle on each side situated low as in Rissoa, although
Schako does not make this clear. The lateral is as usual in the
group. The inner uncinus has as few or fewer denticles than the lat-
eral, and they are quite large. According to Schako’s figures and
1See E. A. Smith, Philos. Trans., Vol. 168, p. 174, and Martens and
Pfeffer, Jahrb. Hamb. Wiss. Anstalten, III, p. 94, 1886.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361
the text on p. 94, there are three denticles on this tooth, but the
description on p. 96 gives five denticles. The outer uncinus has
seven denticles. The denticle formula of what Martens and Pfeffer
identify as Hatoniella kerquelenensisis, therefore, 7 , 5, 3 (?), 7.
1159)
In Dardania Hutton,’ which, so far as shell, operculum and rad-
ula go, is identical with Eatoniella, the dentition as figured by Hut-
ton agrees in essentials with that genus. Hutton’s figure is rather
diagrammatic. It shows no basal denticles, the formula being 5 ,
0-0
6, 3,5 (?). This seems to agree essentially with Hatoniella, espe-
cially in the important and unusual character of the inner marginal
tooth, the cusp of which is remarkable for the small number and
large size of its denticles. The omission of basal denticles may be
an oversight.
The inclusion of Dardania in Eatoniella seems from the data at
hand to be necessary.
Now, in Tatea, the radula (Pl. IX, fig. 8) is unequivocally Hy-
drobioid. Judging from it alone, if one were to ignore the shell
and operculum, it would be pronounced a Potamopyrgus. It differs
in very important particulars from that of Eatoniella. The rachi-
dian tooth shows several well marked basal denticles inserted weld
above the basal margin of the tooth, as in the freshwater genera.
The lateral is as usual above, and has the tongue-like process be-
low, noticed in many non-marine forms. The inner uncinus has
the scythe-like form usual in Hydrobia and its allies, with 15 to 20
minute denticles on the long cusp. The outer uncinus has still
finer denticulation. It will be seen that both the median and the
inner marginal teeth are quite different from the corresponding teeth
of Eatoniella, and altogether like those of Potumopyrgus and its allies.
From these characters we would advocate the removal of Tatea
from the subfamily Rissoinine, and install it in the Amnicolide
(Hydrobiide of Fischer), notwithstanding its aberrant operculum.
The union of Tutea with Eatoniel/a, which some authors have ac-
cepted, is altogether inadmissable; and the genus, which is dedi-
cated to one of the most able of Australian zoologists, will stand as
one of the most isolated in its family.
The figure represents the teeth of T. huonensis ; those of T. para-
disiaca are very similar. J[ have not examined the radula of 7.
rufilabris.
* Trans. and Proc. N. Z. Institute, xiv, p. 147, pl. 1, f. K, 1-4, (1882)
362 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Tatea paradisiaca n.sp. Pl. IX, figs. 10, 11.
Shell narrowly pyramidal, the lateral outlines of the spire slightly
concave above, apex obtuse. Whorls about 73; the nucleus
minute, the first whorl globose and relatively large, following whorls
but slightly convex, separated by linear sutures, the last whorl
either bluntly angular or rounded at the periphery, swelling in a
low varix behind the peristome, then contracting, rather abruptly
falling or deflexed for a short distance in front. Surface shining,
showing excessively faint, fine spiral strize in certain lights. Color,
rich reddish-chestnut, becoming a little paler on the spire, and with
the peristome of a decidedly darker shade.
Aperture ovate, rounded above, vertical; peristome obtuse and
thick, continuous. _Umbilicus hardly perforated. Alt. 4°8, diam.
2°5 mm.; alt. of aperture 1-5 mm.
Eden, New South Wales, Australia, in a brackish swamp (Dr. J.
C. Cox, 1897).
This species differs from 7. rufilabris (A. Ad.*) and T. huonen-
sis (Tenison-Woods‘) in being much broader in proportion to its
heighth, of a darker color, and with strongly developed lip varix.
The appearance of margination below the sutures, produced by
transparence, is more conspicuous in rufilabris and huonensis than
in our new species, and both of the former have the spire more at-
tenuated above.
The species of Tatea may be tabulated as follows:
a. Shell slender, the diameter less than one-half the height,
b. Peristome very thick and heavy ; a keel defining the
base, T. rufilabris A. Ad. (pl. ix, fig. 7).
b’. Peristome rather thin throughout; peripheral keel
weak or wanting ; no varix behind the lip,
T. huonensis T.-W. (pl. ix, fig. 12).
a’. Shell stouter, the diameter over half the height; peri-
stome thick; a low varix behind the lip,
T. paradisiaca Pils. (pl. ix, figs. 10, 11).
3 Diala rujilabris A. Ad., Ann. and Mag., Nat. Hist. (3), x, p. 298, 1862.
Type locality, Port Lincoln. See also Smith, P. Z. S., 1875, p. 538, where it
is referred to Hydrobia, and Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., XVI, p. 268, pl. 7, f.
19 (as Tatea).
4 Bythinia huonensis Tenison-Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania for 1875,
p. 77; also for 1878, p. 71, and 1879, p. 72 (Tatea). Type locality, Huon
River, Tasmania. See also Petterd, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm. for 1888, p. 78,
pl. 2, f. 1 (as Tatea rujilabris).
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363
T. rufilabris and T. huonensis have been united by Mr. Smith,
and the union has been accepted by Australian and Tasmanian
writers. The differences mentioned above seem constant in the
rather small series of each before me; so that I would suggest a
renewed comparison of Australian and Tasmanian specimens by
someone having abundant material, in order that Mr. Smith’s
decision may be confirmed or reversed. The series before me is
hardly ample enough to justify an opinion adverse to that of so
fair minded an investigator as my honored confrére of the British
Museum, but is still sufficient to raise a doubt.
Genus ADEORBIS Wood.
Adeorbis sigaretinus n. sp. Pl. IX, figs. 4, 5, 6.
Shell much depressed, shaped somewhat like the flat Sigaretus
species, upper surface slightly convex, base broadly and deeply um-
bilicated; thin, white. Whorls 42, the first minute, brownish,
elevated, the others convex, rapidly widening, the last very wide,
rounded at the periphery and base, as well ason the umbilical mar-
gin. Sculpture, close and fine wrinkles of growth, somewhat irreg-
ular, and fine, crowded, thread-like spiral strie. Aperture large,
very oblique, subcircular, only slightly excised by the parietal mar-
gin; peristome thin and simple. Alt. 2, greater diam. 4:8, lesser
3°8 mm., or slightly larger, diam. 5°5 mm.
Rockhampton, Australia (Dr. J. C. Cox).
A. sigaretinus differs from A. striatellus from New Caledonia in
the larger size, wider last whorl, open umbilicus without a border-
ing keel, and different ornamentation ; Montrouzier’s species being
distinctly punctured along the striz in the specimens before me, as
stated in the original description. The absence of a constricting,
delicate umbilical keel is a very obvious point of difference.
Genus CORBULA Bruguiére.
Corbula Coxin.sp. PI. IX, figs. 1, 2, 3.
Shell solid, strong and quite inequivalve, inequilateral, very ven-
tricose, the diameter nearly or quite equal to the height; in fully
mature individuals, oblong, the beaks nearly central, anterior end
rounded, posterior end narrower, very obliquely truncated, much
narrowed below and projecting in a short truncate rostrum ; basal
margin moderately arcuate. Surface dull, whitish, with remnants
of a thin yellowish cuticle at the ends. Right valve somewhat
564 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
larger, projecting beyond and closely overlapping the left along the
whole basal margin. Both valves have the posterior area defined
by a keel. Sculpture rather fine, irregular wrinkles parallel to
growth lines, becoming coarser below, and obsolete toward the
beaks, where numerous spaced radial carinule, linear and very del-
icate may be seen under the lens. Interior white, the right valve
with a high, triangular, recurved tooth fitting into a corresponding
deep process in the other valve.
Length 18:5, height 11, diam. 11 mm.
Length 17:5, height 11, diam. 9.5 mm.
Sydney Head (John Brazier), and Eden, Twofold Bay, New
South Wales (Dr. J. C. Cox).
This species is probably the C. nasuta of Angas’ lists of Australian
mollusks, but it is not, in my opinion, the C. nasuta of Sowerby,°
described from Xipixapi, west coast of Colombia. The latter is
smaller, adults before me measuring 7°5 to 10 mm. long, and the
beaks are somewhat different. In C. nasuta, as Reeve’s figure
shows, the larger valve projects above beyond the smaller, while in
C. Coxi the two are nearly equal above. In C. nasuta the concentric
ribs are more prominent on the anterior end than in C. Cozi. The
posterior rostration is decidedly longer in C. nasuta. Sowerby’s
types measured: long 0-7, lat. 0°35, alt. 0-4 inch. These differences
indicate specific distinction; the very widely separated habitats of
the two forms also pointing in this direction.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE Exe
Figs. 1, 2, 3. Corbula Cowi. Lateral, ventral and posterior views.
Figs. 4, 5,6. Adeorbis sigaretinus. Anterior, ventral and dorsal
views of the shell.
Fig. 7. Tatea rufilabris. Front view of shell.
Fig. 8. Tutea huonensis. Dentition.
Fig. 9. Tatea huonensis. Operculum, from within.
Figs. 10.11. Tatea paradisiaca. Front views of two specimens.
Fig. 12. Tatea huonensis. Front view of shell.
All figures variously enlarged, reproduced from camera lucida
drawings.
° Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1833, p. 35; Reeve, Conch. Icon., Vol. II, pl. 1,
fig. 1.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365
DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW SPECIES OF CERION.
BY H. A. PILSBRY AND E. G. VANATTA.
Cerion Fordii P.& V. Figs. 1, 2.
Fig. 1. Fig, 2. Fig. 3. Fig. 4. Fig. 5.
Shell cylindrical, the latter three whorls of equal diameter, those
earlier forming a rather short, obtuse cone. Whorls 10 to 103,
earlier two white, smooth, the following finely striated, strize or rib-
lets evenly spaced though of variable closeness, in number 32 to 45
on the last or next to last whorl, not splitting or more numerous on
the base of the shell, which is rounded, not compressed ; umbilical
chink short, subperforate. Color: longitudinally mottled with
brown, ochre and snow-white ; sometimes uniform white.
Aperture vertical or with the base somewhat advanced; parietal
tooth about median, high, long and strong, extending backward
about four millimeters. Columellar fold very slight, situated high.
Peristome reflexed, its face much thickened ; light brown or whit-
ish ; parietal wall generally heavily calloused.
Alt. 30, diam. of penult. whorl] 12, alt. aperture 123 mm.
Alt. 27, diam. of penult. whorl 12, alt. aperture 102 mm.
Alt. 283, diam. of penult. whorl 11, alt. aperture 11 mm.
Var. submarmoratum P.& V. Figs. 3, 4.
Like the type except that it is ribless, smooth with slight growth-
wrinkles; sutures a little exserted and seam-like above. White,
unicolored or with irregular longitudinal dark fleshy brown stripes
and sometimes ochraceous stains. The first post-nepionic whorl of
the cone is usually striated. Aperture typical.
366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Typical C. Fordii exactly resembles externally a coarsely sculpt-
ured form of C. Dalli from Inagua; but it has the internal armature
of Strophiops or Maynardia. It is a coarser, larger shell than C.
eximeum of Cat Island and New Providence, with far stronger
development of peristome and teeth and more interrupted strigation.
C. Fordii has not the raised ledge across the parietal wall of C.
glans varium, from New Providence, has stronger peristome and
teeth, and is larger.
The pure white form C. Fordii resembles C. abacoense, but is less
stout in the average, has a liver-tinted mouth and lip, and the parie-
tal tooth is notably longer and stronger.
Var. submarmoratum is a larger shell than C. marmoratum,
stouter above, and with a much more developed parietal tooth. It
has not the expanded umbilical area of C. regina eucosmium, of
Turk’s Island.
White specimens of this variety are very similar to C. eleuthere,
but do not taper gradually as that species, the angle of obliquity of
the aperture is different, ete.
Several hundreds of this species were obtained by Mr. John Ford
from a barrel of shells from the Bahamas, exact island unfortunately
unknown. On comparison with the nearly complete series of Cer-
ion in the collection of the Academy it is evident that a new poly-
morphic species is before us, probably from an island or region of
an island hitherto unexplored for this genus. Both the striate and
smooth forms occurred either white or strigate, and so far as we
can judge in nearly equal numbers. ‘Transition forms are fully
represented, though probably 95 per cent. of the specimens are either
the one or the other.
Cerion Pillsburyi P.& V. Fig. 5.
Shell tapering subeylindrical, the later three whorls of nearly
equal diameter, those above forming a rather long cone, which
passes very gradually into the subcylindrical portion; apex very
obtuse. Whorls 10 to 102, the nepionic smooth, next whorl sharply
finely striate or smoothish ; all succeeding whorls except the last one-
half to two, flat and smooth with some growth-lines only ; last one-
half to two whorls regularly costulate, riblets narrower than the
intervals, about one millimeter apart. Base rounded, not com-
pressed ; umbilical chink very short,imperforate. White with irre-
gular, interrupted brown or gray-brown streaks.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367
Aperture vertical; parietal tooth very small, weak and short ; col-
umellar fold distinct, extending inward one whorl. Peristome well
reflexed, whitish, rather thin or thickened ; parietal callus moderate
or very thin.
Alt. 29, diam. of last whorl above aperture 11-12; alt. of aperture
11 mm.
Alt. 283, diam. of last whorl above aperture 11; alt. of aperture
10 mm.
Gun Cay, Bahamas (Dr. Wm. H. Rush, U.S. N.).
The rather long and gradually tapering cone, smooth surface
above, the last one or two whorls ribbed, and very small parietal
tooth, are the most prominent features of this species. Its resem-
blance to C. regina eucosmium is remarkable; but the small area
behind the columellar lip, with short rimation and rounded base,
distinguishes it at once from that form. It is superficially not far
from some of the Cayman Is. species, but has not the strong and
long parietal tooth of those forms.
At the request of Dr. Rush this species is named in honor of
Lieutenant-Commander John Elliott Pillsbury, of the U.S. Coast
Survey Steamer “ Blake.”
368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
ON THE ANNUAL MOLT OF THE SANDERLING.
BY WITMER STONE.
In March, 1896, Mr. Frank M. Chapman published a paper en-
titled ‘“‘The Chanves of Plumage in the Dunlin and Sanderling,” *
his object being chiefly to controvert the theory of Giitke and others
that these and other birds acquired their nuptial dress by an
actual change in the color of the feathers of the winter plumage.
Mr. Chapman demonstrates conclusively, with the aid of a large
series of specimens, that this change is effected by an absolute re-
placement of the old plumage by new and differently colored
feathers. In the case of the Sanderling, Calidris arenaria, Mr.
Chapman describes the plumage changes of the bird in some detail,
and in speaking of the annual molt says :—
“There is no reason to doubt that the Sanderling, like other
birds, undergoes a complete molt after the breeding season ; never-
theless, not one of my twenty August specimens shows any signs ot
molt in progress in the wings or tail. In the larger number, how-
ever, the remiges and rectrices are in an apparently fresh and un-
worn condition, and I assume that in most cases these important
feathers are acquired before the migration is begun. This would be
in July, a month which, as I have said, is not represented in my
series.”
At the time this was published I agreed quite as fully with this
view as I do with the other conclusions reached by the author in
his admirable paper, but specimens recently submitted to me by my
friend Mr. William L. Baily, taken at Cape May, N. J., August 14th,
1897, show the flight feathers in full molt, and prove that the molt
of these feathers does not always take place before the migration,
while subsequent examination of additional material leads me to
think that in the large majority of cases they do not begin to molt
until the migration has begun.
These Cape May specimens also tend to emphasize a fact which
Mr. Chapman has curiously enough stated in the sentence imme-
diately preceeding the one above quoted, and which all who have
studied molts know to be only too true, viz.: “the necessity for
1 Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol. VIII, pp. 1-8.
2The author pointed out the same fact independently in a paper which ap-
peared April 14, 1896. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1896, p. 125.
———
ee
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369
large series in studying the molt and the erroneous conclusions which
may be drawn from negative evidence.”
In investigating the annual molt of the Sanderling, I had before
me a series of sixty-seven skins taken from May to November, in-
cluding besides those in the collection of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, a series from the U.S. National Museum
and the American Museum of Natural History, kindly loaned by
the authorities of these institutions.
The series of spring specimens which I have examined serves but
to substantiate Mr. Chapman’s account of the spring molt, and is
not concerned with the present paper.
My series may be grouped as follows :—-
Birds of the year in first plumage, 19 (Aug. 26th to Oct. 20th).
Birds of the year showing molt of the body feathers, 9 (Sept. 29th
to Nov. 10th).
Old birds in nuptial plumage, 8 (May 21st to Aug. 14th).
Old birds showing molt, 28 (Aug. 2nd to Oct. 31st), 8 of which
(Aug. 14th to Oct. 31st) show molt in the primaries.
Old birds in full winter plumage, 3.
The birds of the year, as is well known, molt the body plumage
in the autumn and the black and white feathers of the back and
head are replaced by light gray as in the winter adults.
The following table shows the progress of this molt :—
U.S. N. M., 106,443, Romney, Eng., Aug. 29th, one or two gray
feathers.
A.M. N. HL, 54,698, Devon, Eng., Sept. 10th, one or two gray
feathers.
A. N.S. P., 34,169, Beach Haven, N. J., October, about 25 gray
feathers.
U.S. N. M., 128,796, Aldabra Isl., Africa, Nov. 10th, about half
the feathers gray.
U.S. N. M., 41,774, Merida, Yucatan, about half the feathers gray.
A.N.S. P., 34,873, Wolfville, N.S., Sept. 29th, gray feathers pre-
dominating.
U.S. N. M., 81,754, Ventura, Cal., Nov. 2d, molt complete.
Other specimens from Wolfville, N.S., taken Sept. 29th, and one
from Havre, France, Oct. 20th, have not begun to change.
This shows the great variation in the time of the molt.
Some species of birds molt their remiges and rectrices with the
first body plumage, but none of the specimens examined show any
evidence of such molt in the Sanderling.
370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
The possibility that some of the specimens described below which
show molt in the primaries were birds of the year was considered,
but all the evidence seemed to point to their being adults.
I feel convinced that the black tips to the wing and tail coverts
will serve to distinguish birds of the year as pointed out by Mr.
Chapman, even after the black and white feathers of the back and
head have been entirely replaced, as they are still retained in birds
that have entirely finished the molt.
The specimens illustrating the annual molt of the adults may be
arranged as follows:
A specimen from Glacier Valley, North Greenland, taken June
14 (A. N.S. P., 30,197), shows the full nuptial plumage as do other
specimens from Cape May, N. J., May 21st to June 13th.
One from Cape May, August, 14th is in worn nuptial plumage
with one or two gray feathers on the back, but no further sign of molt.
Eighteen other specimens (Aug. 2d to Sept. 11th) show a varying
amount of gray feathers in the plumage of the upper surface, giving
them a mottled appearance. In all of these the spotting on the
breast is still perceptible, and in at least half of them scarcely any
molt has occurred in this part of the plumage. In none of them is
there any molt in progress in the wing or tail, even the wing coy-
erts being in every instance the worn nuptial plumage.
The primaries show great diversity as to abrasion, some being
much worn and bleached to a dull brownish tint, while others are
much blacker and comparatively so fresh looking that Mr. Chap-
man considered them to be newly acquired feathers.
As stated below, however, I am inclined to consider them as be-
longing to the old nuptial plumage.’
3 In this connection attention should be called to the fact that in the Dunlin
( Tringa alpina pacifica) the primaries are molted in June, (!) as is shown by
every individual in a series of four collected in Alaska by Dr. Benj. Sharp,
June 28-29, 1895 (Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila.). There is no trace of such
a molt in the only breeding Sanderling that I have been able to examine,
while we have positive evidence that some Sanderlings molt the primaries in
August (see below).
Therefore, if the comparatively fresh appearance of the primaries in some
of our mottled August birds indicates that they are newly acquired feathers,
we must admit that there are two styles of molting in this one species, which
seems unlikely—i. e., in some individuals a molt (in June or July) of the re-
miges, completed before the molt in the coverts or body plumage begins ; and
in others a molt (in August) of all the feathers, the remiges beginning when
the body plumage is about half renewed.
A series of Knot taken in Greenland during June and July show no such
molt as is exhibited in the Dunlin.
f
;
z=
:
;
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371
The specimens included in this mottled series are as follows :—
A. M.N.H., 35,752, ete., 8 specimens, Chatham, Mass., Aug. 27th.
We c:, 1,573, Cape May, Ne sis Sept. 11th.
U.S.N.M., 59,714, Tehuantepec, Mex. , Aug. 5th.
A.N.S.P., 33,744, 34,168, 2 spe’m’ns, Beach Haven, N. ah Aug. 21.
ass N..M., 30,310, Spanishtown, Jam., Aug. 20.
U.S.N.M., 94,714, Hyde Park, Il, Aug. 20,
W25..N.M. tiie 789, White I., Canada Bay, Aug. 2.
U.S.N. M.,124,587, Pt. Lookout, Sept. 8th.
WES NM 91,011, Devon, Eng., Aug. 26th.
A.M.N.H.,51, ATA, Rockaway, L. I., Aug. 4th.
The next series of eight birds shows the continuation of the molt.
In all of these the gray predominates on the back, many of them
being practically like winter birds, having lost nearly all the old
body feathers. In all, however, the molt is in progress in the
remiges, and in most cases in the rectrices also, while in all but the
most advanced, remains of the old wing coverts may be seen in
varying quantity.
These birds in detail are as follows :—
pecs Moltin | Molt in | Moltin | Molt on
* secondaries tertials. vi rts back.
molted | Cc. s RS ing ecoverts Dac
}
Cape May, N. J.. Aug14..; 4 | None. | None. Half com-) About 20
| pleted. old feath-
| ers remain.
Cape May, N. J., Aug 14.. 4 None. |Half com- Half com-| About 25
| pleted. | pleted. | remain.
U.S.N. M., 151,633, Mar-' | )
garita Island, Venezuela,
Jit) 7/ ange een se aeeeee | 4 |2renewed) About | Almost | About 12
Se WN. M., 128,795, ie completed completed remain.
bra Isl., (re ene ae 4 (All but 3 Complete. Complete. Complete.
U.S. N. M. Ses 57938, Aide: renewed, | |
bra Isl., Cl a ee 4 \Complete. Complete. Complete. Complete.
U.S.N.M., 110,029, Kauai, | |
Figwatiat lel) .....c.-.2+2- 3 All but 3 Complete. Complete. Complete.
A. N.S. P., 26,178, Cape| | renewed.
May, N oye Sept. 14......, 2 |Complete. Complete. Complete. Several
| old feath-
U.S. N. M.,102,064, Tambo ‘ers remain.
Valley, Pern, Oct.3l.....| 6 None. Complete. Nearly | Several
complete. ‘old feath-
ers remain.
This shows great variability in the time of completing the molt
and the relative progress of molt in different parts of the plumage.
372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
One point which seems to be borne out by all the specimens is
that the body plumage is pretty well renewed before the remiges be-
gin to molt, and that consequently the molt of these feathers occurs.
after the bird starts on its migration.
If, as Mr. Chapman assumed, the mottled birds which showed no
trace of molt in the remiges and rectrices, had already renewed these
feathers, we would have a condition contrary to that found in any
group of birds which I have examined, i.e., the completing of the
molt of the remiges before the molt of the coverts begins.
Better evidence, however, is to be found in the fact that in some
of the molting specimens above described the primaries that are be-
ing replaced are quite as fresh as those in the mottled birds already
mentioned.
Why there should be this great difference in the wear of the
remiges I am unable to say; and I am equally at a loss to account.
for the peculiar appearance of some birds in which the two outer
primaries are in a wonderfully better state of preservation than the
inner ones, the difference between the second and third being very
marked. All the evidence so far seems to point to the same order
of molt in the feathers of the wing of these birds as is seen in the
Passeres.*
Two specimens given in the above table deserve special comment.
The Margarita Island specimen is remarkable from the fact of its.
capture so far south at so early a date (July 7), as well as in having
so nearly completed its molt. It may, perhaps, have been a wounded
or diseased bird that did not migrate northward in the spring.’ -
The other specimen is the one from Tambo Valley, Peru, October
31st (U.S. N. M., 102,064), which has completed the body molt.
while the remiges are just beginning to change.
4 See Stone, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1896, p. 112.
> For note on the capture of this specimen (No. 151,633, U. S. N. M.), see
Proc. U.S. N. M., 1895, p. 656.
A specimen of Ereunetes occidentalis taken in San Domingo by Dr. W. L.
Abbott, July 11, 1883 (No. 26,158, A. N.S. Phila. ), is almost exactly like this-
as regards the state of its plumage, all the plumage being gray with the mid-
dle rectrices renewed and only the five outer primaries of the summer plum-
age remaining.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 373
CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE HYMENOPTERA OF BRAZIL,
NO. 3. SPHEGIDZ (sens. lat.).
BY WILLIAM J. FOX.
This paper forms a continuation of the reports on the collections
of Hymenoptera made by and belonging to Mr. Herbert H. Smith.
At least one more paper will follow, on the Thynniide, which will
also contain some additions to the earlier reports.
Ampulex trigonopsis Sm.
A single specimen from Chapada (October), I doubtfully refer to
this species. It agrees with Smith’s description, but there are two
large teeth on each side of the projecting carina of the clypeus, of
which Smith makes no mention.
Sceliphron (7vigonopsis) rufiventre Fabr.
Five specimens from Maruru (April) and Santarem.
Sceliphron (Podium) denticulatum Sm.
Chapada (December) ; Santarem. Two specimens.
Sceliphron (Podium) consanguineum Sm.
Two specimens from Chapada (March) and Rio de Janeiro (Oc-
tober) are doubtfully referred to this species.
Sceliphron (Podium) flavipenne Lep.
Two specimens, 9. Rio de Janeiro (November) and Santarem.
Sceliphron (Podium) romandinum Sauss.
Two examples of this fine species. Santarem (September).
Sceliphron (Podium) haematogastrum Spin.
Fourteen @ and thirteen ¢ specimens. This species is quite
distinct by red legs and abdomen. The latter, however, becomes
quite dark in some specimens, and the petiole is sometimes black
and varies a little in length; the point of reception of the recurrent
veins by the second submarginal cell is not constant.
Three specimens differ by having the wings subhyaline, not yel-
low, and may prove distinct. Perhaps they represent Saussure’s
Podium egregium.
25
374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Sceliphron fistulare Dhlb.
Six specimens. Pedra Branca and Maruru (April) ; Chapada.
Sceliphron figulum Dhlb.
Two specimens. Corumba and Uacarizal (February).
Ammophila opulenta Guér.
A large series of this species from various localities. It is dis-
guished by its large size and strong tubercle of mesopleura. The
male has the clypeus prominently produced into a tooth, and
together with the face, covered with golden pubescence. It is best
distinguished by the strongly tuberculate mesopleurz.
Ammophila miliaris Cam.
Twelve male specimens. Chapada (January to March) ; Santa-
rem. Greatly resembles opulenta, but the mesopleurz not tubercu-
late and clypeal prominence shorter.
Ammophila abbreviata Fabr.
A large series of both sexes.
Ammophila aureo-notata Cam.
One female and nine malespecimens. Chapada (March, April) ;
Corumba and Pedra Branca (April); Santarem.
Ammophila moneta Sm.
Four female and five male specimens. Uacarizal (February) ;
Pedra Branca and Chapada (April) ; Santarem.
A female and five males differ only in the sides of petiole and
base of second segment diffused with reddish, and are no doubt A.
ragilis Smith. Moneta and fragilis are evidently one species.
Ammophila asperata n. sp.
°.—Head with strong scattered punctures; clypeus medially
finely punctured, its fore margin broadly and squarely truncate in
middle; fore ocellus separated from the posteriors by a distance
equal to less than half that between the latter; space between hind
ocelli equal to less than two-thirds of that between them and eyes;
first joint of flagellum a little shorter than the two following united ;
pronotum slightly excised medially ; dorsulum coarsely punctured,
but still not unevenly, posteriorly with several coarse transversely
sinuous stris, and suleate down middle for its entire length; scu-
tellum longitudinally striate ; postscutellum rugose ; upper surface
of middle segment suleate, rugose medially, the rugze running into
fine even strive laterally ; side of thorax rugoso-punctate, the meso-
i i a i
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375
pleure not tuberculate, with an } -shaped furrow ; petiole composed
of two joints; wings subhyaline, apices broadly darker, second
submarginal cell subtriangular, narrowed more than one-half above,
the first recurrent vein received near the middle, the second near
apex. Entire insect deep black, abdomen velvety; face and
elypeus with sparse fuscous pile ; spot on tubercles and large one at
each side of apex of middle segment, bright silvery. Length 22 mm.
$ .—F ace and clypeus densely golden; clypeus drawn out into a
median prominence, which is short and obtuse, and before which
the clypeus is visibly depressed; space between hind ocelli nearly
equal to that between them and eyes; dorsulum with rather dense
pale pile, and, in addition, with a short, erect, pale fuscous pubes-
cence; thorax sculptured as in the 9; tegule silvery anteriorly.
Length 22 mm.
Chapada (March). Three specimens. Has the general appear-
ance of abbreviata.
Sphex (Ch/lorion) hemiprasinus Sichel.
Chapada (October). Three specimens.
Sphex (Chlorion) cyaniventris Guér.
One specimen ; same locality and date as the preceding.
Sphex (/sodontia) nigrocaeruleus Tasch.
Nine ¢, three ¢ specimens. Chapada (March, April).
Sphex (/sodontia) costipennis Spin.
Five @, nine ¢ specimens; Chapada (February, March);
Maruru and Pedra Branca (April); Santarem.
Sphex (/sodontia) laevipes n. sp.
@ —Black, with grayish pubescence ; face, clypeus, thorax be-
neath, hind coxze, an oblique line on sides of middle segment (some-
times absent) extending to insertion of petiole, silvery ; tegule, legs
entirely or in part, petiole (the latter sometimes black) wine
colored; wings fusco-hyaline, costal half much darker; clypeus
bidentate, with long, sparse, pale hairs; eyes converging toward
mandibles, the latter bidentate ; space between hind ocelli nearly
equalling that between them and eyes; first joint of flagellum not
quite as long as the two following united; dorsulum and scutellum
with distinct, separated punctures ; middle segment rather coarsely
granulated ; the mesopleurz with coarse punctures; legs compara-
tively scarcely spinose, spines of fore tarsi short; petiole about as
376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
long as the first three hind tarsal joints; last ventral segment con-
vex. Length 17-18 mm.
$.—Colored like the @ ; but in one example the thorax except
dorsulum, is more or less wine colored ; clypeus more convex, its
apex broadly incurved, silvery pubescence denser ; first joint of fla-
gellum nearly as long as two following united; scutellum impressed
medially. Length 18 mm.
Uacarizal (February); Chapada (March). Three 9,one ¢
specimens. SS. /aevipes is probably the form mentioned by Kohl as.
a dark variety of S. costipennis, his specimen,a ¢, having come
from Rio Grande do Sul. It differs from costipennis not only in
color, but by the smoother legs, longer petiole of 9, ete.
Sphex (/sodontia) azteca Sauss.
One specimen, a ¢. Chapada (March).
Sphex caliginosus Er.
Fifteen 9, 22 ¢ specimens. Chapada (March, April); Santa-
rem.
Sphex fuliginosus Klug (= congener Kohl).
A large series of females. Chapada (March, April).
Sphex Servillei Lep. (= /atior Er. =roratus Kohl).
I have no doubt that datior is identical with Servillei. The large
series present, indicates a common occurrence. Chapada (January,.
March, April); Santarem. Ninety-one specimens, of which only
five are females.
Sphex funestus Kohl.
Chapada (March, April); Corumbi (May); Santarem. Four
specimens.
Sphex neotropicus Kohl.
Chapada (March, April); Santarem. Three female, two male
specimens, one of the latter with reddish fore legs.
Sphex ingens Sm.
A single male of this huge species, without particular locality or
date of capture.
Sphex melanopus Dhib. (= rujicauda Tasch.).
Three specimens. Uacarizal (February) ; Corumba (May).
Sphex brasilianus Sauss.
A single specimen of the var. tinctipennis Cam. Chapada
(April).
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 377
Sphex flavipes Sm.
One 9, six male specimens of the var. Iheringii Kohl. Chapada
(February, March).
Sphex ichneumoneus Linné.
Four specimens of the typical form from Santarem (February)
and Maruru (April). Three of the var. dorsalis from same locali-
ties. Over thirty of the var. sumptuosus collected from February to
April.
Sphex dubitatus Cress.
The geographical distribution of this species is extended consider-
ably by three specimens in the present collection, collected at Cha-
pada (February, March) and Corumba (April). There is also a
specimen in the collection of the American Entomological Society
marked Mexico.
Four specimens, which may be the ¢ of this species, have the
pubescence denser and more golden, particularly on head in front ;
antennz rather long and slender, first joint of flagellum about as
long as second and three-fourths of third joint united; face much
narrower than in ichneumoneus; petiole about as long as second and
third hind tarsal joints united ; legs more or less black; abdomen
with more or less black blotches above; last ventral plate triden-
tate apically, the central tooth prolonged, with a carina which runs
almost to base of segment, laterally the segment bears a bunch of
long yellowish hairs, somewhat concealing the lateral teeth. Length
17-18 mm.
~Corumba and Pedra Branca (April).
Sphex ferrugineipes n. sp.
@ —Head and thorax black, with pale, not dense pubescence ;
face, clypeus at sides, line on pronotum, sides of dorsulum and spots
on sides of thorax and at apex of middle segment with silvery pile ;
mandibles, except apex, tegule, legs, except coxe, and base of tro-
chanters, and abdomen, except petiole, entirely, or in part, bright
red ; eyes but slightly converging beneath ; face somewhat narrower
than in ichnewmoneus ; clypeus convex, emarginate medially, hav-
ing the appearance of being bidentate, or entire, front distinctly
punctured; space between hind ocelli about equal to that between
them and eyes; dorsulum with rather strong separated punctures,
those of mesopleure finer and evener; middle segment above with
a transverse, indistinct striation; tarsal comb well developed, the
378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
first fore tarsal joint with six to seven spines ; petiole black, shorter
than combined length of second and third hind tarsal joints; abdo-
men above and beneath with a distinct, sparse punctuation ; wings
subhyaline, not yellowish, apical margins broadly darker. Length
20-22 mm.
$ .—Colored and clothed like the 9, the fore margin of the cly-
peus in addition being sometimes reddish; space between hind
ocelli a little greater than that between them and eyes; first joint
of flagellum shorter than the second and third united, the second a
little shorter than the third ; last ventral plate indistinctly carinated
down middle, its apex prolonged triangularly in the middle. Length
19-21 mm.
Chapada (March, April, October); Corumba (April). Three
9,10 ¢ specimens. Distinguished from ichnewmoneus, dubitatus,
etc., by sparser pubescence, bright red of abdomen, strongly punc-
tured dorsulum (and elypeus in 9? ), shape of last ventral plate in
S$, ete.
Sphex (Priononyx) Thome Fabr.
Quite a large series of both sexes from various localities, collected
in the months of February, March, April, June, September.
Sphex (Priononyx) bifoveolatus Tasch.
Twenty-seven 9, 13 3 specimens. Chapada (March, April,
November) ; Corumba (April).
Psen aurifrons Tasch.
Chapada (October, November). Two specimens.
Psen Smithii n. sp.
$.—Black; antennz basally and beneath, mandibles medially,
tegulz, tubercles, fulvous ; tips of femora, four anterior tibiz, base
of hind pair, and tarsi, yellowish; second abdominal segment at
base more or less reddish; abdomen with a bluish metallic cast;
head below antennz with dense silvery or pale golden pubescence ;
vertex rather finely punctured; ocelli in a triangle, the space be-
tween hind pair about equal to that between them and eyes, the lat-
ter converging beneath; clypeus subtruncate or subemarginate
medially ; antennz rather stout, perhaps a little shorter than head
and thorax ; dorsulum shining, sparsely punctured ; scutellum im-
pressed down middle; mesopleurze punctured similarly to dorsulum ;
middle segment covered with coarse reticulations, the basal enclosure
small, with oblique rugze on each side of a smooth, triangular, cen-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379
tral area; petiole of abdomen about as long as hind femur, flat
above, not suleate; apical margins of segments testaceous; wings
dark subhyaline, iridescent; stigma testaceous, nervures darker ;
second and third submarginal cells each receiving a recurrent nery-
ure, second submarginal cell narrowed about one-third above ; basal
vein and cubital of hind wing interstitial. Length 10 mm.
Chapada (April). One specimen. Allied to the North Ameri-
ean P. fuscipes.
Stigmus neotropicus Kohl.
One specimen. Corumba (May).
Stigmus hexagonalis n. sp.
2 .—Black; mandibles, except apex, yellowish; tegule, tuber-
cles, antenne and legs, including cox, reddish-brown; cheeks
angularly produced beneath; head shining, not striated; ocelli
forming a low triangle, placed in pits ; the space between hind pair
much less than that between them and eyes; clypeus acutely biden-
tate medially ; prothorax above marked by a transverse series of
strong fovez, the antero-lateral angles of pronotum acutely produced,
as are also the sides of prothorax ; dorsulum punctured, with three
deep parallel furrows, the middle one of which runs to apex, the
others hardly half as long; suture between dorsulum and scutellum
foveolate; middle segment coarsely reticulate, at base above with a
hexagonal enclosure, which bears a longitudinal medial fold ; petiole
robust, shorter than hind tibize, with two deep sulci above, between
which runs a rather sharp ridge. Length 5 mm.
Chapada (December, January) ; Corumba (May). Three speci-
mens. Seems to be allied to S. temporalis Kohl, from Guatemala,
of which only the @ is known.
Trachypus Romandii Sauss.
Two specimens. Chapada (November, December).
Nysson tomentosus Hdl.
Chapada (December). One specimen.
Nysson pilosus Sm.
Uacarizal (February). One specimen.
Bothynostethus sp.
A & specimen from Santarem I am unable to refer to any of the
three described species of Bothynostethus. It agrees with Sausswret
in the color of wings, but the mandibles are deeply excised and the
380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
second discoidal cell is much higher than broad. In the two latter
characteristics it approaches the Mexican B. nitens, but differs in
color of wings and larger size (10 mm.). The clypeus is dentate
laterally as in Saussurei, of which it is, perhaps, the ¢.
Scapheutes brasilianus Hdl.
One specimen. Chapada (March).
Gorytes specialis Sm.
Four specimens that agree fairly with the description of specialis.
It is evidently close to G. polybia Hdl., but the suture between dor-
sulum and scutellum is not foveolate. Chapada (January) ; Marurt ;
Santarem.
Gorytes facilis Sm.
Four specimens. Corumbé (January, April); Santarem. This
species belongs, apparently, to the group of G. simillimus as defined
by Handlirsch in his monograph.
Gorytes scutellaris Spin.
Marurti (April); Chapada (April, November); Santarem. Nine
examples.
Gorytes seminiger Dhlb.
One specimen. Rio de Janeiro (November).
Gorytes cayennensis Spin.
Six specimens. Marurti (April); Rio de Janeiro (November) ;
Santarem.
Gorytes fuscus Tasch.-
Santarem. One specimen.
Gorytes valens n. sp.
2? .—Black ; labrum, clypeus, face below antennz, scape beneath,
fore femora and tibiz beneath, and apical margin of abdominal
segments 2-5, bright yellow; anterior tarsi, except the first joint
internally, and a spot on apical joint, and a ring at base of joints 2,
3 and 5 of the remaining tarsi, pale yellow; head and thorax with
long, grayish hairs, unusually hirsute for Gorytes; eyes strongly
converging beneath ; ocelli in a low triangle, situated in depres-
sions or pits; space between hind pair greater than that between
them and eyes; clypeus large, convex, somewhat triangular, its fore
margin broadly truncate; flagellum rather strongly clavate, the
first joint at least twice as long assecund; dorsulum with a distinet,
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381
rather strong, even punctuation, and anteriorly in the middle with
two, closely parallel, impressed lines; the remainder of thorax
punctured, but less closely than dorsulum, the apex of the large
basal area of middle segment being almost smooth ; the middle seg-
ment is short and rounded; mesosternum not at all carinated; the
episternum and epimerum distinetly separated ; wings subhyaline,
yellowish along costa, darker in marginal cell; submedian cell of
hind wings terminating beyond the origin of the cubital vein ; legs
stout, the tibiz serrato-spinose, the spines pale; abdomen robust,
more granulate than punctate, on the first segment, however, and
ventrally punctured ; held in certain lights the abdomen is covered
with golden pile, the apical segments with long, yellowish hairs;
first segment meeting the second broadly, the latter depressed at
base above, ventrally truncated at base, and with a tubercle, so that
when viewed from the side it is angularly produced; pygidium
large, well developed, aciculate, covered with golden pubescence.
Length 14-26 mm.
Chapada (December). Three specimens. Seems to be very dis-
tinct from any Gorytes heretofore described, It seems intermediate
of the groups mystaceus, nigrifrons, ete., and fuscus, robustus. It
agrees with the former in shape of second ventral segment, but the
recurrent veins are both received by the second submarginal cell.
From the fuscus group the former of these two characteristics will
separate it. Then again in the eyes, strongly converging toward
clypeus, it also differs. Except for the second ventral segment it is
not unlike G. moneduloides, but it is a much more robust insect.
Gorytes partitus n. sp.
@ —Head and abdomen, except first segment, black; thorax,
first abdominal segment and legs reddish-brown; clypeus, except
medially, labrum, base of mandibles, spot at base of antennz, scape
beneath narrow line on pronotum, dorsulum at sides, tegule, spot
beneath them, scutellum, postscutellum, large spot at each side of
middle segment, base of first abdominal segment, and four anterior
tibize and tarsi in part, yellow; eyes distinctly converging beneath
clypeus transverse, punctured, broadly truncate ; antennz but little
thickened apically, the first joint of flagellum about one-third longer
than second ; thorax practically impunctured ; suture between dor-
snlum and scutellum foveolate; mesosternum carinated, the epi-
merum and episternum separated ; middle segment convex, divided
by a furrow its entire length, the basal area large; tibize and tarsi
382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
distinctly spinose, pulvilli large, fore tarsi distinctly ciliated ;
abdomen subpetiolate, the first segment scarcely coarctate at apex ;
second dorsal segment depressed at base, second ventral convex ;
pygidium distinct, longitudinally rugose; wings subhyaline, fuscous
along costa and in marginal cell, nervures dark, stigma brown,
submedian cell of hind wings terminating distinctly beyond origin
of cubital vein: head and thorax with silvery pile, that on the dorsu-
lum brownish. Length 14 mm.
Chapada (December). One specimen. Seems to be related to
notabilis Hdl., and fumipennis Sm.
Gorytes coloratus n. sp.
2 —Head and thorax black, abdomen, and legs in part, reddish-
brown; scape, clypeus sometimes, mandibles basally, pronotum,
scutellum anteriorly, postscutellum, spot beneath tegule, and on each
side of segments 2 and 3, or 2-4, anterior tibize and tarsi entirely,
medial tibize, medial tibize within, and medial, and hind tarsi more or
less, yellowish ; flagellum beneath at base, tegule, tubercles, reddish-
testaceous ; dorsulum somewhat iridescent ; head broader than long;
frontal impression deep; eyes large, strongly flattened anteriorly,
strongly converging toward clypeus; ocellii forming a low triangle,
placed in depressions; elypeus distinctly punctured, strongly de-
pressed transversely before the anterior margin; scape longer than
the two following joints united, first joint of flagellum nearly as long
as joints 2 and 5 united ; the pronotum appears as a thick, transverse
fold; dorsulum shining, with distinct separated punctures; meso-
sternum not carinated, epimerum and episternum separated, but not
very distinctly ; punctuation of mesopleur stronger than that of the
dorsulum; suture between dorsulum and scutellum not foveolate;
scutellum strongly convex ; middle segment with basal enclosure
smooth and polished, the posterior face punctured and divided by a
deep furrow which begins at the apex of the enclosure; legs stout,
hind tibize thickened within at apex; first joint of medial tarsi
somewhat curved; tibize and tarsi spinose ; pulvilli distinct; abdo-
men distinctly punctured most strongly on apical segments, first seg-
ment slender on basal half, then broadened to the apex, where it is
convex, but not coarctate; pygidium rather large, obtuse at apex,
deeply punctured; ventral segments 3-5 punctured along apical
margin only ; wings strongly iridescent, clear, the first and second
recurrent nervures interstitial with the first and second transverso-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 383
cubital veins respectively ; cubital cell of hind wings terminating
much before origin of cubital vein. Length 9 mm.
Marurt (April); Santarem. Two specimens.
This species belongs, no doubt, close to G. violaceus Hdl., described
from a single defective specimen from Brazil, which, with other
parts, lacked the abdomen. The present species is clearly more
allied to the bipunctatus group than to chilensis, and it is probable
that it and violaceus form a group. In coloration this new species
seems quite distinct from its allies; it would be interesting to know
whether the abdomen of violaceus is similarly colored.
Bembidula discisa Tasch.
Chapada (January, February, March, September, October).
Twenty-three specimens.
Bembidula variegata Oliv.
Chapada (January, March, September, October, December). Fif-
teen 9? ,five ¢ specimens.
Monedula signata Linné.
Chapada (March). Three females.
Monedula punctata Fabr.
Eleven 2 specimens. Chapada (March).
Monedula surinamensis DeG.
Twenty specimens, representing both sexes, collected in January,
April, September to December, chiefly at Chapada.
Monedula magnifica Perty.
‘Chapada (March, April). Sixteen specimens, all females, of this
handsome species.
Stizus Bolivarii Hdl.
Chapada (January, December); Corumba (February, April) ;
Santarem. Ten specimens, which are probably this species. They
have all the abdominal segments fasciate,
Trypoxylon pallitarse Sauss.
Five specimens. Santarem (February).
Trypoxylon niveitarse Sauss.
Ten specimens. Chapada (January, October, December) ; San-
tarem.
Trypoxylon rufosignatum Tasch.
Chapada (April). Three specimens.
384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Trypoxylon fabricator Sm.
Chapada (October). Three specimens. This species is probably
identical with 7. gracile Tasch.
Trypoxylon superbum Sm.
Chapada (April). One specimen.
Trypoxylon levifrons Sm.
One specimen. Chapada (October).
Trypoxylon leve n. sp.
2 .—Deep black, shining; pubescence pale; hind tarsi except
base and apex, dirty white; front with distinct, shallow punctures,
furrowed from before anterior ocellus to a slight prominence just
behind antenne; first joint of flagellum about as long as the two
following united ; space between eyes above about equal to length
of first joint of flagellum, beneath at clypeus it is somewhat less;
clypeus carinated down middle, somewhat depressed laterally, its fore
margin in the middle subtruncate; face and elypeus with silvery
pubescence; thorax is distinctly punctured; middle segment with
the posterior surface transversely striated, carinated laterally, parted
by a deep furrow, the upper surface slightly depressed apically, sides
apparently smooth; abdomen rather slender, much more elongate
than in allied species, first segment slender, somewhat nodose at
apex, fully one-third longer than second segment; the abdomen
widens gradually from apex of first segment; wings fuscous, with
blue reflection, pale at base and apex. Length 17 mm.
$.—Colored like 9, the wings considerably darker; clypeus
squarely produced, sub-tridentate ; antennze short, clavate, first joint
of flagellum curved, apical joint about as long as the three preceding
ones united, these latter broader than long; thorax finely punctured ;
middle segment except sides entirely transversely striate, but finely
so above at base, where it is also punctured; hind femora sublami-
nated beneath toward apex ; abdomen stouter, and probably shorter
than in 2 (segments three et seg. missing), the first segment not
spinose beneath. Length about 16 mm.
Marurti (April); Santarem. Three 9, one 6, specimens.
Trypoxylon insolitum n. sp.
° .—Black ; sides of the first segment and second and third more
or less, pale reddish, or testaceous: pubescence of thorax pale, and
rather dense; face and clypeus densely silvery, including the
emargination of eyes; front with unusually coarse transverse ruge
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 385
or folds, deeply impressed down middle ; the anterior ocellus is placed
in this furrow, which becomes shallower below and terminates in a
flat projection over the bases of antennze; first joint of flagellum a
little shorter than the two following united; clypeus not carinated,
prominent and rounded at apex; thorax finely punctured, nearly
smooth; tegule testaceous; middie segment above parted by a deep
furrow, which is transversely striated, and on each side of which
another less distinet, curved furrow is present, posterior surface also
parted by a furrow, finely and transversely striated ; abdomen elon-
gate, slender, the first segment almost linear on basal two-thirds,
slightly nodose, its length equal to the following segments united ;
wings subhyaline, iridescent, nervures dark. Length 11 mm.
$ —Clypeus shorter, subtruncate ; first joint of flagellum slightly
longer than two following united, apical joint small, not much longer
than the preceding one; middle segment with the furrow deeper
than in 92, and the upper and posterior surfaces coarsely and trans-
versely striated ; space between eyes at top greater than length of
first joint of flagellum, beneath at clypeus it is slightly less. Length
12 mm.
Rio de Janeiro (November); Santarem. One of each sex. Re-
lated to fabricator Sm. and gracile Tasch. The space between eyes
at top and at clypeus is less in the 9, than in the ¢, an unusual
circumstance.
Trypoxylon medianum n. sp.
$ .—Black ; sides of first and second segments, and the latter at
base, reddish ; clothed with pale pubescence, that on face, clypeus,
tubercles, and postero-lateral angles of middle segment, pale golden ;
a silvery stripe runs below from tegule; clypeus tridentate at apex,
the median tooth acute and longest ; front apparently granulated,
feebly impressed ; a longitudinal raised line behind base of antennz ;
space between eyes at top but slightly greater than that between them
at the clypeus, somewhat greater than the length of first joint of
flagellum; the latter subclavate, first joint about as long as two fol-
lowing united, the ultimate joint small, not much longer than the
preceding one; dorsulum and scutellum with distinct, separated
punctures, those of mesopleure finest; middle segment above finely
punctato-striate, the posterior surface with distinct transverse striz
deeply furrowed down middle, sides punctured; hind trochanters
not dentate; abdomen clavate, rather stout, first segment a little
386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
nodose, as long as the two following united ; wings subhyaline, apical
margins fuscous, nervures dark. Length 13 mm.
Corumba (April) ; Santarem. Two specimens.
Trypoxylon fallax n. sp.
° Black ; sides of the first and second segments and base of the
latter reddish ; face, clypeus and suture below tegule with silvery
pubescence, that on pronotum pale golden ; other pubescence pale ;
front coarsely granulated, with a prominence or tubercle behind
antennze, and above it a V-shaped depression ; ocelli situated in de-
pressions; space between eyes at top about equal to length of first
joint of flagellum, beneath at clypeus somewhat less; clypeus flat,
somewhat roundly produced, emarginate in middle of fore margin ;
thorax with distinct separated punctures; above the middle segment
is finely punctato-striate, depressed slightly at apex, the posterior
surface more distinctly striated and suleate down the middle; first
abdominal segment slightly nodose at apex, about one-quarter longer
than the second ; wings subhyaline, nervures dark testaceous. Length
13 mm.
Var. (?). More subtilely punctured ; clypeus entire.
$.—Similar to @, with the reddish color on abdomen more ex-
tended, the base of segments, 2-3 being of that color, and first joint
of tarsi pale at base; clypeus roundly emarginate ; first joint of
flagellum slightly curved, the last joint but little longer than the
penultimate; hind trochanters not dentate. Length 12 mm.
Chapada (March); Maruri; Santarem. Three 9, one ¢, speci-
mens. Closely resembles medianum, but the clypeus is emarginate,
not dentate, front more coarsely granulated and with a V-shaped
depression, etc.
In addition to the foregoing species of Trypoxylon the collection
contains eight other species, apparently new, represented by single
specimens, which, for that reason and to the inadequate descriptions
of many neotropical species, I have refrained from describing at the
present time.
Oxybelus marginatus Sm.
A single specimen from Santarem,
Oxybelus americanus Spin.
Five specimens. Chapada (May, December) ; Marurt (April) ;
Santarem.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387
Crabro pugnans Sm.
Chapada (April). One specimen. Pugnans belongs to the group
Crossocerus.
Crabro carinatus Sm.
Two specimens. Pedra Branca (April); Rio de Janeiro (Novem-
ber). Seems to belong to So/enius group, as characterized in Kohl’s
table.
Crabro verticalis Sm.
Fourteen specimens, all females. Chapada (January, March, May,
December). This species apparently belongs to Crossocerus group.
Crabro atitlane Cam.
Two specimens from Rio de Janeiro (November) and Benivedes
(July) I refer with some doubt to atitlane. If not identical they
are closely allied.
Crabro productus n. sp.
92 .—Head large, closely punctured; ocelli in a curved line,
space between hind pair slightly, if anything, less than that between
them and eyes; clypeus sharply carinated, its fore margin rounded
medially ; first joint of flagellum about one-third longer than sec-
ond ; pronotum bordered anteriorly by a sharp carina, terminating
in a small tooth laterally ; dorsulum rugoso-punctate, more sparsely
posteriorly, depressed down middle and bicarinate; scutellum with
large, separated punctures; mesopleurz longitudinally rugose, the
mesosternum shining, with distant punctures; middle segment
divided by a longitudinal furrow, which is deepest within the basal
enclosure, which is large and rather finely rugose ; posterior face
with transverse folds on rugz, not margined laterally, the sides
microscopically striated ; tibize distinctly spinose; first dorsal ab-
dominal segment with coarse, separated punctures, with a margin of
fine ones at apex; the second segment less strongly punctured ; the
remaining dorsals finely punctured; ventrals shining, the second
with large, sparse punctures, the third, fourth and fifth with a trans-
verse series of punctures before apex ; pygidium narrow, rounded
at apex, depressed, with large punctures. Black; cheeks and sides
of thorax with silvery pubescence, that on face and clypeus golden,
silvery in part in certain lights; scape, line on mandibles, prono-
tum, tubercles, line on metanotum, spot at apex of four anterior
femora beneath, a line on all the tibize externally, the hind pair
almost entirely, base of hind tarsi, large spot on each side of first
388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
two dorsal segments connected by a narrow line, a medially nar-
rowed fascia on dorsals 3-5, sixth almost entirely and a short line
at each side of ventrals 2, 3, or 2-4, at apex, yellow; wings subhya-
line, nervures testaceous. Length about 9 mm.
$.—Similar to 9 ; space between hind ocelli distinctly less than
that between them and eyes; third and fourth joints of flagellum
uniting in such a way as to form an emargination beneath, the
fourth joint rather prominent at apex; furrowing forming the en-
closure of middle segment foveolate ; punctuation of mesosternum
and second ventral segment finer and closer than in the @, but that
of the abdomen dorsally is coarser ; four anterior femora yellow at
apex, a spot at apex of hind pair beneath ; joints 1-3 of medial
tarsi produced at apex on inner side. Length 8 mm.
Chapada (March, April, November, December). One ¢ exam-
ple is very small,5 mm. According to Kohl’s table, belongs in the
Solenius group.
The collection also contains several additional species of Crabro,
probably new to science, but represented by single specimens.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389
A REVISION OF THE GENUS SYNIDOTEA.*
BY JAMES E. BENEDICT, PH.D.
Among the unnamed Isopods in the National Museum seven spe-
cies regarded as new have been referred to Synidotea as defined by
Harger. Of the eight described species of the genus, five were in
the collection and an additional one was loaned by the California
Academy of Sciences. With so many new, and six of the eight de-
scribed species at hand, it was thought best to treat the genus mono-
graphically, and the descriptions of the two remaining species were
added.
The new species all come from the North Pacific Ocean and Ber-
ing Sea. One was taken in San Francisco Bay by Mr. C. H.
Townsend while examining the oyster beds for the U. S. Fish Com-
mission ; the others were dredged by the ‘ Albatross,’ one off the
State of Washington and five in Bering Sea; two of the latter had,
however, previously been taken by Mr. W. H. Dall.
The bathymetrical range of the genus is from shallow water to
695 fathoms. The geographical range is as follows: One species in
South African waters, one from Japan, one from Lower California,
two from California, one off the State of Washington, seven in Ber-
ing Sea and the adjacent. waters of the Arctic Ocean, and two from
the North Atlantic.
The genus Synidotea was instituted by Harger in 1878 to receive
Idotea bicuspida Owen and I. nodulosa Krdyer. The two species
now represent the two sections of the genus; the bicuspida section
contains eleven and the nodulosa four species. All of the species
come well within the limits of the genus.
The antenne of all have multi-articulate flagella. The palpus of
the maxillipeds has but three joints. The epimera of the four an-
terior segments are indicated, if at all, by a slight notch or pit in the
posterior margins midway between the lateral margins and the
median line; the epimera of the three posterior segments are dis-
tinctly outlined in a dorsal view, and are solidly united to the true
* Published by permission of the Sécretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
26
390 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
segmental margins. The abdomen is composed of two segments
united above but separated at the sides by short incisions.
Tn addition to the above generic characters, most species agree in
having the head excavated in front, a cross-like areolation between
the eyes, the extremities of the cross being usually armed with tuber-
cles or spines; in having a spine or tubercle between the eyes and
the front. A deep transverse suture near the back of the head cuts
off a posteephalic lobe or areolation; between this areolation and
the cross are two lateral areolations, sometimes united at the base
and sometimes separated by a channel. The sides of the thorax in
all species show undulations or nodules of more or less prominence.
The section of the genus of which bicuspida is the type is charac-
terized by having the distal end of the abdomen emarginate or bi-
cuspid, while in the nodulosa section the end is bluntly pointed.
The basal plates of the operculum in all species except harfordi
are crossed by a diagonal line or ridge.
SYNIDOTEA Harger.
Synidotea Harger, American Journal of Science (3), XV, p. 374, 1878.
Edotia Miers, Journal Linn. Soc. Lond., XVI, p. 65 (pars),? 1883.
Synidotea G. O. Sars, Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition, Crust., p. 116,
1885
Synidotea Harger, character emended.
“Antenne with an articulated flagellum.” Epimeral sutures not
evident above on the first four segments; on the last three the lines
of demarcation are more or less distinct. ‘“ Pleon apparently com-
posed of two segments, united above but separated at the sides by
short incisions. Operculum with a single apical plate. Palpus of
maxillipeds three-jointed.”
! Miers, in his “ Revision of the Idoteid ” in this journal, unites several
genera under Edotia Guérin-Méneyille, then arranges Fdotia in three sec-
tions as follows:
2 Antenne well developed, with the flagellum composed of several joints.
ose boomed uniarticulate. (Synidotea).
2 Antenne very small, with the flagellum rudimentary ; postabdomen uni-
Secu ( Edotia).
222 Flagellum of the antennz obsolete ; postabdomen biarticnlate: ( Desmares-
tia, Epelys. )
In this arrangement Professor Sars does not concur, but says in regard to
Synidotea, “ This genus was first instituted by Harger, and should unquestion-
ably be maintained.”
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 391
Key to Species Examined.
a Abdomen emarginate or notched at the distal end.
b Two spines or tubercles overhanging the frontal notch.
c Spines united near the base. pallida
ec’ Tubercles free at the base. eros
b’ No spines or tubercles overhanging the frontal notch.
e With a low ridge arising between the eyes and interrupted
on the median line.
d Outlines of abdomen subparallel. nebulosa
d’ Outlines strongly arcuate. angulata
ce’ Without a ridge between the eyes.
d Outline of abdomen subtriangular.
e Front not excavated. consolidata
e’ Front excavated.
f Outlines of thorax subparallel. marmorata
f’ Outlines of thorax strongly arcuate.
bicuspida
d’ Outlines of abdomen rounded.
e Length of abdomen equal to width at base.
laticauda
e’ Length of abdomen equal to one and one-half
times the width at base. harfordi
a’ Abdomen pointed.
b Undulations of the body not tubercular or spiny.
e Tubercle in front of the eyes not margined. nodulosa
e’ Tubercle on the frontal margin and forming a part of it.
levis
b’ Undulations of the body tubercular and spiny.
e Four spines on the front of the head; body spinous.
muricata
ce’ A wedge-shaped tubercle behind the frontal notch; body
tubercular. picta
Synidotea bicuspida (Owen). Fig. 1.
Idotea bicuspida Owen, Crustacea of the ‘ Blossom,’ p. 92, pl. xxvii, fig. 6,
1839.
Idotea pulchra Lockington, Proc. Cali. Acad. Sci., VII. p. 44, 1877.
Edotia bicuspida Miers, Journal of the Linnean Society of London, XVI,
p. 66, 1883 (pars).
Synidotea bicuspida Sars, Crustacea, Norwegian North Atlantic Exped., p.
116, pl. X, figs. 24-26, 1885; equal to Synidotea incisa Sars, Crustacea et
Pycnogonida nova, etc., No. 8.
392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
There are a large number of speci-
mens of this species in the collection
from Bering Sea and the Arctic Ocean.
The species is the largest and its shell
is the heaviest and strongest of any in
the genus. This and the closely re-
lated Atlantic form, S. marmorata
Packard, and the small Californian
species S. consolidata (Stimpson), are
easily distinguished from any known
species by the triangular abdomen
with a comparatively sharp bicuspid
apex. Some of the largest specimens
measure 31 mm. in length and 14.5 in
width.
Fig. 1. Synidotea bi id
6 (Onesie ye ae : Shallow water to 56 fathoms.
Synidotea marmorata (Packard). Fig. 2.
Idotza marmorata Packard, Memoirs Boston Society of Natural History,
I, p. 296, pl. viii, fig. 6, 1867. Whiteaves, Canad. Nat., p. 262, 1875.
Idotea marmorata equals I. bicuspida Streets and Kingsley, Bulletin Essex
Institute, IX, p. 108, 1877. :
? Idothea rugulosa Buchholz, Zweite Deutsche Nordpolarf., I, p. 285, 1874.
Synidotea bicuspida Harger, Proceedings U. S. National Museum, II, p.
160, 1879; also U. S. Fish Commission Report for 1878, p. 352, 1880.
Edotia bicuspida Miers, Jour. Linn. Soc. Lond., X VI, p. 66, 1883 (pars).
This species was described by A.
S. Packard, Jr., in his paper on the
“ Recent Invertebrate Fauna of La-
brador” from specimens taken in
Kyuetarbuck Bay in seven fathoms
on asandy bottom. The National
Museum series consists of four spec-
imens from Station 2,481, lat. N.
43° 00’ 00”, lon. W. 50° 47’ 30”,
129 fathoms; one from Station
2,436, lat. N. 43° 36’ 00”, lon. W.
50° 06’ 30”, 36 fathoms, and five
from the Gloucester fishermen.
Compared with S. bicuspida it is
not so wide ; the thin epimeral pro-
jections so prominent in bicuspida (Fig. 2. Synidotea marmorata
are much reduced in this species ; Packard. x 23.
the joints of the antenne are relatively longer and more slender in
marmorata. The average size of the specimens of marmorata is much
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 393
smaller than those of bicuspida; a larger series might change this.
The largest male S. marmorata measures 18 mm. in length and 7
mm. in width. A male S. bicuspida of about equal size, measures
17 mm. in length and 8 in width.
Synidotea consolidata (Stimpson). Fig. 3.
Idotea consolidata Stimpson, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., I, p. (89) 97, 1856,
also Boston Jour. Nat. Hist., VI, p. 503, 1857.
Edotia bicuspida (nec Idotea bicuspida Owen ) Miers, Jour. Linn. Soc. Lond.,
XVI, p. 66, 1883 (pars).
Two specimens of this species, labelled
‘Pacific Grove, California,’ were received
from Mr. J. O. Snyder.
The front is emarginate, the median notch
is large. The deep excavation of the front
in S. bicuspida is in sharp contrast to the
nearly straight front of this species. Be-
hind the frontal notch is a pair of large,
blunt tubercles transversely placed. The
lateral margins of the thorax are subparallel
in the male and strongly arcuate in the fe-
male. The margins are incised in this spe-
cies ; in bicuspida they are full. There isa
line of low swellings on the median line and
another line of like swellings part way be- Fig 8. Synidotea con-
tween the median lineand the margin. The solidata (Stimpson). x $.*
abdomen is much like that of bicuspida.
Synidotea laticauda, new species. Fig. 4.
a Lae A single specimen of Synidotea
was taken by Mr. C. H. Townsend
in San Francisco Bay ; it is readily
distinguished from any species yet
described.
The head is wider than long, the
anterior margin is nearly straight
and is slightly produced horizon-
tally; its whole upper surface is
evenly swollen and has neither ele-
vations nor depressions of any kind ;
the cephalic lobe is little more than
indicated. The eyes are large,
Fig. 4. Synidotea laticauda round, lateral and but very slightly
Benedict. x 2} projecting. The antenne are equal
* Incorrect. The antenne should be placed as in the others and show
seven or eight joints in the flagella.
394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
to the head and thorax in length, the flagellum has twenty-one arti-
cles. The basal segment of the peduncle is short, reaching but a
little beyond the front; the second segment is as broad as long ;
the third segment is about once and a half as long as broad; the
fourth is a little more than twice the breadth ; the fifth is nearly as
long as the third and fourth together. The antennule extend a lit-
tle beyond the base of the fourth segment of the antenne.
The thorax is widest at the fourth segment. From the sides of
the fourth segment the outline curves around to the eye. Poste-
riorly from the fourth segment the outline is straight to the distal
third of the abdomen. The second, third and fourth segments are
longest. There are no spines or tubercles anywhere and the rugos-
ities so common to the species of the genus are barely indicated.
The abdomen is very little longer than its breadth at the base.
It tapers gradually for the first two-thirds of its length where it be-
gins to taper more rapidly to a broad emarginate extremity.
The feet are sparsely set with coarse hair. The valves of the
operculum are diagonally crossed by a curved line.
The specimen is clouded with dark patches made up of small
black spots.
This species can be distinguished from any other yet described by
its broadly emarginate abdomen.
Length 17 mm., width 7 mm. (No. 20,504, U.S. N. M.).
Synidotea nebulosa, new species. Fig. 5.
The front of the head is exca-
vated ; between the median notch
and the antero-lateral margin the
outline is emarginate ; between the
margin and the eyes the protuber-
ances are but little elevated; the
cross areolation is smooth; the lat-
eral areolations are separated by
an extension of the cross; this ex-
tension is itself slightly divided by
aslightly impressed line. The de-
pression in front of the postce-
phalic lobe is deep. The sides of
the head extend to the vertical
line of the eyes, cutting off the vi-
sion from objects directly below. Fig. 5. Synidotea nebulosa
The antennz are about 6 mm. in Benedict. x ?.
Py i en. Ta, ee ES =
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 395
length in a large specimen and have a ten-jointed flagellum; the
distal joint of the peduncle is 1.5 mm. in length. The outline of the
thorax is ovate in both sexes; the undulations are distinct; the
fourth segment is the longest. The epimeral sutures of the three
posterior segments can be made out under a lens. The incisions on
the sides of the abdomen are short ; the areolations at the base and
summit are large and smooth. The lateral outline of the anterior
half is straight or slightly concave, of the posterior half convex.
The distal end is slightly excavated.
Several specimens of both sexes were taken at Station 3,600 in
company with S. picta, and at Station 3,637 in 32 fathoms. Mr.
Dall obtained them at Unalaska in 16 fathoms ; at Kyska Harbor,
9 to 16 fathoms; Semidi Islands, 12 to 25 fathoms. Types (No.
20,503, U.S. N. M.) from Station 3,600, lat. N. 55° 06’ 00”, lon.
W. 163° 28’ 00”, 9 fathoms.
This species can be distinguished at sight from all other alcoholic
specimens of the genus by its dark-colored head and fourth segment,
and by the dark line surrounding the elevated portions of the abdo-
men. The first and last three segments of the thorax are light with
small flakes of black uniformly sprinkled over the surface; the
median line of the first three is usually broad and dark.
Length of a large male, 17 mm.; width, 6.5 mm. Length of a
large female, 15 mm.; width, 7 mm.
Synidotea angulata, new species. Fig. 6.
This is a small species easily distin-
guished from the others of the genus in
its region by the angular and projecting
lateral margins of the first three thoracic
segments; it is most nearly related to S.
nebulosa.
The head is excavated in front in a
nearly even curve, and there is no dis-
tinct median notch as in nebulosa. Be-
tween the eyes and the front the tuber-
cles are very low and inconspicuous ;
the cross areolation is a low ridge inter-
BS rupted in the middle by a V-shaped
Fig. 6. Synidotea angulata notch; the lateral areolations of other
Benedict. x j. species, in this, form a single transverse
areolation not at all separated in the middle; it is separated from
the postcephalic lobe by a deep impression. The sides of the head
396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
do not extend to the vertical line of the eyes. The flagellum of the
antenne has nine or ten joints. The sides of the thorax are very
much less arcuate than in nebulosa, and where in the latter species
the margins are rounded, in this they project in obtuse angles; the
lateral margins of the three posterior segments are straight. The
abdomen is very much as in nebulosa. In color this species in part
simulates nebulosa. In the specimens examined it lacks the black
flakes, there is a line of spots near the margin and one in line with |
the epimeral lines.
The largest good specimen is 11 mm. in length.
Stations 2,868, 2,869 and 2,872, in 31 to 38 fathoms,
Station 2,869, lat. N. 47° 38’ 00”, lon. W. 124° 39’ 00”; 32 fath-
oms. Types (No. 20,506, U.S. N. M.).
Synidotea pallida, new species. Fig. 7.
The frontal margin is deeply
and evenly concave, there being
no median notch. The surface
between the eyes is protuberant (I\NY
and is divided bya slightme- @\
dian impressed line. In the la
angle formed by the raised por- ey
tion between the eyes and the
horizontal front are two horn- ho
like tubercles united atthebases ~—4
by a very short ridge across the \ Ke ZA
median line. The cephalic su- if Uf
ture is deep but closed at the { /
bottom. The peduncles of the | f)
antennz are about equal to the \ U
flagella in length; the latter \ :
have from 12 to 16 segments. Wj
The eyes are small, situated ata Fig. 7. Synidotea pallida Benedict.
distance from the margin on x 23.
slight elevations. The sides of the head and of all the thoracic seg-
ments are thin and produced, nearly horizontal. ‘The four anterior
segments are long, with rounded post-lateral angles, the three pos-
terior segments are short with subacute angles. On each side at a
little distance from the median line on the 2d, 3d and 4th segments
isa single spine. In young specimens the spines are proportion-
ately longer and they are replaced on the posterior segments by low
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397
tubercles ; the median line is also tubercular. The legs are long and
slender on the 7th segment, a little shorter on the 6th, and so on to
the 1st which are quite short.
The abdomen is markedly narrower than the 7th segment, it tap-
ers gradually to a point near the end which is broad and well
rounded, the median line ends in a small concavity best seen with a
lens. Excepting the usual lateral incisions, the upper surface is
smooth and glabrous.
A large male measures 22 mm. in length and 7.5 in breadth; a
female, with eggs, 12 mm. in Jength and 4.5 in breadth.
Not less than one thousand specimens of this species were dredged
off Chirikoff Island, Alaska, at Station 3,340, lat. N. 55° 26’ 00”,
lon. W. 155° 26’ 00”, 695 fathoms (No. 20,500, U. S. N. M.).
Synidotea erosa, new species. Fig. 8.
Several specimens of this species
were dredged at Station 3,210 off San-
nakh Islands, Alaska, in 483 fathoms ;
lat. N. 54° 00’ 00”, lon. W. 162° 40’
30” (No. 20,505, U. S. N. M.).
Erosa is more nearly related to S.
pallida than to any species yet dis-
covered, as in the latter there are two
horn-like protuberances just back of
the frontal margin. The cephalic su-
ture is the same except that it is more
open at the bottom. The other pro-
tuberances and depressions of the head
are the same, except that in erosa there
is a prominent tubercle between the
eile! We Gynidoralerosa eyes and the front; in S. pallida this
Benedict. x 2. is lacking, or, if represented at all, by
a low swelling. All of the projections
of the head are more or less eroded. The segments of the thorax
have very low tubercles or slight swellings where the spines are situ-
ated in pallida. The ruge of the lowest portions of the thorax are
much more prominent in this species. In outline erosa is narrower
and less arcuate, the outer margins of the segments are much less
produced. The 7th segment is not noticeably wider than the base
of the abdomen. The abdomen holds its width to a point beyond
the middle, whence it is rounded to the terminus, which, as in
398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
pallida, is slightly concave. The slightly arcuate outline of the
thorax running into the straight outline of the abdomen differenti-
ates this from all other species of the genus. Other differences are,
the larger eyes situated nearer the margin of the head, the very
hairy edges of the valve, and the sparsely granulated abdomen. The
length of the adults from which the foregoing description is made
ranges from 21 to 22 mm.
A female, about 14 mm. in length, has arcuate lateral margins,
and all of the tubercles of the large male are exaggerated in size ;
the tubercles between the eyes and the front and the pair separated
by the median line form a row of four large tubercles on the front.
The young males have almost parallel sides; the median tuber-
cles of the front are swollen and much eroded, as are all of the
prominences of the head. On each of the first four segments of the
thorax is a median tubercle on the transverse ridge and also a
smaller one in front of it; there is another row of tubercles on the
sides. ‘The sides of the abdomen are rough and warty.
Synidotea nodulosa (Krgyer).
The limits of this species are hard to define. All of the species
with pointed abdomens are very similar, yet constitute, I believe,
good species. Abundant material will not unlikely show that addi-
tional species must be recognized. Krgyer described nodulosa from
South Greenland; Harger had several specimens from the Eastern
Fishing Banks and also records them from off Queen Charlotte
Island.
I have not found nodulosa in the west coast collections. A dry spe-
cimen from Jugor Schar presented by the Royal Zoological Museum
of Copenhagen has the cross areolation between the eyes armed
with four tubercles, the two on the transverse line are slightly com-
pressed, those on the median line are united at the base, the poste-
rior one is much the larger; the areolations between the post-
cephalic lobe and the cross are well elevated, coarsely punctate,
and divided on the median line; the tubercles between the margin
and the eyes are well elevated and free from the margin. On each
segment of the thorax a short ridge crosses the median line, form-
ing a slightly elevated angular tubercle on the line. The abdo-
men measures at the base about four-fifths of its length, or 4.2 mm.
broad to 5.3 long.
A specimen from the fishing banks of the northeast coast is prob-
ably nearer Krgyer’s type than any other in the collection; in this
the cross is armed with four tubercles that are much less conspicu-
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399
ous than those of the Jugor Schar specimen, the posterior one on
the median line is the largest and is not so positively united at the
base; the areolations behind the cross are not so elevated, and are
but faintly punctate; in this and in some smaller specimens they are
united on the median line; the tubercles in front of the eyes are not
so nearly vertical and are much more angular ; the transverse ridges
are not so large but more acute, with slight tubercles at their inter-
section with the median line. The abdomen measures at its base
3.2 mm. in breadth, its length is 4.25 mm. In S. levis the cross is
armed with but a single tubercle on the median line; this is not
vertical as in nodulosa, but horizontal, and when seen from above
covers the median notch of the front, otherwise the cross is a smooth
areolation with slightly elevated transverse extremities. The areo-
lations behind the cross are smooth and broadly united at the
median line. The tubercles in front of the eyes arise from the mar-
gin and form a part of it. The segments of the thorax are incon-
spicuously tubercular on the median line. The breadth of the
abdomen at the base is 4 mm., length 5.4 mm.
Synidotea levis, new species. Fig, 9.
Numerous specimens from Sta-
tions 3,252, lat. N. 57° 22’ 20”, lon.
W. 164° 24’ 40”, 292 fathoms, and
3,253, lat. N. 57° 05’ 50”, lon. W.
164° 27’ 15”, 36 fathoms, respect-
ively, differ from S. nodulosa and
its near allies by the lack of three
-tubercles on the head and the less
prominent elevations of the thorax.
The cross-like areolation between
the eyes is smooth with the excep-
tion of a single tubercle which is
prolonged horizontally over the
median notch. The tubercles 0 ae
which in nodulosa arise between Fig. 9. Synidotea levis Benedict.
the eyes and the front, in this spe- xi.
cies arise at the margin and form a part of it. They are less erect
than in nodulosa and are more angular.
Harger says of nodulosa, “Color in alcohol gray, often with
brownish transverse markings;” these specimens are gray in alco-
hol with a dark, broken, median line on the anterior segments.
400 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Length 15 mm., breadth 4.8 mm. Types (No. 20,501, U.S. N.
Mis)
Synidotea muricata (Harford). Fig. 10. Jdotea muricata Harford. Proe. Cal.
Acad. Sci., VII, Pt. I, p. 117, (1876), 1877,
Six specimens, taken by the ‘Cor-
win’ off Icy Cape differ from all
other species of the genus yet de-
scribed by the spiny nature of the
dorsal surface, head and pleon in-
cluded. The locality is lat. 70°
15’ 00” N., long. 162° 55’ 00” W.,
in 25 fathoms.
The head is deeply excavated in
front, the margin running inward
from the lateral prolongations to a
median notch. The flagella of the
antennze have from 10 to 12 seg-
ments. A small spine overhangs
the median notch, a second spine
is situated a little behind the first,
Fig. 10. Synidotea muricata a third is in line on the posterior
Harford. x 23. lobe; two other spines, one on each
side of the first two, form, in con-
nection with them, the figure of a diamond; the spines of the median
line are at the obtuse angles. A little behind the margin and in
front of the eye is a short spine with a compressed base. Spines
with compressed bases are not peculiar to the front, but begin on the
postcephalic lobe and extend to the end of the thorax situated on
transverse ridges and forming the median line of spines. The
spines on the abdomen are not compressed. On either side of the
median line is a lateral line of spines; below these spines on each
segment is a group of five spines arranged in two transverse rows,
three in the anterior and two in the posterior rows. The abdomen
has two transverse ridges, the basal ridge has three spines and the
next ridge five. On each side is a group of from five to nine very
short spines, the number varying according to the size of the speci-
men. The abdomen is broad at the base, constricted at about the
middle and runs out to an acute terminus. The specimens have
been in poor alcohol too long to make color notes of any value.
Length of a large specimen 21 mm., breadth 7 mm.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 401
Synidotea picta, new species. Figs. 11 and 12.
The head is deeply excavated in
front; the notch is deep; the tuber-
cles in front of the eyes are near to
and overhang the margin.
The median line of the cross areo-
lation is elevated into a wedge-shaped
ridge which overhangs the notch in a
vertical view; the transverse extrem-
ities of the cross are elevated forming
tubercles; the lateral areolations are
protuberant and are separated by a
deep depression which unites with the
depression in front of the postce-
phalic lobe and the one behind the
cross, altogether forming a B-shaped
depression. The elevated portions of
Fig. 11. Synidotea picta
Benedict. x }.
the head are pitted. The flagellum of the antennz is composed of
eight or nine segments. From the anterior angles the body widens
to the fourth segment; from this point it diminishes evenly in size
to the end of the abdomen. All of the segments have low swellings
on the median line and numerous rugosities on the sides. The ex-
tremity of the abdomen is pointed; the surface is punctate.
This species is beautifully colored; the
Fig. 12. Synidotea picta,
var. x 3.
antennal peduncles are patched with dark,
the anterior margins of the head are in some
specimens blotched with rose; the rugosities
of the thorax are tinged with red, the abdo-
men is blotched with red and dark. In
the more highly colored specimens the lower
portion of the segments are light and red,
except on the fourth which is always dark.
The legs have a patch of dark on each joint.
The length of a large specimen is 14 mm.
The seven type specimens were dredged
at Station 3,600, lat. N. 55° 06’ 00”, lon. W.
163° 28’ 00”, 9 fathoms, in company with S.
nebulosa (No. 20,502, U.S. N. M.).
Variety.—Specimens obtained by Mr. Dall
in Bering Strait (No. 13,311, U.S. N. M.),
402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
and at Cape Lisburne (No. 13,325, U. S. N. M.) and by Lieutenant
Stoney in Norton Sound (No. 13,641, U.S. N. M.), differ from the
types in having a stouter abdomen and a much more solid shell;
they also lack color, not unlikely because of the greater length
of time in alcohol. These specimens come from localities far to the
north of the station where the types were obtained. More material
in a fresh state may show sound lines of demarcation that are not
sufficiently evident in the material at hand.
Synidotea harfordi, new name. Fig. 13.
Idotxa marmorata Harford, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., VII, p. 117, 1877.
The name given by Mr. Harford was preoccupied by Professor
Packard in 1867. (See p. 392).
The front of the head is nearly
straight, the sides are bent abruptly
downward and inward; the eyes are
on the angle thus formed, extending
the range of vision to objects beneath.
The length of the antennz laid off on
the median line reaches from the front
to the middle of the sixth thoracic seg-
ment ; the fifth joint of the peduncle
equals in length the third and fourth
taken together; the flagellum has
twenty-two segments.
The body is widest at the second and
third segments, tapering forward to
the antero-lateral angles of the head ;
its anterior outline is arcuate ; poste- ;
riorly the body tapers to the end ofthe _Fig. 18. Synidotea harfordi
narrow abdomen in nearly straight Benedict, new name. x 33.
lines. The four anterior segments are the longest. The sur-
face of the body is finely punctate under a lens. The median
line of the thorax is dark-colored ; on the second, third and fourth
segments is a light and slightly impressed V-shaped line, the V
opening forward ; on these segments there is also on each side of the
V a diagonally-placed light spot shaped like a half-moon: the sur-
face is elsewhere spotted and blotched with light and dark. The
specimen is labelled ‘ Magdalena Bay, L. C., W. J. Fisher.’
Length 16.5 mm., breadth 5 mm,
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403
Synidotea hirtipes (Milne-Edwards).
Idotea hirtipes Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. des Crust., III, p. 134, 1840.
Krauss, Die Sudafrikan. Crust., p. 61, 1843.
Edotia hirtipes Miers, Jour. Linn. Soc. Lond., XVI, p. 68, 1883.
Miers’ description of Milne-Edwards’ type is as follows:
“Tn this species the body is somewhat ovate, moderately convex,
arcuated on the sides, evenly granulated above, with large inequal-
ities on the sides of the thoracic segments at some distance from the
lateral margins. Head with the anterior margin very slightly ex-
cavated, and with a semicircular curved impressed line posterior to
its frontal margin, and another, nearly straight line near its posterior
margin ; its antero-lateral angles prominent and nearly right angles.
The first three thoracic segments with an impressed curved line in
the middle of the dorsal surface, and rounded at their postero-lateral
angles; in none of the segments are these angles prolonged back-
ward. Postabdomen short, rounded posteriorly, with a fissure on
each side at its base, and with a small and shallow median emargina-
tion at its distal end. Eyes large. Antennules reaching nearly to
the end of the penultimate joint of the antenne, with their basal
joints very small. Terminal joint of the peduncle of the antennze
longer than the preceding; flagellum with about 14-21 joints. Legs
long, slender, hairy, aud terminating in a long claw. Terminal
plates of the opercular valves irregularly four-sided, being much
narrowed at the distal end. Length of the largest specimen nearly
1 inch (25 mm.), breadth nearly 7: inch (10 mm.).”
Localities, Cape of Good Hope (Types); Simon’s Bay, South
Africa, in 4-7 fathoms.
Synidotea levidorsalis (Miers).
Edotia hirtipes, var. levidorsalis Miers, Jour. Linn. Soc. Lond., X VI, p. 69,
pl. II, figs. 1, 2, 1883.
Miers says of this species “ Two males are in the collection of the
Museum from Jatiyama Bay, Japan, obtained at a depth of 63
fathoms, lat. 39° 2’ N., long. 189° 50’ E., presented by Dr. J. Gwyn
Jeffreys and collected by Capt. H. C. St. John, R. N., that differ
so slightly from I. hirtipes that I cannot regard them as specifically
distinct. The body is quite smooth in the larger example, and very
nearly so in the smaller (which is of larger size than any specimen
of the typical I. hirtipes that I have seen), and in both is of a
decidedly narrower-oval form ; the antero-lateral angles of the head
404 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
are perhaps not so prominent and more rounded; the eyes are
smaller. Length of the largest example about 1 inch, 1 line
(28 millim.) ; breadth about +: inch (10 millim.). In this specimen
the flagellum of the antennee is about 30-jointed, but in the smaller
example (length ? inch, 21 millim.) only about 21-jointed.”
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 405
GEOLOGICAL SECTION FROM MOSCOW TO SIBERIA AND RETURN.
BY Dr. PERSIFOR FRAZER.
The accompanying notes were made during the excursion to the
Ourals which was arranged by the local committee for a certain
number of Geologists before the business session of the Seventh
International Geological Congress at St. Petersburg. In addition
to the complete preparations for the expedition, carefully edited
brochures of its different parts were printed by those Russian
geologists who had devoted especial study to the districts. So far
as the excursionists were concerned the section was necessarily one
of inspection and verification of what had been done, rather than
one of exploration for the establishment of new facts, and con-
sequently, in a description like the following, the data secured in
the years of long and patient investigation by the Geological Survey
of Russia have been used so far as this epitome required them.
The lessons learned by the numerous, long and well planned
excursions made in connection with the Congress, begin appropriately
with the study of Moscow and its environs, for here many of the
geological stages which form the-most important points of orienta-
tion in the study of south-eastern and middle Russia are well
developed and have been thoroughly investigated by numerous
geologists.
In general terms Moscow is a city of very large area occupying
a number of hills from 400 to 500 ft. above the average water level,
which latter, at the southern boundary, is 348 ft. above the ocean.
The hills are cut out of the boulder clay and morainic sand, the
Cretacic, the Jura-Cretacic, (or Volgian), and the Jurassic down to
-the middle Carbonic (or Muscovian), on which the latter rests; by
the Moskowa, the Yaouza, the Néglinnaia and their little tributaries,
The lowest Mesozoic rocks overlying the Carbonic are of Middle
Callovian age, and in the eastern part, of the government of
Moscow they rest on the upper Carbonic rocks, chemically more
altered than the Muscovian which form “the rocky base on which
the ancient capital is built.” [See Livret Guide, I.]. Borings
undertaken to find artesian water in the Devonic have revealed
27
406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
the following measured section from the summit of one of the hills
473 ft. above water level.
Feet.
Argilo-arenaceous Quaternary and Mesozoic, . . . . 70
Middle Carbonic (Muscovian) limestones, . . . . . . 992
Lower Carbonic limestones,. . . . . 243
Coal bearing Argilo-arenaceous stage of the same hone 161
Devonic limestones and Marls, ........ .« 439
Total, co ge su wees co ey, so: oer
The bottom of the bore hole was left in the horizon last mentioned.
Briefly stated the middle Carbonic or Muscovian of the vicinity
of Moscow is typical of this stage, containing many fossil forms of
which half are identical with those found in lower beds of the
Carbonic of western Europe, while others have been found for the
first time in the Muscovian.
The Jurassic fauna is practically in perfect accord with that of
western Europe, except that the Sequanian is not suspectible of
differentiation and the Kimmeridgian is petrographically and
stratigraphically confounded with the overlying Volgian.
On the question of the Volgian appears the first of several sub-
jects of debate among the Russian geologists. The author of the
brochure (L. G., I.) M. Nikitin thus defines the Volgian to which
he gave the name :— :
“The Volgian comprises all those deposits in central and northern
Russia which are found between the beds of the Kimmeridgian of
Hoplites eudoxus and those of the middle Neocomian, lower part of
the upper Neocomian (Hauterivian) stage containing Olcostephanus
versicolor.” The author, while admitting the possibility that in many
parts of Russia where the Volgian is represented by only a portion
of its beds, the explanation may be found in the non-deposition or
subsequent erosion of the missing parts, inclines to the opinion that
so far as the vicinity of Moscow is concerned the apparent absence of
Kimmeridgian is caused by the insufficient preservation of fossils,
while the absence of the upper Volgian and of the middle Neo-
comian is to be attributed to the first two mentioned reasons.
These measures have been principally studied by Nikitin, Bogos-
lovsky and Pavlov of the University of Moscow.
Nikitin thinks that the Volgian group possesses a type of its own
not recognized in the classification and terminologies of western
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 407
Europe, and prefers not to attempt its division between the upper
Jurassic and the lower Cretacic until a great deal more work has
been accomplished. Bogoslovsky terminates the upper Volgian at
the horizon Olcostephanus nodiger which he considers the upper-
most limit of Jurassic as that of Hoplites Rjasanensis is of the
Neocomian and the bed Ole. polyptychus and Ole. hoplitoides the
principal lower bed of the Neocomian.
Pavlov, while accepting the succession of the others, classes the
entire Volgian group with the Jurassic, adding also a part of the
Neocomian of western Europe.
With this preliminary glance at the formations in the vicinity
of Moscow, we were prepared to enter upon the first of the great
excursions, or that to the Ourals. The start was S. E. down the
Moskwa on the Moscow-Riazan Railway, which runs over the lower
arenaceous member of the boulder clay or the eluvion which was
laid down upon it after the erosion of the morainie upper part. To
Bykowa the cuts and pits show white stratified sands belonging to
the upper Volgian. S. E. of Lioubertzy the surface of the hills is
said to be formed of sands and sandstones, partially modified to
quartzite containing ammonites typical of the zone of Olcostephanus
nodiger and Oxynoticeras subclypeiforme. The lower Volgian is
found at Miatchkowo resting on gray and black stratified clays
with intercalations of dark brown argillaceous, combustible schists,
28 to 33 ft. in thickness, corresponding in general to the Oxfordian
and Sequanian. M. Nikitin was led to conclude from a study of
this series that at least in central Russia there exists an intimate
connection between the beds of Cardioceras cordatum and those of
C. alternans, which appears not only in the continuation of the
greater part of the conchifers and gasteropods from one horizon to
the other, but also in the gradual change and passage of some forms
of ammonites and other species [L. G., II.].. This conclusion is of
the greatest importance to the student of the Jurassic in Central
Russia.
Pursuing the route through the government of Riazan along the
river Pronia, the lower Volgian and upper Jurassic representatives
are seen to disappear so that the horizon Hoplites Rjasanensis rests
successively, first on the Oxfordian and later, near the town of
Skopine, on the Callovian. The Carbonic limestones also show
gradually descending outcrops from the lower stages of the Mus-
covian, through the different levels of the lower limestones of
408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Productus giganteus and finally to the lower coal in the neighbor-
hood of Riajsk and Skopine. The quaternary boulder clay of
this region contains large blocks of crystalline and quartzitic rocks
from Finland. All these quaternary deposits of this region are
covered by a dark brown or black soil, which the Russian investi-
gators agree to divide into two classes. 1st. the “tschernozem ”
properly so-called, which is dark brown or black, 0°5 meter or
more in thickness, rich in humus, lime and zeolites, formed in
place by the alteration of various superficial deposits, ete.
2. Forest earth, also dark brown or black, but of different physico-
chemical constitution.
It may be true, however, that the tschernozem of the steppes
when covered by forests is gradually transformed into forest earth.
These two kinds of soil and the resulting steppe and forest alter-
nate in the region between the Pronia and the Volga. The line
of route from Riajsk through Pensa to the neighborhood of Syzran
follows the great trans-Siberian railway over upper Cretacic and
lower Tertiary steppes of moderate glacial interest, and considerable
monotony, but at the latter place there is an abrupt change.
About 760 km. from Moscow by railway, or 1,400 km. from the
head-waters of the Volga not far from St. Petersburg, a sudden
change in the landscape and surroundings on close approach to the
great river indicates that some special forces have been at work in
this neighborhood. In the first place, the Volga, after pursuing a
generally south direction from Kazan, abruptly turns to the east
for about sixty kilometers while skirting the north flank of the
Jegouli Mountains, but here breaking through them perpendicular to
the axis of their prolongation, and leaving a large enough mass on
the left bank to act as one of the two posts of the gates of Samara, it
returns in a direction parallel and opposite to that by which it had
come, and finally resumes its southerly course with some slight westing
toward the Caspian Sea, distant about 1,000 kilometers. It appears
that a gentle anticlinal, with an axis running northerly, and reeog-
nized further to the north in the tilted Permian limestones of the
right bank of the Volga, has suffered a local dislocation resulting
in a fault cutting through it almost at right angles, and bent in the
west flank. The fault passes along the north side of the peninsula,
which is called Samarskaia Louka, after the large city opposite its
extreme point. Both sides of this fault-line the measures dip
S.S.E., but the north side has been depressed, while that to the south
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 409
has been elevated. In the depression of the river Syzran the depos-
its of the Caspian have been laid down. Following the Syzran River
down stream over its easterly course to join the Volga, one sees to the
south of the fault the successive appearance of ever older measures,
from the upper through the lower Cretacic, the Volgian, the Callo-
vian, and, finally, near the town of Syzran, the upper Carbonic.
The railway runs along the heights commanding the town of Syzran,
which consist of Jurassic and Volgian, but as soon as it has passed
that town it descends and runs along the right bank of the Volga,
on the terrace of these formations resting on the Carbonic limestone,
to the village of Batraki, south of the Samarskaia Louka. Thence
a short distance down the Volga (+- 15 km.) one reaches Kashpour.
On the hill of this name one sees in succession downward from the
top various horizons of the Cretacic, the Volgian, and finally the
river deposits. Above Batraki, a less distance, one comes to the
great bridge of the trans-Siberian railway across the Volga, 1,485
meters long, on twelve piers, and estimated at 150 ft. above the
river. At the abutments the Carbonic deposits are compact lime-
stones more or less dolomitic, containing Fusulina and saturated
with asphalt as at Syzran.
The orographic feature of the approach to Syzran is the eleva-
tion caused by the fault passing north of the Samarskaia Louka,
at the great bend of the Volga. The part of this elevation
at and west of Syzran is called the Syzran Mountains, that of
the nucleus of the peninsula the Jegouli, and on the opposite or
left bank of the river, the Mountains of Sok. The main mass of
these mountains is composed of Permian-measures ; but in the neigh-
borhood of Samara, as at Samarskaia Louka, deposits with shells of
Cardium, Corbicula and Hydrobia give the impression that these
are the remains of the the Caspian basin. The terrace clays are
distinctly laid on the Permian, but the Caspian sediments which are
only of insignificant thickness, are found in detached islands, and
may be seen far up on the heights of the Volga throughout the
whole course from Kashpour. The upper beds of the Permian at
Samara are compact limestones with intercalations and masses of
gypsum and silex, which have made the construction of the railroad
bed very difficult in places on account of the tendency to landslides.
The lower Permian beds, oolitic in places, are rich in lamellibranchs,
gasteropods and brachyopods characteristic of the Permian.
410 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Below, there is a cavernous brecciform limestone formed of
fragments of limestone cemented together by calcareous matter, but
without fossils. It is about 83 feet thick, occurs about 4 kilom. up
the Volga from Samara, and forms a large part of the upper part of
the Mountains of Sok. Some kilometers before reaching the con-
fluence of the Volga and Sok the Carbonic limestone shows itself
beneath the brecciated limestone in the sandy beds as in the moun-
tains of Jegouli. The upper horizon shows Schwagerina limestone.
Separated from the Sok Mountains by the valley of that name is the
mountain or hill called Tzarev-Kourgan (Hill of the Tsar). It
shows in descending order from the top: Limestone with Fusulina
longissima and other Fusulinas, Spiriferina Tarane, and Productus
Villiersi.
(d) Limestone with Bellerophon, large, as yet undetermined
Spirifers, Nautilus, Orthoceras.
(¢) Dolomites with Productus Cora.
(6) Limestone of Productus scabriculus, Camarophoria crumena,
Meekella eximia.
(a) Limestone of corals and bryozoans.
The Hill of the Tsar is thus formed by the same limestones as
those constituting the greater part of the Jegouli, and like that of
the fauna of gshélien age near Moscow.
The long distance from Samara to Oufa over the trans-Volgian
steppes is over the Permo-Trias and the Permian. The modelling
of the country is so strikingly like that of the bad lands of South
Dakota and other parts of the western United States that no one
who had seen both could fail to be struck by the resemblance. The
geology would seem to be of the simplest, viz.: the very gradual
succession of continually lower horizons from the Volga to the
Ourals.
But we come unexpectedly here upon another burning question
which divides the geologists of the official survey and others from
Stuckenburg, Kratov, Netchatev, Amalitzky and still others. The
Geological Survey sees in these beds which it marks P T., and which
lie between the Permian and Trias, a series of transitional deposits
not closely analogous to those in similar horizons in central Europe,
and proposes for them provisionally the name Tartarian. The
opponents of this view class all the upper beds of the iridescent
marls as Permian. The Russian Survey recognizes two series of
red and iridescent rocks. The first it calls the Tartarian, which
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 411
caps the beds of Zechstein fauna, and the other lies below the Zech-
stein, corresponding in part with its lowest horizons.
As approach is made to Oufa one after the other of the dis-
tinguishing beds in the two formations rises slowly and loses itself
farther east on the tops of the nearest hills. The gray group of
schistose limestone and marls intercalated with friable sandstone
marking next to the uppermost member of the Permian, recognized
by the Russian Survey, shows itself for the last time on the summit
of Yarych-Taou, the last of the conical mountains of erosion along
the Dioma. ‘The appearance of a red group in the sections near
Oufa has caused many geologists to ascribe this horizon to the
Tartarian, which the geologists of the survey hold tu be an error,
maintaining that the ravines and sections establish beyond doubt
that the measures increase in age as one goes eastward.
Oufa may be properly said to lie on the line which marks the
foot of the Ourals, because at about this distance from the axis of the
Oural chain the streams having broken through the west flanking
foot hills of the main chain take the final courses to fulfil their
ultimate destiny of irrigating and fructifying the trans-Volgian
steppes.
The Permian plateau on which Oufa stands is cut by three
rivers: the Oufa, the Sim, and the Biéleia, into three elevated
plateaux separated by deep and rich valleys. The immediate neigh-
borhood of Oufa has not furnished distinctive fossils, but the sections
along the Biéleia and its aflluents have convinced the geological
surveyors that the upper part of the section at Oufa corresponds
with the lower Permian red bed which is capped by the gray arena-
ceous Zechstein bed, richly furnished with fossils that can be seen in
the sections of Slak, the mountains Yarych-Taou, ete., between
Samara and Oufa. The lower gypsiferous and calco-gypsiferous bed
at the base of the Oufa section can be seen to have intimate relations
with the gray, compact, tile-like limestones, and dolomites, and the
cavernous, spotted brecciform limestones containing many casts of
Bellerophon, remains of Productus and Orthoceras, accompanied by
Schizodus truncatus, Astarte Permo-Carbonico, Macrodium kingia-
num, and corresponds to the lower Zechstein of southern and central
Russia, situated below the lowest bed of Permian red. [See L. G.,
Iif.]
As an aid in understanding the orography of the western half of
the Ourals (from which the eastern half is entirely different) let it be
412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
borne in mind that the westward flowing streams usually have their
origin in extensive marshes and bogs lying in the elevated parts of
the longitudinal valleys, and covering many square wersts' or kilo-
meters. The first part of their course, or that more or less on the
line of the meridian north or south, is usually rapid and tumultuous.
In their middle course they take a sudden change in a direction at
right angles to their final course and descending with the same
rapidity cut through gorges ten wersts or so in length with abrupt
and sometimes vertical walls 100 meters and more in height.
Having passed the westernmost rocky barrier the rivers flow
sluggishly through large alluvial valleys in which rock in place is
rarely seen, and the affluents of the larger streams are few and small.
These valleys are filled with the remains of ancient river and lake
beds, and show distinctly alluvial terraces.
Having brought the section to the lower Permian spotted lime-
stones and dolomites the further journey east reveals a series to
which the name Permo-Carbonic has been given.’
This band separating the two groups is divided into an upper or
calcareo-dolomitic, and a lower member called the horizon of Artinsk.
This latter contains sandstones, limestones, marls and various
schists. Karpinsky, Kratow and Tschernischew have shown that
it is characterized by original ammonitides of great interest since
the discovery of similar forms at Darvas in Sicily, in Texas, and
other places. It contains brachiopods also, of which the study has
established the connection of the different subdivisions of the Pro-
ductus limestone of the salt range with the paleozoic deposits of the
Oural.
The Carbonic of the South Oural consists exclusively of three
sections of limestones each, and especially the uppermost, character-
ized by an abundant fauna.
The Devonic is also represented here in all of its three sections,
of which the lower is much the most interesting, both because to it
is attributed the rocks forming the highest chains of the Ourals, and
because it is therefore the real crux in the geology of these mountains
which is destined to give rise to a voluminous literature, and remain
a moot point among geologists for many years to come. The middle
division of the Devonic is also of interest as frequently containing a
1 Eleven kilometers are reckoned equal to ten wersts.
2 It would have been more in conformity with usuge had the name been
Carbono-Permian.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415
development of its limestones and marls in innumerable swellings or
lumps of various sizes from a few inches to a few feet in diameter,
which on examination prove to consist either of concentric cabbage-
like layers, or of irregular foliations like the bent leaves of a book.
The immensely important conditions which follow from the
acceptation of the Russian Survey’s determination of the relations
of the rocks forming the Oural-Taou, or main chain of the Oural,
makes it desirable to consider it a little more attentively.
The Oural-Taou, or main chain, and water-divide of those moun-
tains is formed of crystalline schistose rocks, which are in intimate
connection with deposits of indisputable paleozoic age, and which
themselves are nothing but modified paleozoic rocks, This is the
‘terse summing up of the thesis [L. G., III, 12], and the argument is
contained in the ideal section (ib., p. 11), in which the lower Devonic
member is shown to be a quartzite lying in a synclinal between
schists and limestones above and below; and the lower of these lime-
stones is stated to contain no fossils by which its age can be definitely
ascertained in the northern Oural region. But in the South Ourals it
contains an extensive fauna described by Tschernischew.
Section trom the Ligaloa to the Avniar
(from lLivret Guide ID. pu)
Fie. 1,
Dj? Limestone. Upper stage of the Lower Devonic.
Dj} g Quartzose sandstone and schists.
Di c Limestones.
M Metamorphic schists and quartzites.
The section representing the views of the Russian Geological
Survey as to the structure of the Oural chain is seen in L. G., III,
p. 11, and is thus described by M. Tschernischew :—
“The most instructive section of the lower Devonic of the south
Ourals extends south of the line of railway, from the chain of
414 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Zigalga to Avniar transversely to the direction of the Zigalga and
of the Bakti and crossing the rivers Yourezan, Avniar, and Biéleia.
This section shows the principal mass of the bed of quartzose sand-
stone Di g between two schistose beds of which the lower rests
directly on the oldest limestones Di ¢ of characteristic fauna. The
predominant rock of the lower schistose hed is a black sericitic
schist reflecting on its steel-gray surface, sometimes a silky lustre.
Quite often is observed the passage of these schists into micaceous
and chloritice varieties, very rich in magnetite and hematite. Taking
up quartz these schists pass into micaceous and talcose quartzites.
In places the black argillaceous schist shows inclusions of large
pyrite crystals, and pseudomorphs of pyrite in limonite.”
‘This black schist is associated in the lower part of the bed D} e
with a serecitic schist nearly of the same composition as the black,
but poorer in carbonaceous matter and consequently of a lighter
shade.’
‘After a certain amount of practice it is easy to distinguish the
lower schists, situated under the horizon of quartzites and sandstones,
from the schists which surmount this horizon. The latter of very
variable color, structure, and composition never have this reflexion
on the plane surface but they pass also, though very rarely, and in
exceptional cases, into chloritic and ottrelitic schists. Their color,
sometimes banded, varies between dark gray almost black, yellowish,
greenish, and reddish gray. Marly sandstone, marls, and limestones
occupy a second rank in the bed Dj g.’
‘A series of rocks Di g separates, as we have said, two beds of
limestone essentially different from a paleontological point of view.
The upper limestones D{ g of which the type is developed in the
Yourézan valley encloses subordinate beds of argillaceous schists
and marly sandstones. Their paleontological character is described
in the paper, ‘ Die Fauna des unteren Devon am Westabhange des
Ural,’ by Th. Tschernischew. This horizon is especially character-
istic by its abundance of Leperditia Barboti, small trilobites of the
genus Cyphaspis, Pentamerus fasciculatus, Pentamerus baschkiricus,
remains of conchifers Conocardium crenatum, Buchiola sexcostata
and other forms.’
‘The lower limestones D1 ¢ capped by the bed Dj g and often
found between metamorphic rocks (as in the upper course of the
Biéleia), are distinguished by their lighter tints, and a marble
structure. Their fauna described in the above work by Tschernis-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415
chew is distinguished by a great variety of forms; 7. ¢., numerous
remains of ostracodes, cephalopods, Platyceras, representatives of
Hercynella (H. bohemica), and peculiar conchifers ( Viasta Dalila).”
In the section this limestone apparently rests conformably on the
group “M” of metamorphic schists and quartzites, which is thus
assumed to be of lower Devonic origin.
The lower division of the Devonic is thus described (1. ¢., 10):
“Tt has great petrographic diversity. The varieties most devel-
oped include quartzose sandstone without feldspar, arkoses and
conglomerates. These are the rocks that form the ridges of the most
cousiderable parallel chains of the South Oural. In the eastern
summits is observed a gradual transition from sandstone, arkoses
and conglomerates, to compact quartzites, charged more or less with
mica. The lower schist is a black sericitic schist, giving a steel gray
sometimes silky reflexion on the surface. Frequently the passage
of these schists to micaceous and chloritic varieties, very rich in
magnetite and iron oxide, can be observed. Taking up quartz these
schists pass into micaceous and talcose quartzites. In places the
black argillaceous schist shows inclusions of large crystals of pyrite
and pseudomorphs of pyrite in limonite. his black schist is asso”
ciated in the lower part of the bed Dig with a sericitic schist
nearly of the same composition as the black, but poorer iv carbona-
ceous matter, and therefore of lighter color.’”*
“The rock most largely developed in the underlying group M
is a mica schist composed of quartz and mica, to which is ordinarily
joined a greater or less quantity of chlorite and magnetite. The
element of greatest interest in these mica schists, and chloritic mica
schists, is the orthose, which occurs in irregular and often broken
fragments. Very often these are enclosed in grains of quartz or
mica. Indications of the substitution of quartz and mica abound in
the cleavage of these orthoses. Tourmaline, and in the neighbor-
hood of Slatooust, garnets and staurotide are the most frequent in-
clusions in the mica schists.”
“ Besides these schists the crystalline region comprises M a series of
argillo-schistose rocks which show the transition of typical phyllites
into the clastic argillaceous schists of the lower Devonic. The
massive rocks of M are represented only by granites and diabases.
Among the granites can be distinguished the gneisso-granites and the
coarsely crystalline porphyritic granites resembling what is called
Rappakiwi from Finland, which is much used for building, and forms
~ 8 See preceding page.
416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
the pillars of St. Isaak’s as well as the parapet of the Neva within the
city of St. Petersburg.
Such is the veriest skeleton outline of the facts of structure
stated by M. Tschernischew in L. G., III, and which he illustrated
by the nine days of excursions between Oufa and the crest or
median line of the Ourals. A point of the greatest interest, but
connected with the structure at the uppermost extremity of the
scale must not be forgotten for it constitutes a lesson of the trip
second in importance to no other. It is in effect that the ex-
plorations of the river terraces of the Biélaia leave no doubt of
the relations between the upper terraces and the post pliocene
deposits of the Caspian sea invasion. The conclusion is that these
upper terraces belong to an epoch, when the Caspian Sea played the
part of a dyke which brought about the raising of the level of the
Kama, the Biéleia and their affluents with the consequent decrease
of the rapidity of their currents and therefore of their erosive force.
In proportion to the retreat of the Caspian sea, the erosive power
of the rivers must haye augmented, from which resulted the narrow-
ing and deepening of these beds and the formation of terraces.
‘This latitude is about that of the northernmost deposits, attributed to
the former Caspian Sea, (57° North), while the southernmost similar
formation ascribed to the action of the White or Northern Sea lies
approximately on lat. 61° North, leaving 4° or about 440 kilo-
meters (273 miles) in which the traces of neither sea have been
found, but in their places the evidences of lacustrian remains filling
the gap.
The route from Oufa was along the post pliocene terrace of
the River Sim, to the upper Carbonic limestone mountain, Kyssy-
Taou, containing Sehwagerina, while on the left were the lower
Permo-Carbonic deposits of Artinsk. Descending the mountain
again to the terrace, this latter is followed to the station Ascha.
Proceeding in general northeast beyond this the course is over
upper Carbonic limestones. Just before reaching the mouth
of the river Karagai-Elga, this formation suddenly gives place to
the middle Devonie across a fault, visible on both banks of the
Sim. A little below the confluence of the Chalcow and the Sim,
one sees the cabbage structure of the upper division of the lower
Devonic. Near the mouth of the Biarda the superposition of Dz on
2 isseen. Miniar is soon reached lying at the foot of a series of
picturesque hills formed of D2. The next undertaking was the
~~
erp,
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. AIT
examination of the rocks from Miniar to Simskaia. The cliffs
were made up (counting from the base) of lower Devonic lime-
stones (D;), the limestones and dolomites (D2), the Snirifer
Archiaci limestones (D,), and the lower Carbonic limestones C,.
Below the Miniar works the D3, limestones show in places the
cabbage structure. About the mouth of the Kalosleika the lower
Carbonic limestones crop out containing an abundance of forameni-
fera, (Hudothyra parva, Fusulinella Struvii, Archediseus Karreri,
and fragments of Productus striatus and Chonetes papilionacea.)
The borders of the lake of Simsk offer a classical section for the
study of the deposits of Artinsk, and Carbonic sediments.
The journey was continued up the valley of the Eralka and down
the valley of the river Berdiach, still in the deposits of Artinsk.
At the (Baschkir) village of Yakhia the Carbonic limestones are ,
again met.
These show themselves all along the route to Oust-Kataw, where
the fossil remains are very abundant.
Between Oust-Kataw and Wiazowaia the same Devonic series
is several times repeated. At Wiazowaia the railway was left
and a section was made in droschkes to the mines of Bakal.
The succession D, D’, D2, is thrice repeated between Wiazowaia
and the village of Perwoukhina the highest crests being formed
of the first named bed, which, two faults successively raise. It is
in these three mountains Chouida, Irkouskan and Boulandikha, (all
of lower Devonic), that the very rich iron ores of Bakal are found.
They have been worked for a century and a half but as yet and
for a long time in the future the work has been and will be done in
open cuts. The variegated quartzites and quartzose schists are cut
by dykes and massives of diabase.
The mineral masses of Hematite and Siderite are exclusively found
in the middle member of the above series or the variegated schists
where they are sometimes 40 meters and more in thickness. Besides
this the minerals show themselves sometimes in pockets. A glance
is sufficient to show the intimate connection between the dolomitic
limestones and the mineral deposits. One can follow step by step
the transition of the limestones into spathic iron and that into
hematite. When the mines were first exploited only Hematite was
found at a short distance from the surface, since then in proportion
to the depth of the workings spathic iron has been found with
passage into dolomitic limestone. The mines of Bakal and Satkinsk
418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
were examined and the return to the railway was made at the
station Souleia over Devonic measures.
From Souleia to Slatooust the upper divison of lower Devonic
D} is passed over as well as D}. Near the station Berdiaouch the
dolomites Dz are seen with thick dykes of porphyroid granite
intercalated among them and resembling the Finland Rappakiwi.
Between Berdiaouch and Toundouch the line pursues the horizon
of the Devonic limestones and dolomites, showing frequently the
foliated structure below described.
Finally a complex succession of rocks begins at the village of
Medwediova containing limestones, schists and argillaceous and
sericitic sandstones, mica schists, diabases, amphibolites and gneiss,
all thrown into folds of high dip and penetrated by faults. The
mutual relations of the massive rocks, crystalline schists and the
quartzites of Ourenga and Kossotour are clearly seen in the sections
near Slatooust. This town lies in a picturesque valley of the river Ai.
The Kossotour and Ourenga heights whieh border it, on the north
and south respectively are similarly composed and are parts of the
same orographic unit.
Under the leadership of Mr. Tscherneschew, Kossotour was
reached by a brisk walk through the woods from the station of
Slatooust and sections were made along the river Ai, showing coarse
grained mica schists and amphibolite, containing large Garnets,
diabase, garnetiferous mica schists, diabase, mica schists, massive
diabase containing an abundance of secondary products and strongly
altered, mica schist of Biotite, Muscovite, Quartz, and Epidotes,
enclosing large Garnets; diabase, mica schists with Almandine;
amphibolite more or less schistose, and mica schists with small
garnets.
A section in the railway cut near the station from southwest to
northeast, showed a series of mica schists dipping + southeast—65°.
There are many inclusions of milk quartz and the bedding becomes
thicker to the north-east, after the first 100 ft., but the general
character of the rocks is comparatively uniform and resembles that
of some American rocks, called by the late Dr. Hunt “ Taconic.”
About 200 ft. from the commencement of the section is a mass
of quartzite and further to the north-east again mica schists,
followed by garnetiferous schist, the Garnets being large and
round. To these succeed more mica schists, intercalated among
which appeared other small outcrops of quartzite. The railway
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419
cut is about 400 ft. long with two sigmoid curves. One hundred and
fifty feet from the northeast end a very much decomposed grayish
layer occurs containing Garnets, some of them flattened on the planes
of bedding. About 74 ft. from the northeast extremity a mass of
white quartz occupies a large space and penetrates to the surface
of the cut above, embedded in the mica schist. Another mass of
white quartz strikes across the railway, south 20° west, mica schists
follow this to the end of the cutting.
The next object of study was the Bolchoi Taganai (or Great
Taganai). There are three mountains called Taganai, viz: Bolchoi
(or great), Srédny (or medium) and Maly (or small) north of Sla-
tooust, which are connected together and with the Oural-Taou or main
chain and water-divide by high plateaux. They are separated from
the north flank of Kossotour by the valley of the river Bolchaia-
Tessma.
All of these heights are composed similarly of a quartzite summit
overlying a friable sandstone with kaolinized Feldspar, and this
latter resting on garnetiferous mica schist with subordinated lime-
stones. The dips being to the north-west, faults with a southeast
hade repeat this succession, three times, the easternmost repetition,
being the lowest but the most extensively developed and formed by
the chain Oural-Taou. On the east side the heights are abrupt
precipices, but on the west they are gently inclined and accessible.
The river Kiolim, which traverses the Ourals and forms part of the
Siberian river system, descends this divide to the north, the river
Tessma an affluent of the Si, taking its course to the south,
where it ultimately joins the waters of the Caspian Sea. At the
base of the Bolchoi-Taganai (called Otkliknoi) occur outcrops of
diabases. The words of M. Tschernischew are herewith repeated.
“ The detailed study of our section demonstrates that all the Taganais
show the same succession of rocks rent by a series of faults. It is
equally beyond doubt that the quartzites of the Taganais correspond
completely with the quartzites and sandstones of the lower Devonic that
we have already encountered on our trip to the mines of Bakal and
environs. It results indubitably that the metamorphic rocks which
support the quartzites of the Taganais are the same clastic modified
rocks of the lower Devonic developed in the more western parts of the
Ourals.”
A study was made of the but little altered Deyonic measures near
the works of Koussinsk where there is an outcrop of dolomitic lime-
420 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
stone dipping to the southeast and constituting the “ mountain”
Silitour. In the neighborhood of Koussinsk also are interesting
examples of the limestones with the foliated bosses often heretofore
referred to. These limestones belong to the middle Devonic
(horizons Dib with Spirifer Anossofi, and D?a with Pentamerus
bashkiricus).
On July 30-(August 11), the train was run back from Slatooust
on the road some 20 kilometers to the “platform” (flag station) Kous-
sinskaja, and the excursionists were taken in droschkes twelve wersts
south to an exploitation of a mine called Schichimskaja Gora. This
was simply a cut in the face of the hill of 100 feet or more in width,
exposing tale and chlorite slate cut by porphyritic diorite. Many
minerals occur at this contact, which may be found described in
L.G.IV,3-+. Returning to the platform, we started after breakfast
to the town and smelting works 14 wersts north of Koussinsk, where
the pretty iron ornaments sold in Slatooust are made. The start was
up a long ascent of the mountain Lipowaia. At a considerable hill
called Silitour, just outside of the town, our examination was made ~
of a contact between diabase and the lowest member of the middle
Devonic limestone, where M. Tschernischew maintains there is
alteration at only one of the two contact planes.
The ascent of the water-divide of the Oural, was accomplished in
the train by crossing the Tessma and turning south, where a series
of iron ore mines lying between the metamorphic rocks and the
dolomitie limestones is passed. The mines are mostly abandoned.
The limestones cover stratified deposits of hematite. The rocks are
much dislocated, but maintain a general direction of N. 30° E. The
dolomitic limestones correspond to limestones Dj ¢ of the upper part
of the Biélaia and the mines of Bakal. On the east of the railroad
the mica schists are cut by granites. In the two great zigzags made
by the railroad in mounting the height, it traverses a development
of garnet rocks analogous to those seen at Slatooust (Kossotour and
Ourenga).
About 38 wersts from Ourjum station, which is almost on the
divide, in the rocky crest of Alexandrovskaia Sopka, composed of
the same quartzites, as those of the Bolchoi-Taganai, the highly
inclined beds dip toward the European side of the Ourals. The
Asiatic side is covered with detritus and blocks.
We have now arrived at the divide and seen all the rocky series
which are displayed on its west side. These series starting from
‘
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 421
Oufa may be resumed in the letters employed by the Russian Survey,
as Permian (P), Permo-Carbonic (PC), Carbonic (C), Devoniec (D),
and finally the material which constitutes the divide called M, and
thought by the official geologists to be metamorphosed Devonie.
It is supposed that the upper and lower black schists are part of
tg and that Dic and D} are conformable with them. The
demonstration turns upon this. Beneath Dj c¢ come the schists
and quartzites marked metamorphic. It does not clearly appear
how the limestones are superposed on it, but unless M be altered
Devonie, this is of minor importance. No one would dream of
calling in question the accuracy of the Russian geologists who have
proposed this structure, without weeks or months of hard and
patient labor in the field. Todo so would be to show an unpardon-
able ignorance of the difficulties of the problem and a poor recogni-
tion of the accurate work which these gentlemen have accomplished.
But they will not consider it disrespectful if some of their recent
guests declare that they are not entirely convinced of the Devonic
character of these quartzites and schists which form the Oural divide.
Only general considerations extenuating this inability to accept the
Russian Survey’s determination as final are here in order. In the
first place the time was not sufficient to observe the contacts M—Dij ¢
and Di c-Dji g, and Dig—Di. The first two of these are nowhere so
explicitly stated in the Livret Guide as to establish the impossibility
of faults. The absence of fossils where these beds were seen deprives
us of much needed light. .Then again the absence of such impor-
tant orographic elements as the entire Siluric, Cambric, and
Archean is very hard to accept, especially after the investigations
of Murchison. The question is one of the highest interest and
importance, and it is hoped that more light may be shed upon it in
the near future.
There is another consideration which it must be confessed aids in
preventing an immediate and unquestioning acceptance of the
Russian structure, although it cannot be dignified by the title of
an argument, and can be mentioned as an analogy only and with
every reserve. Taken, however, together with the other considera-
tions, it is not entirely destitute of weight :—
If we might for the moment leave out of consideration the horizon
of the limestone D} c, and its determination as Devonic we find
petrographically an analogy too strong to be overlooked between
the sequence of the formations from the crystalline eruptives and
28
422 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
massives, and the schistose and calcareous quartzites and sandstones
in other countries and in the Ourals. Of course if it be necessary
to accept the series Di ec as Devonic underlying the quartzite series
Dig, this important quartzite member which is petrographically
and schematically such a striking analogue of the Cambrie (Pots-
dam) or Primal quartzite is lost: but even then the group M is not
proven to be Devonie or even paleozoic by any evidence which it was
possible to present to the participants in such a long and compre-
hensive excursion. The writer does not mean in any way to deny
that evidence exists which establishes the original paleozoic character
of the group M, he only wishes to say that none such was seen by
those fellow members of the excursion of whom he inquired. Of
course long and patient investigation is required to place a critic of
the Russian Survey’s proposed structure in a position to exercise his
office. If, after all, this scheme is to stand, it will add another
feature (and, perhaps, that which caused all the rest) in which the
Oural chain stands out alone among the mountain chains of the
world.
Here then is the greatest of the cruces brought to light by the
labors of the Russian geologists, and laid before their guests at the
recent Congress. It is one which far transcends in interest and
importance the Volgian, Tartarian and Permo-Carbonic questions.
The difference in importance between the problem of such a
structure and that of the permanent taxonomic value of the series
P-C, P-T, Pb (Tartarian), J-Cr (Volgian), Q* (Caspian), or
Cr ’ (Aptian), is that while in these latter cases the sequence is uni-
versally admitted, and the only question is whether the members of
these groups should be ascribed to one of the upper or lower series,
should be divided between them, or in whole or part should stand
alone; the question in the first case is whether three of the great
mountain building systems are entirely wanting in the composition
of the Ourals.
The peculiarity of the Oural chain which most strikes the observer
is that approaching from the western side the divide is reached
before half of the Paleozoic series are crossed, or any of the continent
backbone-making systems have appeared on the surface. From the
end of the first quarter of an ordinary mountain chain crossing, one
looks over the remaining three-quarters, (or where they ought to be)
into the boundless lake-covered steppes of Siberian Asia. But
another surprise is in store for the traveller. Approaching the Ourals
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 423
from the west there is nowhere the bold, rugged landscape that one
sees in the Caucasus or in Switzerland. It is only by looking back
on the steep basset edges of the formations that one realizes the
mountainous character of the region. But starting from Ourjum
to cross the Eur-Asian line, and descending from that line into
Siberia towards Miass the mountainous character is lost altogether.
As M. Karpinsky justly says (L. G., V. 2): “On the east slope
and at a short distance from the axis the region loses almost at once
its mountainous character so completely that, though its geological
structure corresponds with a very complex mountain region, the
greater part of it presents an area so flat that the relief is less
accidented than that of most of the plains of European Russia.”
It is like entering the basement of a house built on the steep side
of a hill and climbing to the roof to find that a broad plain stretches
itself out from that level. This is the first feature to strike the
observer. The second is a corollary of the first, namely the infre-
quency of exposures. The third is the enormous development of
lakes. At least one-third of the surface of these steppes is covered
by water which is supplied from countless bogs and morasses lying
in all positions on the east side of the chain from close up to the
axis to a distance further than the eye could see.* It has been
mentioned that the water courses of the western half in their incep-
tion follow the longitudinal valleys parallel with the axis of the
chain for considerable distances and with considerable rapidity
before breaking through the transverse gorges of about 10 wersts or
kilometers more or less in length to the main water arteries on
the trans-Volgian steppes. The reverse is the case with the Siberian
streams. With a very few exceptions their early course is directly
away from the axis of the chain, and the flow is parallel to circles
of latitude for a very considerable distance. Over this part they
flow sluggishly from and through impassable swamps, showing few
or no outcrops on their banks. ‘The outcrops occur on the com-
paratively elevated country between the water courses.
On the other hand, in their middle course (which the excursion-
ists could not observe) the outcrops of rock in place are reported as
commencing to appear in isolated places, becoming more and more
frequent, and finally uniting in a continuous outcrop. The river is
4 The characteristic features of the water courses to the east are taken from
the Livret Guide, as the course followed by the excursion did not permit the
participants to actually see the second and third divisions here referred to.
424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
shut in a narrow bed with rocky banks that often assume the aspect
of a veritable gorge of 40 m. (131 ft.) and more in height.
The country, which appears ordinarily flat, falls away only in the
neighborhood of the rivers, where it is broken abruptly into rocky
escarpments. The courses of the streams thus display scenery en-
tirely different from the surrounding country. Their lower courses
are said to be distinguished by large, flat, marshy valleys bounded
Dad
bedo
River
.
i eee
Fac LL se LA eth a st as FY — oS ee ee e+
Upper Course
i |
‘
hl tk ot te at cle om TP amen im,
lower Course
( from Livret Guide V pp. 5 &6 )
PIGS 2:
by terraces ordinarily rounded and sometimes cut by ravines.
The river meandering in this valley and approaching sometimes
one and sometimes the other of these terraces, cuts escarpments more
or less deep, sometimes vertical, permitting a view of the tertiary
rocks and alluvial deposits. Here and there one sees the remains
of old river beds called “ staritsa.”
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425
The following is a free rendering of M. Karpinsky’s general de-
scription (L. G. V.): In the most important rivers of the east slope
of the Oural, such as the Toura, Taguil, Nitza, Irbit, Pychma, Isset,
Sinara, Tetch, Miass, Ouwelka, Oui and Togonzak, the lower course
is the most extended. Their western limit coincides almost with
the western limit of the region occupied by the tertiary deposits.
(See the geological map of the eastern slope of the Oural.) The middle
course of these rivers is generally the shortest. The rivers of the
Asiatic system of the Ourals are also less abundant in water than
those of the European system. The vast lake system of western
Asia along the Ourals extends from the very mountain region itself
down to the axis of the divide (as in the case of Lake Itkoul, etc.),
In proportion to the distance from the Oural chain the character
of the lakes changes more and more, and several types united by
those of intermediate character can be recognized. Between the
ramifications of the Ourals and near the boundary between the moun-
tain and plain of the east slope, lakes which form on their borders
islands and rocky promontories in greater or less number are found
scattered far apart in a region constituted essentially by crystalline
rocks. Their contours, predominant directions, and distribution,
depend habitually on the direction of the schistose crystalline rocks
forming the region. In this same direction strings of lakes are
found ordinarily enclosed in a belt formed by the same rocks (see
on map lakes Silatch, Soungoul, Kéréty, Kasli, Irtiach and Bol-
chaia-Nanoga, Miassowo, Terenkoul, little and great Kissiagath,
Yélowoie and Tschébarkoul). All these lakes have considerable
depth even near their shores. Most of them have visible outflows,
and their water is always fresh. The lakes of the steppe remote
from the Ourals have an entirely different character. Their number
is very great, as is the space over which they are distributed, which
extends far to the east.
These latter lakes are found in a region oceupied by horizontally
stratified tertiary deposits. Their forms are simple, and in spite of
their large dimensions they are ordinarily shallow. Near their
margins one often sees terraces of rounded forms, a proof that at one
time they occupied larger spaces. Regularity is observable neither
in the directions of their greatest elongation nor in their grouping.
Almost all of these are without efflux. Many of them contain fresh
water, though in others the water is saline, and in a part of them
salts have been deposited. The salt is predominantly NaCl with
426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
MgSO, and MgCl,. Almost all of these show evidences of gradual
drying up. It is worthy of notice that the salinity of the lakes is
subject to changes of weather and of the seasons.
The eastern limit of the crystalline region characterized by lakes
of type I is separated from the western boundary of the region of
tertiary deposits with the lakes of the steppe by a belt composed
partly of sedimentary and partly of massives and clastics (tuffs). The
lakes of this belt are characterized by certain characters of each of
the foregoing types, 7. e., the simple form, and straight and low
beaches of the steppe lakes and the rocky islets, and correspondence
of the lines of their greatest extension with the strikes of the enclos-
ing rocks which are peculiar to the mountain lakes.
The marshes deserve notice. Some are the beds of old lakes now
covered with vegetation. Sometimes the small lakes are covered
with a mantle of swampy interlacing vegetation. Others are situated
on the belt which divides the rivers, and frequently on the quite
steep slopes of the hills, independently of the marshes in evident
connection with the lakes.
Finally there are regions of salt deposits which characterize the
east slope of the Oural. The thin sheets of salt which appear from
time to time covering even the plants indigenous to saline terraces
with a layer of salt, are developed in the saline lake region, but some
small deposits are found in the western region and quite high up
on the slope. The variation in the distribution of the saline lakes
depends not only on the water infiltrated through the soil, but also
on the wind scattering the pulverized salt into the lakes for longer or
shorter time.
The rocks most frequently encountered on the east slope of the
Ourals are (commencing with the oldest) the lower Devonie (Hercyn.
ian), represented by limestones, and containing a fauna described by
Tschernischew. Among the characteristic fossils are Eutomis pela-
gica, Aristozoe herzinica, Spirifer indiferens, Atrypa reticularis,
A. granulifera, Rhynchonella princeps, Rh. nympha, Pentamerus
galeatus, P. procerulus, var. gradualis, P. striatus, P. vogulicus, P.
pseudoknighti, Strophomena stephani. The tuffs accompanying the
porphyrites contain also organic remains (Pentamerus, Crinoids,
etc.). Radiolaria have been discovered by Tschernischew in the
jasper of the Ourals.
The middle Devonic seems to be represented by limestones with
corals and stromatopores. Griinwaldtia latilinguis, Rhynchonella
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 427
procuboides, Orthis striatula, Pentamerus galeatus and the trilobites
near the village of Pokrovskoie in the district of Irbit Phacops
fecundus, Anarcestes lateseplatus, Pleurotomaria subcarinata, Tenta-
culites acuarius. 'To the upper Devonic may be classed the lime-
stones of Lake Koltouban, Monticocerus intumescens, Spirifer dis-
junctus, Sp. Archiaci, ete. The Carbonic system is composed of (1)
schistose clays and argillaceous schists, sandstones and conglomer-
ates, with intercalations of coal and concretions of Spherosiderite.
The organic remains are almost exclusively plants (Lepido-
dendron glincanum, Stigmaria ficoides). At times the rocks are
much metamorphosed, and the carbonic schists are transformed into
graphites with vestiges of plants. (2) Limestone with Productus
giganteus Pr. striatus, corals, ete. (3) Limestone of the upper
horizons, those of Chartymka, the fauna described by Verneuil.
Gastrioceras marianum, Pronorites cyclolobus var. uralensis. One
hundred species of fossils have been found, of which many have not
yet been described. (4) Ordinarily the limestone of Pr. gigant. are
replaced above by a schistose limestone, or by a coarse conglomerate,
in which the fragments of limestone of different sizes are held
together by a calcareous cement. The conglomerates are replaced
by sandstones covered by marls or argillaceous limestones finely
stratified with subordinate beds of limestones sometimes coralliferous
(Chetetes radians) Syringopora parallela, Spirifer mosquensis.
Above this is a clay with Gypsum.
On the east slope of the Ourals are found islets of mesozoic deposits :
clays and sandstones containing lignite. In general the fossils are
badly preserved remains of plants. (Aspleniwm whitbiense var.
tenuis, Phyllotheca striata, Prodozamites lanceolatus ete. and remains
of Estheria minuta var. karpinskyana.)
Finally on the east slope of the northern Ourals occurs the upper
Jurassic, containing Ammonites; deposits of lower and upper
Cretacic with Baculites beds of upper Cretacic with Belemnitella
mucronata, Gryphea vesicularis, ete.
The tertiary sediments are very remarkable. Commencing at 50
to 100 kilometers from the axis they extend in horizontal beds which
grow continually thicker into the interior of Siberia. The predomi-
nant rocks of these sediments in the zone nearest to the Oural are
sandstones, presenting sometimes very peculiar characteristics, and
particularly, a rock composed of an intimate mixture of amorphous
clay with an equally amorphous silica. This material covers a very
428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
large area. It appears as a compact rock of light or gray color, some-
times yellowish, of which the typical varieties have the property of
disintegrating into minute particles with angular points and curiously
curved surfaces. Fossils are extremely rare in these beds. Along-
side of the teeth of squali, spicule of sponges and of radiolaria, are
found the shells of Lingula, prints of shells of Lima nucata, and the
sponge Botroclonium spasski. Various considerations have induced
the Russian geologists to ascribe these beds to the Eocene.
To the east of these silico-argillaceous beds are widely distributed
sandstones slightly coherent, accompanied by sands and clays. In
these deposits are found well-preserved remains of fishes: Lamna
elegans, L. cuspidata, L. denticulata, Otodus macrotus, Notidanus
serratissimus, Galeocerdo minor, Actobatis, Myliobates etc. Besides
this the remains of mollusks have been found; the species most
widely distributed—Cyprina—resembles very much C. perovalis.
In addition occur Modiola, Psammobia (?), Fusus (Neptunea)
gracilis, F. multisulcatus and Nautica sp. The above are classed as
Oligocene.
Among the most remarkable deposits of post-tertiary age of the
east slope of the Oural besides the glacial deposits developed north
of the 61st parallel are the auriferous and platiniferous sands (the
latter belonging exclusively to the Ourals). Intimately connected
with the serpentines and their primitive rocks, to the disintegration
of which the platiniferous groups owe their origin, they are not so
largely developed as the auriferous placers.
The auriferous placers of the Oural are stratified masses, which vary
from a very thin layer to a thickness of 4 metersand more. Gener-
ally they vary between 0-5 metersand 1m. Their longitudinal extent,
which is usually 20 to 40 m., often reaches 200 and even 500 m. They
are rarely more extensive, though placers of 43, 6 and 12 kilom. are
known (placer Pechtchanka, District Bogoslovsk). Their width is
sometimes very small, 2 to 4 meters; ordinarily it is 20 to 40 m.,
and has been known 100 m. and more. Sometimes auriferous beds
are found on vegetable earth or immediately under the grass, but
usually they are covered by barren earth, 7. e., an alluvial bed desti-
tute of gold, called “turf,” because the first placers found in the
Ourals were covered by a real turf. The barren earth varies from
0-5 m. to 4 m., and occasionally reaches 20 m., and even more. The
placers usually rest on hard rock, or that little disintegrated, called
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 429
‘plotik,” but rarely on a barren alluvial bed under which is found
a second auriferous bed which reposes directly on the “ plotik.”
The auriferous placers are found in the valleys of rivers and
brooks, or in dry ravines, and, of course, follow the axis of their
depressions. A gold nugget weighing 36 kilogr. (Ibs. 79.2) was taken
from the Tzaréwo-Alexandrowsky in the Miass district. Often a
slender thread in the placer is found to be richest in gold, and
probably indicates the strongest current. The gold of the explored
placers varies between 0°57 gram to 2:69 grams per tonne. A larger
yield is rare and when found is in the small placers, or in small parts
of large placers where it sometimes reaches 16 kilos. per tonne. It
is usually accompanied by Magnetite, which is obtained in the wash-
ings as sand called “Schlich.” More rarely this sand is composed of
Hematite, Ilmenite and Chromite. Frequently Quartz and often
Platinum, Garnet, sometimes Zircon, Disthene and Diamonds are
obtained. The richness of the Oural placers does not seem to depend
on that of the neighboring rocks. The most important placers are in
regions of greenstones, crystalline, talcose and chloritic schists, etc.
The regions of granite, gneiss and mica schist are less productive. The
placers on limestones are often found to be peculiarly rich. In this
ease the rock is cut out in the form of natural buckets, in which the
gold is deposited. The Oural placers are post-tertiary, or recent
deposits, containing objects fashioned by man, and occasionally post-
pliocene deposits containing the remains of mammoths, rhinoceros,
etc. Almost all are on the east, very few on the west slope, of
the Oural divide. Among the crystalline stratified rocks here are
gneiss with Biotite, Muscovite, with two micas, amphibolic, uralitic,
etc.; micaceous, talcose, chloritic, siliceous amphibolic schists;
various phyllites and quartzites. Among the crystalline schists,
limestones and dolomites (marbles) are found sometimes with organic
remains. Among the massives, granites, various syenites, miaskite
(Nepheline syenite with Biotite), quartz porphyries, felsite, ortho-
porphyries, diorite, gabbro, norite, diabase, various porphyrites,
various peridotites, diallages and pyroxenites, serpentine and a
mixture of Corundum and Anorthite. Many of these have been sub-
jected to more or less dynamic metamorphism, to which among
other things the green and uralitic schists owe their existence. The
mutual relations of the various formations here are confused from
the dislocation of all the deposits (with the exception of those of
the tertiary, post-tertiary and upper eretaceous, which latter is rarely
430 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
met with) and the cutting of all the sedimentary rocks by the
massives. The rocks above mentioned occur sometimes in their
natural order, but often without any regularity whatever. The
beds generally do not dip with the slope but to the west. In
proportion to the distance from the axis of the chain the stratifica-
tion becomes less deranged and the metamorphism feebler, never-
theless on the eastern slope up to the appearance of the tertiary
deposits in force the different formations alternate without any order.
The conclusion of M. Karpinsky is that the principal abrasion of
the region has been due to the invasion of the tertiary sea (paleogene),
and a considerable part of these deposits have been formed at the
expense of the older rocks then rising above the present level of
the country. The difference in the geological structure in the two
sides of the Oural is reflected in their mineral wealth. Thus the
stratified deposits, such as limonite, cupriferous sand and coal, are
found principally on the west side of the chain, while the vein or
massive deposits are found on the east: the placers are the only
stratified deposits of minerals peculiar to the east side.
After the above, which is the resumé by M. Karpinsky of the
structure of the east slope of the Oural,’ it is, perhaps, the best place
to consider the interesting question of the cause of this structure
which the travellers over the route of the excursion have verified as
accurately stated. Several points have been emphasized above to
call attention to the part which they bear to the hypothesis advanced
by one of these excursionists.
Prof. Gétz of Munich is of the opinion that but two hypotheses are
tenable. The first is naturally that the lake basins have been
ploughed out by ice or other powerful physical agents (which he
concludes cannot be maintained), and the others that they are due
to atmospheric agencies—chemical and mechanical.
The writer’s first suggestion, which he afterwards found had been
advanced independently by Prof. I. C. White, was that the sub-
jacent limestones had -been dissolved out by waters percolating the
soil and the depressions thus formed had been filled with water.
The following is the hypothesis of Prof. Arthur M. Miller, of
the State College of Kentucky, Lexington, Ky.:
“A” (Figure 2) represents the course of a tributary stream of the
Irtysch, draining the Asiatic slope of the Ourals.
Lo) WaT Ee
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 431
“ Prof. Karpinsky states that every one of these streams is divisible
into three courses—a fresh-water-lake-region upper course, a gorge-
region middle course, and a meander-flood-plain-region lower course.
Oural Taou
Plan of Drainage tor any tributary of the Irtyoch
Draining Aviatic Slope of Urals.
OuralTaou
a
--SS-
Oural Taou
Meander
Course
~
~~
_—-—-—-—
(from gketch by Prof. Mu ler )
for this paper.
Fic. 8.
It is the peculiarities of the upper and middle courses that here
demand explanation.”
432 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
“The presence of lakes nearly always point to recent disturbances
in the drainage.”
Recognized causes of lakes are :—
1. Glacial action.
2. Volcanic action—crater hollows and lava dams.
3. Chemical solution—producing inequalities.
4. Epeirogenic movements—phenomena associated with draining
of newly established marine plains.
5. Sluggish stream action in deltas and flood plains.
6. Minor warpings of the earth’s crust—causing changes of
gradient in streams.
Of course we readily rule out causes 1 and 2 here. There is
no evidence of recent glacial or volcanic action in this region under
discussion.
Cause No. 3 would find some advocates as applicable here; but
evidence in favor of lakes being formed in this way is meagre.
Cause No. 4 could have hardly operated here, though it may
have had influence in the ease of the salt lakes of the Siberian steppe
region farther to the eastward.
“No. 5 must also be ruled out; we are not dealing with lower
stream course phenomena.”
“ We seem limited to Cause No. 6. Fig. B represents supposed
section of district “A” just prior to the development of the lakes ‘and
the gorge. We have here in the dotted line the low stream gradient
of a plain lying at base level. Suppose a gentle warping of the
earth’s crust to produce a fold (not a fault) with an axis parallel
with the main chain of the Ourals. This is represented on an exag-
gerated scale in Fig. “C.”’ Such a fold thrown across the paths of
these eastward flowing streams would increase the gradient of that
portion of their courses on the eastward half or limb of this low
anticline. The erosive power of the streams would be intensified in
this portion of their course. They would tend to cut gorges. In
the upper course of the streams, that portion between the developing
anticline and the Oural-Taou, the gradient would be lowered, perhaps
€ven reversed, for the movement upward on the western limb of the
anticline would act in opposition to the current, and form a barrier,
which would tend to dam up the waters behind it. In addition to
this there would probably be a downward synclinal movement in the
region between the anticline and the Oural-Taou. The floor of the
syncline would not only be relatively but absolutely lower than it
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 433
was before. The combined effect of these two movements would be
to drown the upper course of these streams and favor the forma-
tion of lakes.” .
The hypothesis first referred to, for which I find that I am re-
sponsible, is built upon the admitted structure of the river beds in
their divisions described above, and is in effect that at some time
posterior to the deposition of the rocks of the middle course, a
profound dislocation occurred along the Ourals involving an up-
throw of the entire eastern half along a line of fault parallel to and
not far from the axis of the chain, which brought the underlying
Archean rocks to the level of the Devonic of the western slope. The
entire series of rocks forming the eastern slope as far as the present
westernmost occurrence of the rocky gorges of the middle slopes were
affected by this movement. The high angle and great precipitation
eut channels for the rapid streams directly eastward, and ploughed
out the cafions in the Tertiary rocks of the Siberian plains. A
period of erosion ensued during which the elevated eastern half of
the Oural was greatly reduced in height. Following this was a
down-throw of less extent than the original elevation but of sufficient
extent to reduce the rapidity of flow of the rivers near their sources
and on their upper courses, and to transform these latter more or
less into morasses and swamps. In time the sunken river beds of
the upper courses werefilled by sediments, while the rocky gorges of
the middle courses remained as before the channels of streams no
longer possessing sufficient rapidity to have cut them, It seems
reasonable to suppose that if there had been such movements, they
might have produced all the dissimilarity now observable between
the two slopes of the Oural, even if the structure of the two sides had
been originally similar. The rivers of the east slope prior to the
first movement probably originated in the longitudinal valleys
of the harder crystalline and quartzite rocks of the east side.
Their first courses very likely were rapid and tumultuous and
more or less parallel to the axis of the chain, as is now the case
with those of the west side, for considerable distances or until
favorable places were found for them to break through in lines
perpendicular to the axis of the range, when like those of the
western slope they may have excavated their beds, first through
the older paleozoic rocks and further east through the Tertiary,
and finally have reached the level steppes far to the east. The
first effect of the elevation would be naturally to produce direct east
434 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
trending channels and to cut them so deeply that they would still
remain the water courses after the subsequent depression. The
final sinking of the eastern half of the chain, would convert the
river channels already cut out of the crystalline rocks into deep
lakes lying as it is shown these do, more or less in the same direc-
tion and within a belt of moderate width. The currents of the
upper courses must have become sluggish and the sources of supply
have changed to morassesand swamps. The gentle slope directly to
the east would be the natural direction of these streams, instead of
as originally before the first elevation of the longitudinal valleys, to
the N. and 8. Wherever depressions of the level occurred, would
be found a lake of greater or less extent and these lakes would
increase in number and simplicity of form as the angle of descent
became less and the rocks softer. The promontories and deep slopes
of the old river-bed lakes which represented the parts of more than
usually hard rock where the mountain streams had been deflected,
and the deep cafions where the maximum erosion had been ac-
complished, would be less and less frequently seen, the further one
followed the river courses to the east. The production of lakes with
and without efflux in the level region would follow as a matter of
course as is seen in the courses of the Mississippi, the Volga and
other large streams.
The existence of the third or intermediate type of lake of which
M. Karpinsky speaks, lying between those close to the Oural axis
and those on the steppes would be very natural in a part of the
country where both orographic and petrographic characters were
changing from those of the rocks containing the lakes of type I,
to those containing the lakes of type II. Finally many of the
shallower lakes would be transformed into marshes and swamps.
On the other hand the existence of large masses of metamor-
phosed rocks; of the evidences of distortion and crushing; of rents
filled by eruptives and their disintegration produets; the occur-
rence of valuable mineral deposits in that part of the mountain
system nearest to the axis; would be naturally explained by the
dynamic and thermal effects resulting from the regional downthrow.
It appears much at least as plausible that such causes acted as that
the former eastern counterparts of the rocks constituting the west
slope of the Oural have been eroded and redeposited as the rocks of
the retreating Tertiary sea.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 435
On July 31 (August 12), 1897, we left Slatooust for Orjum, where
a halt was made, and a few hundred yards beyond which the conti-
nental divide forming the Eur-Asian frontier was reached and
passed, and the moderate descent on the Siberian side to Miass
at the foot of the Ilmen mountains begun. On the road thither,
and at the station Syrostan, a cutting exposes phyllites, a porous
taleosé rock (listvénite) aud serpentine. Further on schistose
rocks including metamorphosed porphyrites occur. The other sec-
ondary elements are Chlorite, Quartz, Calcite and Epidote. After
these, alluvium covers the surface to the station of Miass. Almost
the entire region between Syrostan and the Ilmen mountains is
auriferous, the central part of the auriferous belt containing the site
of the town of Miass. The gneiss on which the town of Miass is
built traversed within town limits by peridotite, in its western
part is replaced by siliceous schist (kieselschiefer) and phyllite.
The Miass placer situated only two kilometers from the station
is typical of the eastern Oural deposits of this character. The bed
above the auriferous gravel is about 2 to 4 m. thick, and consists of
turf, sand and clay. The auriferous bed itself consists of argilla-
ceous sand with many pebbles, and of gravel containing fragments
of gneiss, quartz and siliceous schist, of 0-7 m. in thickness. The
gold varies from 0°6 to 0-8 gram per tonne. This bed lies on gravel,
sand and clay, 2 m. thick. Borings show talcose and argillaceous
schists and serpentine below it. A little gold is found above these
rocks, but not in paying quantity. The placer which lies in the
ground immediately adjacent to the Miass river is about 1,380 m.
long by 320 broad. The terrace is the ancient bed of the river.
The gold is sought in the lowest points of the ancient and present
valleys. The peat or turf which lies upon this gravel is that which
extends over so large a part of the Siberian steppes and in which at
other places the remains of the mammoth and rhinoceros have been
found. The river is about 500 meters east of the present workings.
This placer was stated to be but 60 m. above sea level, and the mouth
of the Miass but 40 m. (?).
The gravel is screened in a primitive circular rotating screen, of
which the axis is inclined, and is then passed over a table having
two amalgamated plates at the top and two at the bottom. The
shoot is about 5 feet wide and 35 feet long, with a fall of about 20°.
The coarse slimes are carried to the top of a scaffolding, while the
fine slimes are left.
436 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
The I]men mountains which lie close to the town of Miass are
celebrated as the depository of many, both intrinsically and scien-
tifically valuable minerals, some of which are peculiar to the
range. Thus, Miaskite (nephelinic or elceolitic syenite with Biotite),
named by Gustay Rose, is not peculiar to these mountains only,
which bear the name of Ilmen, but also to their prolongations and
the mountains Baiksky, Sobatchia, Potanina and Wichniowaia. In
this continuation another characteristic rock is found composed of
Anorthite and Corundum. In the gneiss of the Ilmens and their
northerly prolongations veins of a rock composed essentially of
corundum and orthose are found. M. Karpinsky considers this an
analogue of the syenites, the corundum taking the place of the
biotite.
The Ilmens are thus more uniform and characteristic throughout
the 150 kilom. of their length than the main chain of the Oural
itself. “ Miascite” (or Miasskite, or better Miassite or Biotite-
nepheline Syenite) is found in many places in the I]mens, of which
the chief is near Lake Ilmen. There and in most of the other
localities are developed the granular and gneissic varieties of
Miassite, cut by veins of very coarse-grained Miassite. A foot note
in L. G. V., 22, gives the following as yet unpublished analysis of
Miassite by M. Bourdakow:
\4
I eA G0 |
SiO, | 52.03 | 56.26 | 54.17
TiO, 0.99 0.47 0.98 ||
Al,O,; 22.34 23.59 23.25 || I. Granular Miassite near
Fe,0, 1.13 0.85 0.69 || Lake Ilmen.
Ne 1.63 2.61 2.95 || ge
ha 0.41 0.09 0.16 | IIL. Schistose Miassite from
CaO 2.09 0.54 2.02 || Mt. Sobatchia.
ae ae naa nee | II. Schistose Miassite from
Ko | 516 579 619 | Mt. Wichniowaia.
CO, 1.32 1.37 1.14
H,0 1.79 0.37 Osa"
98.00 | 99.91 98.53 |
There are over 150 mineral localities exploited in the Ilmen
mountains in the neighborhood of Lake Ilmen. The minerals (of
which a list of 83 is given in L. G. V. by Karpinsky, and 35 are
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 437
specifically described by Arzruni in L. G. IV) lie either in miassite,
syenite or gneiss. The veins most extensive and remarkable for
the minerals they contain are in a peculiar green granite traversing
the gneiss. The granite typical of the veins consists of amazon
stone (microcline), albite, gray colorless or almost black quartz and
biotite. The miassite is often very coarsely granular, the individual
crystals attaining frequently 10 centimeters and more, and a speci-
men of biotite weighing 62-67 kilog. having been found. Some fine
graphic granite is formed of quartz and amazonite.
The rock contains cavities filled with argillaceous matter called
“salo” (grease) in which are found attached to the walls finely
developed crystals of Topaz and among other minerals, Beryl] (Aqua
marine), Phenacite, Tourmaline, Columbite, Samarskite, Monacite,
Monazitoid, Helvine, Garnet, Malaconite, Cryolite, Chiolite, ete.
The veins of micaceous syenite, consisting of Orthose, Plagioclase,
Biotite and sometimes Muscovite, which cut the gneiss, contain very
various minerals: Zircon, Pyrochlore, A¢schynite, Monacite, and
sometimes Apatite, Sphene, Magnetite and Ilmenite.
On August 1 (13) the portions of the Ilmen mountains near the
station were examined by the excursionists. The distance to the
first opening was about 4 wersts, exhibiting miassite containing
Zircon, Elzolite and Nepheline.
Besides typical miassite we obtained Elzeolite with white masses of
Nepheline, Biotite and Ilmenite. The Ilmens themselves are the
most gently sloping of hills and of very moderate height. Further
on were found openings where Sodalite and Amazon-stone were pro-
cured. Among the more important minerals, of which more detailed
description will be found in L. C. IV by Arzruni, are A‘schynite,
Amphibole, Apatite, Bery],Cancrinite, Chiolite, Columbite, Desmine,
Eleolite, Epidote, the Feldspar group, Microcline, Fluorite, Garnet,
Graphite, Helvine, Ilmenite, Corundum, Cryolite, Magnetite, Mar-
tite, Mobybdenite, Monacite, Orthite, Phenacite, Pyrochlore, Quartz,
Rutile, Samarskite, Scapolite, Sodalite, Titanite, Topaz (which was
the first mineral found here in the XVIII Century by the Cossack
Protow), Tschewkenite, Tourmaline, Uralite and Zircon.
After an examination of these localities the route was continued
toward Tchéliabinsk. At the station Bichkil a party of ten excur-
slonists set out in droschkes sixty wersts to visit the gold deposits of
Katch-Kar (or Kotch-Kar). This region is situated 80 kilometers
southwest of Miass. The 360 to 400 mining localities that the dis-
29
438 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
trict contains are found in the upper course of the rivers Kotchkara,
Tschornaia, Osseika, Kamenka and Sanarka. The exploitation of
gold began in 1844, when the placers in the southern part of the
region Kamenka and Sanarka were discovered. Later these placers
became famous on account of the precious minerals, Cyanite, Beryl,
Rose Topaz, Amethyst, Euclase, Ruby, Corundum ete., which occur
with the gold. The first gold in primitive rock in place was dis-
covered in 1863.°
The auriferous region lies in the middle of a large granite zone
running north and south. The gneisso-granites strike approximately
east and west, but have been broken through in a direction per-
pendicular to this, as is shown in numerous more or less parallel
cracks and faults. The faults have in their turn caused the enclo-
sure as veins of masses of granite transformed by dynamo-meta-
morphic action to a dark greenish gray rock generally schistose,
and composed of very finely crushed masses of Orthose, Plagioclase,
Quartz and Mica, with secondary elements, Biotite, Amphibole Gn
certain veins), Chlorite, Tale, Calcite, Pyrite, ete. The country rocks
are a granite called bérézite with Feldspar partially or entirely
transformed to Quartz and Muscovite. The thickness of the ex-
ploited veins varies between 0°05 m. and 2 m. The veins consist of
gray or green opaque Quartz, in which are inclusions of little veins
of Chalcedony in very variable quantities (here and there of Calcite
and Chlorite), but filling the whole crack. The Chalcedony is repre-
sented principally by Mispickel, Pyrite mixed with Chalcopyrite,
Stibine and Galena.
Over the greater part of the mining area the primitive rock is
disintegrated on the surface to a depth of 20 to 50 meters. The granite
is transformed to a pinkish-white clay, unctuous to the touch. The
Quartz becomes spongy, and contains the products of the oxidation of
the Chalcedonies, Ochers, sometimes oxides of manganese and
copper, here and there Pharmacosiderite and Arseniosiderite, also
haloid silver minerals with the appearance of Embolite Ag (Cl Br).
The gold content is 5 to 18 grams per tonne. The veins are richer
at the top, although the gold is more equally distributed in the
lower parts. The gold augments proportionally to the amount
of mispickel, and contains about 50 p.c. Ag. The different locali-
ties of ore resemble each other closely. Up to the present time that
° The information as to this region is taken from Wyssotsky’s description in
LG. Vi.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 439
part of the belt of sufficiently disintegrated rock which allows the
extraction of ore by the simplest processes (crushing and amalga-
mation) has alone been exploited. To separate the chalcedonies the
“stossherd ” and Frue vanner are used. The most important opera-
tions are those of the Mitrofanovsky shaft (40 m.), Woskressensky
(80 m.), the shafts Gavriilo-Arkhanguelsky (70 m.), Loukochinsky
(733 m.), Woskressensky (56 m.), Pavlovsky (50 m.), Alexan-
drovsky (63 m.), ete.
In latter years the yield of gold from the primitive rocks, where
it occurs as an ore, has been 1300 to 1425 kilogr. per year for the
district of Kotchkar, while the placers have given but 300-350
_ kgr. The total production of gold from 1844 to 1897 in this region
is about 47,067 kgr. (103,547.4 lbs.=51.77 tons) of which 25,160
kgr. came from the placers, and 21,900 from the veins (since 1868).
To this some 450 kgr. of silver must be added.
Amphibolic and biotitic gneisses crop out over the entire space
which stretches to the Lake Tschébarkoul, and beyond veins of the
amazonite granite disappear imperceptibly, but the ordinary our-
alian granite with Biotite grows more frequent and extensive
until it becomes predominant. The gneiss squeezed between masses
of granite contains frequent injections of it and innumerable dykes
and veins. Beyond Tschébarkoul the outcrops become more rare.
At 43 kilom. from the station siliceous schists appear, interrupted by
a serpentine; further on, chloritic, taleose and argillitic schists sue-
ceed. These schists are replaced by green-stones, augitic and
ouralitic porphyrites and aphanites, transformed here and there by
dynamo-metamorphic action into uralitic schists. Here and there
along the line of the railway gold is exploited in placers and veins.
On August 2 (14) the party moved along the line of the trans-
Siberian railway to Tchéliabinsk, the easternmost point which was
reached during our sojourn in Russia, viz., over 30° east longitude
from St. Petersburg, or about 61° E. of Greenwich. This very im-
portant railway center is a new town built on a number of gold veins
which have been exploited in latter years. The mines are mostly
from 16 to 20 kilom. southwest of the town, and have a general
similarity to those of Kotchkar. One of the best organized mines
is St. Michael Arkhanguel, belonging to M. Wonliarliarsky & Co.
Along the line of the railway towards Kytchtym the granite
is followed for 8 kilom., and near the crossing of the Miass is cut by
ramified veins of quartziferous diorite. The granite underlies red
440 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
and yellow post-tertiary clays covered by tschernozem. From the
7th to the 52d werst from Tchéliabinsk the clays cover the oldest
rocks almost everywhere. It is only in rare instances that one
observes the islets of tertiary conglomerates and sandstones, which
have escaped erosion, appearing above the surface (12 to 43 wersts)
and siliceous clay with Glauconite (44 wersts), a Kaolin produced
by the alteration of a subjacent granite, a diorite (?) (82 wersts), a
dioritic porphyrite (Lake Kissiagutch) and a Labradorite porphyry
(46 wersts). From the 50th werst such outcrops become more
frequent. First come aphanitic and other massive altered and
clastic rocks. At the 64th werst an uralitic porphyrite occurs,
becoming an uralitic schist ; then serpentine and chloritic schist, and
finally gneiss and granite alternating with chloritic and uralitic |
schists, which predominate further on, and upon which are built the
Kytchtym works. The gneisses are vften biotitic, often amphibolie,
and often garnetiferous. The strike of all the crystalline rocks is
nearly that of the meridian. (L. G., V, p. 33.)
August 3 (15) the party of excursionists left the station of Kytch-
tym in droschkes and drove around lakes Kytchtym and Sougomak
to the base of the Sougomak mountain. Between Kytchtym and
Sougomak mountain only biotitic and amphhibolice gneiss were ob-
served, cut by peridotites more or less serpentinized on the north
of the lake. At the same place appear in irregular prominences
masses of granitic and syenitic character. The mountain is partly
schistose, and contains limestone with a grotto among the gneiss,
but in the main it is composed of massive, extremely tough serpen-
tine with antigorite. From the summit of the mountain a magnificent
view is obtained of the Siberian plain and of the mountainous part
of the Ourals.
The ascent was along the border of Kytchtym lake and through
the town of that name around lake Sougomak and up to the
arréte over a grassy slope of easy grade. Hence, the ascent was
completed by a circuitous path over a species of col to the
shoulder beyond, where a path led up to the summit. On the top
was a fine compact rock determined to be serpentine. The view
from here of the Siberian lakes and steppes was very extensive. To
the west the Ilmen mountains were in sight and also Mt. Yourma,
which Humboldt erroneously supposed to be the nucleus of three
independent mountain chains.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 44]
From Kychtym to Ekathérinebourg the road passes over bands of
gneiss cut several times by granite (traversed by veins of syenite).
There is a region of chloritic talcose, ete., schists among which is
found for instance at the 91stwerst uralitic porphyry transformed to
schist. At the 99th werst these schists change the west dip to south
for half a werst. Beyond the station Maouk, where the schists
have been studied by Morozéwicz, serpentines occur and predominate
to the 115th werst.
The chloritic schist contains large crystals of Magnetite, the
talcose schist nests of radiating Actinolite of emerald green, and the
serpentines a number of veins of Asbestus. The whole is covered
by a bed of turf three meters thick. The serpentine contains
marble at the 126th werst. Among numerous hills of serpentine one
may observe numerous nuclei of gabbro and gabbro-diorite, and other
rocks giving origin to serpentine. The summit of the divide between
the waters of the Tschoussowaia and those of the system of the river
Isset consists of chloritic schist. Marble accompanied sometimes
by listvénite has been exploited for years in the vicinity of the village
Mramorskoe. Succeeding this for six wersts or more come gneiss
and granite, followed by more chloritic and talcose schists, ete.,
accompanied by serpentines, diallage, pyroxenite, uralitic por-
phyrite and occasionally by granite and porphyry.
Ekathérinebourg.—Chloritic schists occur within the limits of the
city, as well as listvénite, serpentine, diorite or gabbro-diorite, ural-
itie porphyry, usually changed into green so-called uralitic schist.
Here and there these schists contain beds of gneiss.
Besides these (See L. G., VII) in the neighborhood occur lime-
stones and granite.’
While a part of the excursionists were examining the so-called
stone tents and the archeological remains of Werkh-Issetsky, others
visited the mineral localities of Eugénie-Maximilianovna to the
1 Ekathérinebourg is the seat of a very active and learned society of amateurs
of natural history, which has made valuable natural history and archeological
collections. A fire destroyed many of the most valuable objects of the former
collection, but this has not prevented the growth of the society. Valuable
remains of a former tribe have been found on theislandin lake Werkh-Issetsk
and in the vicinity of the hamlet of Palkino. M. George-Onésime Clerc is
the very efficient secretary of this society, a savant amateur, who has for
twenty-five years been the chief active spirit within it. He has recently
made the discoveries of human relics previously referred to, and desires to
eee to compare some of the objects with those of the North American
lan.
442 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
northwest of that village, to the right of the river Isseta, and almost
on the summit of the Oural divide. Besides minerals about which
the data are not yet complete, such as Disthene, Bery] of lilac color,
red Corundum, etc., there are met with here Aqua marine, Vesuvian-
ite, Garnet, Essonite and Almandine, Epidote in great abundance,
Pouschkinite, Axinite, Yttrotantalite, Titanite, Chinochlore, Amazon
stone (Microcline) in great crystals, Amphibole, Rock Crystal Pyrite
transformed to Limonite, ete. These occurrences are in a development
of gneisso-granites. The predominant rock isa feldspathic rock, poor
in mica and almost destitute of Amphibole. This feldspathic rock is
accompanied by a rock very rich in Amphibole, sometimes closely
associated with amphibolite (Mt. Medwejka, Romanorka), some-
times with amphibolic gneiss (Medwejka, Poup), sometimes with a
diorite (Séwernaia, Yélowaia), which occupy lower horizons than the
feldspathic rock, although they constitute independent and not very
great elevations.
The above minerals are the product of metamorphism. They are
found usually at a slight depth in contact with feldspathic and
amphibolie rocks, and are almost always accompanied by Epidote.
In the mountain Poup the minerals accompany the crystals of dolo-
mite, and are found in places where the dolomite comes in contact
with amphibolic gneiss, the surface of the hill being formed of
granite. The deposits of the greatest interest are:
Mount Medwejka—Yellow Essonite, rose colored and brown Pis-
tacite.
Mount Yélowaia (Great mine Yevguénie-Maximilianovskaja)—
Axinite, Pouschkinite and Titanite.
Mount Poup (Mine Iwano-Rédivotsevskaja)—Essonite, Epidote,
Clinochlore.
Mount Séwernaia- Yéréméievskaia)—Aqua Marine, Vesuvianite,
Sphene, Garnet, Epidote, Yttrotantalite, Amazon stone etc. [See
Gs Vil]
The imperial lapidary establishment in Ekathérinebourg, and the
depot where minerals, cut and uncut, are exposed for sale, both
under the authority of the government and under private auspices,
is of great interest, but the cutting was not being carried on at the
time the excursion reached the city. The cups and vases of rock
crystal, malachite, jasper, etc., were of great beauty, and showed the
skill which has been attained by the Russian lapidaries.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445
The minerals offered for sale comprise all those which are known
in the entire Oural region as well as those from this particular district,
and have no further claim to enumeration here, since they will be
mentioned in connection with the visit to the localities where they
occur. This and the other great lapidary institution of Russia at
Peterhof employ some of the most skilful artisans in the world.
Leaving Ekathérinebourg on August 6 (18), the railroad passes
successively over the narrow belt of diabases, etc., bordering the city
on the west, and runs northwest nearly parallel to the upper shore of
the lake Werkh-Issetsk through narrow tongues of diallage and
limestones, and of crystalline schists called M, into the broad belt of
granites and syenites containing lakes Isset, Tawatoui, and others.
Skirting the southwest and west shores of these at some distance at
about the middle of the last named the road swerves to a direction
east. of north, and follows a thin band of the crystalline schists, M,
to its extremity, then passing along the contact of limestones and
diabases, and subsequently through first one and then the other
of these rocks across a very complicated area. A long course is
made through gabbros, etc.; to the station Anatolskaja, near which
is the boundary of the mining district of Nijni-Taguil. Between
Anatolskaja and the mining center Nijni-Taguil the road lies in
granites and syenites, and finally in diabases, porphyrites and tufts
to Taguil and Nijni-Taguil, which are situated at the contact of
these rocks with the lower Devonic limestones and marbles.
Nijni-Taguil the most considerable mining locality of the Ourals,
is the property of the heirs of P. Démidow, Prince of San Donato.
The founder of the works was Nikita Démidow, who enjoyed great
favor with Peter the Great, and established a number of iron works
in the Ourals. The river Taguil isdammed at this mining center, and
makes a long, narrow lake 12 wersts long, at the northern extremities
of which are the hills (or mountains) named Lyssaia-gora (Bald
mountain) and Wyssokaia (High mountain). This latter, situated
at the west of the village, contains the rich deposits of magnetite
which furnish the works of Nijni-Taguil, Niéwiansky, Alapaievsky,
Werkh-Issetsky, Soukhsounaky and Réydinsky. At Wyssokaia
the predominating rocks are porphyries without quartz, and very
varied in respect of their constituent elements. The passage from
typical porphyritic texture with well developed crystals of Orthoclase
and sometimes of Plagioclase and Augite into augitic syenites or
444 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
holocrystalline uralite on the one hand, or into compact orthose
on the other is here observed. The intimate correlation of the
combined: elements of different structure and color appears in the
ribbon or spotted structure of the rock, offering a good example
of the composition of the “Schlieren.”*® The interpretation of the
structure by M. Tschernischew is that the metalliferous masses and
the accompanying rocks were formed simultaneously, and that the
beds of magnetite have separated themselves from the magma of
orthose rocks. The magnetite and accompanying rocks of Wysso-
kaja dip generally southeast and east, but the structure is compli-
cated by throws and faults to be seen on the west end of the
mountain.
Brecciform rocks form the base of the series of metalliferous beds
of Wyssokaja. Here can also be seen the disintegrating action of
the orthose rocks, which results in the formation of thick beds of
white and pink clays, enveloping blocks of magnetite. The iron of
Wyssokaja is distinguished for its purity and excellent metallurgical
qualities. The magnetite is very often observed passing into martite,
a mineral very abundant near Taguil.
Among the minerals of Wyssokaja are Asbolan and Rabdionite,
forming in places very thin deposits on the walls of fissures in the
Magnetite and Martite. Immediately to the south of these mines
occur the outcrops of a white siliceous limestone, which forms the
western boundary of the rocks which contain the Médnoroudiansk
deposits.
The Médnoroudiansk copper mines are situated to the south of
Wyssokaja-Gora, between two narrow bands of limestones enclosing
clays, and disintegrated porphyries and tuffs. Along the line of the
deposit is found a band of argillaceous limonites and clays.
The southern part of the mine is separated from the northern by a
thick vein of lamprophyre oblique to the general direction of the
deposit. These iron minerals appear to fill a crack produced by a
fault irregularly bounded on the east and west. The clays of yellow
ocher are rich in copper oxides, and great masses of Malachite taken _
8 These passages of massive to schistoid and gneissic structure, the insensi-
ble transition of gabbros and gabbro-diorites by a series of intermediate phases
to diallage and amphibole-diallage rocks composed of only bisilicates, appear-
ing not only on the same outcrops, but even in the same fragment of rock,
carry conviction to the mind that these complicated combinations of fels-
pathic with non-felspathic masses which Reyer proposed to call “Schlieren,”
exist. L. C., IX, 3.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445
out here have given great celebrity to the mines of Médnorou-
diansk. The celebrated block of Malachite weighing 20,000 pouds
(Ibs. 720,000, or 360 short tons) was found at a depth of 35 or 40
sagenes (245 to 280 ft.) from the surface. In the neighborhood of
the limestones the metalliferous rocks become richer in copper salts
as the limestones are constantly being dissolved by infiltrating
waters. Fossils from these limestones are observed in great number
(Pentamerus vogulicus, Atrypa reticularis, Murchisonia Demidofi,
Pleurotomaria ventricosa, Euomphalus subalatus). M. Tscherni-
schew concludes that a chemical action takes place at the contact
of the limestones and the ore bearing rocks. On the one hand
the limestones are dissolved, and from the argillaceous envelope re-
sults the insoluble residue. On the other hand the deposits of copper
are brought about by the precipitation of this metal, which is carried
to the limestone by waters holding it in solution.
The manganese mines of Taguil—About a werst to the northeast
of Lébiajaia is found the manganese mine which is exploited by two
trenches. The south wall of the south cut exhibiting bright gray and
white limestones dipping southwest 60°, and containing Atrypa
kuchvensis, Spirifer kuchvensis, Sp. pseudo-kuchv., Entomis pela-
gica, stems of crinoids and corals. Beneath this isa white dolomite,
resting on a marble-like limestone, which is in immediate contact
with yellow, pink and violet schists, cropping out in the north wall
of the mine. North of the schists appear the same limestones seen
in the hanging wall, honey-combed with stems of crinoids and corals.
Presumably this represents a tightly folded and inclined synclinal
of limestone enclosing the schists. 'The manganese ore is collected
in nests and pockets, and seems to indicate a relation between its
occurrence and the lower Devonic limestone.
Ascent of Mount Siniaia.—Leaving Taguil and proceeding north
through Laia and to Barantcha the road runs on porphyrites and
tuffs. From the crossing of the Taguil to the latter place the road
crosses gabbros and diallage rocks. The best exposures of the rocks
composing Siniaia are seen in the quarries, which show a diallage
alternating with gabbros. Here may be seen excellent instances
of Schlieren. The structure is not to be explained by gabbros
cutting the diallage rock, for, on breaking it in various directions,
even under the microscope, it is impossible to define the limits of the
two rocks.
446 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
The summit of the Siniaia mountain known as “ Koudriawy-
Kamen” is almost entirely formed of coarse grained diallage rock
containing a considerable quantity of olivine. From the summit of
Siniaia or Koudriawy-Kamen (crumpled stone) a splendid view is
obtained of the summits of the ranges. To the north appears Mt.
Katchkanar, and Mt. Blagodat, to the southeast is the village of
Laia and the works of Taguil, to the west is the Oural chain, here
running nearly north and south.
Kouchwa and Mount Blagodat.—After a short run of nine wersts
north and northeast through gabbros, gneiss, and diabase, we reach
the station Kouchwa, on the last named formation, where the crown
owns works. The station is at the junction of the great and little
Kouchwa. The western part of the village extends over the large
low plain of these streams. Two wersts from the town is situated
Mount Blagodat. The constituent rock of this mountain, like that
of Wyssokaia, is an orthophyre without quartz, but with crystals of
Orthose and sometimes Plagioclase or Augite. All transitions from
coarse grained uralitic and augitic syenites to perfectly compact
orthose rocks resembling in external aspect the Swedish “ Hallajlinta”
as observed by G. Rose. The rocks also approach the structure of
“Schlieren.” The microstructure, the predominance of Feldspar in
the matrix and among the porphyritic elements, and finally the nota-
ble content of sodium bring the greater part of the rocks of Blagodat
near to the group of quartzless augitic porphyries called, after M.
Giimbel, ceratophyres. In Blagodat as in Wyssokaia the orotho-
phyres on the side of diminished mineral masses are enriched by
secondary Epidote, by Garnet, Analcime, Calcite, Chlorite and Mica,
and pass into epidote-garnetiferous and calcito-garnetiferous rocks.
The appearance of these rocks is connected with the disappearance
of the masses of Magnetite, as has been proven by the mining opera-
tions conducted at Blagodat. The magnetic ores of Blagodat appear
as red and as blue. The blue minerals abound in pellets of green
chlorite disseminated through the mass. Near the surface the Chlorite
is destroyed and the mineral becomes porous and easily fusible. Of
course as depth is increased the red mineral is more and more re-
placed by the blue. The deposits occur without definite boundaries,
over the entire east side of Blagodat to the summit wherever there
is orthophyre, but sometimes in the shape of tolerably regular veins,
and sometimes in nests and nodules. The veins gradually increase in
feldspar and pass insensibly into pure Orthose without Magnetite.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 447
On the east side the rocks are separated into strata and dip to the
east and southeast. Near the summit the rock is in the form of an
anticlinal and the direction of its axis about corresponds with the
trend of the mountain.
The deposit is faulted in lines nearly perpendicular and approxi-
mating north-northwest and east. Asa result of the first faulting, part
of the wall of the deposit is thrown to the west flank of the mountain,
and owing to the second, the main deposit is cut off to the south on
the eastern slope. The folds and faults corresponding with the first
of these are anterior to those corresponding to the second or trans-
verse, which accounts for the folding back of the rocks of Epidote
and Garnets and their appearance on the west flank to the foot of the
eastern slope in many places as a result of the first movement. (See
TG. EX. Pl k-).
The mineral deposits have experienced the same fractures as the
rocks containing them, as is evident from the strips of Magnetite
included in the breccias which fill the cracks, and the slickensides
of magnetite. The narrow bands of limestone compressed within
the porphyritic rocks to the east and south of Blagodat contain a
fairly rich fauna often well preserved. The limestones of the lower
Devonic (hereynian) along the rivers Kazanka and Izwestka for a
distance of 4 wersts southeast of Blagodat abound in fossils, among
which M. Tschernischew has described Calymene, Entomis pelagica,
Pleurotomaria kuschwensis, Merista passer, Spirifer pentameriformis,
Sp. kuschw., Sp. pseudo-kuschw., Atrypa kuschw., Pentamerus parvulus,
Pent. integer, Orthis pseudo-tenuissima.
The occurrences of these ores of Wyssokaia and Blagodat, and the
relation they seem to bear to the orthophyres on the one hand and
to the eruptive diabases and porphyrites on the other, will
naturally suggest to the mind of the student of Pennsylvania geology
the Cornwall and Dillsburg deposits. The quotation by M.
Tschernischew of G. Rose’s comparison of one of the transition
forms of these rocks to the Swedish Hillaflinta only increases the
the analogy to the series in Pennsylvania and other parts of the
United States, as well as in Wales, to which the late Dr. T. Sterry
Hunt so often referred. There are many other analogies, as in
the presence of copper and manganese in the Wyssokaja, and
the irregular pocket and mass occurrence of the ore in Blagodat.
The resemblances in the two countries in these respects is very
striking, and is not marred by the Devonic limestones at various
448 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
points south and east of Blagodat. It would seem that the complete
history of these very interesting mineral deposits remains to be
told, and that there is some reason to believe that it will be found
to be similar in Pennsylvania, Czernarvonshire, and the district of
Goro-Blagodat.
Recrossing the Eur-Asian frontier—Leaving Kouchwa the rail-
way continues for a short time in a northerly direction, when it
turns northwest before reaching the river Toura. Up to this point
it is laid almost exclusively on porphyries accompanied by tuffs and
breccias.
The porphyrite breccias consist of a paste of plagioclase and
augite, showing plain fluid structure in which occur Labradorite and
Augite (partly Uralite). Fragments of different sizes of dark gray
ribbon schist, of porphyrite and of quartz, are held in the paste.
Occasionally a large fragment of schist a meter in length enclosed in
the porphyrite indicates the vicinity of a continuous mass of schists.
Up to the present only one outcrop is known, viz.: to the left of the
Toura, between the great and little Garevka. About two wersts
from the Eur-Asian crossing a region of much metamorphosed
gabbros is entered. These gabbros are remarked also west of the
station. Then (197 wersts from Ekathérinebourg) commences a
region of indubitably metamorphic Chlorite and micaceous schists
which constitute the central part of the crest of the Ourals. Beyond
the boundary station the railway crosses the Toura for the last time
and approaches the head waters of the rivers descending the
European slope and mingling their waters with the Kama. [L.G.,
EX]:
The boundary station between Asia and Europe on the further
journey is 426.1 m. (1,397.6 ft.) above sea level, and near the head
waters of the Liéwaia Toura, and of the Tiskoss, which latter is an
affluent of the Koiwa, and at a distance of 255 wersts from Perm.
Following the Koiwa at the ridge near the 237th werst from Perm
it attains an absolute height of 285.7 m. (957 ft.).
Following the right bank and turning obliquely to the northwest
it ascends a sharp incline of a ridge parallel to that of the main
chain, and reaches the maximum elevation of 469.7 m. (1,540.6 ft.).
The first cut in the line reveals argillaceous and chloritic schists
striking nearly north and dipping sharply to the east. Gray and
partly friable quartzites intercalated with disintegrated chloritic
schist, yellowish and reddish talcose clays, and light gray quartzites
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 449
dipping east 75°, bring us to the 242d werst, where black dolomites
of fine grain intercalated with thin veins of calcite dip along with
the quartzites. Further on black argillaceous schists and chlorite and
argilo-chloritic schists appear. At the 230th werst the gabbros of
Douplianoi-kamen, a southern continuation of Teplogorskaja-sopka,
are met. From the 215th werst, at the maximum elevation of
469.7 m., the road pursues the crest of the water divide between the
affluents of the Wejai and the affluents of the Koiwa, and descends
rapidly for 43 wersts to the station Pachya. In the cuts between
the 189th and 185th wersts black argillaceous schists occur. Beyond
the station Biélaia, in a cut on the 184th werst, a light gray arkose
coarse-grained sandstone appears, and further on argillaceous schists
alternating with finely stratified sandstone. At the 177th werst
light gray, compact and dark gray crystalline limestones of middle
Devonic appear with Cyathophyllum. From this point to the station
Pachya the upper Devonic limestones appear with Cyrthia murchi-
sonia, Atrypa reticularis, Orthis striatula, ete. Beyond Pachya the
road enters the Carbonic deposits, which it follows to Vsiéswiatskaia.
A cut at the 166th werst shows compact gray fine grained limestones
C?b with Spirifer mosquensis, Productus cora, Pr. semireticulatus,
Pr. Humboldtii, Chonetes variolaris, Fusulinella spheroidea, ete.
From here to Vsiéswiatskaia only a few outcrops are seen of white
quartzose, fine grained sandstone and clays. The occurrence of
Carbonic measures continues. At the 122d werst Ci b again is seen
with Spirifer mosquensis, Pr. cora, Pr. semiret. Near to the junction
of the Arkhipovka and the Tschoussowaia C, crops out with Fusulina
verneuili, Pr. cora, Spirifer stri., Streptorhynchus eximicformis, ete.
The limestones of the upper Carbonic dipping northeast in the
cut of the 121st werst hold a thin bed of calcareous sandstones of
greenish gray, with remains of calamites, species of Productus, etc.,
interstratified with a gray conglomerate and an arenaceous schistose
clay. The presence of this permo-carbonic sandstone between the
upper carbonic limestones dipping to the northeast is explained by
a reversed fold to the southwest.
To the north of the station Tchoussowaia the outcrops of the
white Gypsum of the permo-carbonice series are seen on a little hill.
From the station Tchoussowaia to Perm, a distance of 119 wersts,
only Permo-Carbonic, Permian and _ post-pliocene exposures are
found in the infrequent and shallow cuts. Between the stations
Liévchino and Motowilikha the road follows the right bank of
450 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
the Kama. At the 11th werst a gray, friable, caleareous sand-
stone P}appears. Between the village Malaia-Yézowaia and
Motowilikha is an outerop of gray friable, partly calciferous sand-
stone P {horizontally bedded and alternating with marly clays of
reddish brown and gray marls. Near Motowilikha the hill is eut
by the deep valley of the rivers Motowilikha and Iwa. On the
right side of this valley in a hill known as Wychka the greenish or
reddish gray calciferous sandstones P} crop out, alternating with
clay marls of deep red and thin seams of light gray marl, all covered
by sandy clay of vellowish brown,and pebbles. From here to Perm
the outcrop is almost continuous of more or less friable calciferous
sandstones of greenish or reddish gray color alternating with deep
red or gray clay marls, and covered by post-pliocene deposits, more
or less yellowish brown sandy clay, yellow or gray argillaceous sand
and pebbles. The dip near Perm and Motowilikha is very gentle,
but visible S-3°. [L. G., X.]
Perm.—The city is built on the left bank of the great river
Kama, which resembles in many superficial features the upper
Missouri. The first view of this river at Perm, (which is 650 kilo-
meters over its bed from its source, and about 700 kilometers from
its junction with the Volga), is likely to cause astonishment at its
breadth and importance; and indeed at the delta near Bogovodskoie
where it joins the mighty Volga, the Kama appeared in August to
be the larger stream of the two. The city of Perm is built on
quite high hills which are cut deeply by the Tchoussowaia and by
ravines, one of which latter is a short distance north of the town.
The Kama is perhaps three-quarters of a mile broad at the landing
place of Perm and its banks are reddish on the steep face next to
the water. The shores are well covered with sod and the hills back
of the flats on the right bank are well wooded and.from 100 to 250
feet high, showing in places clearings and cultivated farms.
On the hills of Kama’s left bank as well as on those laid bare by
the ravines just alluded to, the beds of the upper part of the lower
Permian stage, are well exhibited, (P?). They are gray or brownish
gray sandstones interstratified with more or less marly red and
brownish red clays.
In the river section and also in the ravine just alluded to, these
beds are partially covered by a more or less arenaceous clay, inter-
calated with sand passing in places into gravel. These last deposits
belong to the post-pliocene era. The typical Permian of Perm
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 451
contains large deposits of copper minerals (principally cupriferous
sandstones) which have been exploited until very recently and the
ore smelted at the works of Motowilikha. The lower horizon P} of
lower Permian can be seen in the mountain named Tschourbina
which is on the right bank of the Kama opposite the mouth of the
Tschoussowaia. This horizon of gray calcareous slaty marls inter-
Stratified with gypsum and reddish brown sandstones carries the
bed P? composed of greenish gray sandstone, interstratified with
reddish brown clay. The right bank of the Kama opposite the
city of Perm is low and barren, and formed of post pliocene de-
posits such as gray and brownish gray argillaceous sands with beds
of pebbles and recent deposits. A short distance down the stream
from Perm these sands lie on the Permian bed P? which contains
somewhat cupriferous sandstone.
Throughout the entire distance from Perm to the confluence of
the Kama with the Volga, the banks of the former river exhibit
exclusively Permian measures. ‘The overlying beds are con-
sidered by some of the Russian geologists to be lower Triassic, but
others think they are not sufficiently well known to be ascribed
either to the upper Permian or the lower Triassic, and designate
them Permo-Triassic or PT, and call them provisionally Tartarian.
For two thirds of the distance from Perm to the Volga only the
lower Permian beds P*, and Quaternary are seen, unless the deposit
at Kerakoulino below Sarapoul be considered Tartarian in accord-
ance with the views of some members of the Russian Geological
Survey. M. Stuckenberg, who is the author of L.G., XI, which des-
cribes the geology from Perm to Nijni-Novgorod. and was also the
leader of this part of the excursion, holds this to be erroneous. Ac-
cording to him the middle Permian (P,) commences to appear at
Tikhia-Gory, and continues to Sentiaki where the upper Permian (or
Tartarian) appears and lasts to and beyond Tschistopol. The
further localities on the river from here to Laichew are credited by
him only with the middle Permian P,. For the rest of the Kama’s
course, these higher beds with Quaternary persist. He states that
in the Kama section the lower Permian is represented by but one
member, P, which consists of gray or brownish gray sandstone,
interstratified with more or less nearly red or reddish brown clays,
often containing caleareous concretions. Very rarely are found
remains of conchifers accompanied more frequently by remains of
plants. This bed is 70 to 80 inches thick in the sections near Perm,
452 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Ossa, Ochansk, Sarapoul, etc., and disappears finally further down
near Elabouga.
The middle stage of the Permian (P,) is composed of limestones,
dolomites and gray clay marls, and contains the organic remains
characteristic of the Zechstein of Germany. It crops out in incom-
plete sections in the banks of the Kama, between its confluence with
the Ij and its confluence with the Volga. At Elabouga the bed P,
is seen lying on the lower stage P%.
The upper stage P, or PT is seen between Sarapoul and the
nearest confluent of the Kama to the south*® covering occasionally
the middle stage. It consists principally of clays and marls of a
variously tinted red, alternating with beds of white, greenish or
gray color. Organic remains (conchifers) are very rare.
The post-pliocene deposits which crop out in the banks of the
Kama are represented partly by a fluviatile terrace, and partly by
sediments deposited in the Caspian basin of this period: or, to be
more accurate, in the series of lakes which were in communication
with that basin. These deposits crop out between Tchistopol and the
mouth of the river, by preference on the left bank. The post-plio-
cene terrace is composed of yellowish brown clays with which sands
are oftentimes associated. The Caspian beds though nearly of
the same nature as those of the post-pliocene terrace are more
sandy. These beds contain the remains of mollusks still living in the
east of Russia. The fresh or brackish water forms are often accom-
panied by Caspian marine forms. Here and there in the post-plio-
cene deposits, bones of the Mammoth, and other animals of that
epoch are found. Not very long since a tolerably complete skeleton
of a young mammoth was discovered on the right bank of the Kama
above Laichew. Below this town and near the confluence of the
Volga and Kama isolated bones of post-pliocene mammals have
frequently been seen.
In that part of the Volga between the Kama and Nijni-Novgorod,
and for a considerable distance above and below these points,
travellers have invariably been struck by the great difference between
the two banks. Except in a few localities where the river is con-
siderably deflected to the left (i. e. E [?]) the right bank presents a
continuous succession of escarpments and outcrops of rock in place.
The left bank, on the contrary, forms an alluvial valley, which,
9M. Stuckenberg says: ‘Entre Sarapoul et le confluent de la Kama,”
L1G, X12,
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 453
penetrating several kilometers into the interior of the country pre-
sents Quaternary terracesin gentle echelons. When the confluents
of the Volga on the left bank unite with the major stream, their
valleys are merged into vast spaces like lacustrine basins which owe
their origin to the impeded flow of the melting snows and the strong
floods of spring. At the confluence with the Kama the lacustrine
enlargement begins in the Volga, twenty-five kilometers above
Laichew and extends south to Spassk and the ruins of the old town
of Bolgary. In the months of May and June the waters of the
Volga and Kama at this junction occupy a basin so extensive that
from a steamboat it is occasionally impossible to see the shores. In
these cases the level of the water is 12 to 13 meters above the normal
level. But in the month of August the two rivers have returned to
their original beds and the water level has attained its minimum.
It happens frequently at this season that the steamers seeking the
sinuous and constantly changing channels run aground. ‘This shal-
lowness is most annoying toward Nijni-Novgorod and above.
The left bank of the Volga between the Kama and Nijni-Novgorod
shows no older rocks. Most frequently only recent sediments are
seen. Insome rare localities are found post-pliocene deposits, clays
and sands of the terraces, and between the mouth ot the Kama and
Kazan Caspian lacustrine deposits.
The right bank throughout the whole distance is of middle and
upper Permian and of Tartarian or Permo-Triassic age. The
middle Permian stage, the representative of the German Zech-
stein, is composed of limestones and dolomites, partly of oolitic
structure, with interstratified beds of silex, and more or less consider-
able deposits or accumulations of Gypsum. This stage, which con-
tains almost everywhere many organic remains characteristic of the
German Zechstein, rises from beneath the upper stage between
Bogorodskoie (the mouth of the Kama) and Kozlovka (opposite the
mouth of the river Ilet and 30 kilometers below the town of
Sviajsk). The upper stage (P,) or the Tartarian (PT) consists princi-
pally of different colored (red, pink, white, greenish and greenish
gray) marls, accompanied by thin beds of white limestone, variously
colored clays, and sandstone. This bed is very little fossiliferous,
and contains only some conchifers.””
10 Fifteen years ago the opinion was held by certain Russian geologists that
the beds of iridescent marls P, or PT were parallel formations with a part of
the beds P,., with passage of the marls into these latter horizontally. Now,
thanks to the labors of the Geological Survey and to recent researches of the
geologists of Kazan, it is beyond doubt that P, and PT are independent stages
bedded the one in the other. [L. G., IX, p. 10.]
30)
454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
At the landing place of the village Bogorodskoié, a little above
the mouth of the Kama, the following is a section of the right bank.
P,—Light red and brownish red marl.
P,—Greenish gray marl.
Gray limestone, finely stratified with brown spots, contain-
ing casts of conchifers.
Brown, friable sandstone, with white strata.
Finely stratified gray marl.
Boulders.
The beds, which are hidden by boulders, are shown a short dis-
tance below.
P,—Finely stratified grayish limestone, . . . . O75 m.
Friable:sandstone;: «(2 2 «+ oy <> uso. ese
Gray marly. < 6. as bo" ots 2} vee bee oe ee
Boulders, zc. .5, hs 2) We. take ake ee
Between the above two outcrops, in a rocky promontory, are
shown:
P,—Finely stratified, gypsiferous limestone, ays =
the fingers,. . . » , = 2 OFoime
Finely stratified, paawieh Limestone: with remains
of conchifers, . . . 2-
Gray clay marl, reereennned w ith, gypsum, ah
containing many specimens of es orien-
als. te ie - 076
_ Gray oolitie cnesraes anon in nifoeils ae
acteristic of the Zechstein, . . . . . . 105
A limestone analogous to the last crops out immediately at water
level at 2-3 wersts above Bogorodskoié.
Near to the landing place at Kozmodémiansk, on the Volga, the
following section was made:
P, (PT)—Light red marl with ase and gray
beds, = ies: She Ay . . Lose
Light gray rien i 5 2°
Reddish brown mar! with piconisl gray beds, 3
Brownish gray friable sandstone, . i:
Boulders, he its
Boulders beneath ach seco a ooo nant 6
The right bank of the Volga between Kozmodémiansk and Niyni-
Novgorod.—Here are found upper Permian, Mesozoic and Post-
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 455
pliocene deposits. The first of these predominate in all the outcrops
and are almost always covered by the others. The upper Permian,
P, or PT, attains a thickness of 100 m. and more. It is developed
in an uninterrupted series of marls, sandstones, conglomerates and
more rarely limestones.
The predominance in the series of this or that deposit affords a
differentiation of the following horizons:
A. Clay and marls with interstratified beds of limestone.
B. Sands and conglomerates with subordinated marls.
C. Marls and sands with subordinated sandstones.
D. Sandstones and sands with subordinated marls.
E. The same rocks with beds of limestones and conglomerates.
In- all the sections the horizons B and C are the most defi-
nitely and best expressed. The horizon A is in most cases eroded.
The lower horizons are most frequently masked by slips and
detritus and are not very visible, except near the villages of Issady,
Barmina, and Wassilssoursk. The faunais represented by numerous
conchifer mollusks of the group Anthracoside, especially by the
genera Paleomutela, Oligodon and Paleoanodonta ; by rare gastero-
pods Estheria, Paleoniscide, Ceratodus and Stegocephali. The plant
remains are generally badly preserved.
The Jurassic and Volgian deposits cover in separated islets the
Permian series of the environs of Issady, Barmina and Wassilssoursk.
These are dark gray clays with subordinate beds of sand, conglomer-
ates and limestone. ‘Their ages are referred to the Callovian, Kim-
meridgian and Volgian epochs.
The Post-pliocene is represented by yellow loessoid clays enclosing
a few pebbles and crystalline rocks.
- Below Issady the Volga valley’s right slope forms an enormous
curve, in the upper part of which are seen from the steamboat yellow
outcrops more frequently of leessoid clays (Q,), gray outcrops of the
Jura (J) partly hidden by thickets, and below, the outcrops of
Permian (Tartarian) rocks (P, or PT). The Jura, which is of excep-
tional interest in this section, is unfortunately less visible to-day than
afew years ago, when Sibirtzew, in 1886, established the following
sequence :
(1) Yellowish brown lcessoid clay.
(2) Dark green sandstone with Aucella mosquensis of the Volgian
horizon (horizon of Ozynoticeras catenulatum).
(3) Black bituminous clay without fossils.
456 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
(4) Brownish and yellow clay with-a bed of limestone (Oppelia,
Perisphinctes) determined as a zone of Hoplites of the Kim-
meridgian.
(5) Sandstone of the lower Callovian and conglomerates with
Cosmoceras Goweri, Cadoceras subleve, some forms of Peri-
sphinctes, accompanied by Belemnites, Protocardium, Con-
cinnum, ete.
(6) Gray clays of the gypsiferous lower Callovian, with prints of
Cadoceras.
(7) Variously colored marls.
(8) Sands and conglomerates with subordinate marls.
(9) Marls interstratified with limestone.
Issady— Nijni- Novgorod.—Among the outcrops on the old right
bank, between the landing places of Issady and Nijni-Novgorod,
that below Takinsky deserves especial attention, on account of the
appearance of the middle and lower horizons of the marly and
sandy Permian rocks, notably the series C_—marly, D—arenaceous
marly, E—marly calcareous.
Nijni-Novgorod.—The city is situated on the high and rather steep
right slope of the valley, at the confluence of the Volga with the
Oka. On the side of the Volga the slope is partly covered with
vegetation, partly with buildings, débris, ete. On the Oka side, on
the contrary, fine outcrops permit one to see the structure. Two sec-
tions are especially characteristic: the first in the banks of the river
Yarilo and the other in the ravine nearthe camp. The first of these
sections is seen near the town opposite the steamboat landing of the
Oka, in the great ravine of the Yarilo. The section is as follows:
Post-pliocene, yellow lessoid, sandy argillaceous clay with a very
few marly and a few pebble inclusions.
Permian deposits:
A. Marls imperfectly visible in the right slope.
B. Thick bed of sand, sandstones and conglomerates, with sub-
ordinate beds of marls. In the left slope the conglomerate
of this horizon contains casts of Paleomutela.
C. Thick deposits of variously colored marls interstratified with
limestones and many beds of sands and sandstones.
Between the upper layers of this bed there is a thin layer of
much disintegrated limestone, containing numerous perfectly pre-
served shells of various Anthracoside, especially the groups Paleo-
mutela keyserlingi, Paleoanodonta fischeri and Oligodon. These
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 457
same shells are encountered in other beds of limestones and marls,
but very badly preserved and in the form of interior casts.
The lower horizons of the Permian deposits appear more dis-
tinctly above and below in the ravine. There is visible 30 or 40
meters below the place just described, between variously colored
marls, a bed of sandstone and conglomerate in which are encountered
the shells and other remains of ganoids, accompanied by casts of
conchifers.
From the plateau the view extends far into the valleys of the
Volga and Oka and over the terraces of the left slope of the valley.
From Nijni-Novgorod to Moscow.— The railway from Nijni-
Novgorod to Moscow, following up the valley of the Klinzma
crosses a band of Permian, and later a long and narrow belt of
middle Carbonic limestones, following which it again crosses a
narrow band of Permian before reaching the Jura-Cretaceous or
Volgian on which it continues all the way to the ancient capital.
The Oural excursion was thus concluded after having passed
rapidly over 3,750 kilometers, (2,330 miles) of the most important
of the geological horizons in south and east European Russia, in-
cluding a long and typical part of the Volga, nearly a sixth of the
entire length of the Oural Mountains both in Siberia and in Europe,
and more than half the length of the river Kama.
The insight which this journey affords to the geological structure
of central European and Asiatic Russia could not have been
obtained in any other investigation of equal length and time, nor
in any other less well prepared, illustrated, and conducted.”
1 The sincere thanks of all students of geology are due to his Imperial
Majesty, the Tsar, for the boundless liberality he extended to the foreign
visitors ; to the Russian geologists for the enormous and intelligently directed
labor they devoted to the preparation of the means for demonstrating their
vast and difficuit problems to hundreds of strangers ignorant of their customs
and language; to their energy and pluck in carrying out their programme
without a mishap; and to the hospitality and kindness of all classes of their
countrymen, who made the long journey a continuous succession of pleasur-
able experiences.
458 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
NOVEMBER 2.
Mr. Cuas. P. Perot in the Chair.
Twenty-six persons present.
NOVEMBER 9.
The President, SamurEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-seven persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—
“ New Brazilian Streptaxide,” by Henry A. Pilsbry.
“Notes on Living and Extinct Species of North American
Bovide,” by Samuel N. Rhoads.
NovEMBER 16.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty-five persons present.
The death of Harrison Allen, M. D., on the 14th inst., was
announced. Whereupon, after a statement by the Chair of his
services to the Academy, the following minute was unanimously
adopted :—
The AcADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA desires
to place on record its appreciation of the great loss it has sustained
in the death of Dr. Harrison ALLEN. His earliest scientific
work was accomplished within its walls and his subsequent investi-
gations, including those which engaged his attention at the time of
his death, were all either directly or indirectly contributions to its
credit and standing in the scientific world.
In the several executive and administrative offices to which he
had been appointed—Corresponding Secretary, Member of the
Council and of the Library Committee—his performance of the
duties of each was characterized by loyalty to the best interests of
the society.
While his fellow-members rejoice in the just recognition accorded
him by the scientific world as Comparative Anatomist, Mammalogist
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 459
and Anthropologist, they deeply regret the untimely loss of his
co-operation.
As a student of the works of nature he was conscientious, accu-
rate and thorough; as a friend he was generous, sympathetic and
helpful.
The members of the Academy, while thus giving expression to
their regret for the death of their associate desire to convey to his
wife and children their sincere sympathy in their irreparable be-
reavement.
NovEMBER 23.
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Seventeen persons present.
A paper entitled “The Plants of Lewis and Clark’s Expedition
across the Continent during the years 1804-1806,” by Thomas
Meehan, was presented for publication.
NOVEMBER 80.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty-four persons present.
A paper entitled ‘‘ New and Little-known Bees from Washington
State,” by T. D. A. Cockerell, was presented for publication.
The death, on the 24th inst., of George H. Horn, M. D., was
announced and a resolution was adopted authorizing the appoint-
ment of a committee to make arrangements for a Memorial Meeting
to commemorate the services to science of Harrison Allen, M. D.,
and George H. Horn, M. D.
A minute from the last meeting of the Anthropological Section
of a communication made by the late Dr. Harrison Allen on a
method of comparing skulls was read by Mr. Chas. Morris, who
was requested, in view of the fact that it is probably Dr. Allen’s
last contribution to science, to prepare it for publication in the
Proceedings of the Academy.
Mr. J. Waln Vaux was elected a member.
Dr. Fridtjof Nansen of Christiania, Norway, was elected a corres-
pondent.
The following was ordered to be printed :—
460 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
REPTILES FROM SONORA, SINALOA AND JALISCO, MEXICO, WITH A
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF SCELOPORUS.
BY JOHN VAN DENBURGH.
This paper is an enumeration of the species of reptiles contained
in three small collections, and is presented in the hope that it may
be of use to those who are interested in the distribution of Mexican
lizards and snakes. Two of these collections are in the California
Academy of Sciences: the first, gathered in Sonora by Dr. Gustav
Eisen and Mr. Walter E. Bryant in April and May, 1392; the
second, due to the efforts of Dr. Eisen and Mr. Frank H. Vaslit in
Sinaloa and Jalisco in October and November, 1894. The third
collection was secured by Dr. David Starr Jordan and a party of
students at Mazatlan in December, 1894, and January, 1895, and is
in the Zoological Museum of Leland Stanford Junior University.
1. Phyllodactylus tuberculosus Wiegm.
A fine specimen of this gecko (Cal. Acad. Sci., No. 3,389) was
obtained at Matzalan, Sinaloa, in October. The California Academy
possesses two specimens (248, 249) secured in Durango by Mr. C, A,
Hamilton.
2. Gehyra mutilata (Wiegm.).
Eighteen specimens of this lizard (C. A.S. 3,350-3,367) were
collected at San Blas and one (C. A.8., 3,180) at Tepic, Jalisco.
Females taken in October contain eggs which must have been nearly
ready for laying; femoral pores vary from eleven to twenty on each
side. In connection with Dr. Ginther’s suggestion that this species
has been recently introduced into America,’ it may be of interest to
note that geckos sometimes come to San Francisco in the holds of
vessels.
8. Coleonyx variegatus Baird.
Several specimens were caught at San Miguel de Horcasitas,
in Sonora, in April, 1892.
4. Anolis nebulosus (Wiegm.).
Dr. Eisen and Mr. Vaslit secured this species (3,181-3,188) at
Tepic, Jalisco, in October. The California Academy possesses also
' Biol. Centr. Amer. Rept., 1898, p. 81.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 461
two specimens (C. A. S. 351, 352) caught by Captain Wm. Lund on
the Tres Marias. Dr. Jordan’s party found the species at Mazatlan.
5. Iguana igvana rhinolopha (Wiegm.).
Three specimens were obtained at Mazatlan, Sinaloa, and four
(C. A.S., 3,339-3,342) at San Blas, Jalisco.
6. Ctenosaura teres (Harlan). ‘
This species is more numerously represented, both in the Stanford
University collection and in that belonging to the California Acade-
my, than any other species. These specimens were shot at Mazatlan,
Tepic and San Blas. Many of these specimens are very large and
have dorsal crests so well developed that I have no hesitation in
abandoning Cope’s brachylopha as a name for them, although I
have seen no specimens from near the type locality of Harlan’s
Cyclura teres. It well may be that western specimens differ from
the typical form, but until some better character has been found to
separate them I cannot recognize them as distinct.
7. Crotaphytus baileyi Stejn.
One specimen was brought back from Hermosillo, Sonora.
8. Callisaurus ventralis ‘Hallow).
A Gridiron-tailed Lizard (C. A. 8., No. 3,390) taken at Mazatlan,
Sinaloa, in October, appears to be identical with Californian and
Arizonan examples of this species. Its femoral pores, however, are
only ten instead of from fourteen to eighteen. This locality is much
farther south than any at which this lizard had previously been
found. The species was found also at San Miguel de Horcasitas,
Sonora, in May, 1892.
9. Holbrookia maculata approximans (Baird).
A typical specimen of this subspecies was caught at Duras Nillas,
Sonora, in May, 1892. Several young from Mazatlan, January +25,
1895, are also referred to this form, although their snouts appear to
be more pointed than those of Arizonan examples.
10. Uta ornata B. & G.
This lizard was obtained in Sonora at San Miguel de Horcasitas,
in April, and at Duras Nillas, in May, 1892.
11. Sceloporus utiformis Cope.
Numerous specimens of this Sceloporus were shot at Tepic, Jalisco,
in October.
462 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF . free
12. Sceloporus pyrrhocephalus Cope.
A single young male (C. A.S., No. 3,329) agrees closely with
Cope’s original description of this species. It was found at Tepic,
Jalisco, in October.
13. Sceloporus obscurus new species.
Two male specimens, one young and one adult, obtained at Tepic
appear to differ in important characters from all known species.
Type.—Cal. Acad. Sci., No. 3,213, Tepic, Jalisco, Mexico, Gustav
Eisen and Frank H. Vaslit, November, 1894.
Description.—Upper head-shields nearly smooth; enlarged supra-
oculars in one row, separated from mesial head-shields by a com-
plete series of small scales; two scales on canthus rostralis; frontal
divided transversely but not longitudinally ; interparietal wider
than long; parietals small; ear-opening with very slight denticula-
tion of scales much smaller than those immediately preceding.
Dorsal scales strongly keeled, sharply pointed, without marginal
serrations, in nearly parallel longitudinal rows. Laterals keeled
and pointed, in oblique rows, changing gradually to the larger dor- -
sals and smaller ventrals. Twenty-eight to thirty dorsals on a line
between interparietal plate and base of tail; about seven equaling
length of shielded part of head. Ventrals smooth, emarginate ;
gulars weakly keeled, emarginate. Upper caudals considerably
larger than dorsals. Distance between base of fifth and end of
fourth toe equals distance between end of snout and posterior bor-
der of ear-opening. Tibia equals length of shielded part of head.
Sixteen to eighteen femoral pores on each side, the series not meet-
ing mesially. Males with enlarged postanal plates.
All the upper surfaces are bluish steel-color, lighter and more
bluish about the centres of many scales, sometimes with bronze re-
flections, without collar or other markings of any kind except indis-
tinct cross-bars on the toes. The lower surfaces are similarly
colored, but are paler, with a greenish or bronze cast on the throat
and chest and a large area of campanula blue on each side of the
belly. There is a light streak along the middle of the throat.
mm. mm.
Snout toanus... - sed ses. 22 2 Oko
Thength sof tail). = 3 2%. ace ss: Ser 5
Snout £0) CBE. s. ws avi WO oe, wpe 2 eee es
Shielded part of head-< .. sae. ihe 2 ae
Fore limb. Se, Ol et eee
Hind limbs. 724. ARS 2. 23) eee
Base of fifth to end ay fausth: face os DB ia ae eee
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 463
14. Sceloporus boulengeri Stejn.
A very large number of Scelopori collected at Mazatlan and
Tepic, are certainly identical with Dr. Stejneger’s S. boulengeri. I
believe that this is the same form as Cope’s S. oligoporus. It may
even be true that these are not distinguishable from S. horridus,
but, without an opportunity to examine the types or specimens from
the type localities, it seems best to use a name of unquestionable
applicability.
15. Cnemidophorus deppii lineatissimus Cope.
Two specimens (C. A. S., 3,344, 3,343) taken at San Blas, Jalisco,
in October, 1894, seem typical of this lizard.
16. Cnemidophorus gularis B. & G.
A lizard caught at Guaymas, Sonora, May 12, 1892, is identical
with Arizonan specimens of this species.
17. Cnemidophorus mariarum Giinther.
A large number of lizards from Mazatlan, San Blas and Tepic
seem to be identical with Giinther’s specimens from the Tres Marias
Islands. Whether they are also identical with Cope’s C. communis
and Peter’s C. mexicanus I have not been able to decide.
The upper lateral light lines are much farther apart than in C.
gularis, causing the specimens to bear some resemblance to C. sex-
lineatus.
18. Sympholis lippiens Cope.
One typical specimen (C. A.S., 3,127) of this rare snake was
taken at Tepic in October.
19. Bascanion flagellum frenatum Stejn.
The cross-bars on the neck are rather faint in a snake of this sub-
species (C. A. S., 3,412) which Mr. Bryant procured at Hermosillo,
Sonora, in May,1892. This snake was brought back alive and died
in San Francisco in October, 1892.
20. Bascanion semilineatum Cope.
This racer was taken by the Academy’s collectors at both Tepic
(Nos. 3,131, 3,182) and Mazatlan (No. 3,391) in October.
21. Bascanion lineatum Bocourt.
A single example (C. A.S., No. 3,130) with one hundred and
eighty-four gastrosteges, one hundred and twenty-one urosteges, and
scales in seventeen rows, was shot at Tepic in October.
464 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
22. Hypsiglena torquata (Giinth.).
The Academy’s collectors secured a single representative (C. A. S.,
No. 3,394) of this species at Mazatlan.
28. Natrix valida (Kenn.).
One specimen was secured at Tepic in October.
24. Hapsidophrys diplotropis (Giinth.).
Two typical specimens of this beautiful snake were obtained at
Mazatlan in October.
25. Sibon punctatum (Peters).
Dr. Jordan’s party secured a single snake of this species at Mazat-
lan. Its scale rows are nineteen and its gastrosteges one hundred
and fifty-five.
26. Sibon personatum Cope.
One snake of this kind was caught at Tepie, Jalisco, in October.
It has one hundred and sixty-three gastrosteges, eighty urosteges,
and scales in twenty-one rows.
27. Trimorphodon biscutatus (D. & B.).
Two specimens from Mazatlan are in the Stanford University
collection. They have gastrosteges 249, 250, urosteges 72, 79, scale
rows 24, 25.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 465
SCAPHOPODA OF THE SAN DOMINGO TERTIARY.
BY H. A. PILSBRY AND BENJ. SHARP, M. D.
This account of the Scaphopods of the San Domingo tertiary
strata variously denominated Miocene or Oligocene, is an outcome
of investigations undertaken by the writers in the course of work
upon a monograph of the Scaphopoda published in the “ Manual of
Conchology.” It is based upon collections made by W. M. Gabb,
and briefly described in the Transactions of the American Philoso-
phical Society.
Owing probably to Gabb’s illness when he prepared the pale-
ontological part of the ‘‘ Geology of San Domingo,” and to his death
before its publication, the study of his material seems to have been
incomplete. Our examination of the material shows that of six
species described or recorded by him from the beds in question,
Dentalium rudis is the tube of a Serpuloid worm ; D. ponderosum is,
as Guppy has already claimed, a form of D. dissimile of the Jamai-
ean Oligocene; D. affine bears a preoccupied name, and Gadus dom-
tnguensis is not that species, but a new one allied to the form called
Ditrupa dentalina by Mr. Guppy. Among the specimens of the
species discriminated by Gabb, and in several trays of undetermined
specimens, we have been able to distinguish ten new and well-charac-
terized forms, besides several which are probably distinct species,
but being represented by young or very fragmentary individuals
have been ignored in the following account.’
As to the age of the deposit in San Domingo furnishing these
remains, and that of the same horizon at Bowden, Jamaica, there is
diversity of opinion. Gabb and some others have considered it
Miocene; and in view of the considerable number of species still
existing in the Gulf of Mexico, and the close relationship of many
of the extinct forms with living species, this estimate is not without
support. Conrad, however, in 1852? and again in 1866* expressed
‘Among these, fragments of a species probably referable to our subgenus
Episiphon may be mentioned. This group is represented in the German
Oligocene by Dentalium ottot Sharp & Pils.
2 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1852, p. 198.
3 Check List of the Invertebrate Fossils of North America, Eocene and
Oligocene. Smiths. Mise. Coll., VII, no. 200, p. 37.
466 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
his belief that the San Domingo deposit was Oligocene. This opin-
ion has recently been re-affirmed by Dall* who considers the Bow-
den marls of Jamaica and the beds of similar age in Santo Domingo
to be upper Oligocene.
In considering so small a fragment of the fauna as the Seapho-
poda constitute, a full discussion of this question is uncalled for ; the
more because the Scaphopods afford no conclusive data.
Key to species of Scaphopoda.
I. Shell largest at the aperture, tapering to the apex, :
DENTALIUM.
a. With distinet longitudinal sculpture.
b. Circular sculpture conspicuous ; tube slowly taper-
ing.
c. Somewhat compressed; sculpture of many
longitudinal cords alternating with threads,
crossed by close, circular lamelle.
D. callioglyptum.
c. Circular in section; sculpture of many lon-
gitudinal alternately smaller threads, crossed
by regular, blunt, obliquely encircling striae,
D. Tryon.
b’. Circular sculptured inconspicuous.
c. Tube markedly conical, with 6 or more ribs
at apex, secondary and numerous tertiary
riblets developed in the intervals, D. gabbi.
ce’. Tube very slowly tapering, with six narrow,
distant and sharply detined longitudinal ribs;
intervals wide and plain, D. Cossmannianum,
e”. Square at apex, with 4 ribs, numerous threads
soon developing in intervals but lost on larger
part of tube, which is circular and smooth,
D. dissimile and var. ponderosum.
a’. No longitudinal sculpture.
b. Tube nearly or quite circular in section, almost
straight, slender, considerably tapering; smooth
and polished, D. haytense.
b’. Tube ovate in section, being laterally compressed ;
slowly tapering, thin, smooth ; apex with a terminal
“sheath” and v-shaped slit, D. pyrum.
*Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XIX, p. 304, 1896.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 467
b”. Tube oval in section, compressed between the con-
vex and concave sides; slowly tapering; moder-
ately arcuate; smooth except for very fine growth
lines, D. precursor.
II. Shell contracted toward the aperture, which is smaller than the
largest diameter of the tube; smooth, CaDULUB.
a. Acicular, much attenuated posteriorly, the greatest diam-
eter or “equator ” very near the aperture.
b. Length 6-7 mm., about 8 times the greatest diam-
eter, C. phenaz.
b’. Length 8-12 mm., about 12 times the greatest diam-
eter, C. elegantissimus.
a’, Slender, but not conspicuously attenuated posteriorly, the
greatest diameter near the aperture, where there is a small
depression on the ventral side, C. depressicollis.
a’, Stout and short, the greatest diameter near the anterior
third of the length, gradually tapering toward each end ;
length about 44 times greatest diameter, C. colobus.
Dentalium Cossmannianum n. sp. PI. X, fig. 11; Pl. XI, figs. 10, 11.
Shell a hexagonal prism with slightly convex faces, slender, slowly
tapering, moderately solid, glossy. Sculpture: there are 6 very nar-
row equidistant longitudinal threads, well raised and sharply de-
fined, the wide intervals between them flat on the smaller end of the
shell, but become decidedly convex toward the larger end; circular
sculpture of rather strongly impressed annular growth marks at un-
equal intervals, sometimes close, sometimes distant. Aperture not
preserved in the material before us, but apparently not oblique and
with nearly circular peristome but slightly modified in shape by the
longitudinal threads. Apex not known, but evidently hexagonal.
Length of (broken) type specimen 23 mm.; greatest diam. at
larger end 3:5, at smaller end 2°7 mm.
The type has lost from the smaller end a considerable portion of
its original length and probably somewhat less from the oral extrem-
ity. When perfect it probably measured not far from 45 or 50 mm.
The portion remaining is perfectly characteristic, and unlike any
Tertiary or living species of this region in the filiform riblets run-
ning from end to end, with wide convex intervals showing no inter-
mediate longitudinal sculpture, or only the faintest traces of riblets
in places, visible only under the lens at a certain angle of reflection.
‘This is the form mentioned by Gabb under his remark on D. dis-
468 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
simile, in his paper “On the Topography and Geology of Santo
Domingo,” p. 244. It is named in honor of Maurice Cossmann of
Paris, whose fruitful labors upon the Parisian Kocene are justly
esteemed by workers upon Tertiary mollusks. )
Dentalium callioglyptum n. sp. Pl. X, figs. 10,12; Pl. XI, fig. 21.
Shell large, solid and but very slightly curved; noticeably com-
pressed between the convex and concave surfaces; decidedly taper-
ing. Sculpture, many longitudinal cords or riblets alternating with
threads, altogether numbering about 65 near aperture, about 40
near the middle of the length, the ridges averaging about the width
of the grooves; the whole crossed by circular raised lamelle running
a little obliquely around the tube; these lamelle very close, nearly
regular, most conspicuous in the intervals, and so fine that they are
scarcely visible to the unaided eye. The circular lamellz subobso-
lete toward the aperture in large specimens. Aperture slightly
oblique, judging by the lines of growth; apex unknown ; but accord-
ing to the fragments before us both orifices are slightly oval in con-
sequence of the compression of the tube.
Length unknown, but from the taper of the fragments probably
about 115 mm.; greatest diam. of larger end of largest fragment 13,
least diam. of same 12 mm., length 15 mm.
Another fragment from near the middle of the shell measures,
length 30, greatest diam. of larger end 7-9, of smaller end 46 mm. ;
therefore tapering to the extent of 3°3 mm. in a length of 30 mm.
The specimens were collected by Gabb, who referred them with a
“?” to his D. affine.
We at first thought to identify it with the recent D. carduus
Dal, which has similar file-like circular sculpture; but upon appeal-
ing to our kind friend at Washington for a comparison, the follow-
ing differential features became apparent: “ D. carduwus is lighter ;
the fossil form is not so much curved and the elevated lines are dis-
tant, with no longitudinal sculpture between them ; the anterior part
of the adult carduus has fine longitudinal striz covering the inter-
spaces as well as the elevated riblets.”
D. Tryoni differs from this species in the character of the circular
strie and some other features mentioned below.
Dentalium Tryoni n. sp. PI. X, figs. 5,9; Pl. XI, fig. 22.
- Shell long, rather slender, slowly tapering and nearly straight,
the very slight curvature mainly posterior; circular in section ;.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 469
quite thick and solid. Sculpture: many longitudinal threads about
as wide as the intervals, alternately larger and smaller, crossed by
slightly less strong, regular, blunt, encircling striz, rising into low
granules as they cross the longitudinals; these striz are markedly
oblique, bending well forward on the concave and backward on the
convex side of the shell, and toward the larger end of adults be-
coming irregular and, in part, obsolete. Aperture and apex not
preserved, but both orifices are apparently circular. Estimated
length 90 mm. in a specimen having a greatest diam, of 8°5 mm.
A fragment measures: length 36, diam. at larger end 7, at smaller
end 4:7 mm.
The strongly developed and decidedly oblique encircling sculp-
ture is conspicuous and characteristic. In D.carduus and D. callio-
glyptum the circular sculpture consists of sharp, raised lamelle; in
D. Tryoni of blunt cords, more widely spaced, and with the longi-
tudinal riblets, enclosing rhombic depressions (Pl. XI, fig. 22). In
the imperfect specimen 36 mm. long, measured above, there are 33
longitudinal cords and threads at the smaller end, double that num-
ber at the larger, where some of the threads are very small. Be-
sides the alternation in size, there is a more or less marked tendency
for every fourth riblet to be larger, on the median portion of the
tube. The largest of the fragments (diam. 8°5 mm.) has about 84
subequal longitudinal threads. The increase in number of riblets
is by the regular intercalation of a thread in each interval, so that
at various ages a specimen would have 16, 32 and 64 riblets; the
increase thereafter being confined to the convex side, where the in-
terposed threads appear earliest at each successive increase.
In the general contour D. Tryont is not unlike the living D, cap-
illosum Jeftr.
Dentalium dissimile Guppy. Pl. XI, figs. 3, 4, 5.
Dentalium dissimile Guppy, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., XXII, p. 292, pl. 17,
f. 4 (1866).
Dentalium ponderosum Gabb, see below.
This species, described by Mr. Guppy, from the island of Jamaica,
is apparently identical, as Guppy has stated, with a form collected
by Gabb in San Domingo. It is a member of the “group of D.
quadrapicale” as defined by us in the “ Manual of Conchology,’—a
group distinguished by the quadrangular shape of the apex, the
tube having lateral, ventral and dorsal angles posteriorly. Abund-
5 Vol. XVII, p. 31.
31
470 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
antly developed in the Pacific, this type is not known to have living
representatives in the Atlantic or Gulf of Mexico, although Miocene
and Pliocene forms have been found in the southern United States.
In D. dissimile the tube is square at apex (Pl. XI, figs. 4, 5), but
soon becomes circular in section. Each of the angles at and near
the apex is pinched up into a narrow rounded rib. The interven-
ing spaces are flat and plain near the apex, but soon a median
thread or pair of threads arises, and a little later other threads ap-
pear in the intervals, until there are 30 to 36 threads, varying in
size, in the girth of the tube. This sculpture then gradually be-
comes weaker, leaving the larger part of the tube cylindrical and
smooth, except for circular striation (Pl. XI, fig. 3). The shell walls
are unusually thick.
Ordinarily a specimen of mature growth loses a great part of the
sculptured portion by truncation, so that the square section of the
earlier part of the tube is hardly noticeable. This was the case with
Guppy’s type. The other characters of this species may be seen by
reference to the figures here given and to Guppy’s original descrip-
tion and figure.
Var. ponderosum Gabb. PI. X, figs. 1, 2,3; Pl. XI, figs. 15, 16.
D. ponderosum Gabb, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (N. Ser.), XV, p. 244
(1873).
Larger, heavier, excessively solid, the cavity reduced to a small
perforation by the excessive thickening of the shell. Quadrate form
and accompanying sculpture very soon disappearing; form long
and slender. Aperture rather oblique, the peristome, when per-
fectly preserved, thin and sharp.
In this remarkable form the thickness of the shell wall, when an
adult is broken across the tube, is greater than the diameter of the
orifice. The sculpture disappears sooner than in typical dissimile,
and the taper of the shell is very gradual.
Dentalium Gabbin.n. Pl. X, figs. 6, 7, 13; Pl. XI, figs. 1, 2.
D. affine Gabb, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (N. Ser.), XV, p. 244 (1873).
Not D. affine Deshayes, 1864, nor of Biondi, 1859.
Shell slightly curved near the apex, the greater part of the length
nearly straight; thick, solid and strong; rapidly tapering. Sculp-
ture prominent near apex, weak and low toward aperture. At and
near the apex, hexagonal with six narrow rounded ribs at the angles,
but the symmetry often impaired by the prominence of one or more
of the secondary ribs; the latter lie midway between the six primary
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 471
ribs, for the greater part are decidedly smaller than these, and at-
tain or fall short of the apex according to the age and consequent
degree of posterior truncation. In the secondary intervals there
arise a variable number of tertiary threads, generally one, two or
three in each space ; and at the aperture there is much variation in
the number of riblets and threads, different specimens having 36, 40,
52, ete. In perfectly preserved shells there is seen an excessively
fine but clear cut longitudinal striation in addition to the coarser
sculpture described. Growth-striz fine, inconspicuous and oblique.
Aperture slightly oblique, circular, the peristome bevelled to a thin
edge. Apex rather wide, the orifice subcircular, with a minute
notch on the convex side.
Length 41°5, diam. at aperture 7-4, at apex 2°3 mm. The largest
specimen measures 8 mm. diam. at aperture.
A large, solid and markedly conical species, with very little
curve, and that mainly quite near the apex. It is somewhat like
D). disparile on a very large scale, and, as in that species, the nnm-
ber of ribs at the apex is subject to considerable variation, although
the fundamental form is hexagonal, the tube soon becoming circu-
lar. D. thalloides Conrad of the Claiborne Eocene lacks the fine,
clear-cut longitndinal striation of this species, and, moreover, tapers
much less rapidly.
Gabb’s diagnosis, published after his death, is not very full, and he
gave no figure. As the name imposed by him is preoccupied, we
have considered it best to present a detailed description, in propos-
ing a new name for the form.
Dentalium haytense Gabb. PI. XI, figs. 8, 9.
D. haytensis Gabb, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (N. Ser.), XV, p. 244
(1873).
Known only by fragments, the largest of which is probably one-
half the original length. These indicate an almost straight, rather
rapidly tapering but slender shell, circular or nearly so in section,
with smooth, polished surface ; growth-wrinkles light, rather irregu-
lar, running somewhat obliquely around the tube; and there is an
occasional constriction so slight as to be hardly mentionable. No
trace of longitudinal sculpture. Shell moderately thick (as shown
by the section, fig. 8), but becoming very thin at the aperture.
Apex unknown.
Length of type (broken at both ends) 9°4, diam. at larger end
1:28 x 1°35, at smaller end 0°68 mm.
472 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
This is one of those simple species of the subgenus Levidentalium
which has no prominent specific characters. It is still readily dis-
tinguishable from other smooth forms of the Miocene or Oligocene
of this region. D. pyrum is, perhaps, nearest, but that has a dis-
tinctly ovate or pear-shaped section.
Dentalium pyrum n. sp. PI. XI, figs. 6,7.
Fragments, by which alone this species is known to us, indicate a
shell of slight curvature and slow increase ; thin; distinctly ovate in
section, compressed laterally, the narrow end of the egg-form toward
the coneave side. Surface smooth except for light growth-lines,
polished. Apex with a narrowly oblong orifice, passing into a short,
narrowly V-shaped notch on the convex side of the tube ; the orifice,
except at the slit, surrounded by an erect sheath.
Length of largest fragment 6°45, greatest diam. at larger end 1°8,
least 1°65 mm.; diam. at smaller end 1°3 x 1°4 mm.
The apical characters are exactly as in the recent Antillean D.
perlongum and D. matara Dall. It is the typical Antalis apex.
Dentalium precursor n.sp. Pl. XI, figs. 12, 13, 14.
Shell small, thin, slowly tapering, moderately arcuate, compressed
between the convex and concave sides, the section therefore oval.
Surface smooth except for very fine growth-lines, without longitudi-
nal sculpture. Dimensions of type, which is broken at both ends:
length 5°6, transverse or greatest diam. at larger end -95, least °85
mm.
A member of our subgenus Compressidens,® but less rapidly in-
creasing in transverse diameter than the several recent American
species, among which it is most like Dall’s D. ophiodon. We know
of no allied form in the American tertiaries. It is readily distin-
guished from other smooth forms described herein by the vertically
compressed and more arcuate tube.
Cadulus phenax n. sp. Pl. XI, figs. 23, 24.
Shell very slender, acicular, well curved posteriorly; rather
abruptly swollen quite near the aperture, contracting rapidly an-
teriorly, gradually tapering posteriorly to a small apex; nearly
circular in section; surface smooth, glossy, with slight growth lines
but no corrugation or circular riblets posteriorly. Aperture circu-
lar, somewhat oblique; apical orifice circular with entire edge.
Length 6°5, greatest diameter 0°8 mm.
‘Type D. pressum Sharp & Pilsbry.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 473
Exceedingly similar to C. dentalinus Guppy, of the Jamaican
Oligocene,’ but easily distinguished by the lack of circular riblets
upon the smaller half of the tube. It differs in form from all of
the smooth species of the same group. We have examined a great
many specimens.
This is Gadus dominguensis of Gabb’s paper; not of d’Orbigny.
Cadulus elegantissimus n. sp. PI. XI, figs. 28, 29, 30.
Shell similar to the preceding, but larger, much more elongated.
Tube compressed vertically, very obliquely but indistinctly striated,
glossy. Greatest diameter close to the aperture; contraction rather
slight. Aperture oval ; anal orifice oval, nearly circular.
Length 11°75 mm.; greatest antero-posterior diameter of tube
0°65 mm.
A smaller specimen measures, length 8°75, greatest antero-poste-
rior diam. 0°7 mm.
Two perfect specimens and several broken ones were included by
Gabb in his lot of “ Gadus dominguensis.” It is excessively slen-
der, quite arcuate, and decidedly longer and larger than C. denta-
linus Guppy. The measurements are from the largest of the un-
broken shells. Fragments indicate that somewhat larger individuals
occur.
Cadulus depressicollis n.sp. PI. XI, figs. 25, 26, 27.
Shell long and slender, arcuate, much compressed between the
concave and convex sides throughout. Regularly and slowly en-
larging from the apex nearly to the aperture, then noticeably con-
tracted on all sides; on the middle of the convex side having a
distinctly depressed, concave area about one-third the width of the
shell, and extending from the peristome backward a distance about
equal to the greatest diameter of the aperture; surface smooth and
glossy. Aperture oblong; apex oblong, simple, with subcircular
orifice.
Length 11:75 mm.; greatest diam. of tube 1°63, least diam. at
same point 1-25 mm. ; aperture, greatest diam. 1°06, least 0°8 mm.
This was one of the four species discriminated, upon separating
Gabb’s tray of Gadus dominguensis into its elementary constituents.
With Cadulus dentalinus Guppy, C. dominguensis d’Orb., and the
various forms associated with it, C. depressicollis has no close rela-
tionship. It is slender for a Cadulus, and remarkable for the
™Manual of Conchology, XVII, Pl. 36, figs. 1, 2.
474 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
decidedly concave area on the flattened surface adjacent to the lip
on the convex side.
Cadulus colobus n.sp. Pl. XI, figs. 17, 18, 19, 20.
Shell small, thin, moderately curved, rather short and stout, but
slightly swollen. Greatest girth at about the posterior third of the
length of the tube, slowly tapering to the rather large apex, the
anterior contraction equally gradual. Posteriorly the tube is
strongly compressed vertically, but at the “ equator” and aperture
it is nearly circular in section; surface polished. Aperture circu-
lar, not oblique. Apical orifice transversely oval.
Length 2:95 mm.; diameter at “ equator,” antero-posterior. 0'658,
lateral 0-688 mm.; diam. at apex, antero-posterior 0.24, lateral 0.53
mm.; diam. of aperture 0°55 x 0°58 mm.
C. colobus isa much smaller and more “ stumpy” species than
C. parianus Guppy of the Trinidad Oligocene. It is very unlike
C. dentalinus, elegantissimus or depressicollis. It was found with
Gabb’s lot of “ Gadus dominguensis.”
’
VERMES—SERPULIDZ.
‘‘Dentalium rudis’’ Gabb. PI. X, figs. 4, 8.
? Dentalium rudis Gabb, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (n. ser.), xv, p. 244
(1873).
The fossils referred doubtfully to Dentaliwm under the above
name are unquestionably the tubes of a worm of the family Serpu-
lide. The fragments indicate an almost straight, tapering tube
with no trace of lateral attachment to other bodies. It is thick and
seems to consist of three layers of different structure or composition.
Externally there are eight rude, strongly convex longitudinal ridges
separated by narrow grooves, and rendered irregular by rather
numerous impressed lines running circularly around the tube, and
occasional constrictions also irregular in occurrence. The ribs run
almost straight, on some of the fragments, slowly spiral on others,
the torsion being opposite in direction to that of the thread of an
ordinary screw. The largest fragment measures, length 22, diam.
at large end 7, at smaller end 5 mm.
The measurement given by Gabb was from a number of fragments
from several individuals fitted together according to the taper (as
in fig. 4), and as the latter seems rather regular, his result is proba-
bly not far from the truth.
1897.]
In the present condition of the literature upon tubicolous worms,
it is impossible for us to determine the generic position of these
remains, but we take them to be something of the nature of Ditrupa,
Hamulus or Pyrgopolon ; the massive, sculptured tube being not
unlike the Cretaceous groups mentioned.
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 475
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE X.
(All figures natural size).
1, 2,3. Dentalium dissimile var. ponderosum Gabb.
“ Dentalium rudis” Gabb. Fragments of three individ-
uals. :
Dentalium Tryont n. sp.
Figs. 6,7. Dentalium Gabbi n. sp.
Figs.
Fig. 4.
Big. "5.
Fig. 8.
Bis. 9.
Figs.
Bis. 11.
Fig. 13.
Figs
Fig. 3.
Fig. 4.
ig: «6.
Fig. 6.
Big. 7.
Hie. - 8.
Bio. 9.
Fig. 10.
Bios 11.
Fig. 12.
Fig. 13.
Fig. 14.
“ Dentalium rudis” Gabb. Fragment.
Dentalium Tryoni n. sp.
10,12. Dentalium callioglyptum n. sp.
Dentalium cossmannianum n. sp.
Dentalium Gabbi n. sp.
PLATE XI.
1,2. Dentalium Gabbin. sp. Enlarged view of the apex.
Dentalium dissimile Guppy. Enlarged view of anterior
portion.
Dentalium dissimile Guppy. Enlarged view of posterior
end.
Dentalium dissimile Guppy. Enlarged view of apex.
Dentalium pyrum n. sp. Enlarged view of aperture.
Dentalium pyrum n. sp. Ventral aspect, enlarged.
Dentalium haytense Gabb. Aperture, enlarged.
Dentalium haytense Gabb. Lateral aspect, enlarged.
Dentalium Cossmannianum n. sp. Lateral aspect of
anterior portion.
Dentalium Cossmannianum n. sp. Section, enlarged.
Dentalium precursor n. sp. Aperture, enlarged.
Dentalium precursor n.sp. Lateral aspect, enlarged.
Dentalium precursor n. sp. Dorsal aspect, enlarged.
476
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Figs. 15,16. Dentalium dissimile var. ponderosum Gabb. Two
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Figs.
*Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
sections of one individual (Pl. X, fig. 2) enlarged.
Cadulus colobus n. sp. Dorsal aspect, much enlarged.
Cadulus colobus n. sp. Aperture.
Cadulus colobus n. sp. Lateral aspect.
Cadulus colobus n. sp. Anal orifice.
Dentalium callioglyptum n. sp. Sculpture, much enlarged.
Dentalium Tryoni n. sp. Sculpture, much enlarged.
23,24. Cadulus phenax n.sp. Lateral aspect. |
25.
Cadulus depressicollis n. sp. Outlines of aperture and
“ equator.”
Cadulus depressicollis n. sp. Lateral aspect.
Cadulus depressicollis n. sp. Ventral aspect.
Cadulus elegantissimus n. sp. Lateral aspect.
Cadulus elegantissimus n. sp. Outline of aperture.
Cadulus elegantissimus n. sp. Lateral aspect.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 477
NEW BRAZILIAN STREPTAXIDZE.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
In the course of identifying Brazilian Streptazide some time ago,
my attention was called to the fact that in the collection of the Acad-
emy there were several different and very distinct species labelled
“ Streptaxis candidus Spix,” mainly in the “ Robert Swift” and “A.
D. Brown” collections. I was thus induced to reexamine the large
species of the group Artemon, to which these forms belong, and to
investigate their characters and literature.
Tryon' enumerates the following species: S. candidus Spix (in-
cluding S. Spixianus Pfr.), S. intermedius Alb., S. regius Lobbecke,
S. wagneri Pfr., S. Rollandi Bern., S. Paivanus, conoideus, costulosus
and cypsele Pfr., S. apertus and depressus Martens.
S. regius, Rollandi and cypsele I have not seen. The identity of
S. candidus Spix with S. Spixianus Pfr. is very uncertain. There is
nothing in the collection of the Academy altogether fulfilling the
requirements of the Spix-Wagner description, which indicates a
broadly umbilicated shell, of 25 mm. diam. and half that height.
The larger size of Pfeiffer’s shell is of course not significant, for most
of these species periodically form expanded lips, which, with further
growth, remain visible, varix-like, on the base of the shell; so that
the size of apparently mature examples is not a safe specific crite-
rion.
The following forms seem to be new :—
S. helios n. sp.
Shell depressed, with low-conoid spire, umbilicate, the umbilicus
deep and somewhat funnel-shaped, one-fifth the diameter of shell;
rather thin and not very strong, buff tinted ; the surface with varn-
ish-like gloss, very smooth, with only a faint puckering below the
suture representing the costulation of the allied species. Apex
minute, smooth; whorls fully 63, moderately convex, at first slowly,
then more rapidly increasing, the last decidedly wider than the
penultimate (viewed from above), well rounded at the periphery,
convex beneath, very obtusely subangular around the umbilicus.
1 Manual of Conchology, (2), I, pp. 61-63.
478 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Aperture oblique, roundly crescentic, the width hardly exceeding
the height; peristome thin, but very slightly expanded below, the
columellar margin expanded, slightly recurved, but little impinging
upon the umbilicus;
Alt. 15, greater diam. 24, lesser 21:7 mm.; width of aperture 11,
height 11 mm.
Brazil.
Smoother above than any of the other large species. Perhaps.
Pfeiffer’s “Streptaxis candida var.,” Chemnitz, edit. 2, Helix, Pl. 103,
f. 29, 30, is this species; but in fig. 29 the basal lip is less deeply
rounded than in typical helios.
8. tumulus n. sp.
Shell subglobose-depressed, umbilicate, the umbilicus deeply pen-
etrating, cylindrical or well-like, one-seventh the diameter of shell ;
solid; white or yellowish with brilliant gloss, the upper surface
sculptured with smooth, regular, slightly arcuate, rounded costule,.
wider than their intervals, and on the last whorl about 24 in the
space of a millimeter; becoming obsolete at the periphery, the base
being smooth with the luster of varnish. Spire low dome-shaped,
the earlier whorls slightly conic. Whorls 7, very slowly increasing,
the last scarcely wider than the penultimate (viewed from above),.
rounded at periphery and convex beneath, showing two slight vari-
ceal ridges marking former peristome positions. Aperture oblique,
rotund-crescentic, mainly basal, but little wider than high; peri-
stome not expanded above, becoming slightly so at base, and ex-
panded and slightly recurved at the columellar margin, where it is.
dilated somewhat and impinges upon the umbilicus.
Alt. 18, greatest diam. 25, lesser 23 mm.; width of aperture 12,
height 11:7 mm.
Brazil.
The outlines of the spire are more convex than in S. spixianus
Pfr., the whorls more compactly coiled, the last conspicuously nar-
rower. The aperture is rounder and more basal, and the umbilicus
decidedly smaller. Compared with S. regius Lobbecke, this species
is less elevated with decidedly narrow umbilicus.
S. capillosus n. sp.
Shell closely resembling S. Spixianus Pfr. in general contour,
openly umbilicate, the umbilicus from one-sixth to one-fifth the
diam. of shell; moderately solid; grayish-white or yellowish. Sur-
1897. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 479
face slightly shining, very finely and closely costulate-striate through-
out, the costule clear-cut but minute, about 5 in the space of a
millimeter, on the last whorl; becoming lower and fainter on the
base. Whorls 6 to 64, convex, at first slowly, then more rapidly
increasing, the last decidedly wider than the penultimate, rounded
at the periphery, obtusely angular around the somewhat funnel-
shaped umbilicus. Aperture rounded lunate, oblique; outer and
basal margins of peristome slightly expanded, columellar margin
dilated above; basal margin slightly bent forward in the middle.
Alt. 13°5, greater diam. 21, lesser 18°3 mm.; width of aperture
11, height 9°5 mm.
Alt. 12°5, greater diam. 20°5 mm.
Province of Bahia, Brazil.
Resembles S. Spizianus in form, but the series of a half dozen spe-
cimens before me differs constantly from that species in the smaller
size of the shells and the extremely fine striation.
S. decussatus n. sp.
Shell depressed-turbinate, narrowly umbilicate, the umbilicus deep
and well-like, one-ninth or one-tenth the diam. of shell; moderately
solid; pale yellowish. Surface glossy, closely and finely costulate
above, the costulee wider than the intervals, about three in the space
of a millimeter, and decussated by numerous fine spirals, which cut
or indent them but do not appear in the intervening grooves; the
base similarly but less strongly costulate. Spire low conoid, with
the lateral outlines but slightly convex, apical whorls costulate ;
whorls 64, at first slowly, then more rapidly widening, the last
bluntly but conspicuously angular at the periphery, convex beneath,
angular around the umbilicus. Aperture rhombic, somewhat ob-
lique, angular at middle of outer margin and at junction of the
basal with the columellar margin; peristome unexpanded, becoming
slightly so below, the columellar margin vertical, dilated above,
impinging upon the umbilicus.
Alt. 16, greater diam. 22, lesser 20 mm.; width of aperture 12,
height 11 mm.
Brazil.
Peculiar in the decussated sculpture and continuation of the cos-
tulation to the apex. The angular periphery and verge of the nar-
row umbilicus are also conspicuous features.
480 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
DECEMBER 7.
The President, Samurt G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—
“Descriptions of two new forms of Perideris,” by Henry A.
Pilsbry.
“Synopsis of the recent Psammobiidze of North America,” by
We eeDall:
“The Gerrhonotus of the San Lucan Fauna of Lower California
with diagnoses of other West American Species,” by John Van
Denburgh.
“The Petrifaction of Bones,” by E. Goldsmith.
DECEMBER 14.
The President, Samurt G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.
Forty-four persons present.
DECEMBER 21.
The President, SamuEx G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.
Forty-six persons present.
A paper entitled “Anatomical Notes on certain Western
American Helices,” by Henry A. Pilsbry and E. G. Vanatta, was
presented for publication.
The death of the Rey. Samuel Haughton of Dublin, Ireland, a
Correspondent, was announced.
Additional Note on the Gastropod Genus Tatea, Tenison- Woods.
—Mr. H. A. Pirssry offered the following remarks : Owing ‘to
the incompleteness of our series of the “ Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Tasmania,” and to the omission of an entry in the “ Zoo-
logical Record,” an important note on Tatea,’ by a corresponding
member of this Academy, was overlooked by me in dealing with
this genus in these Proceedings, p. 360.
Professor Tate correctly refers Dardania Hutton, 1882, to Eaton-
della, following Hutton ; and he further includes Matean in Eaton-
1On the classificatory position and synonyms of Eatoniella rufilabris, by
Professor Ralph Tate, F. L.8.,
2 Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. W ales, TX, 1885, p- 940.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 481
iella. This union I have proven to be inadmissible on the ground
of the totally different dentition of the radula.
Professor Tate’s note, therefore, does not in the least affect the
conclusions reached in my paper, viz., that Tatea is a valid genus
of Amnicolide ; that it is not at all closely related to the Rissoini-
ne; and that it is not equivalent to the genus Eatoniella.
It only remains to add that the paper of my esteemed colleague
may be consulted with advantage for the full specific synonymy,
and for details of the external anatomy of Tatea not given in my
own communication.
DECEMBER 28.
GENERAL Isaac J. WISTAR in the Chair.
Thirty-six persons present.
A paper entitled “ Odonata (Dragonflies) from the Indian Ocean
and from Kashmir collected by Dr. W. L. Abbott,” by Philip P.
Calvert, was presented for publication.
The following was offered from the Anthropological Section :—
The Anthropological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences
views with the deepest regret the untimely death of its late able
and esteemed Director, Dr. Harrison ALLEN, to whose earnest
efforts the organization and subsequent success of the Section were
mainly due and who served it as Director from its first meeting
until his decease. Dr. Allen’s broad interest in the science of
anthropology in general and his valuable series of studies in the
characteristics of human crania in particular, were indicated by
numerous communications to the Section, of which one, on a new
method of estimating the comparative measurements of skulls,
given in October, 1897, was probably his last communication before
any scientific body. The high value and wide diversity of his
scientific work, the originality and suggestiveness of many of his
views and the deep earnestness of his devotion to scientific research
render his death a serious loss to the world of science as a whole,
and in particular to the institutions with which he was intimately
connected. By the Anthropological Section it is felt to be a loss
which cannot easily be repaired.
The communication above alluded to has been reported as
follows :—
482 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Comparative Measurements of Skulls—At the meeting of the
Anthropological Section of the Academy, held October 8, 1897,
Dr. Harrison ALLEN presented a number of Hawaiian skulls,
placed in his hands by Dr. Whitney, who had enjoyed exceptional
opportunities for their collection. It had been found, he said, that
the Hawaiian people of high caste selected different burial places
from those of low caste, the former choosing caves as places of
sepulture, the latter interring their dead on the sea coast. This
custom renders it easy to divide the skulls into two classes, whose
distinction is also indicated in their characteristics. He had found,
on comparison of these classes of skulls, that they presented well-
marked distinctions, not due to any difference of race, but simply to
different habits and conditions. The skulls of high caste origin
were found to have characters due, in his opinion, to higher intelli-
gence and more luxurious habits of living than those belonging to
the lower caste, all the differences observed being probably referable
to these causes.
In comparing these characters he adopted a special method, con-
stituting a modification of the ordinary method. Instead of indi-
cating variations by curves, he arranged the numbers representing
the measurements of significant features in the series of skulls, in
steps, or terraces, each step indicating by its width the degree of
preponderance of its corresponding number. Omissions in the
series of numbers were likewise indicated. He considered this
method superior to that of curves, as greatly simplifying the com-
parisons of a series of numbers, and enabling conclusions to be
readily and quickly drawn.
This communication possesses a special value in its being the last
made by Dr. Allen, whose death took place shortly after its deliy-
ery.
The following were ordered to be printed :—
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 483
NOTES ON LIVING AND EXTINCT SPECIES OF NORTH AMERICAN
BOVIDE.
BY SAMUEL WN. RHOADS.
Through the courtesy of his friend Stewart Culin, of the Depart-
ment of Archeology and Paleontology, University of Pennsylvania,
the author has been permitted to examine a collection of mammal-
ian fossils forwarded from Alaska to the University.
These fossils were collected ‘‘on the tundra, back of Point Barrow,”
a locality from which no mammalian fossils appear to have been
previously recorded, and situated 500 miles farther north than the
celebrated Elephant Point. fossil beds on the shores of Eschscholtz
Bay.
They comprise numerous parts of the skeletons of Elephas, to-
gether with the skulls of three individuals of the genus Bison, all in
an unusually good state of preservation. In identifying these for
Mr. Culin it was found necessary to make comparisons with the
type specimens of Bison in the Museum of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia. The results of this study appear to war-
rant publication, affecting as they do the question of the relation-
ships of Bison latifrons (Harlan), B. antiquus Leidy, B. alleni
Marsh and B. crampianus (Cope).
The two smaller specimens, Nos. 13,752, 13,753 of the University
Museum Catalogue, undoubtedly represent the smaller extinct bison
of N. America, named in 1854 by Richardson, Bison crassicornis,
from specimens taken at Eschscholtz Bay, Alaska. The smaller of
these two specimens, No. 13,752, is from an adult animal, probably
a male, of four or five years. The fronto-parietal and occipital por-
tions of the skull from the posterior line of the orbits to the basi-
occipital inclusive, are intact, as also the horn-cores. The distance
from tip to tip of horn-cores is 812 millimeters. The frontal breadth
between the bases of horn-cores is 318 mm. Specimen No. 13,753
is a skull in much the same condition as the preceding, excepting
the horn-cores, whose terminal thirds have been destroyed. It be-
longs to an older animal than No. 138,752, the frontal breadth be-
tween the bases of horn-cores being about the same as in that speci-
484 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
men but the interorbital width is 325 mm. greater. The horns of
both these specimens agree closely in size, curvature and relative
dimensions with the larger horn-core and attached frontal bone
forming the type of Leidy’s Bison antiquus from Big Bone Lick,
Kentucky.
Dr. J. A. Allen, in his Memoir of the American Bisons,’ not only
shows the specific differences of the smaller extinct bison of America
from the living animal, but establishes the priority of Leidy’s name
antiquus over Richardson’s crassicornis, and shows that both these
names were, with little doubt, applied to the same species. In the
Museum of the Academy is the most complete cranium of fossil
American bison’ yet recorded (Pl. XII, fig. 2). It was sent to Dr.
Leidy by Messrs. Calvin and Wilfred Brown, who discovered it in
the Pilarcitos Valley near San Francisco, Cal. It is classed by
Leidy under /atifrons, to which he subsequently referred his antiquus
specimens. Its relations to the existing bison are much closer, how-
ever, than to Leidy’s type of antiquus. A comparison of the type
of antiquus from Big Bone Lick with the newly acquired specimens
from Alaska, confirms the views of Dr. Allen and Prot. E. D. Cope,*
viz., that we have in B. antiquus a near prototype of the existing
bison. In antiquus the stout, subcircular horn-cores have first a
lateral growth at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the skull
(or directed slightly backward) and on a level with (or slightly be-
low) the frontal plane, rather abruptly curving upward along their
distal third within a plane intersecting the frontals at right angles,
or at an angle from 5 to 15 degrees posterior thereto. In Bison bi-
son typical specimens show the following characteristic differences
from B. antiquus: a, the size of the cranium in largest known ex-
amples is 10 to 15 percent. less; b, the relative length of the horn-
cores to the breadth of frontals between the bases of horn-cores is 5
to 10 per cent. less; ¢, a straight line drawn from the tip of horn-
core across the median superior base of same in B. bison will, if con-
tinued, intersect the orbits; in B. antiquus, a line similarly drawn
intersects the base of opposing horn-core—in other words, the chord
of the smallest arc in horn-cores of B. bison is at about an angle of
45° to the longitudinal axis of the skull, while in B. antiquus the
same chord is more or less nearly at right angles (90°) to that axis ;.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 485
d, the vertical and longitudinal (transverse) diameters of the horn-
cores of B. bison, measured at one-third of the distance of whole
length of core from base of same, are about equal, and the superior
(concave) surface of core well rounded, in B. antiquus the longitudi-
nal diameter is much the greater, and the superior (concave) sur-
face of core more or less flattened.‘
The third, and by far the most interesting, of all the Alaskan
specimens loaned by Mr. Culin, is a large cranium of a long horned
fossil bison (No. 13,754), in which the frontal and occipital por-
tions, with their horn-cores, are intact. The upper margins of the
orbits and the basal suture of the nasals are also present. The
specimen is evidently of a fully adult male animal, and is much the
best preserved and strongly fossilized example of bison that has
come to hand. In the latter respect it is in strong contrast to the
other bison specimens which accompanied it from Alaska, or, in
fact, with any in the entire series now at the Academy. As com-
pared with the antiquus skull from Alaska already mentioned, it is:
more thoroughly mineralized, and shows but slight traces of the
water-worn appearance so evident in the latter. Its specific gravity
is 13 to 12 times that of the antiquus specimens. Whether they
all came from the same site and geological horizon we have no
source of information, but the comparatively recent characters of
the antiquus skulls, their color and frangibility, bespeak a much
later age and indicate a surface exposure to the elements, so that
they do not greatly differ in character from the weathered skulls of
recent Musk Ox sent to the University from Alaska in the same
shipment. The large-horned specimen, which may, for the present,
be referred to as number 13,754, shows, in the size and curvature of
its horns, a very different type of bison from either B. bison or B.
antiquus, in these and other respects indicating their closer relation-
* In the type of antiquus this flattening is very marked, as also in the Alas-
kan specimens. In Leidy’s California specimen the flattening is very slight,
and in cross section the horn differs very little from B. bison. Indeed, this
specimen in this regard is so different from the type of antiquus and from all
the antiquus specimens from Alaska as to raise the question of their specific
identity.
Just before this article went to the printer, the author consulted a valu-
able paper in the Kansas University Quarterly for July, 1897, on the osteol-
ogy of B. antiquus, by Alban Stewart. While Mr. Stewart unfortunately
makes no comparisons between his fine skull of antiquus and other American
fossil species, and omits to mention many characters which are essential
in such comparisons, his paper brings out some strong distinctions between
typical antiquus and B. bison hitherto only conjectured because of the frag-
mentary state of all other specimens.
‘
486 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
ship to the huge-horned B. latifrons of Harlan, the type of which is
in the Museum of the Academy. It is, however, a much smaller-
horned species, and the horn-cores are much more curved and flat-
tened than in latifrons. The difference in the size of the cranium
in the two species is not great, the frontal breadth heing the
same, but the greater breadth and massive development of the occi-
pital region in /atifrons is very noticeable, a difference necessitated
by the great relative weight of the horns and the consequent de-
velopment of the cervical muscles and their attachments at the base
of the cranium. The species to which No. 13,754 shows closest rela-
tions is B. erampianus of Cope, recently described,’ from the Pleis-
tocene of Kansas, the type of which is also in the Museum of the
Academy.
The horn-core and rostral portion of cranium which represent
this species are intermediate in size and characters between /atifrons
and No 13,754.
As pointed out by Prof. Cope, the characters separating latifrons
from crampianus, based solely on the horn-cores, are, without much
doubt, specific, the difference in size alone amounting to 40 per cent.,
while in curvature and the relative dimensions of cross section the
distinctions are equally pronounced.
It therefore remains to consider the status of the Alaskan speci-
men with regard to crampianus. Before doing so, however, the
question of sexual differeuces in the development of the horn-cores
of the genus Bos and Bison should be considered. Dr. Leidy, in
his study of the extinct bisons, evidently believed, or at least thought
it possible, that sexual variations in size of horn-cores of the extinet
bisons might account for some of the so-called species described by
himself and others, and, subsequent to describing antiquus as a dis-
tinct species, he made it a synonym of Jatifrons! The extreme im-
probability of this conjecture is made evident by Dr. Allen in his
monograph. It is impossible to determine the sex of fossil speci-
mens, except where they are perfect enough and numerous enough
to exhibit the characters which determine this in nearly related liv-
ing species. The number of specimens of fossil bisons is yet too
small and their condition too fragmentary to arrive at a very satis-
factory answer to this question. So far as it goes, however, it is
pertinent to show the extent of difference in the size and shape of
§ Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., IV, p. 456, pl. XXII: (= B. alleni Marsh).
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF, PHILADELPHIA. _ 487
horns between males and females in living species of the genera Bos
and Bison. A comparison of males and females in old world species
of Bos, as B. indicus, B. caffer and B. grunniens, not only confirms
the diagnosis of the bovine section of the Bovide made by Flower
and Lydekker :* “horns of nearly equal size in both sexes,” but
shows also the relative position of the horns to the skull and their
curvature is subject to no specific sexual variations. In the existing
American Bison, to which all the fossil remains of Nearctic species
appear more closely related than to the Palearctic species, we have
excellent opportunities to determine the sexual characters of the
horns from very large suites of specimens in several of our museums
as well as among herds of the living animals. Of the latter the
author has examined the herd of the Philadelphia Zoological Society,
in which about twenty individuals, including six adult females, are
represented. Without exception, these females prove that the only
difference between male and female bison horns is in the smaller
basal calibre of the latter. With respect to curvature and angle of
growth from the skull they are singularly like the males in the same
herd. With respect to length, the maximum female horn fully
equalled the longest of any male horn examined, in this respect
showing a length relative to the size of body about 20 per cent.
greater than in the male.’ With respect to the shape of the horn-
cores in the two sexes, those of the female are more cylindrical
throughout, almost entirely lacking the slightly flattened contour
exhibited by the superior surface of male horn-cores.
It would seem fair to assume, therefore, where there is no evidence
to the contrary, that the extinct species of Bos and Bison were anal-
ogous to our existing forms in respect to the slight differences be-
tween the horns of males and females of the same species, and that
marked differences in size and diametric proportions of the adult
horn-cores, making due allowance for the more slender and eylin-
drical character of the female horn, are diagnostic specifie charac-
ters. On this basis we will return to a comparison of the horn-cores
of the Alaskan skull, No. 13,754, with Cope’s type of B. crampianus.
The basal processes of the left horn-core of crampianus are wholly
wanting, but the contour lines and sulcations of the original parts
indicate that but a small portion of the base of the core is missing.
® Mam. Liv. and Extinct, 1891, p. 360.
7 The relative length of sheath to core is greater in females than in males,
so that the cores of females average shorter than males of same age.
488 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
e
A conservative estimate of the original length of the horn-core, add-
ing two inches (50 mm.) to the broken apical portion and two more
for the basal part, makes it 800 mm. when measured along its pos-
terior are on a plane with the occiput; the same measurement in No.
13,754 is only 520 mm. The girth of core of crampianus measured half
way from base to tip, where the specimen is best preserved, is 305
mm., while that of No. 18,754 is 241 mm. These dimensions show that
in crampianus we have a species bearing horns more than 4 heavier
and longer than the large-horned Alaskan animal, and in this respect
showing a difference out of all proportion to the greatest known dif-
ference shown by adult males and females of the same species in exist-
ing bisons. Examining next the shape of the horns in the specimens
under consideration we note a striking difference, quite sufficient
when present in living species, to denote specific values. The greatest
diameter of the horn-core of crampianus, measured ata point half way
between base and tip, is 105 mm., the least diameter 92 mm., the first
of these measurements being taken along a line parallel to the facial
plane and the second at right angles thereto. In No. 13,754 these
measurements are respectively 88 mm. and 67 mm., showing the
greater superior flatness of the horns of the Alaskan animal. A
median cross-section of the core of crampianus, in the words of its
describer, “is a triangle, with a broadly rounded apex.” Itis more
properly a truncated oval or ellipse, the flattened or hollowed
truncate portion corresponding with the posterior face of the core.
In No. 18,754 the same section presents a rounded hemispheric out-
line, the flat side of which is on a line with the facial plane and
forms the superior anterior face of the core, and the truncated side,
seen in crampianus, is replaced by a convex, rounded curve, falling
posteriorly into a larger one and terminating anteriorly quite
abruptly along the superior posterior edge, which forms a distinct
ridge at this part along the distal half of core.
The relations of No. 13,754 to crampianus being now made appar-
ent, it should be stated that the author considers the latter a syno-
nym of B. alleni Marsh, briefly described in the American Journal
of Science,® from a single horn core “ from the lower Pliocene of
Kansas.” The dimensions and curvature of this specimen, together
with the locality and geologie stratum from which it was taken,
duplicate too closely the characters and history of the crampianus
type to warrant any other conclusion, and the foregoing remarks
8 Am. Jour. Sci., 1877, No. LX XXI, p. 252, Appx.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 489
showing the relations of crampianus to No. 13,754 will, of course,
equally apply to B. allenit. The use of crampianus in the above
comparisons was necessitated by the writer’s inability to procure the
type of allent.
Prof. Marsh also described on the same page of the American
Journal two horn-cores of another and smaller and straighter-horned
bison from the lower Pliocene of Nebraska which he named Bison
jerox. Its specific distinction from B. alleniis, perhaps, well-founded
(although it is not enough smaller than that species not to be its
female), because of the straightness of its horns. In this respect
and in its much greater size it is, without a doubt, a different species
from that represented by the large Alaskan specimen No. 15,754.
Both ferox and alleni, of course, are not comparable to latifrons, and
both are as equally removed from antiquus (= crassicornis) as cram-
pianus has been shown to be.
Before making a final decision as to the status of this large Alas-
kan specimen it remains to consider some important questions of
synonymy and identity arising from the original description and
figures of crassicornis.
Richardson’s species erassicornis, as originally described in the
“ Zoology of the Voyage of the Herald,” is founded primarily on
the skull formerly secured by Captain Beechey at Eschscholtz Bay
and figured by Buckland in the appendix to Beechey’s Voyage.
This skull is figured by Richardson on Plate IX of his work, no
other reference being given in the headline of his article on this
species (p. 40). On page 42 he enumerates a “ No. 91,” stating:
“This number indicates the large horn-core, of which aside view
on the facial aspect is given in Plate XIII, fig. 1, and a view of the
coronal aspect in fig. 2, both of the natural size.” On the next
page he refers to this specimen, stating, after a comparison with
other remains from Alaska and with Bos primigenius—‘“it has
therefore been considered a horn-core of an older and probably a
male individual of the race that produced the skull marked No.
1 A, and to which, from the thickness of its horns, I have given the
distinctive epithet of crassicornis.”
Leidy, Allen and others have already almost conclusively shown
that crassicornis, based on the Beechey specimen as a type, is a syn-
onym which must yield priority of publication to antiquus of Leidy.
The fine series of specimens of fossil bison now in the Academy
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia confirms this conclusion. But
490 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
a comparison of the figures of the large horn-cores on Plate XIII of
Richardson’s work, which he also refers to crassicornis, shows unmis-
takable similarity to the horn-cores of the large-horned Alaskan
specimen from the University of Pennsylvania, No. 13,754. Not
only is the shape and curvature of these horn-cores, as figured by
Richardson, remarkably similar to those of No. 13,754, but the
measurements of the latter coincide almost exactly with those given
for the former. Indeed it would be almost impossible in a series of
hundreds of such skulls to find two individuals so nearly alike.
As has already been pointed out, we cannot account for the dif-
ference between Richardson’s type skull of crassicornis and the large
horn-cores which he attributes to a male of the same species, on the
ground of sex. There is little doubt that the Beechey type specimen
of crassicornis is of a male, and that the small, rounded horn-core,
which Richardson figured on Plate XIII in contrast with the large
ones under the name “ B. priscus,” is of a female antiquus (—erass-
icornis). An exactly similar specimen of same size and curvature
with its accompanying sheath is in the collection of the Academy,
being presented by Dr. B. Sharp, who secured it at Elephant Point,
Kotzebue Sound, Alaska. It is also worthy of mention that these
supposed female horns show a close analogy in their slenderness,
length and deep sulcation of cores as compared with that of the
supposed male specimens of “ crassicornis”’ from the same locality,
to the same characters in B. bison.
From the foregoing we may arrive at the following conclusions :
a. B. crassicornis, as described and figured by Richardson, is a com-
posite species; b. The name crassicornis was “first applied” and
“primarily related” to a type specimen “No.1 A,” Pl. IX, ¢,
which has been determined to be specifically the same as the type
of an earlier named species, B. antiquus, of which, therefore, B.
crassicornis becomes asynonym ; ¢c. Therefore, Canon XX VIII, and
“affirmation (f),” A. O. U. Code, the name ecrassicornis cannot ap-
ply to the other and large-horned species enumerated under that
name by Richardson; d. It having been demonstrated that this
large-horned species is identical with the Alaskan specimen, No.
13,754, which differs in many essential characters from any bison
yet named, therefore it is proposed ,to designate this species as:
Bison alaskensis sp. nov. Great Alaskan Bison. PI. XII, figs. 3 and 6.
Type from “Tundra back of Point Barrow, Alaska.” Ad. ¢,
No. 13,754, Col. of Mus. of Sci. and Art, Univ. of Penna. Basal
part of cranium with attached horn-cores in good condition. —
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 491
Syn. Bison erassicornis Richardson, Zool. Voy. Herald, 1854, pp.
42, 43, Pl. XIII, figs. 1 and 2 (including solely the references to
large $ horn-core “ No. 91”).
General characters.—Size intermediate between B. antiquus and
B. alleni; frontal breadth equalling that of B. latifrons, the occi-
pital development much weaker. Horn-cores strongly curved up-
ward and forward, their tips reaching behind the plane of the occi-
put; greatly flattened and smooth superiorly, broadly rounded and
deeply furrowed inferiorly, showing a rounded hemispheric outline
in median cross-section as contrasted with type of crampianus (=
alleni). Frontal and occipital characters as in B. bison and its
other extinct allies, when contrasted with Old World forms. Ratio
of length of single horn-core to breadth of frontals between horn-
cores much smaller than in type of crampianus’ (—=alleni) and Jati-
frons. Ratio of greatest median diameter of horn-core to the least
median diameter of same, much less than in any known American
species of bison. For more detailed comparative characters con-
sult the preceding pages of this paper.
Measurements.—Greatest extent of horn-cores, measured between
tips, 1,180 mm.; chord of are of left horn-core from tip to superior
base, 405 mm. ; shortest frontal width between basilar processes of
horn-cores, 465 mm.; greatest interorbital width, 400 mm. ; length
from basal suture of nasals to posterior edge of occipital crest, meas-
ured along mesial frontal profile, 333 mm.; greatest mastoid
breadth, 8308 mm.; vertical height of occiput, from lower border of
foramen magnum to highest point of occipital crest, 174 mm.; great-
est width between the outer edges of the lateral wings of the con-
dyles, 162 mm.; girth of frontal shoulder of left horn-core, meas-
ured 20 mm. from basal border of core, 349 mm.; greatest girth
of left horn-core, measured along basal border, 410 mm.; girth of
left horn-core at a point 200 mm. from its inferior basal border,
241 mm.; greatest diameter of core at same point, 86 mm.; least
diameter of core at same point, 66 mm.; length of left horn-core meas-
ured along superior are (adding 15 mm. for portion of tip worn off),
497 mm.;.the same measured along inferior are of same, 526 mm.
Habitat and Geologie Position—Northern Alaska (and British
America?) from Kotzebue Sound northward ; living in early Plis-
tocene time, anterior to but perhaps overlapping the existence of the
* Judging by the dimensions of the antorbital section of the type of cram-
pianus, its cranium was about the same size as those of alaskensis and latifrons.
492 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
more southern B. antiquus, whose remains are found in the same
deposits along the southern range of alaskensis.
Note on “ Bison appalachicolus” Rhoads.
In the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia for the year 1895, pages 246 to 248 inclusive, the writer
described the horn-core of a fossil bovine from a limestone cave in
Pennsylvania as a new species, under the above name. A more
critical examination of the type of appalachicolus suggests the fol-
lowing remarks:
The portion of the frontal plate attached to horn-core presents us
with a sagittal suture showing that the forehead of this animal was
smooth and nearly level between the horn-cores, that the width of
the skull at this point was only 90 millimeters, and that there was a
well defined, low, osseous prominence along the sagittal suture.
These and other characters of the type bespeak a fully adult ani-
mal. A fragment originally associated with the type, from the
character of the matrix and its label, contains a nearly perfect cross-
section of the more distal portion of the same horn-core. At its
smaller end this piece of core measures transversely 48 by 40 mm.
It indicates a horn-conformation approaching more nearly to Ovibos
than Bison, in this respect verifying the supposed affinity of the
specimen to the musk ox rather than to the bison. The charac-
ters of the base of the horn-core, after careful comparison with cor-
responding parts in Ovibos and Bison, indicate it to belong to the
right side of the skull. This identification is also in the direction
of Ovibos, as it indicates that the horn had a forward drop like the
musk ox. Considered in this light, eppalachicolus presents us with
a small, flat-browed type of ox, lacking the osseous frontal rugosi-
ties of Ovibos, with horns resembling in their shape the extinct
Ovibos cavifrons in being more rounded and slender at base than O.
moschatus. It is much smaller than cavifrons and the drop of horns
very much less, in this respect being intermediate between cavifrons
and Bison antiquus. As originally pointed out, its relation to O.
bombifrons is very remote, and its place in the bovine series forms
an interesting link between Ovibos and Bison. It may stand mure
properly in nomenclature as Ovibos (Boétherium ?) appalachicolus.
Notes on the Woodland Bison of Boreal America, with Description
and Name.
For many years the existence of a race of buffalo peculiar to the
wooded tracts lying between the Liard and Peace Rivers, Great
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 493
Slave Lake, and the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains in Atha-
basea, has been asserted by hunters and travellers in this portion of
the great northwest. Many have been the opinions of naturalists
as to the relations of this so-called “ Wood Buffalo” to its congener
of the plains, the Bos bison of Linnzeus and the Bos americanus of
Gmelin and subsequent authors generally. Unfortunately the sub-
ject has, up to the present time, never got beyond the domain of
hearsay. theory and hunter’s stories, because no undoubted specimen
of typical Wood Buffalo has been made a basis for the critical de-
termination of its characters as compared with the buffalo of the
more southern plains and prairies. In searching among the litera-
ture touching upon the Wood Buffalo this radical deficiency became
more and more apparent, and it was with no small satisfaction that
the writer succeeded in discovering, through correspondence with
his friend, Professor J. Macoun, of the Canadian Geclogical Survey,
that a specimen of an adult male Wood Buffalo had recently been
added to their museum at Ottawa. The characters of this specimen
sufficiently confirm the more trustworthy statements of those who
have had a field acquaintance with the Wood Buffalo to show its
claim to recognition as a well defined race of Bison bison. Nor is
this to be wondered at when we consider the decidedly different en-
vironment and habits of this northern race, and from what we know
of other American mammals living in similar conditions, the differ-
entiation between the two had practically become a foregone conclu-
sion.
Before giving a detailed description of the Wood Buffalo it will be
of use to the reader to know something of its literary history.
Among the earliest notices we have of the existence of the American
bison in the limited area now exclusively tenanted by the woodland
race was Mackenzie’s narrative in his “ Travels to the Polar Sea,”
Vol. Il, pages 147, 155, 156, 377, where he states that he found
them abundant at the headwaters of Peace River. Sir John Rich-
ardson, in 1829, made the following statement of the northern range
of the bison in his “ Fauna Boreali Americana,” page 279: “ Great
Slave Lake, in latitude 60°, was at one time the northern boundary
of their range, but of late years, according to the testimony of the
natives, they have taken possession of the flat limestone district of
Slave Point on the north side of that lake, and have wandered to
the vicinity of Great Marten Lake, in latitude 63° or 64°.” On
page 282 of the same work he thus briefly refers to the woodland
494 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
form: “The bison which frequent the woody parts of the country
form smaller herds than those which roam over the plains, but are
said to be individually of greater size.” This is the first published
intimation known to the writer of a distinction between the two
forms. In Hind’s “ Narrative of the Canadian Exploring Expedi-
tions,” published in 1860, the relations of the wood and plains buf-
faloes are quite fully considered but no conclusions arrived at, as the
author got nearly all his information from hearsay. He says:
“Many old hunters with whom I have conversed on this subject,
aver that the so-called Wood Buffalo isa distinct species, and al-
though they are not able to offer scientific proofs, yet the difference
in size, color, hair and horns are enumerated as the evidence upon
which they base theirstatement. * * * Theskin ofthe so-called
Wood Buffalo is much larger than that of the common animal, the
hair is very short, mane or hair about the neck, short and soft, and
altogether destitute of curl, which is the common feature in the hair
or wool of the prairie animal. ‘Two skins of the so-called Wood
Buffalo, which I saw at Selkirk Settlement, bore a very close resem-
blance to the skin of the Lithuanian Bison, judging from the speci-
mens of that species which I have since had an opportunity of see-
ing in the British Museum. The Wood Buffalo is stated to be very
scarce, and only found north of the Saskatchewan and on the flanks.
of the Rocky Mountains. It never ventures into the open plains.”
Dr. J. A. Allen, whose painstaking monograph of the American
bisons,'® justly entitles him to speak authoritatively on the subject,
was unable to recognize the ‘‘ Wood ” or “ Mountain ” Buffalo as an
authentic variety or subspecies of B. bison, although his researches.
brought the subject up to the year 1876.
A short summary of his conclusions may be made as follows: a.
The Wood Buffalo as-defined by Hind (1. ¢c.) and the Mountain
Buffalo of the United States, referred to by hunters and travellers
in the Rocky Mountains, are probably identical in their so-called
differences from the plains animal in larger size and darker, shorter
and softer pelage. 6. The most trustworthy accounts of the Wood
and Mountain Buffaloes are so contradictory that it is almost impos-
sible to believe in its existence. c. There is ample scientific proof,
however, that the bisons formerly living in the high wooded por-
tions of the central Rocky Mountains averaged larger than those of
the plains. d. The difference in environment surrounding the
‘0Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., IV, 1876, pp. 39 to 41.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 495
mountain and woodland animal, should it be proven that such en-
vironment was the chosen and constant habitat of this so-called
race, would tend to develop just the differences claimed to distin-
guish them.
In 1885 Mr. E. T. Seton (now Ernest E. Thompson) read a paper
on “The Ruminants of the Northwest” before the Canadian Insti-
tute, Toronto. An extract from this paper relating to “The Wood
Buffalo” was published in 1886 in the Proceedings of the Institute,
pages 114 to 117. This paper adds somewhat to our previously
published knowledge of the animal in question, but has the same
defects which embarrassed the investigations of previous authors,
absolute lack of material for comparison. Mr. Seton mentioned
that both tne Indians and a Mr. E. Mignault, who spent twelve
years on the Peace River in the service of the Hudson Bay Co.,
aver the Wood Buffalo to be a distinct species, keeping entirely
aloof from their plains relatives. As proof of this he says that
“the last Prairie Buffalo ever seen in the valley was killed in 1866.
It was a solitary, mangy bull, a complete outcast, and this need not
to have been his condition had the Wood Buffaloes, [of that same
region] been his immediate kindred.” Mr. Seton seems convinced
that his “Wood Buffalo” is a good “variety,” but, like all who
wrote before him, dares not assign it a distinctive scientific name,
ealling it ‘“‘ Bison americanus var.?” He also advances the theory
(and there are many reasons for adopting it) that our plains buffalo
is a degenerate, modern offshoot of the ancient woodland stock,
which last named species exclusively inhabited the country before
the prairies, as such, existed. Parallel instances which he cites in
support of this theory are the timber and prairie wolves of the same
regions and the timber and barren-ground caribou.
In Chapter X, pages 141 to 159 of his book, “ Barren Ground of
Northern Canada,’ Warburton Pike, Esq. describes a hunt for
Wood Buffalo in February, 1890, on a tributary of Buffalo River,
about 50 miles south of its outlet into the southern waters of Great
Slave Lake. This is the first authentic published account, written
by an eye witness, of the country exclusively inhabited by the Wood
Bison, and the only specific account of a hunt for this race of buf-
falo by so competent an observer.
Mr. Pike is ‘‘ inclined to think that the very slight difference in
appearance [of the Wood Buffalo] is easily accounted for by cli-
matic influences, variety of food and the better shelter of the woods.”
496 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF . ELSaF
This is all he has to say regarding the main subject of the foregoing
discussion. It is quite sufficient, however, to show that he recog-
nized a difference and attributed it to well known laws upon which
the systematist bases his limitations of subspecies. His remarks re-
garding the country and the buffaloes of the region extending from
the Liard River and Great Slave Lake to the Peace River, on the
east side of the Rocky Mountains, are of great interest. “Scattered
over this huge extent of country,” he continues, “are still a few
bands of buffalo. Sometimes they are heard of at Forts Smith and
Vermilion, sometimes at Fort St. John close up to the big mount-
ains on Peace River, and occasionally at Fort Nelson on the south
branch of the Liard. It is impossible to say anything about their
numbers as the country they inhabit is so large, and the Indians,
who are few in number, usually keep to the same hunting ground.”
Describing the scene of his final hunt, he says: ‘“ Prairie and timber
were about in equal proportion. * * * About noon we found
the track that we had been looking for, easily distinguishable from
the many tracks of moose and woodland caribou that we had crossed.
Little Francois made a capital approach, and after a couple of hours
walk we sighted a band of eight buffalo feeding in a small wood-
surrounded swamp.”
In the Smithsonian Reports for 1896, pages 407 to 412, Mr. W.
T. Hornaday devotes considerable attention to the “ Wood or
Mountain Buffalo.” It is disappointing to find that in all his re-
searches concerning the buffalo our author brings us no nearer a
solution of the question, for he never saw a specimen of this sup-
posed variety. In the absence of direct evidence and with an evi-
dent misconception of the reputed size of the woodland form, he
proposes a theory to occount for the relatively “smaller” propor-
tions of that race! He concludes that “at present there is not the
slightest ground for considering that the ‘ Mountain Buffalo’ or the
‘Wood Buffalo’ is entitled to rank even as a variety of Bison amer-
acanus.”
One of the latest and most reliable published references to the
wood buffalo appeared in “ Forest and Stream,” Oct. 23, 1897, page
323. It is from the report of Inspector Jarvis, sent to the far north
by the Canadian Government with instructions regarding game, etc.,
and reads: “ I have taken great pains in making thorough inquir-
ies as possible in connection with the buffalo, their habits, number,
and range. The range of a scattered band of about three hundred
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 497
is from Peace Point to Salt River, and from Salt River to within
twenty miles of Fort Resolution, on Great Slave Lake.”
Through the courtesy of Mr. G. B. Grinnell the writer was put in
communication with Mr. H. I. Moberly, of the Hudson Bay Co., at
Winnipeg, whose personal acquaintance with the woodland and
plains buffaloes renders his opinion of much value regarding their
so-called distinctions. Mr. Moberly writes as follows in answer to
a set of questions on the points in controversy :—
WILLOUGHBY, Sask, N. W. T., November 9, 1897.
S. N. Rhoads, Esq.
Dear Str.—I have to acknowledge receipt of -your letter dated
29th ult., and will be glad to give you as full particulars as I can
regarding the Buffalo :—1st, as to size: They are much larger than
the Plains Buffalo. In full-grown animals they are from 100 to 200
Ibs. heavier. 2d, relative length of limbs: They are longer limbed
and longer in the body than the plains’ ones. 3d, length of horn:
The horns of the Wood Buffalo are nearly or fully twice the length
of the plains’ ones, and much straighter. 4th, fur: The long fur [of
head, neck and shoulders] is longer and more of a silky fur than
the plains’ ones, and the under fur thicker and finer pelt, caused, no
doubt, by the high latitude they live in. 5th, habitat and habits:
They lived formerly from the beginning of the woody country north
of the Saskatchewan to Great Slave Lake, and further north along
the east slope of the Rocky Mountains. At present there are not
more than two hundred and fifty to three hundred alive, and they
are in two bands, one on the lower Peace River, north of it, and
run from close to Great Slave Lake at Peace Point, which is some
ninety miles below Fort Vermilion. The other is on the upper
Hay River and ranges between Peace River and the Liard River,
and run down some two hundred and fifty miles east of the Rocky
Mountains and up to the foot of the Rocky Mountains. I certainly
think they are a different animal from the Plains Buffalo. One
reason is that formerly, when they were both numerous and met
time and again on the edge of the timber line, I have never known
any [of one kind] to go with another band [of the other kind].
The Wood Buffaloes live principally on the small branches of birch
and willows, although at times they also eat grass. I think there is
as much difference between them [wood and plains animals] as there
is between the Wood Caribou and the small Barren Ground ones,
which [species] meet every winter but never join together. I am
498 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
not aware of any specimen of the Wood Buffalo that has been
stuffed, but I know that formerly some heads were sent out to Sir
George Simpson, who was the Governor of the Hudson’s Bay Co.
Hoping this may be of service to vou, I remain,
Yours truly,
H. I. Moser ty.
As previously remarked, Prof. John Macoun has kindly furnished
the writer with full data concerning the mounted specimen of Wood
Buffalo in the Ottawa Museum, and it is upon this specimen that
the following description is based. It was carefully mounted by
Ward, of Rochester, New York, in a tightly closed iron and glass
ease. In consequence, Prof. Macoun was unable to get access to it
for more exact measurements.
Bison bison athabasce subsp. nov. Woodland Bison.
Type :—ad. 3, in the Geological Museum, Ottawa, Canada. Pre-
sented through Warburton Pike, Esq., by the Hudson Bay Com-
pany. Secured presumably (fide Prof. J. Macoun) in March, 1892,
by Indians within fifty miles southwest of Fort Resolution, Great
Slave Lake. Specimen consists of well-mounted skin, with accom-
panying skull and horn-cores separate, all in one glass and iron
case.
Syn. Bos or Bison americanus (= Bison bison) of authors, in part.
“Bison americanus, var.?” Seton [Thompson], Proc. Canad.
Inst., ITI, 1886, p. 114.
General Characters.—Size larger, colors darker, horns slenderer,
much longer and more incurved and hair more dense and silky
than in B. bison.
Description of type specimen from data furnished by Professors
J. Macoun and H. A. Ward: Pelage everywhere dense and silky ;
short and fine over much of hinder half of body, becoming very
dense and curly and long anteriorly, especially on shoulders and
neck and also quite long on the frontal aspect. Color along crest of
hump and vertebral line to rump “light brown,” shading in all di-
rections to darker brown and becoming almost black on the whole
head, legs and belly. “ Looking at head and legs you would say at
once they were black.” Ears, muzzle, hoofs and horns and distal
half of tail black.
Horns (on mounted skin) very long and strongly recurved.
“Curved inward so as to come towards the eye within two inches of
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 499
the line of the base;” nearly semicircular in exterior outline, but
more abruptly incurved along terminal third. Horn-cores of de-
tached skull strongly curved, directed at base “ slightly downward”
below frontal plane, “then outward and upward, the tips slightly
incurved, the general] direction of core being slightly backward; a
line drawn from middle of orbit to tip of core intersecting base of
core higher than in Bison bison.” Horn-cores nearly circular in
section at base, becoming slightly flattened above, medially, “ with
an obscure ridge below.”
Measurements.—(Sent by collector with skin to Prof. Frank A.
Ward). “ Height at shoulders, 1,703 millimeters ; height [to rump]
just in front of hind legs, 1,602 mm.; total length [of head and
body, without tail ?] 2,846 mm.”
Skull: (measurements sent by Mr. J. F. Whiteaves, zoologist of
Canadian Geological Survey).—Frontal width, between bases of
horn-cores, 343 mm.; length of horn-core measured along superior
curve, 293 mm.; greatest depression of superior are of horn-core
below a line connecting the tip and superior base of core, 102 mm.;
horns (on mounted specimen) measured along the inferior curve,
533 mm.; shortest distance from tip of horn to its superior base,
229 mm.
Habitat.— W ooded uplands of the Northwest Territories, formerly
from the east slope of the Rocky Mountains to the 95th meridian,
and from latitude 63° to latitude 55°; probably ranging south
along the Rocky Mountains to the United States.
Remarks.—The great size, darkness of color, and character of horn
and horn-core in the type of Bison bison athabasce, granting that it
is typical of the form known as the Wood Bison, are quite sufficient
to distinguish it from the plains animal and fully justify the opin-
ions uf many hunters and travellers as to its separability from the
latter. The characters of the skull alone are sufficient to warrant
the distinction. In the type the frontal breadth between the bases
of horn-cores is equal to that of the old male specimen of fossil
bison (Pl. XII, fig. 2) from California, which Leidy figured as “ B.
latifrons” in the Geological Survey of the Territories; and in this
_respect is more than 50 mm. wider than the largest old male skull of
B. bison in the museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
11 Prof. Macoun sends the following measurements from the mounted speci-
men :—‘‘ Height at shoulder, 1,779 mm.; length without the tail, 2,821 mm. ;
length of horn 458 mm. ; circumference of horn at base 318 mm.”
500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Philadelphia. In athabasce the relative length of the horns and horn-
cores to the size of the skull is about the same or even greater than
in antiquus, but on the other hand they are much more slender and
recurved than in B. bison. In their abrupt curvature they resem-
ble B. scaphoceras, but in their relative slenderness they are farth-
est from that species of any of our American species except the
straight and long-horned Jlatifrons. Judged solely by horn charac-
ters their place in the chronological series would appear to be the
latest of all our known species, with the minimum of calibre and
the maximum of curvature ; but the weight of evidence favors their
position between B. bison and the most recent fossil species.
Below is given a list of the living and extinct species of American
bisons now recognized as valid, with their original references and
most important synonyms. . The type localities, probable geographic
distribution and probable sequence in time are also given. Of the
fossil species the following were probably contemporaneous or closely
sequent: B. alleni, B. ferox” and B. scaphoceras in middle and later
Pliocene time; B. alaskensis, B. latifrons and B. antiquus in earlier
and middle Pleistocene time; and “B. latifrons” (so-called, of
Leidy, from California) forming a connecting link in later Pleisto-
cene time with B. bison through B. bison athabasce.
1. Bison alleni Marsh. Amer. Jour. Sci., 1877, p. 252 (= B. crampianus Cope,
Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1895, p. 456).
Lower Pliocene of Kansas. Great Plains of Middle North A mer-
ica.
2. Bison ferox Marsh. Amer. Jour. Sci., 1877, p. 252.
Lower Pliocene of Kansas. Great Plains of Middle North Amer-
ica.
8. Bison scaphoceras (Cope). Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1895, p. 457.
Upper Pliocene of northern Nicaragua. Mountain regions of
southern Mexico and Central America.
4. Bison latifrons (Harlan). Fauna Amer., 1825, p. 273.
Pleistocene of eastern Kentucky. United States east of the Rocky
Mountains.
5. Bison alaskensis Rhoads. Spec. nova (I. ¢.) (= B. crassicornis Richardson, _
Zool. Voy. Herald, 1854 (in part), pp. 42 & 43, Pl. XITI, figs. 1 & 2).
Pleistocene of northern Alaska. Arctic America, east of the
Mackenzie River and north of the Arctic Circle.
12 The status of ferox, especially in regard to its relations to latifrons, is hard.
to determine. It is, however, close to latifrons, of which it probably was the-
nearest ancestor,
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 501
6. Bison antiquus Leidy. Proc.-Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1852, p. 117, (= B. eraasi-
cornis Richardson, Zool. Voy. Herald, 1854 [restricted type], pp. 40 & 41, Pl. IX).
Pleistocene of eastern Kentucky. North America, from north-
western Alaska to southeastern Georgia and Texas.
7. Bison —— sp. 2143 (—“B. latifrons’’ Leidy, Rep. U.S. Geol. Surv. Terr., I, p.
253, Pl. XXVIUI, figs. 4 & 5).
Pleistocene of western California. Pacific slope, from Oregon
southward.
8. Bison bison athabasce subspec. nova (I. ¢.), (= B. bison’Auct. in part.=“ Wood
or Mountain Buffalo ’’).
Recent of northern Athabasca, N. W.T. Wooded uplands of the
Northwest Territories, from the east slope of the Rocky Mountains
to the 95th meridian, and from lat. 63° to lat. 55°; probably reach-
ing southward along the Rocky Mountains to the United States.
9. Bison bison (Linnzus). Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 72; (= B. americanus Gmelin, Syst.
Nat. Linn. I, 1788, p. 204).
Recent of Interior North America. Lowlands east of the Rocky
Mountains and west of the Allegheny Mountains, the Great Lakes
and Lake Winnipeg; and from the Saskatchewan River south to the
Gulf of Mexico, near lat. 25°.
EXPLANATION OF. PLATE XII.
Fig. 1. Bison bison (L.). Old male; Col. of Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila.,
No. 4,589; from the plains of the western United States.
Fig. 2. Bison californicus sp. nov. type. Old male; Col. Acad. Nat.
Sci., Phila. No. 297; from Pilarcitos Valley, near San
Francisco, California. Labelled “ Bison antiquus Leidy.”
The original of Leidy’s figures of ‘ Bison latifrons” (sic), U.
S. Geol. Surv. Terr., Vol. I, 1873, p. 253, Pl. XVIII, figs.
4&5.
Fig. 3. Bison alaskensis sp. nov. type. Old male; Col. of Mus. Sci.
and Art, Univ. of Penna., No. 13,754; from Tundra, near
Point Barrow, Alaska.
18 During the foregoing investigations the writer was in frequent cor-
respondence with Mr. F. A. Lucas, of the Smithsonian Institution, who is
preparing an illustrated monograph of American fossil bisons, and has kindly
given valued suggestions on controverted points. Having called his attention
to the radical differences between the type of Leidy’s B. antiquus and his
California specimen of so-called ‘‘/latifrons,’ Mr. Lucas now concurs in the
opinion that they are distinct species, and that the California species should
be given aname. It is therefore proposed that the name Bison californicus
be applied to it, the type of the species being No. 297, Col. Acad. Nat. Sci.,
Phila. For characters, etc., see Leidy references; also Pl. XII, fig. 2.
33
502 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Fig. 4. Bison latifrons (Harlan), type. Col. of Acad. Nat. Sci,
Phila. From Big Bone Lick, Kentucky.
Fig. 5. Bison crampianus (Cope), type. Col. of Acad. Nat. Sci.,
Phila., No. 3; from Wellington, Kansas.
Fig. 6. Bison alaskensis sp. nov., type. Rear view of specimen, No.
13,754 figured under No. 3, of same plate.
Nore.—Figures 1 to 5 inclusive were photographed on same
plate and as nearly at same facial angle as possible, to show their
comparative size and the curvature of horn-cores. Figure 6 was
photographed separately and on a larger scale, as will be noted on
comparison with figure 3 of the same specimen.
as
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 503
DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW FORMS OF PERIDERIS.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.
Perideris Kobeltin. sp.
Shell ovate, ventricose, whitish under an olivaceous yellow cuti-
cle, brownish in places. Surface obliquely plicatulate in the direc-
tion of growth lines, and above the periphery decussated by numer-
ous rather inconspicuous spiral impressed lines. Spire abruptly
contracted above, mucronate. Whorls about 63, the earlier 23
forming a mamillar projection, the rest rapidly widening, last whorl
swollen. Suture white from loss of cuticle, and minutely beaded.
Aperture oblique, reddish inside; lip obtuse, brown; columella
whitish, vertical rather straight, subtruncate below. Alt. 65, diam.
40, alt. of aperture 35 mm.
Cape Palmas, West Africa. Type in coll. A. N.S. P.
This species is evidently identical with Kobelt’s P. sauleydi
(Conehyl. Cab., p. 42, pl. 13, f.1, 2). It is far from being the species
so called by Joannis. It is likely that Kobelt had not seen Joannis’
original description and figure, from the fact that his reference to
that author is altogether incorrect ; and thus the misidentification
arose.
Perideris Saulecydi var. normalis n. var.
Shell resembling Achatina Saulcydi Joannis (Magazin de Zoolo-
‘gie, 1834, Classe V, pl. 50) in the general coloration, being white
streaked with livid purple, with some bluish suffusion, the pen-
ultimate whorl whitish with reddish flames. Whorls about 73, the
earlier 38 forming a mamillar mucro, higher and more distinctly
differentiated than in Saulcydi, those following forming a more taper-
ing cone than in Sauleydi, the last not perceptibly constricted below
the suture. Suture maryined below by a narrow crenate or beaded
band. Sculpture: unequally, obliquely plicatulate, sometimes with
subobsolete spirals on penultimate whorl, the last whorl with faint,
obliquely descending, scar-like impressions at right angles to the
growth-lines, Aperture oblique, dark purplish-brown inside ; parie-
tal wall orange-brown from the retention of the cuticle by the parie-
504 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
tal glaze. Columella somewhat concave, passing gradually into the
thin basal lip. .
. Alt. 76, diam. 40, alt. of aperture, 36 mm.
Alt. 74, diam. 40, alt. of aperture, 35 mm.
“Taboo, Africa” (Robert Swift coll.in A. N.S. Phila.).
This form differs from P. Sauleydi (Joannis) in being more elon-
gated and slender throughout, the last whorl not concave above,
aperture consequently not acuminate posteriorly as in that species ;
the spire more elongated and tapering, and the terminal “ mamelon”
more pronounced.
It is also dextral; but as the apparent sinistrality of Joannis’
species may possibly (though not probably) be due to an artist’s
failure to reverse, I do not place great stress upon this feature.
Illustrations of this and the preceding form will appear in the
Manual of Conchology in due time.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 505
PROCEEDINGS OF A MEETING HELD IN COMMEMORATION OF
HARRISON ALLEN, M.D., AND GEORGE HENRY HORN, M.D.
In compliance with a resolution adopted by the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia a meeting was held December 31,
1897, in conjunction with kindred societies, to commemorate the
services rendered to science by Dr. Harrison Allen and Dr. George
H. Horn. The Chair having been taken by Dr. Henry Skinner,
Chairman of the Committee of Arrangements, the following papers
were read :—
BIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES OF HARRISON ALLEN AND
GEORGE HENRY HORN.
BY EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D.
The period of the Academy’s history with which Doctors Allen
and Horn are first identified, the years of the early ’60’s, was bright
with both accomplishment and promise. Made notable by the work
of the illustrious veterans who were still active and by that which
might be hoped for from those who were just beginning their careers,
it was probably the most brilliant epoch in the history of the so-
ciety. But few of the great collections which have since come into
prominence were in existence. The Smithsonian Institution was then
rather a distributing agency than a store-house of scientific material,
and museums everywhere were benefited by itsactivity. The United _
“States Government had not become, through the Agricultural De-
partment, the National Museum, and the Geological Surveys, a
formidable rival in the publication of scientific papers, and the
work of Gill, Meek, Hayden, Coues, Stimpson, Kennicott, Yarrow
and others was made known to the scientific world most promptly
and accurately through the Proceedings of this Academy.
In the old building at the corner of Broad and Sansom Streets,
Leidy, easily first among equals, pursued his paleontological studies
in a little, dark and dusty room on the first floor of the museum,
his brilliant microscopical investigations being carried on more
comfortably at home. The results were reported in either case to
the meetings of the Academy, and could generally be depended on
to render them interesting, even though nothing else were forth-
coming.
506 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Cassin had the western room of the library filled with trays of
mounted birds and scores of ornithological volumes which no one
about the place dared to touch, for Cassin was very much of an
autocrat and was impatient of rules. Books and specimens, how-
ever, were made good use .of, especially on Sundays, for the
exigencies of bread-winning left him but little time during the
week for his favorite study.
S. B. Buckley occupied the herbarium, a long, narrow, dark room
in the southeast corner of the second museum floor. He had pre-
sented and published some interesting observations on ant-life, and
was then working up his collection of Texan plants, the publication
of his results calling forth savage criticism from Asa Gray, which
created quite a stir at the time and gave poor Elias Durand, the
Director of the Herbarium, more than one bad quarter of an hour.
The President, Isaac Lea, was reading by title his contributions
to the genus Unio and other conchological papers, synopses of which
were published in the Proceedings, to be afterward expanded into
parts of the Journal, sumptuously illustrated at the expense of the
author by some of the finest lithographs ever made in America.
The place left vacant in 1850 by Samuel George Morton had been
filled by James Aitken Meigs, who, after serving a brief term as
Librarian, was devoting all the time he could spare from a rapidly
growing practice to the study of anthropology. Thirty years later
the Academy came into possession of the library he was then col-
lecting and a portion of the fortune resulting from his successful
professional work.
The sound of the fierce battle between Lea and Conrad had died
away to a distant reverberation, and the latter, as efficiently as his
dyspepsia would allow, was describing fossil mollusca and making
autograph drawings on stone of his new species. His activity was
greatly stimulated by the facilities for publication supplied by the
newly started American Journal of Conchology, and by the interest
in his work displayed by the editor, George W. Tryon, Jr.
Thomas B. Wilson had just presented the superb collections of
birds which for many years were, and perhaps still are, the crown-
ing glory of the Academy. They had been deposited from time to
time since 1845, and Wilson had even made an addition to the
Academy’s building for their arrangement, but they only became
the absolute property of the society in March, 1860.
We find the Curators at this time complaining that in spite of
Wilson’s addition the building was rapidly becoming too small for the
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 507
collections, a disadvantage which, in November, 1865, resulted in the
appointment of a committee “ to devise,” in the language of the reso-
lution, “ methods for advancing the prosperity and efficiency of the
Academy by the erection of a building of a size suitable to contain
the collections.”
In the intervals of cruises, Dr. Ruschenberger was introducing
improvements in the administration of affairs, and to his energy
and devotion is due the ultimate success of the Committee on
Building then appointed. Some administrative reforms were indeed
required, for although the Academy had been brought to the
distinguished position it then held by the voluntary labors of those
interested in the advancement of knowledge, the absence of
responsibility was productive of serious disadvantages. ' Up to this
time no one connected with the institution, except the janitor, had
received continuous compensation for service rendered, although
appropriations were made from time to time for special work as oe-
casion required. The services of an Assistant Librarian were se-
cured in January, 1862, at the munificent compensation of two dol-
lars a week, and an assistant to the Curators was appointed some time
after. Dr. Leidy, then, as during the rest of his life, Chairman of
the Curators, had been heard to declare that if the Academy were
in possession of everything it had ever owned, a building twice the
size of the one then occupied would be required to house the collec-
tions. The losses were due partly to the destructive action of time,
partly to bad museum methods, and partly, it is to be feared, to a
liberal interpretation of the law of mewn and tuum. The enthusi-
astic young naturalists of the period were allowed to rearrange and
disarrange the collections as they pleased, each according to his own
ideas of classification. Infested birds were carried to the cellar by
the hundred and baked in a hot oven until they became as brittle
as punk. The insects, especially, were entirely neglected because of
the activity of the recently founded American Entomological So-
ciety and the serious disagreement then existing between Thomas B.
Wilson and John L. LeConte. A valuable collection of insects was
being rapidly reduced to dust, and an enthusiastic young ento-
mologist of the time proposed transferring the few remaining good
butterflies bodily to his own collection, so that they might be pre-
served from destruction. It was not the Curators or the members
of the Entomological Committee, but the Assistant Librarian who
prevented the carrying out of his virtuous intention. As for the
508 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
library: a distinguished ornithologist has recently been heard to
lament that in Cassin’s time he could take away any book he wanted.
The by-law governing the case then, as now, forbade the removal
of books from the building, and, although this gentleman doubtless
returned all he borrowed, the same, it is to be feared, could not be
said of others who violated the law. Although then without a cent
of endowment, this department of the Academy was kept well up
with the times by exchange of publications and the munificence of
Dr. Thomas B. Wilson,
The meetings were interesting and well attended, and the annual
volume of the Proceedings, thanks to the absence of competition,
had attained dimensions not since reached.
The most hopeful feature, however, of that epoch, was the galaxy
of young men who were then appearing on the scene, some of whom
turned out to be brilliantly successful, while others were far from
reaching the goal of their ambition.
Cope had been elected a member in July, 1861, although prior to
that he had been an active worker in the Academy. The Curators
had reported in 1859: “The care of the herpetological cabinet,
which for some time had lost the valuable services of Dr. Hallowell
in consequence of illness, has now been undertaken by E. D. Cope,
a young man who gives promise of much future usefulness both to
the Academy and to Natural History.” He contributed three
papers to the Proceedings that year, and seven in 1860. All his
time was at this period devoted to herpetology, his work being done
in a small room on the first gallery floor. It was filled to overflow-
ing with books, bottles, the remains of luncheons, old clothes and
other impedimenta. His personal peculiarities were quite as pro-
nounced then as a later period of his career, and he already gave
promise of becoming what he was afterward justly said to be: the
greatest naturalist born on American soil.
Directly beneath Cope’s quarters, in the northeast corner of the
museum floor, was the mammalogical room where John Hamilton
Slack, a man of great versatility, laid ambitious plans for a mono-
graph of the quadrumana. As first proposed, it was to take the
form of a dignified quarto or even folio, to be richly illustrated at
the expense of the author, but it eventually appeared as a modest
paper of sixteen pages in the Proceedings for 1862. His ability as
a musician and amateur conjuror interfered with his scientific work.
Versatility has its disadvantages.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 509
Tryon’s first paper had been contributed in 1861. He was an
indefatigable worker, and gave up his interest in a lucrative busi-
ness to devote himself to science. He was most generous in his
appreciation and encouragement of others. Hestarted the American
Journal of Conchology in 1865, and, in 1879, the Manual of Conch-
ology, which is still issued by the Section founded by him. His
business training and strict attention to details of management en-
abled him, strange to say, to make both of these unpromising enter-
prises, yield him a revenue, all of which, with much more, was, on
his death, left to his favorite department of the Academy. In
quite a special sense, therefore, his work continues.
Gabb had been appointed a Jessup Fund student, and was en-
gaged in those studies which enabled him to render good service on
the Geological Survey of California, and to act as Director of the
Survey of San Domingo. The income of the Jessup Fund had be-
come available for the assistance of young naturalists in 1860, the
first recipient of benefits being Charles Conrad Abbott, then en-
gaged in the study of ichthyology, but since celebrated for his grace-
ful contributions to the literature of popular natural history. Dur-
ing the first years of the existence of the Fund, nearly all the young
workers in the Academy, including the subjects of this notice, and
several of more mature years, were assisted from the income thereof.
The Jessup Fund was then, and continues to be, productive of most
desirable results.
Prominent in this group of aspiring young naturalists were Har-
rison Allen and George Henry Horn. It is especially fitting, and,
indeed, almost unavoidable, that the services rendered by them to
science should be commemorated jointly, as their lives were laid in
parallel lines to a singular degree. Horn was born in 1840, Allen
one year later; they were pupils of the Central High School at the
same time, classmates and members of the same graduating class in
the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania; their
work in the Academy began about the same time, they were both
Jessup Fund students, they served contemporaneously in the medi-
cal corps of the army during the closing years of the war; they were
to a limited degree, collaborators in their scientific work ; they each
held the office of Corresponding Secretary in the Academy, they
were members of the Academy’s Standing Committees at the same
time; they sat together at the Council Board until their work was
done, and they died within ten days of each other—the elder after a
510 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
trying period of incapacity, the other in the full enjoyment, to the
last, of those scientific pursuits which had rendered his entire life
tranquil and happy.
Harrison ALLEN was born in Philadelphia, April 17, 1841.
He was admitted to the Central High School in February, 1855,
from the Hancock Boys’ Grammar School. He then resided at
No. 352 N. 6th St. In consequence of straitened means, he was
compelled to leave the High School in March of the following year
for a position in a hardware store, where, however, the conditions.
were so uncongenial that he remained but a short time. A subse-
quent experiment proved that life on a farm was quite as foreign to
his inclinations as the commercial engagement.
Impelled by his innate love of science, and taking advantage of
the only avenue at first open to him in the desired direction, he then
entered the dental office of Dr. J. Foster Flagg and there pursued
his studies with such earnestness and fidelity as to secure for him-
self the warm and enduring regard of his preceptor. His dental
studies were, however, merely the introduction to his life work. He
did not matriculate at the Dental College, and that he had no inten-
tion of doing so is evident from a letter which the youth wrote to his
mother in 1860, during his course in medicine. An extract is of
special interest because of the definite aims and ambitions defined
by him for his guidance on the threshold of his active life :—‘* You
are sufficiently aware of my history,” he writes, “to know that it.
was not my own choice in taking up dentistry, and that all along I
employed my spare time in reading medical books. From this
a conclusion could easily be drawn that I intended studying medicine.
The truth is that I was marked for medicine; that was my
earthly goal, and I intended to reach it through thick and thin.
That was the resolution mentally formed and recorded, and I am
now fulfilling it. . It is my ambition to be known as a good
physician and a good man, and I know that many men having
greater natural abilities and higher ambitions than I, have achieved
much more than I ever will, and yet commenced at a much lower
round of the ladder. I am hopeful, and intend to be industrious
—I can say and do no more.”
In 1861 he presented a thesis under the title “ Entozoa hominis,”
and received the degree of Doctor of Medicine from the University
of Pennsylvania. In July of the same year he published descrip-
tions of four African bats, his first contribution to science.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 511
Short as had been his time in the High School, there is little
doubt that his love of natural history resulted from the influence ex-
erted by Dr. Henry MeMurtrie, who then filled the chair devoted to
that subject. At least one collecting expedition in company with
Horn and two or three other school-mates was referred to many
years later by Dr. Allen as the occasion of lasting delight, and the
fact that he named the Mexican bat which formed the subject of his
second paper Centurio McMurtrii, after his old teacher, proves that
he held him in deservedly kind remembrance. The immediate
cause, however, of the first publication was probably the interest
taken in the collections of Paul B. DuChaillu, which had just been
secured by subscription for the Academy.
Dr. Allen was elected a member of the Academy in 1862, his pro-
posers being Messrs. Cassin, Cope and Cleborne. He had, however,
very little time for natural history. After serving a year as resi-
dent physician in the Philadelphia Hospital, he was commissioned
as Acting Assistant Surgeon in the United States Army, January
31, 1862, and for the next four years was actively engaged profes-
sionally in the field or in military hospitals. His first assignment
was to the Broad Street General Hospital, Philadelphia, from
which he was transferred, May 17th, to Cliffburne General Hospital,
Washington, D.C. He was given the rank of Assistant Surgeon,
July 30th of the same year, and until the February following was
in the field with the artillery of the 3d Corps in the Army of the
Potomac. He then served in the Douglas, the Lincoln and the Carver
Hospitals of Washington, the Fairfax Seminary Hospital of Alex-
andria, Virginia, and, from December, 1864, until September, 1865,
he was in responsible charge, at the age of twenty-four years, of the
Mt. Pleasant General Hospital in Washington. From September
12th to October 12th, 1865, he enjoyed a well-deserved leave of
absence. On his return to duty he was again assigned to the Douglas
General Hospital, where he remained until December Ist. A week
later he resigned from the army with the rank of Brevet-Major.
During his period of duty in Washington he spent much of his leisure
time in the Smithsonian Institution where he was brought under the
influence of Professors Joseph Henry and Spencer F. Baird, men to
whom so many of the naturalists of that period were indebted for
inspiration and encouragement.
Of these months his friend and associate Dr. Theodore Gill writes :
“ While he was in charge of the Fairfax Seminary Hospital I visited
512 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
him several times and stayed some days each visit. He used to
bring or send an ambulance for me, and I remember the pleasure
IT had in the country, going there. I was much struck with the ad-
ministrative ability he displayed. Remember that he was a very
young man for such a place as he held, having a considerable staft
of assistants, all of whom, I think, were older than himself. He was
a rigid disciplinarian, and I heard he was complained of for keep-
ing aloof from his staff, but I am inclined to think he was wise in
doing so. He did not join with the hospital surgeons’ mess, but
had his meals served in a pleasant room, taking them alone or with
members of his staff or others whom he specially invited for each
occasion. His companionship was certainly very congenial to me,
and I presume, from the frequency and urgency of his invitations,
mine was to him. Our discussions were by no means confined to
medicine or even zoology. They embraced a wide range of subjects,
and I was often surprised to learn how multifarious were his sym-
pathies and how wide bis range of reading.”
On his return to Philadelphia he made an earnest but dignified
canvass for the Professorship of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy
in the Auxiliary Faculty of Medicine of the University, just then
endowed by Dr. George B. Wood. He was endorsed by strong
letters from American and foreign naturalists who recognized the
merit of his published works. He had no social backing; the influ-
ence he brought to bear on the Trustees of the University was
legitimately based on his standing as a zoologist, and was in marked
contrast to the campaign of at least one of his competitors.
Dr. Allen was the successful candidate. He held the position to
which he was then elected until 1879. His lectures on medical
zoology were so well received that, at the request of the class, he pre-
pared his Outlines of Comparative Anatomy and Medical Zoology,
the publication of which was, however, owing to professional en-
gagements, delayed until 1869. The volume is by no means the
least important of the author’s works, and it is of special interest in
the present connection inasmuch as the chapters on Hemiptera and
and Cantharis were contributed by Dr. Horn.
In the latter part of 1876, Dr. Francis Gurney Smith, the Profes-
sor of the Institutes of Medicine in the University, was unable to con-
tinue his course of lectures which was completed by Dr. Henry C.
Chapman. The course of 1877-78 was delivered by Dr. James
Tyson. On his resignation at the end of that term Dr. Allen was
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 513
appointed to fill the vacancy. He held the professorship until
1885, when he resigned because of increased professional work.
He was emeritus professor of the Institutes until 1891, when, on the
death of Dr. Leidy, he resumed his old position in the Auxiliary
Faculty which he held until last year. He also served for one year
as Director of the Wistar Museum.
On establishing himself in Philadelphia at the close of the war,
he at first engaged in the practice of general surgery. His love of
minute detail caused him to concentrate his attention on the affec-
tions of the upper air passages, his inclination to do so being, per-
haps, obscurely the result of his early dental studies. So successful
was he in his specialty that he soon became a recognized authority
in laryngology and rhynology, the latter science having, it may al-
most be said, originated in his diagnosis of disturbances of the nasal
mucous membranes and his careful descriptions of departures from
the normal anatomy of the facial region.
His professional and zoological work were equally distinguished
by untiring care in the elaboration of minute details, a characteris-
tic as evident in his first descriptions of bats as in his most recent
craniological studies. Had Dr. Allen been an artist instead of a
physician he would have been a Meissonier rather than a Makart.
The scope of Dr. Allen’s interest in professional and scientific
work is clearly indicated by the positions he held in the Academy
and elsewhere, a brief statement of which is all that can be here
given :—
He was assistant to Wills’ Eye Hospital from 1868 to 1870; Sur-
geon to St. Joseph’s Hospital from 1870 to 1878 and visiting sur-
geon to the Philadelphia Hospital from 1874 to 1878.
He held the position of Professor of Anatomy in the Philadelphia
Dental College from 1866 to 1878. He was Vice-President of the
Pathological Society of Philadelphia in 1877; President of the
American Laryngological Association in 1886, of the American
Association of Anatomists from 1891 to 1893, and of the Anthro-
pometric Society at the time of his death. He served as judge in
the Section of Anthropology at the Columbian Exposition in 1898,
and was a member of the American Philosophical Society, the Bos-
ton Society of Natural History, the Biological Society of Washing-
ton, the Philadelphia County Medical Society, the Neurological So-
ciety of Philadelphia, the Historical Society of Texas, and Corre-
sponding Member of the Society of Natural Sciences of Chili. He
served as President of the Contemporary Club in 1894-1895.
514 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
It was in connection with the Academy, however, that nearly all of
his extra professional work was accomplished. He was but little in-
terested in administrative affairs, and was reluctant to accept official
positions the duties of which might interfere with his favorite stud-
ies. He served as Corresponding Secretary in 1867, and was a
member of the Council at intervals from 1876 until his death. He
also served on the Library Committee. He was instrumental in
founding the Anthropological Section and was its Director until
his death. He contributed his last scientific communication to one
of its meetings. The character and extent of the work accom-
plished in the Academy and elsewhere will be considered by com-
petent judges of its value.
Dr. Allen was married to Miss Julia Colton, Dee. 29,1869. His
widow, a son and a daughter survive him. He found rest and re-
laxation from his professional and scientific work in literature, mu-
sic, and the sympathy and affection of a devoted domestic circle.
His summers were spent at his home in Sciasconset on Nantucket
Island, whence he would return in the fall invigorated by the out-
door life of a lover of nature.
In his intercourse with his professional brethern and his scientific
associates, Dr. Allen was always helpful and appreciative. A certain
reserve and dignity of bearing gave assurance of intellectual force
which was fully realized on a close acquaintance with the man and
his work. He was precise and careful in his statements, charitable
in his judgment, and generous in his dealings with the poor, the
weak and the sick. His religious convictions were earnest and
definite. He was brought up as a Hicksite Friend, but later in life
he accepted the doctrines of Trinitarian Christianity, and, in the
spring of the present year, he was baptized according to the rites of
the Protestant Episcopal Church.
In the summer of 1895 he had an attack of indisposition which
he seems to have regarded as a premonition of the affection which,
two years later, proved fatal. Last April he underwent an opera-
tion for appendicitis from which he survived only through the
prompt action of his physicians in the administration of stimulants
and the employment of artificial respiration. His summer at Scias-
conset, seemed, as usual, to have strengthened his vitality. He re-
sumed his professional work on his return to Philadelphia, and made
frequent and sometimes prolonged visits to the Academy where he
completed some anthropological investigations, the results of which
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 515
will be published by the Wagner Free Institute of Science and the
United States Government.
He presided at the meeting held November 12th in commemora-
tion of his life-long friend the late Edward D. Cope, in the rooms of
the American Philosophical Society. Some of those who were pres-
ent on that occasion were painfully aware that Dr. Allen was far
from well. Two days later, on the afternoon of Sunday, November
14th, he was seized with an attack of angina pectoris which resulted
in death.
In 1860 he had written to his mother: “it is my ambition to be
known as a good physician and a good man.” Those who knew Dr.
Allen best as a physician and a man, know with what completeness
of fulfilment he had lived his life.
GeEOoRGE Henry Horn was born in Philadelphia, April 8, 1840.
His preliminary education was received in the Jefferson Boys’
‘Grammar School, from which he entered the Central High School,
July, 1853. He took the full course and graduated with the
degree of Bachelor of Arts, February 11, 1858. The degree of
Master of Arts was conferred on him by his Alma Mater, July,
1863. At the time of his graduation he lived at the southwest cor-
ner of 4th and Poplar Streets, where his father was the proprietor of
a drug store.
Almost immediately after leaving the High School he matricula-
ted in the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania.
He took his degree in medicine in 1861, his thesis being entitled
“< Sprains.”
While yet a student of medicine he contributed his first papers to
the Proceedings of the Academy. He did not immediately devote
himself to the specialty in which he later became so distinguished,
his first three contributions to science being descriptions of new
species of recent and fossil corals and comments on Milne-Ed-
wards’ classification of those organisms.
There is every reason to believe that his incentive to the study of
natural history was received, as in Dr. Allen’s case, from the profes-
sors of the High School. In addition to MeMurtie’s lectures, Dr.
B. Howard Rand, at that time Recording Secretary of the Acad-
emy, was liberal in the distribution of tickets of admission to the
Museum, and many of his pupils found profitable occupation for
their Friday afternoons in visiting the collections.
516 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Horn was early thrown into association with Dr. John L. Le-
Conte, whose prominence as a coleopterologist was undisputed. The
mutual regard then established led to community of study and was.
only interrupted by death.
Dr. Horn’s fourth paper, also published in 1860, was on new spe-
cies of North American coleoptera in the cabinet of the American
Entomological Society. His later contributions to science, the ex-
tent and value of which will be treated of by one eminently qualified
to do so, were, with one or two exceptions, devoted to this specialty,
as an authority on which Dr. Horn certainly had on rival in
America at the time of his death.
Having passed the required examination, Dr. Horn received a
commission as Assistant Surgeon in the United States Army, March
1, 1868. He was attached to the 2d California Cavalry, Depart-
ment of the Pacific, until July 14th of the following year, when he
was commissioned as surgeon of the 1st California Infantry Volun-
teers, remaining in that position until the term of service of the regi-
ment expired, Dec. 3, 1864. He was again mustered into service
May 22, 1865, as assistant surgeon of his old regiment, the 2d Cali-
fornia Cavalry, and commissioned as surgeon of the 2d California
Infantry, September 23, 1865. His service terminated with that of
the staff of his regiment, April 16, 1866.
During his military service in the west he improved the oppor-
tunity to make extensive additions to his collection of coleoptera,
and was intimately associated with the California Academy of Sci-
ences,
On his return to Philadelphia he devoted himself to the general
practice of medicine, his field being in the northwestern section of
the city, with which he had been identified nearly all his life, and
where he was held in the highest esteem by those to whom he min-
istered as a physician. He was especially skilful as an obstetrician,
and hundreds of families felt that they had suffered irreparable loss
when he retired from the duties of active practice a few years before:
his death.
Dr. Horn’s devotion to science was singularly undivided. Al-
though every obligation of his profession was regarded by him as
binding, he practised medicine merely as a means to anend. He
found at once his relaxation and intellectual profit when, after an
exhausting day of attendance on the sick, he was at leisure to pore
over his cherished insect-cases until far into the night. Not having
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 517
married, he was not distracted by domestic ties from his favorite
occupation, and for social engagements he cared but little. Art
and literature were to him outside issues, very well in their way, but
to be left to the cultivation of others. As a contributor to know-
ledge, his function was well-defined, and recognition of his success
as an entomologist was valued by him the more because of the sin-
gleness of his interest.
It is gratifying to know that such recognition was conveyed to him
in abundant measure by those who knew of the enduringly accurate
character of his work. He was one of the twelve honorary members
of the Entomological Society of Belgium, one of the sixteen honor-
ary members of the Entomological Union of Stettin, and one of the
eleven honorary members of the Entomological Society of France.
He was an active member of the Russian Entomological Society,
Correspondent of the Boston Society of Natural History, the Bio-
logical Society of Washington, the Kansas Academy of Sciences,
and the Zoologico-Botanical Society of Vienna. He was also a
member of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia, the Entomolo-
gical Societies of New York, Washington and Newark, and honor-
ary member of the Feldman Collecting Social. He was Librarian
and one of the Secretaries of the American Philosophical Society at
the time of his death.
On the death of his valued friend, Dr. John L. LeConte, he was
elected President of the American Entomological Society, a position
which he held continuously until his death, combining with it the
Directorship of the Entomological Section of the Academy.
He received the title of Professor of Entomology from the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania. The position, it is believed, was entirely
honorary, no active duties being attached to it.
As might be supposed from the strictly defined limits of his field
of scientific investigation, his work was more in connection with the
American Entomological Society than with the Academy, although
his interest in the latter was unflagging. He was elected a member
July 31, 1866, on his return from the west. He served as Corre-
sponding Secretary from 1876 to 1890. He was a member of the
Council from February 25, 1875 to December 26, 1876. He was
again elected in December, 1891, and held the position at the time
of his death. He also served on the Finance Committee for 1893,
and on the Publication Committee from 1875 to 1890, and from
1893 to the end. The duties of these several positions were per-
formed by him with fidelity and discretion.
o4
518 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
His relinquishment of active professional work was probably due
to a consciousness of failing vigor, but the gravity of his condition
was not manifest until December 26, 1896, when he was stricken
with unconsciousness while engaged in playing a game of cards with
some friends at the Columbia Club. Although he partially rallied
from the attack and was able to attend the Nansen meeting in the ©
rooms of the American Philosophical Society, his work was done
and the interval was one of patient waiting for the end. Among
his few relaxations during his later years, had been those enjoyed as
a member of a fishing club which occupied a comfortable house at
Beesley’s Point, N. J. He took an active part in the management of
the establishment, and the last months of his life were spent there,
until a renewed attack of cerebral hemorrhage terminated in death,
November 24th of the present year.
The loss sustained by the Academy in the death of Drs. Horn
and Allen is the most recent of a disastrous series beginning in 1891
with that of Dr. Joseph Leidy, and immediately preceded early
in the present year by that of the brilliant naturalist, Edward D.
Cope. The effect of such subtraction from the membership of the
society must be acutely felt, but the work of these distinguished
men lives after them, and we may be consoled by the hope that the
influences which formed them, and which in no small measure
emanated from this Academy, may continue to produce worthy
successors who will be sustained and encouraged by the unselfish
devotion to the cause of intellectual advancement of those who have
gone before.
DR. ALLEN’S ZOOLOGICAL WORK.
BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS.
So far as we have any record, Dr. Harrison Allen’s first and last
papers on zoological subjects, as well as his last verbal communica-
tion before a scientific body, were originally presented in this Acad-
emy. Of seventy contributions to science, accessible to the author,
fully one-half were first issued in the publications of this society.
In systematic zoological work Dr. Allen’s publications number
about thirty; in comparative anatomy, forty; those exclusively
relating to Man number seven, while eight relate largely to the
special subject of animal locomotion. With the exception of about
ten of the seventy titles attributed to him, his papers are in the
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 519
nature of brief contributions to four of the more important A meri-
can scientific journals and cover from one to four pages each. In
many cases they were simply elaborations of verbal announcements
first made at the meetings of this Academy. His monographic
work comes under four titles, and it is worthy of special note that
of the seventy titles appearing under his name, thirty-five relate
almost exclusively to the Chiroptera or bats.
Dr. Allen’s systematic work was confined wholly to the bats, a
fact the more remarkable in view of his wide knowledge of and
interest in many other families of the Mammalia. _ It is significant
of his very early interest in this difficult and neglected group of
animals, that his first published paper was printed in the Proceed-
ings of the Academy in 1861 under the title, Descriptions of New
Pteropine Bats from Africa. Ue here describes a new genus and
three new species of African bats in the collections made by Du
Chaillu and presented by subscription to the Academy. As a
first effort this paper is surprisingly well prepared, both from the
systematic and the anatomical points of view. Even granting
his anatomical knowledge as a graduate of medicine, it is difficult
to believe that the author had not made a close study of the bats
previous to inspecting the Du Chaillu novelties. The theory
that his interest in the Du Chaillu collections, coupled with the
opportunity of entering upon a comparatively unworked field of
original research, was the incentive of his life-long devotion to study
of the Chiroptera, is probably correct.
Only three short papers by him, all on the Chiroptera, appeared
between 1861 and 1864, during his service in the United States
Army. It was in Washington while thus engaged that he came
under the inspiring influence of Prof. S. F. Baird, to which was
probably due the issue, in 1864, of his first Monograph of the Bats
of North America.
Professor Baird having wholly omitted the Chiroptera from his
great work on North American mammals, published by the Govern-
ment in 1857, Dr. Allen was now able to supply a long felt need in the
zoological literature of America. Confined as it was to a technical
treatment of the species found north of Mexico, the monograph was
limited to eighty-five pages of a volume of the Smithsonian Miscel-
laneous Collections. Of the twenty species and eight genera recog-
nized, one genus and six species were first described by the author.
520 "PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
In forming an estimate of this work it would be unfair to test it
by later standards. We must allow much for the crude conceptions
and scant knowledge of American bats then existing among the .
most distinguished naturalists. The number of specimens then
available for study in our museums was but a tithe of those now
existing, and in the light of such facts Dr. Allen’s initial work, per-
formed during his leisure hours, does him credit as the pioneer in
this branch of mammalogy.
In 1893 his second Monograph of the North American Bats
appeared as Bulletin No. 43 of the National Museum. — This issue,
more than twice the size of its predecessor, is based on more exten-
sive suites of specimens than the first and summarizes the investiga-
tions of himself and others, including Dobson, during the intervening
thirty years. The book is well illustrated, new methods of ana-
tomical comparison are introduced and the morphology in many
cases is greatly elaborated. The results, from the standpoint of
the systematist, are somewhat confusing, and it is evident that
the author was at times led astray by a wrong conception of the
laws of geographic variation and unduly biased by his theory
of pedomorphism. His effort to set his nomenclature on an endur-
ing basis is only partially successful, handicapped as he was by
his association with old-school systematists and the small amount of
leisure which active office practice allowed him for an exhaustive _
examination of the literature. As a compendium of our knowledge
of North American bats up to that period, in some cases half-con-
cealing yet half-revealing the truths which have recently been
elaborated by Mr. G. Miller, Jr. in his Revision of the North
American Vespertilionide,’ Dr. Allen’s last edition is a valuable
and enduring work, full of original suggestion. It is the standard
by which we must judge all future systematic work on the American
Chiroptera. It is to be regretted that Mr. Miller should have
neglected to do honor, in his Revision, to Dr. Allen’s long and
faithful service in this special department of zoology. The success
of the later naturalist in his monographie work has only been made
possible by the years of patient research, the mistakes, the sugges-
tions, and withal the earnest truth-seeking, of Dr. Harrison Allen.
In comparative anatomy Dr. Allen published about forty papers,
most of which are in the form of communications to learned societies
on the anatomy of Man and the bats, and among these may be
1 North Amer. Fauna, No. 13, 1897.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 521
classed those relating to animal locomotion. In 1869 appeared his
Outlines of Comparative Anatomy and Medical Zoology, a com-
pend of his lectures delivered in the University of Pennsylvania as
Professor of the branches treated of. The concise character of this
little book, its simplicity of classification and treatment, and its
suggestiveness to the student in original research, distinguish it from
ordinary text books, and it may still serve as a valuable guide to
instructors in anatomy.
Notes on the Conformation of the Mammalian Skull and Studies
in the Facial Region, also record observations indicating the special
studies which Dr. Allen had been conducting previous to the year
1875 and which were bringing him into prominence as an anatomist-
In his studies of animal locomotion Dr. Allen deserves special
notice, standing as he does quite alone in his discussion of Prof. Muy-
bridge’s instantaneous photography of animals in motion. This
work was performed at the request of the University of Pennsylvania.
He had previously studied anatomically the limbs of the mammalia,
notably the wings of bats, with a similiar purpose in view. His
paper was modestly entitled Materials for a Memoir on Animal
Locomotion. On this unpretentious basis the whole essay is largely
conducted, no theories or generalizations being indulged in where a
more imaginative writer would have felt at liberty to roam at will.
He confined his speculations on animal locomotion, as in his previous
work, chiefly to practical suggestions for future investigation.
In connection with this work we find several examples of newly-
coined words and technical terms called for by Dr. Allen’s studies
in minute anatomy. Without such additions to nomenclature a new
branch of technical study such as the one undertaken by Muybridge
and Allen could not be intelligently, and at the same time concisely,
presented.
In 1884 Dr. Allen published his System of Human Anatomy,
a quarto volume of eight hundred pages, profusely illustrated, and
representing an amount of learning and labor far out of proportion
to its popularity and financial success.
His Distribution of Color Marks in the Mammalia which appeared
in the Proceedings of the Academy in 1888, is the most important con-
tribution to the literature of the subject yet published by an Amer-
ican author. He states his “ main object has been to contemplate
color marks as the result of nutritive processes, controlled by recog-
nized biological forces both in health and disease.” The paper is a
522 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
valuable record of observations made on the lines defined by previous
writers, especially by Eschricht and Voigt, on the human subject.
It forms a valuable summary of previous work, adding much mate-
rial for future research, but advancing no hypotheses. In this the
author was consistent with the cautious conservatism which charac-
terized his life.
Taking a comprehensive view of the zoological work of Dr. Allen
in connection with our knowledge of his personality, we are most im-
pressed with its conscientiousness united to an unselfishness only too
rare among men of Science. |
In a personal acquaintance with Dr. Allen as a student of zoology,
the author was early impressed with his serious and deliberate,
almost solemn, consideration of the subject in hand. i 20
PGIORTERe Gee ly «| ALOU Rurehaneiis eye retire: wee 1g
Meigs Fund, hee 1540) (Chas brs Sractit oo) yo) eels
U.S. Dept. aE peribuliare! Oi ible PAC MIS REV: | ia eh iis 14
PennsylvaniaState Library, 46 | U.S. Dept. of State, . . 13
540
Minister of Public Works,
France, . :
U. 8S. Dept. of Taber :
Persifor Frazer
Geological Survey of India
Geological and Natural
History Survey, Minn.,
Bernard H. Steiner
Comité Geologique Russe,
U. S. Treas. Department,
Thomas Meehan,
Department of Mines, Rete
South Wales,
U. S. Commission of igh
and Fisheries, f
Geological Survey of Mie:
_ souri, Mie
East Indian Gen ee
Geological Surv. of Canada,
Geological eee: of Ala-
bama,
Ohio State Taber y
Clarence B. Moore :
Governor-General,
Néerlandaises .
P. P. Calvert .
University of Kansas
U.S. War Department,
Cal. State Mining Bureau,
Mass. Commission of In-
land Fisheries, ete.
Norwegian Government
Congrés Géologique Inter-
nationale,
Bentham Trustees,
Gardens,
Commision Gaolosien ae
Mexico .
S. R. Roberts,
Government of Aseesune
Republic,
Indes
Kew
aft
bo bo 09 W& 09
bo
bo
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
Geological Survey of Iowa,
Mr. Wetherill,
W. W. Jefferis,
W. E. Meehan,
Geological Survey of New
York,
Trustees of the Melbourne
Exhibition, 3
Geological Survey of Port
bai 5 (2271) ne 9 ead ys
L. Voission, ee
Exposition International
de Bruxelles, .
Department of rimless
Nova Scotia,
Angelo Heilprin,
Charles G. Sower,
Congres International des
Péches Maritimes,
Benjamin Sharp,
Samuel N. Rhoads,
Uselma C. Smith,
Mrs. Carvill Lewis,
Wan Box a:
Henry C. McCook, .
Geological Survey of Rou-
mania,
Lewis Woolman,
Samuel G. Dixon, :
Geological Survey of Mary-
land,
U. 5. Fish Cominiasiont
Lord Crawford,
Adams Memorial Commit-
Weer, Is WS. ic Fig Fit oc
Committee on Botany,
Pennsylvania Pharma-
ceutical Association,
Emil Holub,
Lemcke & Buechner, New
York,
[1897.
2
2
2
2
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 541
These accessions were distributed to the several departments of
the library, as follows :—
Taian weit o. soto . 4,002 | Mineralogy, . . . «. « 18
Renew. 4, .. Lol | Physical Science, .° . 17
Botaty, . eee et OrmMibnOlOpy. -.. 5 matte ets 13
General Natural Bast Ory, 102, | Helminthology,. . . . 10
PPOTYCUILUTe,, . -. Os Viedrenmre. +.) “keer ees 9
intomolopy, 9°. 3 47 | Bibliography, 7
‘Anthropology, . . . . 47. | Chemistry, 5
Mammalogy;: 2... . 31 | Geography, SOE: 5
Wenchology; so.ce es: a0" arneyclopedias: (Aik 2 t +
Voyages and Travels, . . 30 | Herpetology, . 1
Ichthyology, . 297)|\) Miscellaneous; i! ~) 74
Anatomy and Phy Salo, 23
The slight falling off in receipts from the number reported last
year is owing to the decrease of appropriations, made necessary by
the large expenditures for 1896. To the same cause is due the com-
paratively small number of volumes bound, which amounts to only
270, a large part of these being credited to the special funds, thus
farther curtailing the amount available for the purchase of books.
In the cases, secured by the removal last year of the stock of pub-
lications of the Academy to the basement, have been arranged the
books on Physical Science and Anthropology, the latter section of
the library being more than doubled by the large collection of val-
uable works included in the Meigs bequest. Extensive additions of
case room are required in nearly every department of the library,
the maintenance of the geographical arrangement of the journals
and periodicals being increasingly difficult from year to year. The
plan suggested in the last report of arranging journals devoted to
special subjects in connection with the special departments of the
library, does not seem to meet with the endorsement of those imme-
diately concerned, so that no transfers have been made.
A portrait in oil of the late Professor Edward D. Cope by C. A.
Worrall, has been procured by subscription and added to the gal-
lery.
The Librarian improved the occasion of his attendance last July
at the Second International Library Conference held in London,
to inspect the scientific sections of a number of libraries there and
elsewhere throughout the United Kingdom, with the result of being
able to congratulate the Academy on the extent and convenience of
.
542 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
arrangement of its collection of books which in both respecte
compares favorably with those of much older establishments. In
liberality of administration the Academy is especially deserving of
recognition, as, apart from the fact that under the By-Laws the
books must be consulted on the premises, it places on the reader
none of the restrictions almost universally met with elsewhere.
It is increasingly apparent that the growth and arrangement of
the library are seriously interfered with by lack of means. If it
were not for the care taken to secure the largest possible return from
exchange of publications, the other resources at the disposal of the
Library Committee would be entirely inadequate, and the opportu-
nity for advanced study in the Academy would be materially cur-
tailed. This would be now more than ever the cause of serious re-
gret, because the library was never so much resorted to by students
of kindred institutions as it has been during ‘the past year. Not
only for such readers, but more especially for our own workers, it is
essential that the latest scientific literature be placed promptly on
our shelves and in such binding as to make it most convenient of
access with the least wear and tear. To secure these ends at least
double the income now at the disposal of the Library Committee
will be required. .
Acknowledgement is again due Mr. Wm. J. Fox for efficient ser-
vice in the library, especially during the Librarian’s absence in
Europe.
All of which is respectfully submitted.
Epwarp J. NOLAN,
Librarian.
REPORT OF THE CURATORS.
The past year has been characterized by a greatly increased in-
terest on the part of the general public in the Academy’s Museum,
owing to the better facilities for the exhibition of the collections
afforded by the new museum building, the opening of which was
recorded in our last report. New cases have been placed on the
first and second floors of the new building, and much has been ac-
complished in perfecting the arrangement of the various collections.
The Curators are able to report the specimens at the present time
in an excellent state of preservation, although the impossibility of
the systematic arrangement and proper display of the collections
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 543
in some departments, owing to the need of cases, seriously affects
their examination and use by students.
The most noteworthy change in the arrangement of the museum
during the year has been the transfer of the wall cases on the bird
gallery to the basement of the new building, where a commodious
storage department has been arranged for the reception of the great
bulk of the alcoholic preparations.
The entire series of fishes and alcoholic mollusca have already
been arranged in their new quarters, and are much more accessible
to the student, besides being entirely protected from the dampness
which, in their old situation, seriously affected the preservation of
the labels.
The entire collection of fishes, numbering upward of fifteen thou-
sand, has been catalogued by Mr. Henry W. Fowler, and supple-
mentary labels placed inside the jars to ensure the preservation of
the data.
The work of cataloguing and renovating the ornithological col-
lection, which has been in progress for several years past, has been
brought to completion.
The remounted exhibition collection is ready for removal to the
third floor of the new building, as soon as sufficient cases can be
procured.
A start has already been made in the furnishing of this floor, and
one handsome plate-glass case has been placed in position, in which
will be arranged a synoptical collection representing the principal
orders of birds.
A similar case has been placed in the Pennsylvania and New
Jersey room for the accommodation of the Delaware Valley
Ornithological Club Collection of local birds with nests and eggs,
which is now nearly complete. For the storage of bird skins addi-
tional space has been allotted adjoining the room of the Ornitholog-
ical Section.
In the mammal hall attention is called to the group of Alaskan
Fur Seals, collected by Dr. Sharp and Mr. J. M. Justice, which
has been mounted during the year, and is now displayed in a large
plate-glass case. ,
Numerous other animals have been mounted by the taxidermist
during the past year, all of which maintain the high standard of
work which has characterized the specimens prepared for museum
exhibition in the past few years.
544 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Foremost among these may be mentioned the Orang Utan, Striped
Hyaena, Pacifie Walrus, Cheetah and Florida Crocodile.
In the department of paleontology much valuable work has been
accomplished. The large slabs containing the Icthyosauri have
been removed from the old vestibule to the entrance of the new
Museum on Nineteenth Street, where they can be seen to much bet-
ter advantage.
The collection of vertebrate remains from the Port Kennedy Bone
Cave, upon which Professor Cope did his last scientific work, has
been displayed in the Pennsylvania and New Jersey Room. The
entire collection of American invertebrate fossils has been rear-
ranged during the year, and placed in systematic order as regards
horizons, while upward of twelve hundred specimens have been
cleaned and placed in trays.
Work on the Isaac Lea Eocene Collection has progressed regu-
larly during the year, through the liberality of the Rev. L. T.
Chamberlain, D. D. Mr. C. W. Johnson has been engaged in
arranging the display collection, which has been increased to fill
an additional ease provided by Dr. Chamberlain early in the year.
Mr. Johnson and Mr. Burns have also done a considerable
amount of field work which has added richly to the collection.
Miss Anna T. Jeanes has presented two horizontal oak cases,
which have been placed on the first floor of the new museum, in
which a synoptical collection of minerals has been arranged for the
benefit of students, while a portion of the old collection of minerals,
which it is not desired to exhibit, has been stored underneath in the
drawers.
A collection of rocks from Philadelphia and vicinity, selected
mainly from the State Geological Survey Collection, has been ar-
ranged in the Pennsylvania and New Jersey Room, and a synopti-
eal collection of rocks has been arranged in two cases in the old
museum, both of which will prove of assistance to students of geol-
ogy.
Four additional cases have been added to the William S. Vaux
Collection for the accommodation of exceptionally large crystals and
masses of minerals, and an additional case to the Clarence B. Moore
Archaeological Collection. Mr. Moore has spent much time in the
field during the year, and has added many rare and interesting spe-
cimens to this collection.
The conchological department has continued to increase under
the constant care of the professor in that department, and the rear-
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 545
rangement of a considerable portion of the bivalves has been made
possible by the removal of part of the minerals from this gallery.
Besides those already mentioned, there have been numerous large
and valuable additions to the museum during the year, as will be
seen in the appended list.
Among them we would call attention to the valuable collection of
marine specimens from California, presented by Mr. Harold Heath ;
a collection of rocks and birds from South Africa, presented by Dr.
Emil Holub, through Mr. H.G. Bryant; a collection of Coleoptera
from Pennsylvania and New Jersey, presented by the Feldman
Collecting Social, a collection of African insects and mollusks
from Dr. A. Donaldson Smith; a collection of alcoholic mammals
of North America from S. N. Rhoads, as well as the numerous
valuable specimens received through the year from the Zoological
Society of Philadelphia. The collection of marine invertebrates
preserved in formaline has also been increased through the liberal-
ity of Mr. F. W. Walmsley.
Several important improvements in the museum building are aiso
noteworthy, particularly the fitting up of the receiving room at the
east end, as an addition to the library and the renovation of the
Council Room.
The Curators have also, during the year, vacated one of the small
rooms on the library floor, and have allotted a large space on the
basement floor of the new museum for the storage of publications.
The Curators take this occasion to express their indebtedness to
various members and to the Conservators of the Sections, for valu-
able assistance in caring for the special collections, particulars of
which will be found in their several reports.
Important assistance has also been rendered by the students of
the Jessup Fund. Much assistance has been given to specialists by
placing the collections at their disposal, and in addition to the
many who have made use of material at the Academy, specimens
have been loaned to representatives of various scientific institutions
throughout the country, including Anthony Woodward, Henry C.
Mercer, T. Wayland Vaughan, Ered’k. A. Lucas, L. M. Under-
wood, H. M. Smith, Walter Faxon, C. F. Millspaugh, H. C. Ober-
holser, B. L. Robinson, T. W. Stanton, Robert Ridgway and others.
Henry C. Coapman, M. D.,
Chairman of the Curators.
546 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
REPORT OF THE BIOLOGICAL AND MICROSCOPICAL
SECTION.
The Section has held ten meetings during the past year with
slightly increased average attendance. Communications of general
interest have been made at each of the meetings, diatoms and
bacteriology receiving special attention.
The Conservator reports the purchase of several new objectives.
Donations to the museum were made by Dr. J.C. Morris, and a large
aquarium was presented by Mr. Holman. The following commu-
nications were made to the Academy: .
“Demonstration of Absorption of Carbon Dioxide and of the
Generation of Oxygen by Diatoms,” by T. Chalkley Palmer.
“ Dentition of Snails,” by Professor Pilsbry.
“Furs,” by Dr. Morris.
“The Neuron,” by Dr. A. O. J. Kelly.
“Structure of the Diatom Valve,” by F. J. Keeley.
The officers of the Section are as follows:
Director, . : : ; : J.Cheston Morris, M. D.
Vice-Director, . : ; : T. Chalkley Palmer.
Treasurer, . : : 4 ; Charles P. Perot.
Conservator, , 4 : F. J. Keely.
Corresponding Secretary, . . John G. Rothermel.
Recorder, . , , : ; Charles 8. Boyer.
CHARLES 8. Boyer,
Recorder.
REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION.
The past year has been one of continuous growth in the concho-
logical department of the museum, although no one accession of
great size has been received. In the arrangement of the collection
considerable progress has been made. The bivalves of the families
Pholadidx, Teredidze, Myide, Mactride, Solenide, Donacidz and
some allied groups have been transferred from the table cases to the
rail cases formerly occupied by minerals, and systematically arranged
therein. To the space thus gained, the terrestrial operculates have
‘ been transferred, and the species rearranged according to the latest
monographs of the several groups. ‘The cases formerly occupied by
the operculates, which had long since been outgrown by the increase
of the collection, will now be utilized for displaying the Bulimulide,
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 547
which are at present being monographed in the Manual of Conchol-
ogy; the collection of Helices having extended over the cases for-
merly containing Bulimi. é
Other museum work worthy of note has been a thorough revision
of the Ampullariidz, Pinnidz, Pectunculus and Amphidromus of
the collection, by Miss J. E. Letson, and a revision of the Arionidee
and Cylindrellidze by Mr. E. G. Vanatta and the Conservator.
The recent and fossil Scaphopoda of our collection have been
studied by the Director and Conservator of the Section, and the
specimens relabelled; the results of the study being embodied in a
monograph of the group in the Manual of Conchology.
The entire collection of alcoholic mollusks has been transferred
from the mollusk gallery wall cases, to cases erected in the basement
of the new building, where they have been arranged in systematic
order.
The routine work of identifying specimens for correspondents has
as usual occupied considerable time; but as in former years a large
number of species new to science have resulted from the time thus
expended. 1,505 lots of specimens from 72 persons have been
received, labelled and placed in the collection during the year. A
detailed list of accessions will be found in “ Addition to the
Museum.”
The officers of the Section are as foliows :
Director, . ‘ : ; : . Benjamin Sharp, M. D.
Vice-Director, . : : . John Ford.
Recorder and Librarian, . : . Edw. J. Nolan, M. D.
Corresponding Secretary, . . . Chas.-W. Johnson.
_ Treasurer, . : S. Raymond Roberts.
Recocenile snbenitieal
Henry A. Pirspzry,
Conservator.
REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SECTION.
Six meetings has been held during the present year. The attend-
ance has been guod and many interesting and valuable verbal com-
munications have been made. ‘The year has been an eventful one
in the history of the Section. More commodious quarters have been
occupied and work in all of the orders of insects has been consequ-
ently stimulated. ‘The collections are in better condition than ever
548 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
before and they are being well protected against museum pests. The
Section has been fortunate in having aid from a number of its
members interested in special branches of entomology. Dr. H. G.
Griffith has done excellent work in the rearrangement of the exotic
Coleoptera and Mr. Gerhard has worked industriously on the Mar-
tindale Lepidoptera. A number of valuable collections have been
presented and many small lots of insects. These are enumerated in
the list of additions to the musenm. It is hoped that the display
collection in the museum may be rapidly increased for the benefit
of the visiting public. So far as the collections for study are con-
cerned, little is to be desired, as in a number of the orders we
have the finest collections of American species in the world.
Ten numbers of the Entomological News have been published
forming 256 pages and 11 plates. At the meeting of the Section
held Dee. 28rd. the following were elected to serve as officers for
the coming year:
Director, : é Phi : : Chas. S. Welles.
Vice-Director, : : E ; , Philip Laurent.
Treasurer, . : p ; : : E. T. Cresson.
Conservator and Recorder, . : : Henry Skinner.
Secretary, é j ‘ : 5 : Wm. J. Fox.
Publication Committee, . : : ; 1e 1
Henry SKINNER,
Recorder.
REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION.
The Director of the Botanical Section respectfully reports that
though the work of the Section has had to be performed almost
wholly by the volunteer labors of its members, the general progress
of the year has been satisfactory. Much valuable assistance could
have been secured in the distribution of various collections awaiting
their final arrangement, if the extra rooms had been fitted with the
cases referred to in the Conservator’s report to the Section which is
appended as part of this document. The cost of mounting speci-
mens has been defrayed by the Academy.
Our late lamented fellow member, John H. Redfield, knowing
that the time must surely come when the Herbarium and its work
would retrograde without the services of a salaried Curator, left his
herbarium and library to the Section to be sold for the nucleus of a
1397. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 549
fund, the interest of which should go to the care and increase of the
collection of plants. These have been disposed of, the Herbarium
being secured for $1,700 by the Missouri Botanical Garden, and the
books sold at auction. The fund will be known as the Redfield Me-
morial Herbarium Fund. The investment now made will yielda
small income next year, which will help in the purchase of new col-
lections. No attempt has been made the past year to add to the
fund, as it was not thought wise to interfere with the applications of
the Academy for aid in other directions.
The Section is free from debt, and has a small balance in its
treasury.
The officers for the ensuing year are:
Director, . : : E ‘ : Thomas Meehan.
Vice-Director, . é : : é Charles E. Smith.
Conservator and Treasurer, ‘ é Stewardson Brown.
Recorder, ; . A ; , Chas. Schiffer, M. D.
Corresponding Secretary, : : Jos. D. Crawford.
Respectfully submitted,
THomas MEEHAN,
Director.
Report of the Conservator.—Notwithstanding the disadvantages
under which the Botanical Department has had to work, the result
for the past year has been fully up to those preceding.
The mounting of the collections has been steadily carried on
through the untiring efforts of the Director of the Section, and is
now completed up to Gentianacez. It 1s hoped to have them all
properly arranged by the end of the next season.
The Lewis and Clark Collection has been carefully examined by
Mr. Thos. Meehan and Professor B. L. Robinson of Harvard College.
There is every reason to expect that before the next report shall
be made, the much needed cases for accommodation of the rapidly ae-
cumulating material will have been secured. The accessions of the
year are recorded in the list of additions to the Museum.
I wish to congratulate the Section on the good work of the year,
and to thank all those who have contributed to its performance.
STEWARDSON Brown,
Conservator.
REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND GEOLOG-
ICAL SECTION.
Ten meetings of the Section have been held during the year with
an average attendance of more than nine members.
36
550 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
An active interest has shown itself at the meetings, communica-
tions having been made by many of the members and by visitors.
Of these may be mentioned several on geology, especially of the
vicinity, on the composition of soils, on a new mineral called Tri-
saltite by Mr. Goldsmith, on glacial striz and rubbings made from
them, and on a large deposit of corundum, in gneissoid or granitic
rocks in Ontario.
Two successful excursions were enjoyed by the Section: one on
May 27th to Media, Mineral Hill, and the Sharpless quarry and the
other on October 23rd to the quarries, ete. near Avondale, Chester Co.
The Officers of the Section are as follows :—
Director, . : : z Theodore D. Rand.
Vice-Director and Conservator, . : Wm. W. Jefferis.
Recorder, . ‘ : f 5 ; Charles Schiffer.
Treasurer, . : : ; John Ford.
Respectfully submitted,
THeEo. D. Ranp,
Director.
REPORT OF THE ORNITHOLOGICAL SECTION.
It is gratifying to be able to report the completion of the work of
renovating the mounted collection of birds in the museum of the
Academy. This work was begun in 1892 and has progressed steadily
ever since, though press of other museum work has often occasioned
delay. As finally catalogued the collection, of practically the same ~
extent as at the time of the death of Dr. Thomas B. Wilson, numbers
24,492 specimens.
Of this number 15,000 duplicates, including the types, have been
unmounted and placed in tight cabinets, while the remaining series
of 10,000 specimens has been arranged systematically in the large
exhibition cases on the old Ornithological Gallery. The improve-
ment in the appearance of the collection is marked and the reduc-
tion in the number of the specimens exhibited makes it possible to
dispense entirely with the old wall cases in which the specimens
were so much in danger from mold and dampness.
The labelling, except in the case of some of the larger birds, has
been restricted to group or family labels. The cards are so quickly
spoiled by dust in the old cases that it has been considered best to
defer the general labelling until new cases are provided and the col-
lection is removed to the new Museum building.
1897.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 551
All the specimens are numbered to correspond with the catalogue
and all data have been preserved on the bases of the stands.
The Conservator is now engaged in a careful study of the numer-
ous type specimens contained in the collection, the results of which
will be published in the Proceedings of the Academy, so that the im-
portant facts relative to this famous collection may be properly pre-
served.
During the past year the completion of the work above described
has involved the remounting of 500 specimens, the writing of 2,000
labels and the entry of 5,000 specimens in the permanent catalogue.
Besides this the entire collection was rearranged in the exhibition
cases to bring it into proper sequence.
The Section’s quarters have been still further enlarged by the
allotment of additional space on the floor adjoining its room to
accommodate the additional cases of skins. The whole study-series
has been carefully examined and found to be in excellent condition.
The accessions for the year comprise an important collection of
North Carolina birds presented by Robt. T. Young, a small collec-
tion of African species from Dr. Emil Holub and numerous spec-
imens received from the Zoological Society. The Delaware Valley
Ornithological Club has also added many rare and artistic groups of
nests and eggs to the collection of Pennyslvania and New Jersey
birds, and by its meetings at the Academy, has been instrumental
in keeping up a live interest in this branch of science.
The Stone Collection of Pennyslvania and New Jersey birds
numbering upward of 2,000 skins has been received on deposit and
is at the disposal of students who may desire to consult it.
In reviewing the work of the year the Conservator wishes to ex-
press his acknowledgment of the valuable assistance rendered by
Mr. Henry W. Fowler.
At the annual meeting of the Section held December 20, 1897, the
following officers were elected :—
Director, . : : : ‘ : Spencer Trotter, M. D.
Vice-Director, . : : F 3 George S. Morris.
Recorder, ; : ‘ : . Stewardson Brown.
Secretary, . : - : : William A. Shryock.
Treasurer and Conservator, ‘ Witmer Stone.
WiITMER STONE,
Conservator.
552 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
REPORT OF THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL SECTION.
Five meetings have been held during the past year, at which
communications were made by Prof’s. Brinton, Allen, and Culin, and
a special communication on “ Primitive Transportation,” by Prof.
Otis T. Mason, of the National Museum, Washington, D.C. A
committee was appointed to consider the question of obtaining space
in the old museum hall for the collection of crania possessed by the
Academy. Mr. John G. Rothermel was elected Treasurer, to suc-
ceed Dr. M. V. Ball, resigned. The death of Dr. Harrison Allen
left vacant the Directorship, which office he has filled since the or-
ganization of the Section. At the December business meeting a
quorum was not present, and the annual election could not he held,
the officers of the Section being continued until the next meeting.
The office of Director remains vacant.
CHARLES Morris,
Rocorder.
REPORTS OF THE PROFESSORS.
ANGELO HEILPRIN, PRoFEssoR OF GEOLOGY, reports that the
work in his department during the past year has been confined
mainly to its educational aspect. The regular spring course of in-
struction was comprised in twenty-six lectures and eight field dem-
oustrations, the attendance at which, while smaller than in the cor-
responding period of the year before, was sufficient to indicate a
live interest in geology and an appreciation of the opportunities that
‘were offered for practical study. As in previous years a large part
of the classes was composed of school teachers. A special course of
six lectures was delivered under the auspices of the Ludwick Insti-
tute in November and December, with the largest attendance yet
secured in the Academy, the record showing an average of 163 for
each lecture.
The condition of the collections in the department of geology re-
mains unchanged. There is a deficiency of case-room, and imme-
diate relief can hardly be looked for. Some rearrangement of the
collections has been made under the direction of the Curators, both
in the old and in the new museum buildings, but a large part of the
specimens must still be placed in the drawers of the cases.
Additions to this department of the Academy’s museum, and
notably to the affiliated department of paleontology, have been re-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 553
ceived from various sources, a number of them from former students
of the courses of geology. While the generous gift of the late Prof.
KE. D. Cope does not strictly concern the department of geology, as
defined by the By-Laws, a reference to it cannot be omitted. Prof.
Cope’s collections are uot only a monument to the indomitable en-
ergy and scientific devotion of a master of his specialty, but of the
utmost importance to the student of vertebrate paleontology. The
collections should be secured for the Academy, to which they have
been virtually proffered, and with which the name of the deceased
has been most intimately associated.
Dantet G. Brinton, M. D., PRoressor or ETHNOLOGY AND
ARCH ®OLOGY, reports that during the spring of 1897, a course of
free public lectures was delivered by him in the lecture hall of the
Academy on the recent advances in the science of anthropology.
The lectures were well attended, and an increased popular interest
in this branch was manifest.
The anthropological collections of the Academy have been ar-
ranged in mostly new cases and exposed to public view in a favor-
able portion of the recently constructed addition to the Academy
building. The number of visitors who give attention to this portion
of the collections of the Academy show that it is one in which the
general public is much interested.
BrenJAMIN SHarp, M. D., PRoressor oF INVERTEBRATE ZOOL-
oGy, reports that during the past year he delivered two courses, one
of ten and the other of six lectures, upon invertebrate zoology,
under the auspices of the Ludwick Institute, and one lecture in the
Friday Evening Course on “The Sea and its Influence upon Animal
Life.”
The additions to the museum have not been extensive, the most
important being the collection of invertebrates made by the Alas-
kan and Siberian Expedition.
Henry A. Pitspry, PROFESSOR IN THE DEPARTMENT OF MOL-
LUSCA, reports that he has delivered two courses of lectures upon
Malacology during the year.
Several reports upon particular groups of mollusks, both recent
and fossil, based upon material in the collection of the Academy
have been prepared and published in the Proceedings, together with
others based upon material sent for investigation from abroad. Pro-
gress has been made in the classification and arrangement of the
554 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
collection, the details of which may be found in the report of the
Conservator of the Conchological Section.
Henry Skinner, M. D., Proressor IN THE DEPARTMENT OF
Insecta, reports fully on the condition of the entomological collec-
tions, his statements being included in the report of the Entomologi-
eal Section. He will deliver six lectures in the Academy’s Lud-
wick Institute Course early in the coming year.
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ~ 585
The election of Officers, Councillors and Members of the Finance
Committee to serve during 1898, was held with the following re-
sult :—
President, ; : y . Samuel G. Dixon, M. D.
Vice-Presidents, . : . Thomas Meehan.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D.
Recording Secretary, ‘ . Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
Corresponding Secretary, . Benjamin Sharp, M. D.
Treasurer, . : ; . George Vaux, Jr.
Iibrarian, . : : . Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
Curators, : ; : . Henry A. Pilsbry.
Henry C. Chapman, M. D.
Arthur Erwin Brown.
Samuel G. Dixon, M. D.
Councillors to serve three years, Charles P. Perot.
C. Newlin Peirce.
Theodore D. Rand.
Philip P. Calvert.
Finance Committee, 5 . Charles Morris.
Chas. E. Smith.
Uselma C. Smith.
William Sellers.
Charles P. Perot.
Councillor for unexpired term
of two years, . : . Charles H. Cramp.
ELECTIONS DURING 1897.
MEMBERS.
vanuary 26.—William Biddle Cadwalader, Charles J. Pennock.
February 23.—Thomas H. Montgomery.
March 30.—Bartram W. Griffiths, E. T. Stotesbury, Robert K.
McNeely, Louis Weber, M. D.
April 27—Henry Brinton Coxe, Ferdinand Philips, Eckley
Brinton Coxe, Jr. ;
May 25.—Sager Chadwick,
June 29.—Alonzo H. Stewart, M. D., Chas. E. De M. Sajous, M. D.
September 28.—Thomas H. Conarroe, M. D., G. A. Muller, Kath-
erine Muller.
October 26.—Daniel Baugh.
November 30.—J. Waln Vaux.
596 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
CORRESPONDENTS.
May 25.—Alexander Karpinski of St. Petersburg, Russia.
November 30.—F ridtjhof Nansen of Christiania, Norway.
COUNCIL AND STANDING COMMITTEES FOR 1898.
COUNCIL.
Officers. —Samuel G. Dixon, M. D., Thomas Meehan, Rey. Henry
C. McCook, D. D., Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Benjamin Sharp, M. D.,
George Vaux, Jr., Henry A. Pilsbry, Henry C. Chapman, M. D.,
Arthur Erwin Brown.
To serve Three Years—Charles P. Perot, C. Newlin Peirce,
Theodore D. Rand, Philip P. Calvert.
To serve Two Years—Thomas A. Robinson, Charles H. Cramp,
Charles Morris, Isaac J. Wistar.
To serve One Year.—Uselma C. Smith, Charles E. Smith, John
Cadwalader, William Sellers.
STANDING COMMITTEES.
Finance.
Uselma C. Smith, Charles Morris, Charles E. Smith, William
Sellers, Charles P. Perot.
Publications.
Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith, Henry A. Pilsbry, Henry
Skinner, M. D., Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
Library.
Charles P. Perot, Arthur Erwin Brown, Thomas A. Robinson,
Henry C. Chapman, M. D., Dr. C. Newlin Peirce.
Instruction and Lectures.
Uselma C. Smith, Benj. Smith Lyman, Samuel G. Dixon, M. D.,
Philip P. Calvert, Samuel N. Rhoads.
Committee of Council on By-Laws.
Isaac J. Wistar, Theodore D. Rand, Arthur Erwin Brown and
Benjamin Sharp, M. D.
ba |
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 55
ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM.
MAMMALS.
Dr. Thos. Biddle. Tarsius fuscus dissected, in alcohol.
Henry G. Bryant. Skin of marmot, Alaska.
Dr. H. C. Chapman. Two specimens of Pteropus in alcohol. Em-
bryos of Macropus and Canis dingo, dissected specimens in alcohol
of Loris gracilis, Galago crassicaudata, Ornithorhynchus and Nyctecebus
Dr. 8. G. Dixon. Lepus aquaticus, Alabama, (mounted).
Dr. Emil Holub. Mounted Jerboa and Jackal and eight skulls of
mammals, South Africa.
Dr. W. E. Hughes. Atalapha borealis (mounted).
Medico-Chirurgical College. Two skulls and odd bones of Elephant.
Purchased by subscription. Male Orang Utan (Simia satyrus) lived in
the Zool. Society’s Garden, Nov., 1893 to Noy. 1, 1897, mounted
Nov., 1897.
S. N. Rhoads. Collection of 60 jars of alcoholic mammals from N.
America. Specimens of Lepus sylvaticus, New Jersey (mounted).
Sigmodon hispidus floridanus (mounted). Three foetal Lynx rufus,
Clinton Co., Pa.
R. T. Young. Skin and skull of Fiber zibethicus.
Zoological Society of Philadelphia. The following mammals which
have been prepared as indicated. Mounted: Crab-eating Raccoon
Procyon cancrivorus, Gazella muscatensis 9 , sacred Monkey, Semno-
pithecus entellus ; Dusky Monkey, Semnopithecus obscurus ; Cheetah,
Cynzxlurus jubatus 9 ; Campbell’s Monkey, Cercopithecus campbell ;
Striped Hyzena, Hyxna striata ; Black Macacue, Macacus maurus ;
Striped Wallaby, Macropus dorsalis 9 ; Coati, Nasua nasua; Carib-
bean Seal, Monachus tropicalis ; Ocelot, Felis pardalis ; Bengal Cat,
Felis bengalensis ; Brush-tailed Wallaby, Petrogale penicillata : also, to
be mounted, Young Elk, Cervus canadensis; Fallow Deer, Cervus
dama 8. Red Kangaroo female with young, Macropus rufus.
Skins. Black spider Monkey, Sapagow vellerosus ; Prairie Dog, Cyno-
mys ludovicianus; Two Common Seals, Phoca vitulina; Common
Paradoxure, Paradoxurus; Brown Capuchin, Cebus futuellus ; Monkey
(sp. undet.); Javan Civet, Viverra tangalunga, Barbary Ape, Maca-
cus inwus.
558 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897..
Osteological preparations. Skulls of all the mounted animals and
skin specimens; also of Young Camel, Camelus sp. ; Prong-horned
Antelope, Antilocapra americana.
Disarticulated Skeletons of Pronghorned Antelope, Antilocapra amer-
icana ; Two Gillespie’s Seals, Zalophus californianus ; Indian Buffalo,
Bos buffelus; Coon-like Dog g, Canis procyonoides ; Brush-tailed
Wallaby, Petrogale penicillata; Rhesus Monkey, Macacus rhesus >
Javan Civet, Viverra tangalunga; Two Caribbean Seals, Monachus
tropicalis ; Monkey (sp. undet. ).
Rough Skeletons. Chamois, Rupicapra tragus; Indian Buffalo, Bos-
buffelus ; Camel, Camelus dromedarius.
BrirDs.
H. L. Albright. Three specimens of Loxia curvirostra minor, Lycom-
ing Co., Pa. (skins).
Henry G. Bryant. Olor columbianus (mounted) and skin of Uria
mandti.
H. R. Deacon. Urinator imber, Seaville, N. J. (skin).
Delaware Valley Ornithological Club Collection. Fifteen nests and
sets of eggs of Pennsylvania and New Jersey birds and twenty
mounted birds presented by members of the Club. Nest of Yellow-
billed Cuckoo, (Coccyzus americanus) from Mrs. Edw. Robins,
Goshawk, Accipiter atricapillus from Chas. A. Shriner ; Wood Ibis.
(Tantalus loculator), from Dr. Park P. Breneman. Gannet (Sula
bassana) S. B. Irwin and J. H. Cullin.
Dr. Emil Holub. Ten mounted specimens of South African Birds and
three skulls.
R. B. Long. Mounted specimen of Bubo virginianus.
Leander Rogers. Specimen of Ardea herodias (skin).
Babu H. Sukhi. Chicken with four legs.
H. Van der Wielen. Two skins of Bicknell’s Thrush (Turdus aliciz#
bicknelli).
Visitor. Specimens of Cardinalis cardinalis and Fringilla celebs.
H. W. Warrington. Mounted specimen of Cathartes aura, Haddon-
field, N. J.
H. W. Wenzel. Skin of Piranga rubra from Philadelphia.
W. C. Wetherill. Egg of Tinamou.
R. T. Young. A collection of skins of North Carolinian birds. Four
skins of Parus hudsonicus, Nova Scotia; skin of Sterna hirundo,
Prince Edward Island.
Zoological Society of Philadelphia. The following birds which have
been prepared asindicated. Mounted: Carpophaga paulina; Skele-
1897. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 559
ton, Olor buccinator, Grus stanleyi; Skull and Sternum, Ciconia
nigra, Phasianus reevesi ; Skin, Garrulax picticollis, Rhamphastos dis-
colorus, Garrulus glandarius, Trupialis defilippi, Polytelis melanurus,
Nucifraga caryocatoctes, Branta bernicla.
Ardea virescens caught in Logan Square (mounted).
REPTILES.
Dr. Harrison Allen. Three jars of Reptiles.
Dr. Thos. Biddle. Ophibolus doliatus, Pennsylvania.
Arthur Erwin Brown. FHutenia vagrans and two specimens of Scelo-
porus consobrinus.
Dr. H. C. Chapman. Dissection of Sphenodon punctatus. Carapace
and plastron of Chelopus insculptus.
Edw. D Cope. Collection of reptiles from Vera Cruz, Mexico.
Chas. E. Ridenour. Three young Anacondas.
F. W. Walmsley. Ophibolus getulus and doliatus, New Jersey.
H. W. Wenzel. Pseudemys rugosa, Philadelphia.
Lieut. H. L. Willoughby, U.S. N. Crocodilus americanus, Florida
(mounted).
Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Two specimens of X7tphosoma rus-
chenbergeri. .
FIsH.
Dr. Harrison Allen. Specimens of Echelus conger.
Dr. H.C. Chapman. Dissection of Squalus, Astroscopus anophis, two
young Cyclopterus, Polypterus bichir. Skeleton of the head of Lop-
hius piscator.
D. Morgan Eldridge. Head of Rabbit-fish (Lagocepialus).
Wm. Ellis. Two specimens of Zoarces anguillaris.
W. J. Fox, Series of Fundulus, Atlantic City, N. J.
Harold Heath, Large series of fishes from Pacific Grove, California.
Dr. C. P. Henry. Puffer fish (Tetradon), dried.
Mrs. Tiel. Specimen of Cyclopterus lumpus.
INSECTS.
Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. 207 Orthoptera, 180 Diptera, 262 Hemi-
ptera, 4 Coleoptera, 31 Neuroptera, 77 Lepidoptera, 160 Hymeno-
ptera, all from N. E. Africa.
Feldman Collecting Social. Sixteen boxes of Coleoptera, containing
656 genera, 1,326 species, numbering 3,828 specimens.
Dr. Henry Skinner. Five hundred and ninety-six exotic butterflies.
C. H. Hutchinson. Seventy-two butterflies mounted on plaster
tablets.
560 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897..
G. F. Russell. Two hundred specimens, various orders, collected in
U.S. of Columbia.
Prof. Ellison A. Smyth, Jr. Six exotic butterflies.
Dr. Jos. H. Romig. Twenty Alaskan butterflies.
Recent MOo.Luusca.
T. H. Aldrich. Goniobasis from Tallapoosa river, Alabama. Four
species land shells from Sumatra.
Mr. C. F. Ancey. Helix subaperta, from Algeria. \
EK. H. Andrus. Five fresh-water species from Oregon.
J.S. Arnheim. ‘Thirteen species shells from California and Alaska.
N. T. Bednall. Acanthochites variabilis from Australia.
W.G. Binney. Prophysaon and Hesperarion trom California.
Frank Burns. Glandina truncata from Gregg’s Landing, Fla.
Mr. F. L. Button. Four species land and freshwater shells, from Cali-
fornia.
E. B. Chope. Land shells from Florida.
George Clapp. Polygyra profunda and exoleta from Virginia. Poly-
gyra devia var. Clappi from Idaho.
T. D. A. Cockerell. Four species land shells from California and New
Mexico.
H.8. Conrad. Helix nemoralis, New Jersey.
J. C. Cox. Thirteen species of Jschnochiton and other marine shells
from Australia.
W. H. Dall. Nanina diadenia Dall from Malay Peninsula.
Dr. Dolley. One species Tethys, from Bahamas.
Bernard L. Douredoure. Cyprea and Umbonium.
Mrs. H. E. Dwight. Dentaliwm sericatum.
J. H. Ferriss. Sixty-three species land shells from Tennessee.
John Ford. Abnormal form of Cyprea lynx from Singapore ; Cerion
Fordii, from Bahamas; Littorina palliata, Greenwich Bay, R. I.
Henry W. Fowler. Unio complanatus.
Mr. Gaines. Nassa, from Tango, Japan.
Mrs. E. M. Gaylord. Ariolimax and Purpura from Oregon.
G. H. Gude. Vitrea alliaria Mull.
Wilfred H. Harned. Polygyra albolabris, Lycoming Co., Pa. and
Pearls from Ostrexa.
Harold Heath. Thirteen jars alcoholic mollusks from Mazatlan, Mex.
and Monterey, Cal.
Charles Hedley. Three species from Australia.
Miss E. J. Letson. Sixty-three land and fresh-water species from
Buffalo, N. Y.
Mr. H. N. Lowe. Four species from California.
1897. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 561
J.G. Malone. Limaz, Prophysaon, etc. from Oregon.
William A. Marsh. Two species of Unio from Texas.
E. H. Matthews.
Centropristis .. . . 106, 108
Centurio. . oes ee
Cephalacanthide ae 132
Cephalacanthus 132
Cepola 87
Cepolidee 87
Cepolis 10
Ceratina . . 351
Ceratodus . >
Cerion . . . 19, 365--3867
Ceropales o> Sea
Cervus . ste . «+, 20,)208
Cetengraulis .. . = +\ Saeae
Cheetodipterus . 123
Cheetodon, 78, 103, 116, 123, 124
Cheetodontidee xe 123
Cheeturichthys . 86
Channa .. Snes 69
Chanodichthys ae 59
Chatoessus . 62
Chilomycterus 131
Chilopsis 138
Chinochlore 442
Chiolite 437
Chlarias . . . 57
Chlorichthys . . 119
Chlorion 375
Chlorite . : 435
Chloroscombrus 101
Cheetetes er ee
Chonetes . 417, 449
Chromis. .. - Las
Chromite : 429
Chrysanthemum 201
Chrysophrys . 76
Chrysopsis . . 192
Cirsium .. . 192
Citrus . 174
Clarias 57
Cleome 348
Clinus . 133
Claupanodon . 94
Clupea 63, 64, 66, 94
Clupeidee : 94
Cnemidophorus 463
Cobitidee . . 60
Cobitis 60
Coilia .. 66
Coleonyx 460
1897.]
Collichthys
Compressidens .
Columbite
Concinnum
Condylura . .
Congrus .
Conocardium
Conodon
Corbicula
Corbula .
Cosmoceras
Cornus .
Corundum . .
Corvina
Coryphena
Crabro 5
Crassatella . .
Crotaphytus .
Cryolite . .
Cryptochiton . e
Cryptotenia .
Ctenosaura
Culius .
Cyanite
Cyathophy lum
Cybium ..
Cyclas . .
Cymbidium
Cymbium
Cynoglossus
Cynoscion .
Cyphaspis .
Cyphonyx .
Cyprzea
Cyprina .
Cyprinide .
Cyprinus
Cyrthia
Dahlia
Dardania
Dasyatidee
Dasyatis . .
Decapterus . .
Dentalium. .
Dentex
Desmine
Diabasis . .
Diacope. .
Diamond
Diapterus
Didelphis
Digitalis...
32,
7 294, 295,
186--188,
. 429,
Sle sy lee
, 122,
. 887,
_. 299
» 465--472,
. 24, 207,
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
567
Diodon 130
Diodontidze 130
Diodontus . . 141
Diorite 420
Diporom. 7% SS eee
Disthene 429, 442
Ditrupa . . iy ope eee ae
Dorcelaphus . . . 25, 208, 311
Dormitator . abe
Dorosoma 62, 63
Dorosomatidee . 4 ee
Drepane. . 78
Drepanide . 78
Drymezeus 22
Dules . : » »Jprteli@6é
Eatoniella . . . 360, 480
Echeneidide . . . 132
Echeneis :, ots Ela
Edotea . . . 391--408
Eleolite . 2 aya?
Eleotris 84, 132
Elephas . . . 483
Eleutheractis J EOF
Elopidee 63, 94
Elops . 94
Embolite . . 438
Engraulidide . . 64, 95
Engraulis 64, 65, 95
Entomis . . 445, 447
Ephippide. .,... . « .95) aia
Epidote . . . 418, 435, 437, 442
Epinephelus . 78, 104, 105
Episiphon . . a 3 . 465
| Eques . 116
| Equula 73
| Erethizon 210
Eriphyla ea Ges
Erythronium . . 161, 162
Esocidee 7 OO Fmeo
Esox 94,97, 98
Essonite . . 442
Estheria . 427, 455
Eucinostomus Pet cree 3
Euclase . . 438
Eudothyra . 417
Eunotia . 144
Euomphalus . 445
Eupomacentrus 116
Eutomis. . 426
Evotomys . 27, 206, 211, 212, 214
Beéldspar >... Gils 419
Felis 32, 222
568 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Fiber . 27, 212, 309 | Helvine . ~ AST
Fistularia : 70 | Hematite 417, 429
Fistulariide . 70 | Hemiramphide 69, ag
Fluorite . 437 | Hemiramphus : 9 seeeeiees
Heemulide . _ 7, 109 | Lactophrys . 128
Hemulon 109 | Lactuca. : LO 2
Halistylus . 298 | Lagocephalus . . 81, 128
Hamulus : 475 | Lamium ges 845)
Hapsidophrys . 464 | Lamna . 428
Harpe : 118 | Larrea : 355
Harpodon . . 67 | Lasionycteris . 224
Helianthus . 193, 201 | Lateolabrax 73
Heliases 117 | Lauricoche 292
Helicella 859 | Leiognathide . 73
Helicide . . . . 11 | Leiognathus 73
Heliophytum . 169, 170 | Lejeania 359
Heliotropium .. . 169-172 | Leperditia . 414
Helix 10, 19 | Lepidodendron 427
1897.]
Lepidotrigla
Leptocephalidee
Lepus :
Lethrinus
Leuciscus
Liatris
Lilium
Lima
Limicolaria
Limonacanthus
Lingula .
Liriodendron
Lissoacme
Listvenite
Lobotes .
Lobotidee
Lonicera
Lophiidee
Lophiomus
Lophius .
Lutianide .
Lutianus
Lutjanus
Lutra
Lutraria
Lycium .
Lycodontis .
yu ;
Maclura.
Macrodium .
Macronyx .
Macropteronotus
Magnetite .
Magnolia ;
Malacanthide .
Malacanthus
Malachite
Malaconite .
Martite .
Mastacembelus
Meekella
Megalops
Megellania .
Melichthys .
Menticirrhus
Mephitis
Merista .
Mesodesma
Mesoprion .
Miassite .
Microcline .
Micropogon
83
sé Gaal
25, 209, 305
Sa ihiphsnG
59, 60
192
172
428
358
te ee
428, 454
202, 203
_ 487, 441, 444 |
. 198, 202, 203
ae eee
437, 444
. 69
410
68, 94 |
329, 330
126
ageklier|
31, 219
447
. 293
. 74, 108
Sy aaete
437, 442
115
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
Micropteryx
Microtus
Misgurnus .
Modiola
Molybdenite
Monacanthidee
Monacite
Monazicoid
Monedula .
Monopterus
Moringua
' Moringuidee
| Mugil
Mugilidee
| Mulgedium
Mullide .
| Mulloides
| Mullus
Mureena .
Murzenesocidee
Murzenesox
Mureenichthys .
Murzenidee
| Murchisonia
Mus
| Muscovite
Mustela .
Mutilla .
Myceteroperca
Mygnimia
Myliobates .
Myliobatidze
| Myride .
Mystus
Nacella .
Neesiotes
Narcine .
Narcobatidee
Natrix
Nautilus .
Neomeenis .
Neopetrzeus
Neotoma
Nepheline
Neptunea
Novacula
Notidanus .
| Notocyphus
' Notogonia ,
26, 212, 304,
Monacanthus .
Monopteride. .
Monticocerus .
569
101
306-308
60
428
437
329
92
464
410
108
22
214
437
428
428
233
230
570
69
69
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
Nycticejus . 224
Nysson . 379
Ocinebra 296
Ocyurus 108
Odontoscion 115 |
Ogcocephalidee 133
Ogcocephalus lead Ass
Olcostephanus . 406, 407
Oligodon 455, 456
Oligoplites . ee LO
Oncidium 184
Ophichthus 62, 93
Ophichthyide . 62, 93
Ophichthys . 62 |
Ophicephalidee .
Ophicephalus . ;
Ophisurus 62, 93
Opisthonema . 94
Oppelia . 456
Opuntia . er ieee ers | (0)
Orthis . 427, 447, 449
Orthite . aera ke Mig Mebain
Orthoceras . 410, 411
Orthoclase . ; - . 448
Orthosesah s Ge-7 ht AST eASs
Osmerus 26 Sri ‘Sten:
Osmia ... . . . 384-346
Ostraciide . 128
Ostracion .) “428
Ostreea . . 829, 330
Otodus . . 428
Otolithus Ae Sie
Oxalis S 16d 162
Oxybelus «Fe 386
Oxynoticeras 407, 455
Pagellus 4.) oe
Pagrus Ry ei
Paleoanodonta 455, 456
Paleeomutela 455, 456
Paleoniscide . . 455
Paralichthys 87
Parascalops 223
Parophrys . 88
Passaloecus . 141
Pavia Pha “itets:
Pecten 329, 330
Peltandra . . 164
Pentamerus 414, “420, 496,
427, ral 447
Pentstemon ; 173
Pepsis 280-283
Perca 99, 104, 109
[1897.
Percolabrax ee
Perdita . 358- 350
Perideris . . 003.
Perisphinctes . . . 456
Peromyscus 27, 212, 304,
306, 809-314
Pterometopon . us HOS
Phacops 427
Phaius ; 184
Pharmacosiderite . 458
Phenacite 437
Philypnus : ~ bee
Phlox . : 178, 180, 181
Photinula . « s SORES
Phyllodactylus 460
Phyllotheca . 427
Pinna . 3 4330
Pisidium . 291, 292
Pisodonophis ~ 162
Pistacite . : . ogee
Plagioclase . : 437, 438, 443
| Plagioptycha 10
Plagusia . -~ (2s
Planiceps . 261-263
| Platessa 88.
Platinum 429
Platophrys . 133.
Platycephalidee 82
Platycephalus . 82
Platyceras 415
Platysomus . 101
Pleurodonta 10
Pleuronectes 90
Pleuronectide . 87, 133
Pleuronichthys . 88.
Pleurotomaria . . 427, 445, 4AT
Podium . : 373.
Peeciliidee 97
Polycaulus . s0 38m
Polydactylus 71, 98
Polynemidee ype fle
Polynemus o MASS
Pomacanthus . . 124, 125
Pomacentridee (7; 4s.
Pomacentrus 77
Pomadasis . ‘ 75.
Pompilus 249- 259, 265
Potamopyrgus. . ge SOG
Pouschkinite . . 442
Priacanthide . V4 MON
Priacanthus . . +4; LOK
Priocnemis . . 266-275.
1897.]
Bromage §2 6. fs '. «OG |
Priononyx . 378
Prionoputis §.:. . . . 84
Prionotus ae) he Se ale
Presmoaster, © 6 St. . | OS
Pristopoma. . . a To
Procyon . : 31, "219, 310
Prodozamites ; arm 5 4/¢
Productus 408, 410, 411,
417, 427, 449
Promicrops 105
Pronorites 427
Protocardium . 456
Psammobia 428
Psen . eo Ore
Pseudagenia . 235, 286
Pseudorhombus . .. . 88
HCCTOHN Sra ts Wis 43 ween
Pteromys "815-324
Pteropodide . . ."* 36
Putorius . 31, 217, 310, 311
Pyrgopolon : 475
Pyrochlore. . Bune? fas
Quartz 418, 429, 435,
Quartzite 418, a
Quercus IY Re eis Sh 62 72 ELS (0)
Rabdionite . 444
Rachycentride 108
Rachycentron . 103
Raia ade a ene PROS
Raya ss : 93
Reithrodontomy Ny 304, 309
Seemiors) 6.8. ee ee
memopstide (4 ON Le Ont.
MO UALIS). 2 4. 4. “Sle. Oa
einolophide. +. | . d6 4
varies ane S Ore 7 2 te
Rhomboplites. . 108
Momus: |. ..°. *. Sf, 10d
IS ss 2038
Rhynchonella . Onl ye SG
Rhypticus 106, 107
Rissoa 360
Rissoina . 360
Rissoinine . 481
Rubus B00
ECDL e: NG eS 437
paaneicnthys ... . . . 6f
Bilaecigees sf i.) '. OS) OT
Salanx Pa Ans :
Salius . 263-276 |
Salix . 193 |
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
67 |
571
Salnio!) ss. 4404 ers) 1 Ob
Samarskite . be CR? MEST
Sardinella: y. i505 4%. 1. *605° 94
Sardinia. “4 fai) fee Be
Saurida 2 + “aie tees GS
SHUTUIS*! 2, fa) if boar Oe
Sealops... 3 ‘s 0.1 ge "ee, eee
Sealpellum . vi fe oes
Scapheutes . 380
Scapolite 437
Scaridze 119
Scarus : 119, 121
Scatophagidee SFE acs or ee
Seatophacus 4.) 24 .°2 *2 7 #9
Sceliphron . 373, 374
Sceloporus . . 461-465
Schistose 418
Schizodus 4. ee Ee
| Schwagerina 410, 416
Sciadopitys . 3) lee tO
Scizena 75, 76, 1038, 182
Scizenidee ~ OnE
Sciuropterus 31, 206, 217,
311, 314-326
Sciurus . oi 216, 310
Scoliodon .... 91
SCOMMER Boe kal «8 = 72, 73
peomberomerus ,° .--. 72,299
Seombridwas: 4) +.1:. 7 > 72,99
Scorpezena at ey Een
Scorpzenidee Pore eye
Selene 4s, Pe
Semelen=s 6 toul6 2 8.92) 295
| Serpulide . ; _ ey
Serranidwien?. wt. 7d, 104
SECCAMUS) | rl tas tinc wch 73
Sempmmay 4. t1..4a 8 66
Sibon 464
Seema anes. ht) ee ee aL (i
Rrecpardeat "Fa a 4 OT! aE
SHoamities tes Laws fon. en Ue
Sillagamideae Vote Mh 87
ulleOm tia totes ae OF
Silphium £702 191. 192
(Seipnespenia +505. Go. OF
Simmer el SSR
Sodalite . 487
Solem ou, ©. «. |. *. 88, des
Soremms ame 6 6.) 1. 88S
Sonchus Se outacy” i 192
DOLE =F.) 4 0. 3d, 293, 304, 311
Sparidee . 216, REL
572 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
Sparis . = . 107, 409 Daraxaeum. |. . 385
Sparisoma 119, 120, 121 | Tarpon » 2 oe
Sparus . 76, 107 | Tarsius . 34--55
Spheeralcea ape 352 | Tatea . 360--362, 480, 481
Se al gag ; 135 | Taxodium = LOD
Sphene ce," gaan | “helama,.. «at66
Spheroids . . 129, 180 | Tentaculites . . 427
Sphex . . » « . « 8¢6--3878 | Tetradon . 81
Sphyrena . 2... ae bie -98°|| Wetraodon ‘ -\ eee
Sphyrmg. +2. -. 2 ae. “9 | | Metraadentidis, - . 81,128
Sphyrnide. . wise) (Oia! Detrodon,: . 128
Spirifer, 410, 417, 420, 426, Teuthidide . owt ls
427, 445, 447, 449 | Teuthis 79, 126
Spiziferina . ‘3 PALO SN Dherapon ee
Spirorbis . . . 158--159 | Theraponidee 2 yes
Sporus sie eee 104 | Thracia . 292.
Squaliobarbus ...... 59) Thrissa » ieee
Squalus . ; . 56, 91 | Thryssa 64, 65
Staurotide . 415 | Tillandsia «| eee
Stigmaria 427 | Titanite 437, 442
Stigmus . 379 | Topaz. 437, 438
Stizus . . Se slemooe | orpedo » |. eae
Stolephorus . 64, 95, 96 | Tourmaline . 415, 437
Streptaxidee : . 477 | Trachicephalus. > Meat
Streptaxis . ; 477--479 | Trachinocephalus . 685 ae
Streptorhynchus . . . 449 | Trachinotus . . 103
Stromateide . ; 73, 103 | Trachinus. so OF
Stromateoides .:).0.. «> 2) Ws | “Erachurops: . 73, 100
Stromateus ‘ 78, 103 | Trachypus . ae
Strombus . <. 2°. op. 2904) “Eriacanthide: we.
Strophomena. . . . 426 | Trizenophorichthys 85
Sturnella 146--152 | Triznopogon Bel)
Sturnus . . 146 | Trichirus . . 100
Syacium . 188 | Trichiuride . eo!)
Syenite é 436 | Trichiurus 72, 100
Sympholis. . 463 Trichosoma . . 64, 65
Symphurus ce? 1383 | Trichiuride . See
SMA O TIS Pe Joke aoe ois ee eet Oa ADI eee 83, 132
Synanceia . . 81 | Triglide . 83, 182
Synaptomys, 25, 26, 211, 304--307 Trigonopsis . . aol
Synaptura . . . . 90 | Trimorphodon . . 464
Syngnathide << .°... . -9% | Griphasia.. me re
Syngnathus te all 1S pee eibonides ye 8)"
Synhalonia 3847, 348 Trophon . 329, 330
Synidotea . 389 | Trygon 57, 9s
Synodontide . . 67, 96 | Trypauchen . . onitem
Synodus 2 .° =.) % “< 2396 /eieypoxylon: & 383--386
Syringopora. . 427 | Tschewkenite . pated
Tachysurus, <-. 4. ove eDarbomilla 296
Tamias 30, 215 | Turritella 329, 330
Tanacetum pst E)"/
. 192 | Tylosurus
1897.]
Ulema
Ulmus
Umbrina
Upeneoides
Upeneus
Uralite
Uranoscopidee
Uranoscopus
Uroconger .
Urocyon . .
Urolophus . .
Urosalpinx
Ursus
Uta .
Uvularia
‘81,
. 31, 220,
113
185
115
NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.
Vanilla
Vespertilio . .
Vesperugo . .
Vesuvianite
Viasta .
Vomer
Vulpes
Xenocypris
Xyrichthys .. .
Xystema
Yttrotantalite .
RUSE a cane
Zeus
Aircon.
Aizipiig), 3 east
_ 38, 227,
"28, 29,
573
184
228
224
442
211
eo
sien AOD
437
190
574 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1897.
GENERAL INDEX.
1897.
Additions to the Museum, 557.
Allen, Harrison, M. D., Observa-
tions on Tarsius fuscus, 34.
Premolars and form of Skull,
145. Announcement of death
of, and minute of appreciation,
458. Minute from Anthropo-
logical Section, 481. Compara-
tive measurements of Skulls,
482. Proceedings of a meeting
in commemoration of, 505.
Anthropological Section, report
of, 552.
Banes, Charles H., announcement
of death of, 11.
Bement, William B., announce-
ment of death of, 356.
Benedict, James E. 7
e s ~
’
- il
, 1a
SD : 7
PLATE VIII.
NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1897.
PROC. ACAD.
'
L\
HMhearh, vel
HEAR ON CRYETOCHITON.
fi
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1897. PLATE IX.
PILSBRY. NEW AUSTRALIAN MOLLUSKS.
PILSBRY AND SHARP, SCAPHOPODA OF SAN DOMINGO.
i
Le ia!
XI.
PLATE
/.
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 189
HUTTE TOT
mmm LOTTE
16
PILSBRY AND SHARP, SCAPHOPODA OF SAN DOMINGO.
if
ane ee
ete ats & Roa
; 1 Dy’ Wie oo
a AAD) HVE MEET NS Uae WY
} le : Abin
i i hala re ow
d as :
y | Py AR Dy
Aad i
ae et
Ply aes
A ‘ . 4
‘ i!
an
ih
‘
‘wh
i
: \
~, “i
a a
‘ T
fi
uf
4
t
{
,
\
(
~
‘
‘ !
pe
F
\
F
th
oe
‘
“
;
‘ ih
F
Ul i)
i A ,
Ova’
2 ah ;
PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1897. PLATE XII.
RHOADS ON AMERICAN BOVIDE.
ta |
hs ae
aL tu);
ny i
ih 2
2 Py r
J it ed :
7 a
ven "7 ;
vapw ba an
1 ' is All
‘
‘
%
1
—.
f eaten
ah
K 2
say
‘
hf
Am Mas 3) Sai Pa
QH Aeademy of Natural Sciences
oe of Philadelphia
A2 Proceedings
v.49
Biological
& Medical
Senals
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
tet
”
- a5 Sy
=" : SEN
ae .
zs <, -
Shetty
Sica eee
aie wee
4
EAA
: